Technical Manual

Technical Manual
TNC 360
Valid for the NC software types
259 90 up to version 06

April 1996 208 793 21 · 3.3 · 4/96 · S · Printed in Germany · Subject to change without notice
(208 793 E1)
Preface
This Technical Manual is intended for all manufacturers and distributors of machine tools. It
contains all the necessary information for the assembly, electrical installation, start-up and PLC
programming for the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls TNC 360.
Whenever HEIDENHAIN improves the hardware or software in these controls you will receive a free
delivery of updated information. Please arrange and insert this updated information in your manual
without delay. This will ensure that your manual always remains at the current revision level.
You can use extracts from this manual for your machine documentation. An enlargement of the
manual format (17 cm x 24 cm) by a factor of 1.225 will produce pages in A4 format.
No manual can be perfect. Like all living things it must grow and change. Among other things, it
lives from your impulses and suggestions for improvement. Please help us by giving us your ideas.
DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH

Department E/P
PO Box 1260
83292 Traunreut
Germany
8/95 TNC 360

Contents Technical Manual TNC 360
Update Information 1
Introduction 2
Mounting and Electrical Installation 3
Machine Integration 4
Machine Parameters
5
Markers and Words
6
PLC Programming
7
Data interfaces
8
Original Equipment Manufacturer’s (OEM) Cycles 9
Positioning Module 10
Appendix 11
Update Information No. 8
In mid February 1996 software version 17 was released for the NC software types 260 02 and 280
49, and for the newly introduced software types 260 060 (for 1 MB EPROMs) and 280 610 (for 2 MB
EPROMs). The new software types were introduced for the Polish conversational language.
Software version 17 contains the following additions:
• The software now supports the new handwheel HR 410.
The HR 410 is a portable electronic handwheel with:
Keys for selection of five axes

Keys for traverse direction
Keys for three pre-programmed feed rates for latched traverse
One key for actual-position capture
Three keys for machine functions determined by the machine manufacturer
Two permissive buttons
Emergency stop button
Magnetic holding pads
With MP7640 = 6 you can activate the functions for the HR410 handwheel.
MP7645.0 determines whether the keys on the handwheel are assigned to the NC or the PLC.
MP7645.0 = 0 MP7645.0 = 1
NC key assignment PLC key assignment
O96 O97
X IV I160 I161
Handwheel O98 O99
Y V control panel I162 I163
ACTUAL
O100 O103
Z POSITION
CAPTURE I164 I167
LOW FEED MEDIUM HIGH FEED
RATE FEED RATE RATE
O104 O105 O106
I168 I169 I170
– + I171 I172
O109 O110 O111 O109 O110 O111
I173 I174 I175 I173 I174 I175
With the exception of the A, B and C function All keys are assigned to the PLC. Handwheel
keys, all keys are assigned to the NC. axis and handwheel interpolation are set by
MP7670.x determines the interpolation factor module 9036. With W766 you can change the
for low, medium and high speeds. MP7671.x feed rate by pressing the axis direction keys.
determines the low, medium and high speed
values. The speed is given as a percentage factor
of the manual feed rate (MP1020.x).
4/96 TNC 360 Update Information No. 8 1-1

MP7670 Interpolation factor for handwheel
Input: 0 to 10
MP7670.0 Interpolation factor for low speed
MP7670.1 Interpolation factor for medium speed
MP7670.2 Interpolation factor for high speed
MP7671 Manual feed rate in "handwheel" operating mode with HR 410

Input: 0 to 1000 [% to MP1020]
MP7670.0 Low speed
MP7670.1 Medium speed
MP7670.2 High speed
A dummy plug (Id.-Nr. 271 958 03) is available for an EMERGENCY STOP.
There are connecting terminals on the adapter for the contacts from the emergency stop button
and the permissive buttons (maximum load 1.2 A)
Connector layout:
VL ID number 281 429.. KA ID number 296 466.. VB ID number 296 467 05 HR 410
ID number
296 469 01
D-sub D-sub D-sub Coupling on Connecto Connecto Connecto

connector connector connector mounting r (male) r (female) r (male)
(male) (female) (male) base 18-pin 18-pin 18-pin
9-pin 9-pin 9-pin (female)
18-pin
Housing Shield Housing Housing Shield Housing Housing Shield Housing Housing Shield
2 White 2 2 White E E White E E
4 Brown 4 4 Brown D D Brown D D
6 Yellow 6 6 Yellow B B Yellow B B
7 Gray 7 7 Gray A A Gray A A
8 Green 8 8 Green C C Green C C
6 6 WH/BK 6 6
7 7 YL/BK 7 7
5 5 WH/RD 5 5
4 4 WH/BL 4 4
2 2 WH/GN 2 2
3 3 WH/YL 3 3
1 1 WH/BR 1 1
WH/BR 3 Contacts 1 + 2
WH/YL 2 Contact 2 (left) Permissive button
WH/GN 1 Contact 1 (right)
WH/BL 1 Contact 1
WH/RD 2 Contact 1 Emergency stop
YL/BK 3 Contact 2
WH/BK 4 Contact 2
1-2 TNC 360 Update Information No. 8 4/96

Internal wiring of the contacts for the HR 410 permissive buttons and the EMERGENCY STOP
button:
Zustimmtaste
Permissive 1 1
button Zustimmtaste
Permissive 2 2
button NOT - AUSSTOP
EMERGENCY
Kontakt22
Contact
1 2
Kontakt11
Contact
1 2
Cable adapter
Kabeladapter
4
Kontakt
Contact 22
2 Contact 11 X2
Kontakt X2
1 Contact 11
Kontakt
3 Contact 22
Kontakt
3
Kontakt 1+2
Contact 1+2
2 Contact 22 X1
X1
Kontakt
1 Contact 1
Kontakt 1
• When machine parameters are being downloaded via the V.24 interface, comments beginning
with the characters ";" or "*" can also be downloaded, either before or after the machine
parameter value.
• Machine parameter MP5020, bit 9 decides whether the control sends the EOT character after
receiving the ETX character.
• The error message "ERROR IN TRANSFERRED VALUE“ is displayed after a timeout is exceeded
during transfer via the V.24 interface.
• PLC Module 9036 expanded

With Module 9036, handwheel interpolation factors of all or of individual axes, and the values for
the jog positioning can be transferred from the PLC to the NC.
Calling the module:
PS B/W/D/K PLC status information type

PS B/W/D/K PLC status value
CM 9036
PL B/W/D Messages that are stored in the STACK:
0: PLC status information was transferred
1: Incorrect PLC status information type
2: Transferred PLC status value incorrect
3: Writing inhibited (e.g. by MP)
The marker M3171 is set if there is an error in transfer.

NC status information type: PLC status value:
0: Handwheel interpolation factor for X-axis 0 ... 10

1: Handwheel interpolation factor for Y-axis 0 ... 10
2: Handwheel interpolation factor for Z-axis 0 ... 10
3: Handwheel interpolation factor for 4th axis 0 ... 10
4: Handwheel interpolation factor for all axes 0 ... 10
5: Handwheel interpolation factor for all axes 0 ... 10
6: Select handwheel axis; X-axis 0
Y-axis 1
Z-axis 2
4th axis 3
7 to 9 reserved
10: Limit on jog increment 0 ... 50000 µm

-1 = Remove limit, activate last jog
increment
-2 = Remove limit, activate minimum from
PLC limit on jog increment and jog
increment input via NC
1-4 TNC 360 Update Information No. 8 4/96

The new edition of the Technical Manual for TNC 360 incorporates the data from Update Information
issues No. 1 to 6 in the appropriate chapters and sections. The description of TNC 355 has been
deleted since this unit is no longer in our product program.
Please replace the complete contents of the manual.
We will continue to send new information on the hardware and software of the TNC 360. Please file
the Update Information issues here.

New PLC Input/Output Unit PL 410 B

In December the PLC I/O unit PL 410 will be replaced by the PL 410 B.
The PL 410 B provides the same number of switching inputs/output as on the PL 410.
The connector layout is compatible with the PL 410. The dimensions have changed slightly
near the connections X15 to X22.
In contrast to the PL 410, the PL 410 B will be available in two versions. The following version
can be connected to the TNC 360:
PL 410 B Id.-Nr. 263 371 12
64 PLC inputs
31 PLC outputs
1 output “Control is operational“
The logic unit must be connected to the PL 410 B with a new connecting cable.
Connecting cable LE 360C/ PL 410 B: Id.-Nr. 289 111 ..

Max. 20 m
10/94 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update Information No. 6 1-1

For NC software types 260 02 and 280 49, software version 13 was released in mid-June1994,
software version 14 at the end of June, and software version 15 at the beginning of July.
Software version 13 contains the following enhancements:
The input range for machine parameter MP1350 (type of reference mark approach) was
expanded. An input value of 3 selects encoders with distance-coded reference marks, and
thedirection of traverse reverses when the trip dog for the reference end position is crossed.
Data transfer in blockwise mode (ACK/NAK protocol) could be interrupted if the control
characters STX or ETB were transmitted incorrectly. Since the TNC did not know the cause of
the interruption, it sends NAK (after a delay in which no further data are transferred) if a block
was not completely recognized due to a faulty STX or ETB.
If ACK is not received within a certain time, the error message TRANSFERRED DATA
INCORRECT N is generated.
If bit 3 in machine parameter MP7641 is set, the electronic handwheel is selected in each
operating mode (initially before REF traversing) to be able to interrogate the inputs of the
handwheel keys (except axis keys) in the PLC. The axis keys on the handwheel and the
handwheel impulses do not become active until handwheel mode is selected. After an error the
handwheel is not selected again until the handwheel key is pressed.
If the operating voltage of the control is outside the limit values, the blinking error message
PROCESSOR CHECK ERROR M is displayed.
The input range of machine parameter MP4220 has been expanded to 0 ... 65535.
The memory for the executable PLC program has been increased from 28K bytes to 32K bytes.
The value for the analog voltage of the analog input at connector X8 is transferred to word
W392.
The meaning of machine parameter MP7225 (automatic block generation with the capture
actual position key or with PLC marker M2829) has been changed as follows:
MP7225 = 1 : Block generation with the capture actual position key
MP7225 = 2 : Block generation with PLC marker M2829
MP7225 = 0 : No block generation
The resolution of the feed rate display depends on the programmed feed rate:
Feed rate ≤ 31 999 mm/min (previously 29 999 mm/min): display step 2 mm/min
Feed rate > 31 999 mm/min (previously 29 999 mm/min): display step 20 mm/min
Software version 14 was released to correct the following error:

If a STOP and an M function for PLC positioning were executed in one NC block, in the
following block an M function that becomes effective at the beginning of the block (e.g., M3)
was not executed!

Software version 15 was released to correct the following error:
### If, in an OEM cycle that was run from the EPROM, the feed rate was defined via Q parameter,
a greatly excessive feed rate was ouput.
1-2 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update Information No. 5 7/94

In late February 1994, software version 12 was released for the NC software 260 02 and 280 49.
Note:
In software version 11, the deceleration ramp is too flat when the feed rate is changed at constant
contour transitions during operation with feed precontrol. This error was corrected in software
version 12.
Software version 11 must be replaced by software version 12!
No new features were introduce in software version 12.

Software version 11 for software types 260 02 and 280 49 was released at the end of January 1994.
Software version 10 was not released for general distribution.
The following improvements were made since version 9:
• Machine parameter 7411 defines whether during execution of the TOUCH-PROBE block the
current compensation values for probe length and radius should be taken from the central tool
file or from the calibration process.
MP7411 = 1 : Probe length and radius values from the tool file
MP7411 = 0 : Probe length and radius values from the calibration process
MP 7411 is also effective for tool length compensation in the digitizing cycles. This machine
parameter was already available in version 08, but it was not documented.
• Machine parameter MP7225 was introduced for automatic generation of NC blocks in the
PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode. With the "actual position capture" key (teach-in) it is now
possible to generate a positioning block in plain language dialog (not in ISO mode) with a
maximum of 3 axes and without feed rate, radius compensation or M-functions. This positioning
block is inserted below the currently addressed block in the selected NC part program. The
current actual position values become the nominal position values. The axis is selected in the
dialog "AXIS SELECTION =" in the MOD operating mode. Here up to 3 out of 4 axes can be
selected by pressing the corresponding axis keys.
MP7225 = 1 : Block generation with the actual-position-capture key (teach-in)

MP7225 = 2 : Block generation with the actual-position-capture key or with the PLC marker
M2829 (the marker is reset by the NC)
MP7225 = 0 : No block generation or axis selection possible.
• If the machine parameters are erased, the RS-232-C/V.24 interface is now preset to FE mode.
• PLC inputs I160 to I175 (HR 332 handwheel) now generate signal edges. The positive edge is
assigned to markers M1660 to M1675, the negative flank to markers M1860 to M1875.
• If machine parameter MP7641, Bit 2 = 1, the interpolation factor for the handwheel can be set
both from the keyboard as well as from PLC module 9036. If Bit 2 = 0, the machine parameter
functions as before (input either from the keyboard or from PLC module 9036).
• The NC saves the code number entered in the MOD mode in Doubleword D276.
• Machine parameter MP810 defines the modulo value for reducing the position values of the
auxiliary axes. Machine parameter MP7470 has no effect on auxiliary axes. Rotary axes as NC
axes are always reduced to the range 0° to 359.999°. Machine parameter MP810 was already
available in version 08, but it was not documented.
1/94 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update information No. 3 1-1

• The new PLC module 9124 makes it possible to set a feed rate override value for secondary
axes. The override value can lie between 0% and 100% (resolution 0.01 %) and must be
transferred as a whole number (0 to 10 000). It can be set before the beginning of a movement
or during the movement of an auxiliary axis. If the control is reset, the NC presets an override
value of 100%.
Call :
PS B/W/D/K <Axis> (0..3 for X/Y/Z/4)
PS B/W/D/K <Override value> (0..10 000)
CM 9124
PL B/W/D <Error code>
0: Override was set
1: Invalid axis was entered
2: Axis is not defined as auxiliary axis
3: Override value is invalid
Error status after call: M3171 = 0 : Override was set
= 1 : Error condition see above
If more than one of the PLC modules 9120/9121/9123 for controlling the movement of auxiliary
axes is called within one PLC scan, only the last called PLC module is executed. The module
9124 can be called in addition to the above modules within one PLC scan, but it will always
become effective after the other module.
• In PLC module 9036 (transferring PLC status information to the NC) the interpolation factor can
be set for all axes by transferring the value 4 or 5.
• The PLC can inhibit the reference pulse for specific axes through Word W608 (bit-
coded,....4zyx).
Bit = 1 : Reference pulse is not evaluated
Bit = 0 : The next reference pulse is evaluated
• By setting marker M2615 the reference mark of the spindle is evaluated again. The marker is
reset by the NC.
• Marker 2510 fixes the spindle potentiometer setting at 100%. Marker M2511 has the same
effect on the feed rate potentiometer.
• CC blocks in OEM cycles are effective only locally and are not transferred into the calling
program.
1-2 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update information No. 3 1/94

In earl September 1993 the software version 09 was released for the software types 260 02 and
280 49.
The new version contains the following changes:
• If marker M2612 (Suppress position exchange in the tool table) is set before a T strobe is set
(M2046), the position numbers are not exchanged. The PLC acknowledges the T strobe without
having exchanged in the tool magazine and resets the PLC marker M2612. The new tool
number is shown inverted and the associated tool data (length and radius) are activated. The
tool number is shown inverted in the status display until the tool has physically been changed. If
the control is switched off and on in this condition, the last exchanged tool becomes active
again.
• During execution of cycle 13 (spindle orientation) the NC sets the new marker M2408. This
marker can be evaluated by the PLC for the spindle orientation and should afterwards be reset
by the PLC.

1 Software
In July 1993 the following software was released:
260 02x 08 for insertion of 1M byte EPROMs

and 280 49x 08 for insertion of 2M byte EPROMs
The software numbers 280 49x 01 to 07 were not delivered. The new software version became
necessary because new logic units can also accommodate 2M byte EPROMs (see below in Section
2 "Hardware").
The new software version contains the following changes:
• The PLC can limit the maximum feed rate through the doubleword D596. In order to ensure
compatibility to previous PLC programs the doubleword D596 is preset with the value
300 000 mm/min after control switch-on or after interruption of the PLC run.
The new feed rate is effective immediately!
The doubleword D596 has no effect with the new cycles "Tapping" (Cycle 2) and "Rigid Tapping"
(Cycle 17).
• In the newly introduced machine parameter MP60, axes can be defined as auxiliary axes.
These axes cannot be moved by an NC program. They are controlled exclusively by the PLC.
All auxiliary axes work independently of each other. Auxiliary axes always move in trailing
mode. The following modules are available for the PLC to control the axes:
Module 9120: Positioning of auxiliary axes
Module 9121: Stopping the auxiliary axes
Module 9122: Status inquiry of auxiliary axes
Module 9123: Traversing the reference point of an auxiliary axes
• Spindle orientation can be suppressed at the beginning of Cycle 17 "Rigid Tapping" with
machine parameter MP7160. At the beginning of the cycle, the spindle voltage is decelerated
with the ramp from MP3410.1 to the value 0 volts.
In this case it is not possible to cut into the same thread several times!
• Up to 20 NC "tool def" blocks can be read-in during blockwise transfer without central tool
memory, whereby the tool def block must be read-in before the associated "tool call". When a
"PGM call" NC block is read-in or when a user cycle is called, the NC blocks with "tool def" are
considered up to the above mentioned limit and provided that the proper order is followed. A
violation of these preconditions releases the error message "TOO MANY TOOLS".

• If bit 2 is set in machine parameter MP7300, the last inserted (programmed) tool is
automatically activated during switch-on.
• By setting the static PLC marker M2612 the PLC can now prevent the exchange of pocket
numbers in the central tool memory during a P output.
• Function FN19 was introduced, with which two numerical or Q parameter values with an
accuracy of 1/1000 (i.e., three places after the decimal point) are transferred into the PLC
doublewords D280 and D284. A value of 2.5, for example, is filed in the doublewords as 2500.
The unit of measure of the calling NC program is set in marker M2150 (millimeter=0/inch=1).
During transfer the NC sets the strobe marker M2149. The transfer must be acknowledged by
the PLC with the marker M2611.
• The number of PLC labels was increased to 1024.
• Marker M2614 was introduced. Setting this marker blocks the output of PLC functions
(M/S/T/Q output) by the NC. The marker is set and reset by the PLC; it is read by the NC.
• Marker M2827 was introduced. It is set by the PLC and causes the following behavior in case
of an external EMERGENCY STOP and erasable positioning error:
Machining is not aborted ("control in operation" symbol off, strobe signal reset). Instead,
machining is merely interrupted as in an NC STOP (control-in-operation symbol blinks). This
permits machining to be resumed with NC START after the error has been corrected. This
marker functions only for the output of M/S/T/Q strobes.
• Now a maximum of 32 Q parameters can be transferred for user cycles. To do this, the 'DLG-
DEF' or 'DLG-CALL' blocks must be programmed several times in the user cycle, whereby in
the third DLG block only the first five entries can be evaluated.
• The following Q parameters were introduced:

Q114 current tool length
Q115 to Q118 measured values of the 4th axis after a programmed probing cycle
• The type of tool compensation (R0/RR/RL/R+/R-) is stored in Q parameter Q123:

Q123 = 0 means R0
= 1 means RR
= 2 means RL
= 3 means R+
= 4 means R-
• Application as positioning module:

If machine parameter MP 4010 = 1 is programmed (PLC program from RAM), no machine
parameters will be taken from the PLC EPROM when the positioning module is switched on. If
the CRC sum of the machine parameters is incorrect they will be taken from the PLC EPROM.

• The software now supports PLC subprograms stored in the PLC-EPROM (translated PLC
code). With the PLC.EXE programming software from HEIDENHAIN such programs can be
written and on an external computer and filed in the PLC EPROM.
• The incremental jog positioning can be activated or deactivated (dialog "JOG-INCREMENT: ...")
in the 'ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL' operating mode by pressing the 'ELECTRONIC
HANDWHEEL' key, provided that marker M2498 is set.
• In the 'PROGRAMMING AND EDITING' operating mode the electronic handwheel can be used
to move the axes, provided that in machine parameter MP7641 bit 1 = 1. The interpolation
factor (regardless of handwheel model) and the handwheel axis (for HR130) can be change
only in the 'ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL' operating mode. A handwheel axis, once chosen,
remains in effect even when the operating mode is changed.
Simultaneous operation of the handwheel interface and the RS-232-C interface at differing
baud rates (38 400 and 19 200 baud) results in the error message "BAUD RATE NOT
POSSIBLE".
• The current feed rate in mm/min is now available in the PLC.
• Module 9150
During an active M/S/T output the PLC can use module 9150 to define an NC block, which is
then executed after the M/S/T strobe is acknowledged, before the control continues the NC
program. An NC block can also be defined if no program is being run. The block is then
executed immediately.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Instruction code>
PS B/W/D/K <Address of the parameter block in the B/W/D range>
CM 9150
Error code: 0 = NC block was inserted

1 = NC program started, but no M/S/T strobe
2 = Unknown instruction code
3 = Incorrect address in B/W/D range
Error status after call: M3171 = 0 NC block was inserted

= 1 error condition see above
At present the instruction code <0> is implemented for TOOL CALL
Parameters :
B<Adr+0> active elements bit-coded
Bit 0 =1: Tool number, otherwise modal
Bit 1 =1: Tool axis, otherwise modal
Bit 2 =1: Spindle speed, otherwise modal
Bit 3 =0
Bit 4 =0
B<Adr+1> Tool axis (0/1/2/3 = X/Y/Z/IV)
W<Adr+2> Tool number
D <Adr+ 4> Spindle speed (Format 0.001 rpm)

• Module 9120
Positioning an auxiliary axis
The positioning of an axis is started by presetting a target position (in the reference system), a
feed rate and a flag register. The axis is positioned without regard to other processes in the
control. There is no contour interpolation with other axes.
Conditions:
The given axis must be activated via MP10 and configured as an auxiliary axis via MP60.
The values for rapid traverse, analog voltage for rapid traverse, acceleration, etc., must be
properly set in the machine parameters.
For axes with automatic reduction (modulo value in MP810.x) the axis is always moved in the
shortest direction to the target position, unless the target position is entered as an incremental
value.
There is no checking for violations of the limit switch ranges!
The axis must be stationary. If the axis is already moving, the positioning must be terminated
beforehand with module 9121.
If the axis was in the reference point traversing mode, this state is canceled. The positioning
always builds on the momentary counter contents.
If the modules 9120, 9121 and 9122 are called several times during a PLC scan, only the last
instruction is executed.
If a "positioning error" status was set in this axis it is erased.
Potential errors:
A non-existent axis was transferred.
An axis was transferred that was not identified as an auxiliary axis in MP10 and MP60.
The axis is already moving.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K<Axis> (0 to 3 for X/Y/Z/4)

PS B/W/D/K<Target position> (in the reference system, Format 0.001mm)
PS B/W/D/K<Feed rate> (mm/min)
PS B/W/D/K<Flag register> Bit 0 = 1: incremental target position
= 0: absolute target position
CM9120
0: Positioning was started
1: A non-existent axis was transferred
2: Axis is not configured as an auxiliary axis
3: The axis is already moving
4: Absolute position outside of the modulo range
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Positioning was started correctly

= 1: Positioning was faulty

• PLC MODULE 9121
Stopping a positioning with an auxiliary axis
A positioning started beforehand with modules 9120 or 9123 can be canceled at any time with
module 9121.
Conditions:
The given axis must be activated via MP10 and configured in MP60 as an auxiliary axis.
If modules 9120, 9121 and 9122 are called several times for the same axis during a PLC-scan,
only the last instruction will be executed.
Potential errors:
An axis was transferred that was not configured in MP10 and MP60 as an auxiliary axis.
The given axis is already stationary.
Call:

CM9121
0: Positioning is canceled
3: Axis was already stationary
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Positioning was stopped

= 1: Faulty execution
• PLC MODULE 9122

Inquiring the status of an auxiliary axis
For a certain axis a bit-coded status word is transferred that contains information on the
momentary operating state of this axis.
Conditions:
Status changes causes by commands that the PLC sends to control the auxiliary axes
(modules 9120, 9121, 9123) are not recognized until the next PLC scan.
After switch-on, bit 1 (axis over reference point) is erased.
It is possible to position the axis without traversing the reference point first.

Potential errors:
Call:

CM9122
PL B/W/D <Status>
Bit 0: 1= Axis is auxiliary axis
Bit 1: 1= Axis has traversed the reference point
Bit 2: 1= Axis is positioned
Bit 3: 1= Direction of motion is negative
Bit 4: 1= A positioning error has occurred
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Status was transferred

• PLC MODULE 9123

Passing over the reference point of an auxiliary axis
The module starts positioning in a preset direction, which continues until a reference point is
found or the positioning is canceled with module 9121.
Conditions:
The given axis must be activated via MP10 and configured as an auxiliary axis via MP60.
The values for rapid traverse, analog voltage for rapid traverse, acceleration, etc., must be set
in the machine parameters.
There is no checking for violations of the limit switch ranges!
The axis must be stationary. If the axis is already moving, the positioning must be canceled
beforehand with module 9121.
The feed rate override is not included in the calculation.
The state "reference point not yet traversed" is set for the axis.
A reference point that already exists in this axis is erased, but not the numerical value of the
axis. This is not reinitialized until the reference point is found.
If modules 9120, 9121 and 9122 are called several times during a PLC scan, only the last
instruction is executed.
If a "positioning error" status was set in this axis it is erased.
The positioning is stopped as soon as the reference point is reached. Since the axis must
decelerate before it can stop, it comes to rest behind the reference point in the direction of
motion.

Potential errors:
An axis was transferred that was not configured in MP10 and MP60 as an auxiliary axis.
The axis is already moving.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K<Flag register> Bit 0 = 1: negative traverse direction
= 0: positive traverse direction
CM9123
2: The axis is not configured as an auxiliary axis
3: The axis is already moving
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Positioning was started

2 Hardware
The part numbers of the LE 360C logic units that can accommodate 2M byte EPROMs are:
Id.-Nr. 270 641 3x for BE 212

Id.-Nr. 270 642 3x for BF 110
The 2-M byte EPROMs occupy only the sockets IC-P1 and IC-P2. IC-P3 and IC-P4 remain vacant.
The jumper located next to IC-P1 should then be inserted in the setting 2M!
You will receive Update Information issues on the TNC 360/TNC 335 hardware and software
whenever developments warrant. This information will then be included in Supplementary Issues
that you can integrate into the appropriate chapters of the Technical Manual.

Introduction – Contents 2
1 Hardware Concept 2-2
2 Features and Specifications 2-3

2.1 TNC 360 2-3
3 Software 2-6
3.1 NC Software 2-6
3.1.1 Software and hardware versions 2-7
3.1.2 Software option 2-8
3.2 PLC Software 2-8
3.3 EPROM sockets 2-9
8/95 TNC 360 2-1

1 Hardware Concept
The HEIDENHAIN TNC 360 contouring control is designed for use with drilling and milling machines.
The HEIDENHAIN TNCs consist of several units. The principle subassembly is the logic unit. The
logic unit is joined to the other units and the TNC accessories by connecting cables.
Noml. value outputs

Encoders PLC I/0 unit
••• •••
Visual display unit

TNC keyboard unit Machine operating panel
Common
•••
Touch probe NC PLC PLC inputs
data area
Electronic handwheel
•••
PLC outputs
Data interfaces
The logic unit contains the electronics for both the NC and the PLC sections of the control.
The common data area contains the machine parameters and the PLC markers and words. The
machine parameters define the hardware-configuration of the machine (ranges of travel,
acceleration, number of axes etc.). The PLC markers and words are used for the exchange of
information between the NC and the PLC.
2-2 TNC 360 1 Hardware Concept 8/95

2 Features and Specifications
2.1 TNC 360
Components • Logic unit LE 360

• Keyboard TE 355 A, TE 355 B
• Color graphics VDU BE 212 (12 inch, 512 x 256 pixels)
• Flat luminescent screen BF 110 (192 mm x 120 mm, 640 x 400 pixels)
Control modes • Contouring control for 4 axes and spindle orientation

• Linear interpolation in 3 of 4 axes
• Circular interpolation in 2 of 4 axes
Program memory Buffered RAM memory (approx. 70 KB) for 32 NC programs,

central tool file, PLC program (if not filed in EPROM),
EPROM memory (128 KB) for PLC program, OEM cycles,
dialogues for OEM cycles, PLC error messages
Tool memory 99 tools
Operating modes • Manual operation

• Electronic handwheel /jog positioning
• Positioning by manual data input
• Program run, single block
• Program run, full sequence
• Programming and editing
• Test run (logical and graphical)
Programming In HEIDENHAIN conversational mode and according to ISO
Entry and display 1 µm, 5 µm, 10 µm, 50 µm, 100 µm

resolution
8/95 TNC 360 2 Features and Specifications 2-3

Programmable • Nominal position (absolute or incremental dimensions) in Cartesian or
functions polar coordinates
• Straight lines
• Circular arcs
• Helical interpolation
• Corner rounding, chamfering
• Tangential approach and departure from a contour
• Tool number, tool length and radius compensation
• Spindle speed
• Rapid traverse
• Feed-rate
• Program call from inside other programs
• Subprograms and repetition of program sections
• Fixed cycles for peck drilling, tapping (without floating tap holder),
slot milling, rectangular pocket milling, circular pocket milling
• Cycles for milling pockets with a free contour (SL cycles)
• Shifting and rotation of the coordinate system, mirroring, scaling,
dwell time, miscellaneous functions M, program stop
• Spindle orientation (to be implemented by the machine manufacturer)
• OEM specific cycles (to be defined by the manufacturer of the machine)
Parameter- Mathematical functions (=, +, −, x, :, sin, cos, angle α of r sin α and

programming r cos α, , a² + b²), parameter comparison (=, ≠, >, <),
output of parameter values via the data interface
Digitizing • With TS 120 and TNC software expansion option

• Optional evaluation software for PCs
Maximum traverse ± 30 000 mm (1181 in.)
Maximum 300 m/min (11 810 ipm)

traversing speed
Data interfaces • RS-232-C/V.24; data transfer rates up to 38 400 baud
Cycle times Block processing time: 40 ms (for 3D straight lines without radius com-
pensation and with 100% PLC utilization)
Control loop cycle time: 6 ms
PLC cycle time: 24 ms
Position feedback Incremental HEIDENHAIN linear and angular encoders, preferably with
distance-coded reference marks, or incremental HEIDENHAIN rotary
encoders
2-4 TNC 360 2 Features and Specifications 8/95

Control • 4 inputs for position measuring systems (4 sinusoidal inputs)
inputs • 1 measuring system input for spindle orientation (square-wave input
signal)
• 1 input for electronic handwheel
• 1 input for 3D-touch probe system
• 55 PLC inputs + 1 control-is-ready input
• Additionally 64 PLC inputs on optional PLC I/O board PL 410 B
Control • 5 analogue outputs for the spindle and axes

outputs • 31 PLC outputs + 1 control-is-ready output
• Additionally 31 PLC outputs on optional PLC I/O board PL 410 B
Integrated PLC • Programming in the form of a list of instructions, max. 4000 PLC
commands
• Entry by HEIDENHAIN keyboard or data interface
Supply NC: 24 Vdc (See Chapter 3, Section 4.1)

voltage PLC: 24 Vdc
Power NC: approx. 27 W (with BE 212 connected)

consumption PLC: approx. 48 W (See Chapter 3, Section 4.1)
PL 410 B: approx. 480 W (See Chapter 3, Section 4.1)
BF 110: approx. 33 W
Environmental • Operating: LE/BE 0 to 45° C (32 to 113° F)

temperature BF 110: 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
• Storage: –30 to 70° C (–22 to 158° F)
Approximate LE 360 C: 8.0 kg

weight TE 355: 1.6 kg
BE 212: 11.0 kg
BF 110: 1.7 kg
PL 410 B: 1.5 kg
HRA 110: 0.7 kg
8/95 TNC 360 2 Features and Specifications 2-5

3 Software
The logic unit contains separate software for the NC section and the PLC section. The software is
identified by an 8-digit number.
After switching on the control, the NC and PLC software numbers are displayed on the screen. The
software number can also be directly requested with the aid of the MOD function.
3.1 NC Software
The 8-digit NC software number identifies the type of software, the dialogue language (language of
the country) and the software version.
260 02 0 15
Software-Typ
Software type
Landessprache
National language
00 == German
deutsch
1 = tschechisch
1 = Czech
2 = französisch
2 = French
3 = italienisch
34 == Italian
spanisch
45 == Spanish
portugiesisch
66 == Swedish
schwedisch
77 == Danish
dänisch
88 == Finnish
finnisch
99 == Dutch
niederländisch
Software-Version
Software version
In addition to the above-listed languages, the TNC can always display English, which may be
selected via the machine parameter MP7230.
2-6 TNC 360 3 Software 8/95

3.1.1. Software and hardware versions
HEIDENHAIN has manufactured several different hardware versions of the logic units LE 360 and LE
360 C. The following table shows which software is compatible with which hardware version:
Id.-Nr. LE 360 Id.-Nr. LE 360 C

Software Type 258 991 99 264 660 99 264 085 99 270 641 39 270 642 39
/Version (BE 212) (BF 110)
259 90x 02 to 05 02 to 05 02 to 05 06 -
260 02x (1-MB - - from 07 from 07 from 07
EPROM)
280 49x (2-MB - - - from 08 from 08
EPROM)
Only the software types 260 02 and 280 49 will continue to be developed.
Software Releases
HEIDENHAIN releases new versions of NC software in irregular intervals.
NC Software Version Release

259 90x 02 1/91 (Introduction)
259 90x 03 7/91
259 90x 04 3/92
259 90x 05 3/92
259 90x 06 7/92

260 02x 05 3/92
260 02x 06 7/92
260 02x 07 10/92
260 02x 08 7/93
260 02x 09 9/93
260 02x 10 Never released
260 02x 11 1/94
260 02x 12 2/94
260 02x 13 6/94
260 02x 14 6/94
260 02x 15 7/94
260 02x 16 3/95

280 49x 09 9/93
280 49x 10 Never released
280 49x 11 1/94
280 49x 12 2/94
280 49x 13 6/94
280 49x 14 6/94
280 49x 15 7/94
280 49x 16 3/95
8/95 TNC 360 3 Software 2-7

3.1.2 Software option
HEIDENHAIN offers the "Digitizing with TS 120" function as a software option (see Chapter "Machine
integration"). An additional software protection module is installed in controls supplied with this
software option. The Id.-Nr. of the LE 360 logic unit has the variant xxx xxx 79, while the LE 360 has
xxx xxx 34. If the software module is installed, the option number 262 351 01 is indicated on the
screen under the NC and PLC software numbers.
The “Digitizing with TS 120“ software option can be retrofitted. The kit is available under Id. Nr.
265 310 01.
The kit contains:
Software module (EPROM Id.-Nr. 262 351 01)

Printed circuit board
Sponge rubber
ID label
Mounting Instructions
3.2 PLC Software

The PLC software is produced by the manufacturer of the machine. Either HEIDENHAIN or the
manufacturer of the machine can store this software in EPROMs. HEIDENHAIN assigns PLC
software numbers to the machine manufacturers on request. HEIDENHAIN can archive the specific
PLC programs in a data bank, so that the installation of the correct PLC program is assured if a
control has to be exchanged.
2-8 TNC 360 3 Software 8/95

3.3 EPROM sockets
Sockets for the processor board:
IC-S [SW-Modul]
IC-P3
IC-P1
IC-P5 [PLC-EPROM]
IC-P4
IC-P2
If the 2-MB EPROMs are used, only the sockets IC-P1 and IC-P2 are needed. IC-P3 and IC-P4
remain vacant. The jumper located next to IC-P1 must then be set to position 2M.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Software 2-9

Mounting and Electrical Installation – Contents
1 Hardware components TNC 360 3-4

1.1 Changes in the ID-number 3-6
2 Assembly Hints 3-8

2.1 Electrical noise immunity 3-8
2.2 Heat generation and cooling 3-8
2.3 Humidity 3-9
2.4 Mechanical vibration 3-9
2.5 Mounting position 3-9
2.5.1 Logic unit 3-10
2.5.2 Visual display unit (VDU) 3-11
2.5.3 PLC Input/Output board PL 410 3-11
2.6 Degree of protection 3-11
3 Summary of Connections 3-12
4 Power Supply 3-14

4.1 Overview 3-14
4.1.1 NC power supply 3-14
4.1.2 PLC power supply 3-15
4.1.3 Buffer battery 3-16
4.2 Power supply for the visual display unit 3-17
5 Encoders 3-19
5.1 Linear encoders 3-19
5.2 Angular encoders 3-19
5.3 Encoder inputs for sinusoidal signals (7 to 16 mApp) 3-20
5.3.1 Connector assignments 3-20
5.3.2 Connecting cable 3-20
5.4 Encoder inputs for square-wave signals 3-21
5.4.1 Connector assignments 3-21
5.4.2 Connecting cable 3-21
6 Nominal Value Output 3-23

6.1 Connector assignment 3-23
6.2 Connecting cable 3-23
7 Visual Display Unit (VDU) 3-26

8/95 TNC 360 3-1

8 Touch Probe System Input 3-28
8.2 Connection of the touch probe system 3-29
8.2.1 TS 120 3-29
8.2.2 TS 511 3-30
9 RS-232-C/V.24 Data Interface 3-32
10 Handwheel Input 3-33

10.1 Pin layout 3-33
10.2 Portable handwheel HR 330 3-33
10.3 Integral handwheel HR 130 3-34
10.5 HRA 110 handwheel adapter 3-37
11 PLC inputs/outputs 3-40

11.1 Technical data 3-40
11.2.1 PLC inputs 3-41
11.2.2 PLC output 3-42
11.4 PLC I/O expansion-board 3-45
11.4.1 PL 400 connection 3-45
11.4.2 PLC inputs/outputs on the PL 400 3-47
11.5 PL 410 PLC I/O expansion-board 3-49
11.5.1 PLC inputs/PLC outputs on the PL 410 3-50
12 Machine control panel 3-53

12.1 Pin layout 3-53
13 TNC keyboard 3-56

13.1 Pin connections 3-56
14 Dimensions 3-58
14.1 LE 360 C 3-58
14.2 Keyboard units 3-59
14.2.1 TE 355 A 3-59
14.2.2 TE 355 B 3-60
14.3 Visual display units 3-61
14.3.1 BE 212 3-61
14.3.2 BF 110 3-62
3-2 TNC 360 8/95

14.4 Input/Output units 3-63
14.4.1 PL 410 B 3-63
14.4.2 PL 410 3-64
14.4.3 PL 400 3-65
14.5 Panel-mounted handwheels 3-66
14.5.1 HR 130 3-66
14.5.2 HR 150 3-67
14.5.3 HRA 110 handwheel adapter (for HR 150) 3-68
14.5.4 Handwheel knobs 3-69
14.6 Cable adapter 3-72
15 Grounding Diagram 3-75
16 Cable Overview 3-77
8/95 TNC 360 3-3

1 Hardware Components TNC 360
The TNC 360 consists of the following hardware components:
– LE 360 C (Logic unit),
– TE 355 A or TE 355 B (TNC keyboard),
– BE 212 or BF 110 (Visual display unit),
– if desired, PL 410 B
The TNC 360 is not subject to export restrictions. An export version is not necessary.
Logic unit
TNC 360 and TNC 335:
LE 360 C
Id.-Nr. 270 641 .. (for connecting the BE 212)
Id.-Nr. 270 642 .. (for connecting the BF 110)
TNC keyboard
TNC 360: TE 355 A (Id.-Nr. 255 015 01) TE 355 B (Id.-Nr. 255 016 01)
3-4 TNC 360 1 Hardware Components TNC 360 8/95

Visual display unit
BE 212 (Id.-Nr. 242 370 01) BF 110 (Id.-Nr. 267 209 01)
PLC Input/Output Unit (Option)
PL 410 (Id.-Nr. 263 371 01)
8/95 TNC 360 1 Hardware Components TNC 360 3-5

1.1 Changes in the ID Number
LE 360 Logic Unit:
Id.-Nr. 258 991 99 Series introduction since 1990

Id.-Nr. 258 991 98 Socket for "digitizing" software module since 1991
Id.-Nr. 258 991 79 Same as Id.-Nr. 258 991 98, but with software module since 1991
Id.-Nr. 264 660 99 New processor board since 3/91

Id.-Nr. 264 660 79 Same as Id.-Nr. 264 660 99 but with software module since 7/91
Id.-Nr. 264 085 99 New PLC- and graphics board since 7/91
Id.-Nr. 264 085 79 Like Id.-Nr. 264 085 99, but with software module since 7/91
LE 360 C Logic Unit
Id.-Nr. 270 641 29 For connecting a BE 212 since 1992

Id.-Nr. 270 641 24 With digitizing software module
Id.-Nr. 270 642 29 For connecting a BF 110 since 1992
Id.-Nr. 270 642 24 With digitizing software module
3-6 TNC 360 1 Hardware Components TNC 360 8/95

2 Assembly Hints
2.1 Electrical noise immunity

Please note that the vulnerability of electronic equipment to noise increases with faster signal
processing and higher sensitivity. Please protect your equipment by observing the following rules
and recommendations.
Noise voltages are mainly produced and transmitted by capacitive and inductive coupling. Electrical
noise can be picked up by the inputs and outputs to the equipment, and the cabling.
Likely sources of interference are:

– Strong magnetic fields from transformers and electric motors,
– Relays, contactors and solenoid valves,
– High-frequency equipment, pulse equipment and stray magnetic fields from switch-mode
power supplies,
– Mains leads and leads to the above equipment.
Electrical interference can be avoided by:

– A minimum distance between the logic unit (and its leads) and interfering equipment > 20 cm.
– A minimum distance between the logic unit (and its leads) and cables carrying interference
signals > 10 cm.
(Where signal cables and cables which carry interference signals are laid together in metallic
ducting, adequate decoupling can be achieved by using a grounded separation screen)
– Screening according to DIN VDE 0160.
– Potential compensating lines ∅ ≥ 6 mm² (see Grounding diagram).
– Use of original HEIDENHAIN cables, connectors and couplings.
2.2 Heat generation and cooling

Please note that the reliability of electronic equipment is greatly reduced by continuous operation at
elevated temperatures. Please take the necessary measures to keep the unit within the permissible
ambient temperature range.
Permissible ambient temperature in operation: 0° C to 45° C (BF 110: 0° C to 40° C)
The following means may be employed to ensure adequate heat removal:

– Provide sufficient space for air circulation.
– Build in a ventilator fan to circulate the air inside the control cabinet. The fan must reinforce the
natural convection. It must be mounted so that the warm air is extracted from the logic unit
and no pre-warmed air is blown into the unit. The warmed-up air should flow over surfaces
which have good thermal conductivity to the external surroundings (e.g. sheet metal).
– For a closed steel housing without assisted cooling, the figure for heat conduction is 3 Watt/m²
of surface per °C air temperature difference between inside and outside.
– Use of a heat exchanger with separate internal and external circulation.
– Cooling by blowing external air through the control cabinet to replace the internal air. In this
case the ventilator fan must be mounted so that the warm air is extracted from the control
cabinet and only filtered air can be drawn in. HEIDENHAIN advises against this method of
cooling, since the function and reliability of electronic assemblies are adversely affected by
contaminated air (fine dust, vapors etc.). In addition to these disadvantages, a filter which is
not adequately serviced leads to a loss in cooling efficiency. Regular servicing is therefore
absolutely vital.
3-8 TNC 360 2 Assembly Hints 8/95

Incorrect Correct
LE
Obstructive
elements
LE
Heat generating
elements
2.3 Humidity
Permissible humidity: < 75 % in continuous operation,
< 95 % for not more than 30 days p.a. (randomly distributed).
In tropical areas it is recommended that the TNC is not switched off, so that condensation is avoided
on the circuit boards. The heat generation prevents condensation and has no further disadvantages.
2.4 Mechanical vibration

Permissible vibration: < 0.5 g
2.5 Mounting position

Note the following fundamental points on mounting:
– Mechanical accessibility
– Permissible environmental conditions
– Electrical noise immunity
– The electrical regulations in effect in your country
8/95 TNC 360 2 Assembly Hints 3-9

2.5.1 Logic unit
HEIDENHAIN recommends the following mounting position:
>577
>110
Minimum clearance 80 80
for servicing!
recommended:= 40 40
approx. 250 mm
°C °C
100
Air
* outlet *
30
Maintain clearance °C
for screwdriver
*
160
Connecting cables
must not hinder °C °C
swivel movement * *
100
Air
of the control
30
inlet
218.5
132.5
30 °C Measuring point for

* ambient temperature
83 60
Free space for air circulation
Free space for servicing

°C
*
40
PL
°C
5
* 32 Illustration of
R max. swivel range.
The minimum angle of
swivel for exchange
of subassembly should
be at least 90°.
40
145
270
40°
40
3-10 TNC 360 2 Assembly Hints 8/95

2.5.2 Visual display unit (VDU)
Permissible ambient temperature
BE 212 max. 45° C (113° F)

BF 110 max. 40° C (104° F)
The VDU must be installed with a minimum clearance of 25 mm to the housing. It is recommended
especially, that a large area is left free above the unit for heat removal.
Temperature is measured at a distance of 25 mm to the housing. The above mentioned

temperatures must not be exceeded.
Please also note for the BE 212:
When mounting the VDU it must be remembered that this unit is very sensitive to magnetic pick-up.
The picture position and geometry can be disturbed by stray magnetic fields. Alternating fields cause
periodic movement or distortion of the picture.
For this reason, keep a minimum distance of 0.5 m between the VDU casing and the source of any
disturbance (e.g. permanent magnets, motors, transformers etc.)
2.5.3 PLC Input/Output board PL 410

One PL 410 can be connected to the LE 360 C, if desired. There is no preferred mounting position
for heat removal.
2.6 Degree of protection

When mounted, the visual display unit and the keyboard unit provide class IP54 protection against
dust and splashwater.
8/95 TNC 360 2 Assembly Hints 3-11

3 Summary of Connections
Control loop board
X1 X1 = Measuring system 1 (~)

X21 X24
X3 = Measuring system 3 (~)
24V X5 = Measuring system 5 (~)
X12 X25 X6 = Measuring system S ( )
X3 X12 = Touch probe system
X31 X8 = Nominal value outputs 1,2,3,4,S
X9 = VDU
X22
X4 X8 X11 = HR 130/330/332 handwheels,
X26 HRA 110
PLC and graphics board

X21 = PLC output
X6 X23 X27
X9 X22 = PLC input
X23 = TNC keyboard (TE)
X24 = Power supply 24 V for PLC
X25 = Data interface RS-232-C/V.24
X26 = Input/Output board PL 410
B X27 = Machine operating panel
X31 = Power supply 24 V for NC
B = Signal ground
Danger to internal components!

Do not engage or disengage any connections while the unit is under power.
3-12 TNC 360 3 Summary of Connections 8/95

4 Power Supply
4.1 Overview
The supply voltages must meet the following specifications:
Unit Supply voltage Voltage range dc Max. current Power

average consumption consumption
LE NC 24 Vdc Lower limit LE 360 1.5 A 28.8 ... 36 W
(VDE 0160, 5.88 20.4 V - - - (also supplies
low-voltage the BE 212)
electrical
separation)
Upper limit
PLC 24 Vdc 31 V - - - 1) 2A Approx. 48 W
(VDE 0160, 5.88 when half3) of when half3) of
base insulation) the outputs are the outputs are
switched on switched on
simultaneously simultaneously
PL 410 B 20 A Approx. 480 W
PL 410 4) when half3) of when half3) of
PL 400 4) the outputs are the outputs are
switched on switched on
simultaneously simultaneously
HRA 110 (VDE 0160, 5.88 0.2 A Approx. 5 W
low-voltage
electrical
separation)
BF 110 2) Approx. 1 A with 24 W typical
full display 32 W max.
1
) Voltage surges up to 36 V - - - permissible for t< 100 ms.
2
) The BF 110 has its own line power connection, which also powers the internal ventilation.
3) No more than half the outputs can be switched on simultaneously.
4
) No longer included in product program
4.1.1 NC power supply

Connection terminal X31
Pin Number Assignment

1 + 24 Vdc
2 0V
3-14 TNC 360 4 Power Supply 8/95

The NC and the HRA 110 must not be supplied U
from the machine control voltage supply! It
requires an individual, external and separately
24 V 1.5 Vpp
generated supply voltage according to VDE
0551. Use 24 Vdc with a permissible ac
component of 1.5 Vpp (recommended filter
capacitor 10 000 µF/40 Vdc).

The internal fuses of the power supply assembly must be exchanged only by
HEIDENHAIN personnel.
If the operating voltage of the control (5V on the processor board) is outside the limit values a
blinking error message "PROCESSOR CHECK ERROR M" is displayed.
4.1.2 PLC power supply
The PLC section (PLC inputs and outputs) of the LE and PL is run from the 24 V machine control voltage
supply, generated according to VDE 0160.
Superimposed ac components, such as those caused by a three-phase bridge rectifier without smoothing,
are permissible up to a ripple factor of 5% (see DIN 40110/10.75, Section 1.2). This means an absolute
upper voltage limit of 32.6 V and an absolute lower voltage limit of 18.5 V.
U
32.6 V
31 V
20.4 V
18.5 V
8/95 TNC 360 4 Power Supply 3-15

X24 power supply for the PLC at the LE

1 + 24 Vdc switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
2 + 24 Vdc not switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
3 0V

Use only original replacement fuses.
Power supply for the PL 410 B
The PLC outputs are powered in groups.
Terminal Assignment PLC output

X9 0V
X10 +24 V power for logic and for "Control is operational"
X11 +24 V power for outputs O32 to O39
X12 O40 to O47
X13 O48 to O55
X14 O56 to O62
Power supply for the PL 410

Connections as with PL 410 B.
Terminal Assignment
X13 +24 Vdc switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
X12 0V
X3 Pin 12 + 24 Vdc not switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
4.1.3 Buffer battery

The buffer battery is the potential source for the RAM memory for NC programs, PLC programs
and machine parameters when the control is switched off.
If the ”EXCHANGE BUFFER BATTERY” message appears, the batteries must be exchanged.
The 3 batteries may be found behind a screw cap in the power supply section of the logic unit.
As well as the batteries, the logic unit contains an additional energy store, mounted on the
processor board, for buffering the memory contents.
This means that the mains can be switched off when replacing the batteries. The energy
store will ensure that the memory is retained while the batteries are exchanged.
3-16 TNC 360 4 Power Supply 8/95

Type of batteries:
Three AA-size batteries, leak-proof,
IEC designation "LR6"
4.2 Power supply for the visual display unit

BE 212
The BE 212 visual display unit is powered through the LE (connector X9).
BF 110
X1 power supply

1 + 24 V
2 0V
The BF 110 must not be supplied with 220 V!
8/95 TNC 360 4 Power Supply 3-17

5 Encoders
The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls are designed for the installation of incremental linear and
angular encoders.
The control controls the actual position with a measuring step of 0.001 mm or 0.001°. Encoders with
a graduation period of 0.001 mm or 0.001° to 1 mm or 1° may be used.
It does not matter whether the encoder or encoder has one or several reference marks.
However, HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of encoders with distance-coded reference marks,
since the traversing distance when homing on the reference marks is thereby reduced to a
minimum. See chapter "Machine Integration."
5.1 Linear encoders

Measurement of length is best performed by a linear encoder. Insofar as it is compatible with the
accuracy requirements, linear measurement can also be made using a rotary encoder on the
ballscrew.
HEIDENHAIN recommends use of the following linear encoders:
LS 103 C, LS 106 C, LS 405 C, LS 406 C, LS 706 C, LB 326, ULS 300 C.
For linear measurement with the aid of a rotary encoder and a ballscrew you could use, for example,
an ROD 450.
5.2 Angle encoders

For direct angular measurement in the A, B or C axes the following incremental angle encoders are
available: ROD 250 C, ROD 700 C, RON 255 C, and RON 705 C.
In order to meet accuracy requirements, HEIDENHAIN recommends line counts of at least 18 000.
8/95 TNC 360 5 Encoders 3-19

5.3 Encoder inputs for sinusoidal signals (7 to 16 µApp)
The LE can have encoders with sinusoidal inputs (7 µApp to 16 µApp).
Maximum input frequency is 30 kHz.
5.3.1 Connector assignments

X1, X2, X3, X4 encoder 1, 2, 3, 4
Flange socket with female connector insert (9-pin)
Pin No. Assignment

1 I1+
2 I1–
5 I2+
6 I2–
7 I0+
8 I0–
3 + 5 V (UP)
4 0 V (UN)
9 Inner shield
Housing Outer shield = unit housing
The interface complies with the recommendations in VDE 0160, 5. 88 for separation from
line power.
5.3.2 Connecting cable

Please use only HEIDENHAIN encoder cables, connectors and couplings. Standard HEIDENHAIN
extension cables cover a maximum distance of 30 m.
Measuring
system LE
max. 30 m
With standard extension cable (Id.-Nr. 262 006 ..)
With armoured extension cable (Id.-Nr. 262 016 ..)
A connecting cable with power supply lines Ø 1 mm2 PUR [3 (2x0.14) + (2x1.0) mm2],
Id.-Nr. 244 955 01 can have a maximum length of 60 m.
3-20 TNC 360 5 Encoders 8/95

5.4 Encoder inputs for square-wave signals
One encoder with square-wave signals can be connected at the input X6. Maximum input frequency
is 300 kHz.
5.4.1 Connector assignments

X6 encoder S

5 Ua1
––—–
6 Ua1
8 Ua2
––—–
1 Ua2
3 Ua0
––—–
4 Ua0
––—–
7 UaS
2 + 5 V (UP)
12 + 5 V (UP)
11 0 V (UN)
10 0 V (UN)
9 (contact spring) screen = housing
line power.
5.4.2 Connecting cable

Please use only HEIDENHAIN encoder cables, connectors and couplings.
In order to be able to connect an encoder to the square-wave signal input of the logic unit, the
sinusoidal signal from the encoder must be converted to a square-wave signal. This conversion is
performed by the interpolation and digitizing electronics (EXE). The interpolation and digitizing
electronics is either integrated into the encoder or is an independent unit.
If the interpolation and digitizing electronics does not have its own power supply, it can be supplied
from the logic unit. In order to ensure a correct supply voltage, the total length of the connecting
cable between the interpolation and digitizing electronics and the logic unit must be limited (see the
following diagram).
8/95 TNC 360 5 Encoders 3-21

Spindel-Orientierung:
Spindle orientation:
Extension cable X6
Verlängerungskabel LE
ROD 426.xxx8
Id.-Nr. 262 011..
1024lines
1024 Striche
max. 20 m
Winkelmeßsysteme:
Angle encoders:
X6
ROD 271 C Extension cable
Verlängerungskabel LE
RON 275 C Id.-Nr. 262 011..
max. 20 m
or:
oder:
Extension cable
Verlängerungskabel Connection cable
Verbindungskabel
ROD 250 C X6
RON 255 C EXE LE
ROD 700 C 602 E
RON 705 C Id.-Nr. 262 006.. Id.-Nr. 262 004..
5fach
5-fold
max. 30 m max. 10 m
bzw.
or:
Extension cable
Verlängerungskabel Verbindungskabel
Connection cable
ROD 250 C X6
RON 255 C EXE LE
ROD 700 C 801
RON 705 C Id.-Nr. 262 006.. Id.-Nr. 233 764..
5fach
5-fold
max. 30 m max. 50 m
If necessary, linear encoders can also be connected to the LE via interpolation and digitizing
electronics.
3-22 TNC 360 5 Encoders 8/95

6 Nominal Value Output
The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls control the position loop servo with a nominal value potential
of ± 10 volts.
Maximum loading of the nominal value outputs: 2 mA

Maximum load capacitance: 2 nF
6.1 Connector assignment X8

max. 20 m
X8 Nominal value output
Id.-Nr. 244 006..
BROWN •
1 1 Nominal value output 1
2 2 Analog input
YELLOW
RED/BLUE
4 4 do not use
PINK
G R AY / P I N K
6 6 do not use
RED
VIOLET
8 8 Nominal value output S axis
WHITE
9 9 0V Nominal value output 1
10 10 Analog input
GREEN
12 12 do not use
G R AY
BLUE
BLACK
15 15 0V Nominal value output S axis
line power.
6.2 Connecting cable

HEIDENHAIN offers a connecting cable with a connector at one end (Id.-Nr. 244 006 ..).
The connecting cable to the nominal value outputs may not have more than one intermediate
terminal clamp. The clamp must be made in an earthed connection box. This is necessary when the
cable must branch to physically separate servo inputs. It is only possible to earth the screening of
the servo leads in this way. If required, suitable connection boxes are available from HEIDENHAIN
with the Id.-Nr. 251 249 01.
Connection box
8/95 TNC 360 6 Nominal Value Output 3-23

The housing of the connection box must be electrically connected with the frame of the machine.
The 0 V of the nominal value differential input must be joined to signal ground, (cable cross-section ≥
Ø 6 mm², see also under "Grounding diagram").
Suggested solution for connecting and wiring the screening in the connection box:
LE Insulated against housing
• Leads
Leads are
are provided
provided
with end sleeves.
with en sleeves.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Cable screens are led onto 0.14 mm2

insulated strands via crimp eyelets.
•
X Y Z IV S
SERVO

1 Noml. value output X axis
2 Noml. value output 0 V X axis
3 Noml. value output Y axis
4 Noml. value output 0 V Y axis
5 Noml. value output Z axis
6 Noml. value output 0 V Z axis
7 Noml. value input IV axis
8 Noml. value input 0 V IV axis
9 Analog input
10 Analog input 0 V
11 Noml. value output S axis
12 Noml. value output 0 V S axis
13 Screen connection
If the manufacturers want to use their own cable, HEIDENHAIN offers a 15-pin D-sub connector
with solderable leads (Id.-Nr. 243 971 ZY).
3-24 TNC 360 6 Nominal Value Output 8/95

7 Visual Display Unit (VDU)
The LE 360 C is factory-prepared for connecting the BE 212 CRT screen or BF 110 flat panel display.
The status is indicated by the Id.-Nr. on the ID label (Id.-Nr. 270 641 for BE 212 and Id.-Nr. 270 642
for BF 110).

Both display units are connected to the socket X9 on the LE 360 C, but with different cables.
X9 Visual display unit
D-sub connection (female 15-pin)
Pin Number BE 212 BF 110

1,8 0 V power supply –
2,4 + 12 V power supply –
3, 5, 6 Do not use Do not use
7 – Video
9 V SYNC V SYNC
10 H SYNC 1 –
11 0 V Signal 0 V Signal
12 – –
13 Video –
14 H SYNC 2
15 CLOCK
Housing Outer screen = Unit housing
line power.
3-26 TNC 360 7 Visual Display Unit (VDU) 8/95

Standard cable Extension cable

Id.-Nr. 242 874 .. Id.-Nr. 244 504 ..
BE 212 LE
max. 25 m

Id.-Nr. 250 477 .. Id.-Nr. 254 640
BF 110 LE
max. 25 m
8/95 TNC 360 7 Visual Display Unit (VDU) 3-27

8 Touch Probe System Input
The 3D touch probe systems from HEIDENHAIN can be delivered in two versions:
– TS 120 with cable transmission and integrated APE interface electronics
– TS 511 with infrared transmission of the trigger signal and connectable via APE interface
electronics
For start-up and adjustment of the 3D touch probe systems see Chapter "Machine Integration".

X12 Touch probe system TS 120/TS 511
Pin Number Signal designation

1 Inner screen (0 V)
3 Ready/standby
4 Start
5 +15 V ± 10 % (UP)
6 + 5 V ± 5 % (UP)
7 Battery warning
8 0 V (UN)
9 Trigger signal
10 Trigger signal2
2, 11 to 15 Do not use
2 Stylus in rest position = signal high
3-28 TNC 360 8 Touch Probe System Input 8/95

8.2 Connection of the touch probe system
Please use only HEIDENHAIN connecting cables and adapters for the connection to the touch probe
system.
8.2.1 TS 120
The touch probe system TS 120 is connected directly to the logic unit via a cable adapter.
See also Section "Mounting dimensions".
TS 120 helical cable Cable

Cableadapter
adaptercomplete
completemax.
max.50
50m
(extended 1,5 m) m
X12 Touch probe inputs

Id.-Nr. 274 543..
• 1 1
2 2
PK
3 3 Standby
WH
• • 4 4
1 1 5 5 +15V ±10% (U P)
BN BN/GN
2 2 6 6 + 5V ± 5% (U P)
GY
TS
GY
3 3 •
WH/GN
7 7 Battery warning
120 4 4 8 8 0V (UN)
GN GN
5 5 9 9 Trigger signal
YL YL
6 6 10 10 Trigger signal
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
8/95 TNC 360 8 Touch Probe System Input 3-29

8.2.2 TS 511
The TS 511 touch probe system can only function together with a transmitter/receiver unit (SE 510)
and interface electronics (APE 510).
3m max. 7 m max. 30 m
SE 510 Id.-Nr. 274 540 .. APE 510 Id.-Nr. 274 539 ..

X12 Touch probe input
SE 510
WH/BN
•
• WH • • GY • • 1 1 Internal screen (0V)
0V 1 1 1 7 2 2
BN YL APE GY
UP 2 2 2 5 3 3 Standby
3 3 BN RD 3 510 3 YL 4 4 Start
GY WH BN
Flash signal 4 4 4 2 5 5 15V ±10% (U P)
5 5 GN 5 6 6 6
GN BL BL
IR-signal 6 6 6 1 7 7 Battery warning
Internal 7 7 7 4 WH 8 8 0V (UN)
WH/ WH/
screen (0V) BK BK 9 9
GN 10 10 Trigger signal
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
The signals may be inverted by changing the switch positions S1 to S4 in the APE 510.
See the operating instructions for the TS 511.
Please install the transmitter/receiver unit SE 510 either insulated from, or electrically connected to
the machine, as it must take up a definite potential, also under vibration. The earthing screw of
the APE 510 must be joined to the machine signal ground by a potential compensating lead
(≥ ∅ 6 mm²).
See also Section "Earthing plan".
3-30 TNC 360 8 Touch Probe System Input 8/95

9 RS-232-C/V.24 Data Interface
HEIDENHAIN guarantees that, if properly connected, the serial data interface RS-232-C/V.24 will
transmit data correctly up to a distance of 20 m between the logic unit and the peripheral unit.
The connection to the peripheral unit is made via a cable adapter which is attached to either the
operating console or the control cabinet. See also the section "Mounting dimensions". For
connection to the peripheral unit, HEIDENHAIN offers a standard connecting cable
(Id.-Nr. 274 545 01) , length 3 m.
X25 V.24/RS-232-C
D-sub connection (female 24-pin)
Pin Number LE 360 C

1 Chassis GND
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 CTS
5 RTS
6 DTR
7 Signal GND
20 DSR The interface complies with the recommendations in
9 - 19, 21-24 Do not use VDE 0160, 5. 88 for separation from line power.
V.24-Adapter Block
3m max. 17 m
Peripheral
X25 Data interface RS-232-C/V.24
unit
Id.-Nr. 274 545 01 Id.-Nr. 239 758 01 Id.-Nr. 239 760..
• WH/BN WH/BN
• • • • WH/BN WH/BN
•
GND 1 1 • GN •
1 1 • 1 1 • YL • 1 1 GND Chassis
TXD 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 RXD Receive data
YL GN
RXD 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 TXD Transmit data
GY PK
RTS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 CTS Clear to send
PK GY
CTS 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 RTS Request to send
BL BN
DSR 6 6 • RD • 6 6 6 6
RD
6 6 DTR Data terminal ready
GND 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 GND Signal ground
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
BN BL
DTR 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 DSR Data set ready
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
3-32 TNC 360 9 RS-232-C/V.24 Data Interface 8/95

10 Handwheel Input
The handwheel HR 130 or HR 330 or HR 332 or the handwheel adapter HRA 110 can be attached to
the HEIDENHAIN contouring control TNC 360. See also Chapter "Machine Integration".
10.1 Pin layout

X11 Handwheel input
D-sub connection (female insert, 9-pin)
Pin Number LE 360 C

1 CTS
2 0 V (UN)
3 RTS
4 + 12 V (UP)
5 Do not use
6 DTR
7 TxD
8 RxD
9 DSR
line power.
10.2 Portable handwheel HR 330

The HR 330 is a portable handwheel with keys for the 4 axes, rapid traverse, direction of traverse
and EMERGENCY STOP.
The HR 330 is connected to the logic unit by means of the cable adapter Id.-Nr. 249 889 ..
See also Section "Mounting dimensions".
The HEIDENHAIN extension cable Id.-Nr. 249 814 .. may be used to increase the connection
distance.
The HR 330 is available in 2 versions:
– HR 330 Helical cable (stretched length 2.2 m) Id.-Nr. 251 534 11

– HR 330.001 Normal cable (max. 6 m) Id.-Nr. 251 534 02
– HR 330 Helical cable (stretched length 2.2 m) Id.-Nr. 251 534 11
– HR 330.001 Normal cable (max. 6 m) Id.-Nr. 251 534 12
– Dummy plug for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Id.-Nr. 271 958 02
8/95 TNC 360 10 Handwheel Input 3-33

HR 330.001 max. 6 m
HR 330 max. 2.2 m max. 48 m max. 49 m
HR Adapter LE Electronic
HR 330 X11 handwheel
Id.-Nr. 251 534 .. Id.-Nr. 249 889 .. Id.-Nr. 249 814 ..
BLUE
EMERGENCY OFF 2
BLUE
max. 24V 1 • • •
1 1 1 1
WHITE WHITE
2 2 2 2 0V
BLUE
1 1 3 3 3 3
BLUE BROWN BROWN
HR 330 2 2 4 4 4 4 +12V ± 0.6V(U V)
GREEN
3 3 5 5 5 5
YELLOW YELLOW YELLOW
4 4 6 6 6 6 DTR
BROWN
5 5 7 7 7 7
WHITE GREEN GREEN
6 6 8 8 8 8 RXD
• • • 9 9 9 9
max. 50 m
The adapter includes a cable with a 9-pin connector for the logic unit, and two terminals for
connecting the 24 V of the EMERGENCY STOP control circuit (max. load 1.2 A).
See also section "Mounting dimensions".
10.3 Integral handwheel HR 130

The HR 130 is the integral version of the HR 330, without the keys for the axes, rapid traverse etc.
It may be attached directly to the logic unit, or via an extension cable (Id.-Nr. 249 814 ..).
The HR 130 (Id.-Nr. 254 040 ..) is available in several versions (standard cable length 1 m):
– Small knob; axial cable exit: version 01
– Small knob; radial cable exit: version 02
– Large knob; axial cable exit: version 03
– Large knob; radial cable exit: version 04
– Ergonomic knob; radial cable exit: version 05
Mounting dimension drawings are provided at the end of this chapter.
3-34 TNC 360 10 Handwheel Input 8/95

max. 6 m max. 49 m
HR 130 LE Electronic
X11 handwheel
Id.-Nr. 254 040 .. Id.-Nr. 249 814 ..
• • • •
1 1 1 1
WHITE WHITE
2 2 2 2 0V
HR 130 3 3 3 3
BROWN BROWN
4 4 4 4 +12V ±0.6V (U V)
5 5 5 5
YELLOW YELLOW
6 6 6 6 DTR
7 7 7 7
GREEN GREEN
8 8 8 8 RXD
9 9 9 9
max. 50 m

The HR 332 handwheel features two permission buttons and a keypad that can be evaluated via
PLC (see Section "Handwheel" in Chapter "Machine Integration"). There are several variants of the
handwheel with different labeling. Please contact HEIDENHAIN for more information.
The HR 332 is connected to a cable adapter on the panel through a connecting cable of 5 m length.
The connecting cable is available with or without metal armor tubing. The maximum cable length
from the HR to the LE is 50 m.
HR 332 Id.-Nr. 266 064 21
Connecting cable to HR 332 Id.-Nr. 272 291 ..

Connecting cable to HR 332, with metal armor Id.-Nr. 272 292 ..
Cable adapter HR 332/ LE Id.-Nr. 274 556 ..
Extension cable for cable adapter In development
Dummy plug for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Id.-Nr. 271 958 01
Handwheel holder Id.-Nr. 268 268 03
8/95 TNC 360 10 Handwheel Input 3-35

HR Adapter LE
332 HR 332 X11
Id.-Nr. 272 292 .. Id.-Nr. 274 556 .. Id.-Nr. on request
Id.-Nr. 272 291 ..
3 sw
2 vt
1 rt
2 ws
1 ws
HR 332
EMERGENCY OFF 1 blue 1 1

EMERGENCY OFF 2 pink 2 2 LE X11
Permiss. 3 red 3 3
Common 4 violet 4 4
bl
1 1
bl
1 1
Permiss. 5 black 5 5
white
2 2
white
2 0V
6 6 x 6 6
rt
3 3
rt
3 3
TXD 7 green 7 7
brown
4 4
brown
4 +12V
RXD 8 grey 8 8
x
5 5
x
5 5
Screen 9 x 9 9
yellow
6 6
yellow
6 DTR
DSR 10 yellow 10 10 grey
7 7
grey
7 DXD
0V 11 white 11 11 green
8 8
green
8 RXD
+12V 12 brown 12 12 9 9 9
max. 50 m
The adapter has a cable with 9-pin connector for the logic unit, two connecting terminals for the 24 V
of the EMERGENCY OFF circuit of the control (max. load 1.2 A) and 3 connecting terminals for the
permission switch circuit. The permission keys are make-contacts (24 V/1.2 A).
10 Handwheel input
3-36 TNC 360 10 Handwheel input 8/95

10.5 HRA 110 Handwheel Adapter
The HRA 110 permits two or three HR 150 handwheels to be connected to an LE.
The first two handwheels are permanently assigned to the X and Y axes. The third handwheel can
be assigned to the X, Y, Z or IV axes either through an optional step switch or via machine
parameter. (See Section "Handwheel" in Chapter "Machine Integration").
HR 150 HRA 110
X31 24 V
X1 S2 Achswahl (Option)
AXIS SELECTION (OPTIONAL)
S1 Unterteilungsfaktorwahl (Option)
X2
INTERPOLATION FACTOR (OPTIONAL)
X3 X23 LE X11
Id.-Nr. 270 909..
max. 20 m max. 50 m
Another step switch (optional) is available for selecting the interpolation factor of the handwheels.
The interpolation factor of the switch must be evaluated in the PLC and is displayed on the TNC
screen, but it cannot be changed via TNC keyboard. If the handwheels are mounted without the step
switch, however, the interpolation factor is selected for each axis via TNC keyboard.
Pin layout
Handwheel inputs X1, X2, X3

1 I1+
2 I1–
5 I2+
6 I2–
7 I0+
8 I0–
3 + 5 V (UP)
4 0 V (UN)
9 Inner screen
Housing Outer screen
8/95 TNC 360 10 Handwheel input 3-37

Handwheel adapter output X23
Pin layout

1 RTS
2 0 V (UN)
3 CTS
4 +12V (UP)
5 Do not use
6 DSR
7 RxD
8 TxD
9 DTR
Direct current connection X31

Pin layout

1 + 24 V
2 0V
The 24 V power supply of the PLC must not be connected to the handwheel adapter, since this
would cancel the electrical isolation of the PLC inputs and outputs. The handwheel adapter must be
supplied by the 24V supply of the NC (low voltage electrical separation according to VDE 0160,
5.88).
3-38 TNC 360 10 Handwheel input 8/95

11 PLC inputs/outputs
The HEIDENHAIN contouring control TNC 360 C has a capacity of max. 119 PLC inputs and 62 PLC
outputs.
55 PLC inputs and 31 PLC outputs can be connected directly to the logic unit. One PLC I/O board
(model PL 410 B or PL 410), with 64 PLC inputs and 31 PLC outputs, can be connected to the logic
unit.
11.1 Technical data

PLC inputs
Logic unit/ PL 410 PL 410 B PL 400

Potential range
”1” signal: Ui 13 V to 30.2 V 13 V to 30.2 V 16.5 V to 30 V
”0” signal: Ui –20 V to 3.2 V –20 V to 3.2 V –20 V to 4 V
Current range
”1” signal: Ii 3.8 mA to 8.9 mA 2.5 mA to 6 mA 6.2 mA to12.6 mA
”0” signal: Ii 1.0 mA at Ui = 3.2 V 0.65 mA at Ui = 3.2 V 1.6 mA at Ui = 4 V
PLC outputs
Transistor outputs with current limiting
Logic unit PL 410 B/ PL 410 / PL 400

Min. output potential
for ”1” signal 3 V below supply voltage
Nominal operating
current per output 0.1 A 1.2 A
Permissible load: resistive load, inductive load only with a quenching diode parallel to the inductance.
No more that half of the outputs may be switched on at simultaneously.
It is not permissible to short-circuit several outputs from the logic unit simultaneously.
A single short circuit does not cause an overload.
3-40 TNC 360 11 PLC inputs/outputs 8/95

11.2 Connector assignment
11.2.1 PLC inputs

The PLC inputs I128 to I151 are on connector X27 for the machine control panel.
X22 PLC inputs
D-sub connector (37-pin female insert)
1 I0
2 I1
3 I2
4 I3 acknowledgment for ”control is
operational” test
5 I4
6 I5
7 I6
8 I7
9 I8
10 I9
11 I10
12 I11
13 I12
14 I13
15 I14
16 I15
17 I16
18 I17
19 I18
20 I19
21 I20
22 I21
23 I22
24 I23
25 I24
26 I25
27 I26
28 I27
29 I28
30 I29
31 I30
32 I31
33, 34 Do not use
35, 36, 37 0 V (PLC) test output; do not use
8/95 TNC 360 11 PLC inputs/outputs 3-41

11.2.2 PLC output
The PLC outputs O0 to O30 and the "Control is operational" output are on connector X21 (PLC
output). The PLC outputs O0 to O7 are also to be found on the connector for the machine control
panel (X27).
See also Section "Machine control panel".
X21 PLC output


1 O0
2 O1
3 O2
4 O3
5 O4
6 O5
7 O6
8 O7
9 O8
10 O9
11 O10
12 O11
13 O12
14 O13
15 O14
16 O15
17 O16
18 O17
19 O18
20 O19
21 O20
22 O21
23 O22
24 O23
25 O24 1)
26 O25 1)
27 O26 1)
28 O27 1)
29 O28 1)
30 O29 1)
31 O30 1)
32 Do not use
33 0 V (PLC) 1)
34 Control operational
1) Cannot be switched off via EMERGENCY STOP

Please use only HEIDENHAIN connecting cables.
The length of cable between the logic unit and the element to be switched is limited to 25 m.
HEIDENHAIN recommends building a transfer unit with a terminal strip into the switch cabinet.
This transfer unit can be connected to the logic unit with the HEIDENHAIN connecting cable Id.-Nr.
244 017 ..
max. 25 m
Id.-Nr. 244 017..
If operation is to be without transfer unit, then the HEIDENHAIN connecting cable

Id.-Nr. 244 005 .. can be used.
max. 25 m
Id.-Nr. 244 005..
Terminal color assignments:
1 = GY/RD 14 = GN/BL 27 = YL/BK

2 = BN/BK 15 = YL 28 = WH/YL
3 = WH/BK 16 = RD 29 = GY/BL
4 = GN/BK 17 = GY 30 = PK/BL
5 = BN/RD 18 = BL 31 = PK/RD
6 = WH/RD 19 = PK 32 = BN/BL
7 = WH/GN 20 = WH/GY 33 = PK/GN
8 = RD/BL 21 = YL/GY 34 = BN
9 = YL/RD 22 = GN/RD 35 = YL/PK
10 = GY/PK 23 = WH/PK 36 = VI
11 = BK 24 = GY/GN 37 = WH
12 = PK/BN 25 = YL/BN
13 = YL/BL 26 = GY/BN
If the connector is to be assembled in the field, a 37-pin solderable connector is available from
HEIDENHAIN (Id.-Nr. 243 937 ZY).

11.4 PLC I/O unit
One PL 400 board with 63 PLC inputs, 31 PLC outputs and the "Control is operational" output can be
connected to the logic unit. The PL 400 can be mounted directly on the logic unit. See Section
"Power supply" for the power connection.
11.4.1 PL 400 connection

Pin connections on the logic unit
X26 PLC I/O board (PL 400)

D-sub connector (24-pin male insert)
1, 2, 3 0V
4 Serial IN 2
5, 6, 17, 18 Do not use
7 RESET
8 WRITE EXTERN
9 WRITE EXTERN
10 A5
11 A3
12 A1
13 Screen
14, 15, 16 + 12 V (from PL 400)
19 Serial IN 1
20 EMERGENCY STOP
21 Serial OUT
22 Serial OUT
23 A4
24 A2
25 A0
Housing External shield

Pin connections on the PL 400
X10 Connections on the logic unit

Pin connections as for connector X26 on the logic unit
Connecting cable
X10
LE
PL 400
X26
Id.-Nr. 250 481..
max. 20 m

11.4.2 PLC inputs/outputs on the PL 400
The PLC inputs/outputs on the PL 400 are distributed among nine connectors.
Assignments as follows:
X1 X2
Pin Number Assignment Pin Number Assignment
PL 400 PL 400
1 O32 1 O43
2 O33 2 O44
3 O34 3 O45
4 O35 4 O46
5 O36 5 O47
6 O37 6 O48
7 O38 7 O49
8 O39 8 O50
9 O40 9 O51
10 O41 10 O52
11 O42 11 O53
12 Do not use 12 Do not use
X3 X4
PL 400 PL 400
1 O54 1 I126
2 O55 2 I74
3 O562) 3 I73
4 O572) 4 I72
5 O58 5 I71
6 O592) 6 I70
7 O602) 7 I69
8 O612) 8 I68
9 O622) 9 I67
10 Control is operational 10 I66
11 Do not use 11 I65
12 +24 V cannot be switched 12 I64
off via ext. EMERGENCY
OFF1)
1) +24 V must always be connected, even if the outputs are not used.
2) Outputs cannot be switched off via EMERGENCY STOP

X5 X6
PL 400 PL 400
1 I86 1 I98
2 I85 2 I97
3 I84 3 I96
4 I83 4 I95
5 I82 5 I94
6 I81 6 I93
7 I80 7 I92
8 I79 8 I91
9 I78 9 I90
10 I77 10 I89
11 I76 11 I88
12 I75 12 I87
X7 X8
PL 400 PL 400
1 I110 1 I122
2 I109 2 I121
3 I108 3 I120
4 I107 4 I119
5 I106 5 I118
6 I105 6 I117
7 I104 7 I116
8 I103 8 I115
9 I102 9 I114
10 I101 10 I113
11 I100 11 I112
12 I99 12 I111
X9
PL 400
1 Do not use
2 Do not use
3 Do not use
4 I125
5 I124
6 I123
The connections to the PLC inputs/outputs must be made with leads with a conductor
cross-section ≥ ∅ 0.14 mm² Cu. The maximum permissible lead length is 20 m.

11.5 PL 410 B / PL 410 PLC I/O unit
The PL 410 B / PL 410 has 64 PLC inputs, 31 PLC outputs and one "control-is-operational" output.
In its interface to the LE and its load capacity of inputs and outputs it is identical to the PL 400.
The analog inputs (X15 to X22) of the PL 410 cannot be evaluated in the LE 360 C! The DIL switch
on the PCB of the PL 410 must therefore be set to OFF (as is stated on the housing). The PLC
outputs are powered in groups and are therefore switched off via EMERGENCY STOP in groups.
Connecting cable
X1
PL 410B LE
PL 410
Id.-Nr. 263 662 ..
max. 20 m

11.5.1 PLC inputs/PLC outputs on the PL 410
The PLC inputs and outputs on the PL 410 are distributed over 6 switches. The 16-pin connectors
are arranged in vertical pairs.
PLC inputs
Pin layout
X3 X4
1 I64 1 I80
2 I65 2 I81
3 I66 3 I82
4 I67 4 I83
5 I68 5 I84
6 I69 6 I85
7 I70 7 I86
8 I71 8 I87
9 I72 9 I88
10 I73 10 I89
11 I74 11 I90
12 I75 12 I91
13 I76 13 I92
14 I77 14 I93
15 I78 15 I94
16 I79 16 I95
X5 X6
1 I96 1 I112
2 I97 2 I113
3 I98 3 I114
4 I99 4 I115
5 I100 5 I116
6 I101 6 I117
7 I102 7 I118
8 I103 8 I119
9 I104 9 I120
10 I105 10 I121
11 I106 11 I122
12 I107 12 I123
13 I108 13 I124
14 I109 14 I125
15 I110 15 I126
16 I111 16 I127

PLC outputs
Assignment of the grouped power supply:
Terminal Assignment PL 410 /PL 410 B
X9 0V
X10 +24V PL supply and "Control is ready" (cannot be
switched of via EMERGENCY STOP)
X11 +24 V supply O32 - O39
X12 +24 V supply O40 - O47
X13 +24 V supply O48 - O55
X14 +24 V supply O56 - O62
Pin Layout
X7 X8
Pin Number Assignment PL 410/PL Pin Number Assignment PL 410/PL

410 B 410 B
1 O32 1 O48
2 O33 2 O49
3 O34 3 O50
4 O35 4 O51
5 O36 5 O52
6 O37 6 O53
7 O38 7 O54
8 O39 8 O55
9 O40 9 O56
10 O41 10 O57
11 O42 11 O58
12 O43 12 O59
13 O44 13 O60
14 O45 14 O61
15 O46 15 O62
16 O47 16 "Control is operational"

12 Machine Control Panel
A separate 37-pin female connector (X27) is mounted on the logic unit for the connection to the
manufacturer's proprietary machine control panel. This connector includes the PLC inputs I128 to
I151, the PLC outputs O0 to O7, as well as the 0 V and +24 V of the PLC power supply. The PLC
inputs I128 to I151 may be connected only with the power supply from pins 36 and 37, since this
power supply is internally secured as required.
12.1 Pin layout

X27 Machine control panel

1 I128
2 I129
3 I130
4 I131
5 I132
6 I133
7 I134
8 I135
9 I136
10 I137
11 I138
12 I139
13 I140
14 I141
15 I142
16 I143
17 I144
18 I145
19 I146
20 I147
21 I148
22 I149
23 I150
24 I151
25 Do not use
26 O0
27 O1
28 O2
29 O3
30 O4
31 O5
32 O6
33 O7
34, 35 0 V (PLC)1)
36, 37 + 24 V (PLC)2)
1) Externally available PLC reference potential for the outputs O0-O7
2) Externally available (via fuse) PLC supply voltage for the inputs.
8/95 TNC 360 12 Machine Control Panel 3-53

HEIDENHAIN recommends that a 37-pin D-subminiature connector should be mounted on the

machine control panel. The machine control panel can be connected to the logic unit with the
standard HEIDENHAIN connecting cable Id.-Nr. 263 954 ..
max. 25 m
Id.-Nr. 263 954..
If the machine control panel does not have a 37-pin D-subminiature connector, the HEIDENHAIN
connecting cable Id.-Nr. 244 005 .. may be used.
max. 25 m
Id.-Nr. 244 005..
For the assignments of the multi-core conductors see Section "PLC inputs/outputs".
If for any reason the manufacturers of the machine have to produce their own cable, a 37-pin
connector is available from HEIDENHAIN (Id.-Nr. 243 937 ZY).
3-54 TNC 360 12 Machine Control Panel 8/95

13 TNC Keyboard
The TNC keyboard TE 355 A/B is connected to the logic unit by a connecting cable.
13.1 Pin connections

On the logic unit
X23 TNC keyboard (TE 355 A/B)
1 RL0
2 RL1
3 RL2
4 RL3
5 RL4
6 RL5
7 RL6
8 RL7
9 Do not use
10 Do not use
11 Do not use
12 Do not use
13 Do not use
14 Do not use
15 Do not use
16 Do not use
17 Do not use
18 Do not use
19 Do not use
20 SL0
21 SL1
22 SL2
23 SL3
24 SL4
25 SL5
26 SL6
27 SL7
28 Do not use
29 Do not use
30 Do not use
31 Do not use
32 Do not use
33 Do not use
34 Spindle override (wiper)
35 Feed override (wiper)
36 + 5 V override potentiometer
37 0 V override potentiometer
Housing External screen
3-56 TNC 360 13 TNC Keyboard 8/95


Id.-Nr. 263 954 .. Id.-Nr. 263 955 ..
TE 355 LE
max. 25 m
8/95 TNC 360 13 TNC Keyboard 3-57

3-58
14.1 LE 360 C
14 Dimensions
560
84 476+5 22"
3.3" 10 18.8"+.02" 456+2
0
.4" 100.5 18"+.08" 311.5 411.5
8
.29±.012"
3.95" 12.26" 16.2"
7.3±0.3
.31"
132.5±0,2 140.5±0.2
.51"
13
1.77"
5.2"±.08" 5.53"±.08"
TNC 360
45
.78"
15
.6"
20
Ø
5
DI
"
R12.8
36
R 32
8
A
.32
"
R 40
10.5"±.008"
134
5.3"
R 1.5
267±0,2
8"
9.25"±.008"
280±o.2
10.73"
272.5
6.34"
160
9.25"±.008"
235±0,2
12.93"±.02"
Befestigungsmöglichkeit PL 400
326±0.5
12.9"
(Befestigungsschrauben M3x5)
328
MOUNTING POSSIBILITY PL 400
Ø (FIXING SCREWS M3x5)
DI 10,
A 3
.4
"
R 50
14 Dimensions
R 2.4"
.28"
Betriebserde M6
7
Schutzerde M5 SYSTEM EARTH M6
36 80±0.2 210±0.2 340±0.2
PROTECTION EARTH M5 83.5
1.42"
0 3.15"±.008" 8.26"±.008" 13.39"±.008" 3.3"
10 392
145
5.7"
4" 15.43"
Anschlußkabel dürfen Schwenkbereich der Schwenkbereich der Steuerung

Steuerung nicht beeinträchtigen!
CONNECTION CABELS SHOULD NOT INTERFERE FIELD OF SWIVEL FRAME TRAVERSE
M3 (Einschraublänge max. 3)
WITH TILTING RANGE OF CONTROL UNIT!
M3 (LENGTH OF ENGAGEMENT .12")
9
.35"
12.5
.5"
10.5
.41"
25 427
1" 16.8"
8/95
14.2 Keyboard units
14.2.1 TE 355 A
281
.236"±.008"
6±0.2 269±0.2 11.063"

6±0.2
.236"±.008" 10.591"±.008"
5.5
.217"
10.787"
274
10.315"
262
55 112
0
2.165" 4.409"
8+1 Frontplattenausschnitt 236+0.5 x 224+0.5

DIA.315"+.039" FRONT PANEL OPENING 9.21"+.020" x 8.819"+0.20"
1.16"+.19"
31+5
.98"
.157"
.079"
25
10
.98"
.039"
25
DIA.394"
Dichtung 3 dick, im eingebauten Zustand 2 dick

GASKET .118" THICK INCORPORATED .079 THICK
23.5 234+2
0.925" 9.212"+.079"
.708"
18
8.740"+.079"
222+2
8.819"+.020"
224+0.5
X2
R60
R2.36
Massenanschluß M5
GROUND CONNECTION M5 Frontplattenausschnitt
236+0.5 FRONT PANEL OPENING
9.291"+.020"
8/95 TNC 360 14 Dimensions 3-59

14.2.2 TE 355 B
.236"±.008"
350
6±0.2
6±0.2 13.78" 338±0.2
.236"±.008" 13.307"±.008"
.217"
5.5
3.80"
96.5
7.598"±.008"
193±0.2
2.62"
66.5
8.07"
205
51
2.01"
Dichtung 3 dick, im eingebauten Zustand 2 dick

GASKET .118" THICK INCORPORATED .079 THICK
Ø8+1
DIA.351"+.04"
1.16+.19"
31+5
.157"
1.97"+.20"
4
50+5
.98"
.079"
25
.40"
2
1
Ø10
DIA .394"
338±0.2
.335"±.016"
13.307"±.008"
8.5±0.4
248+1 75±0.4
9.76"+.040" 2.95"±.016"
.040"
1
752"±.020"
191±0.5
7.598"±.008"
193±0.2
7.38"+.04"
X2
187.5+1
X1
R60
R2.36
"
19 300±0.5
.748" 11.81"±.020"
Montagefläche 0.5 Frontplattenausschnitt

MOUNTING SURFACE .02" FRONT PANEL OPENING
3-60 TNC 360 14 Dimensions 8/95

14.3 Visual display units
14.3.1 BE 212
350 Z
6±0.2 13.78"
.236"±.008" 338±0.2 Freiraum für Belüftung 94
13.307"±.008" FREESPACE FOR AIR VENTILATION 3.20"
5.5
.236"
6
.217"
1.18"
30
.236"±.008"
MIN. .47"
min. 12
6±0.2
MAX. 9.53"
10.315"±.008"
max. 242
262±0.2
7.72"
196
MAX. 6.30"
max. 160
9.61"±.020"
244±0.5
10.79"
274
1.18"
30
5 328+0.5
MIN. .79"
min. 20
.197" 12.91"+.020" 322.5 max. 303 26
12.70" MAX. 11.93" 1.02"
Montagefläche 0.5 Frontplattenausschnitt

MOUNTING SURFACE .02" FRONT PANEL OPENING
40
1.58"
DIA .307"+.008"
max. 300
1
MAX. 11.80"
Ø7.8
.040"
Z 2–0.5
.08"–.02" 5
.197"
DIA .394"
Ø10
11.02"
280
Dichtung 3 dick
im eingebauten Zustand 2 dick
GASKET .118" THICK
INCORPORATED CONDITION .079" THICK
20 20
.79" .79"
Freiraum für Belüftung

FREESPACE FOR AIR VENTILATION
max. 326
MAX. 12.83"
1.87"
47.5

3-62
14.3.2 BF 110
0,5 Montagefläche
.02" MOUNTING SURFACE

281 55+5
11.06" 2.2"+.2"
6±0.2 269±0.2 4 1
.236"±.008" 10.59"±.008" .16" .04"
.236"±.008"
TNC 360
5.5
6±0.2
11,5–0.5
.45"–.02"
.22"
.32"+.04"
Ø10
8+1
.79"±.04"
20±1
M5 Dichtung 3 dick
GASKET .12" THICK
7.598"±.008"
193±0.2
6.7"+.04"
170+1
6.5"±.04"
165±1
8.07"
205
14 Dimensions
Frontplattenausschnitt
FRONT PANEL OPENING
6.5–0.5 256+1
.26"–.02" 10.03"+.04"
R40 Ø8
DIA Masseanschluß M5
R 1.6" .32"
GROUND CONNECTION M5
14±1 253±1
.55"±.04" 9.96"±.04"
8/95
14.4 Input/Output units
14.4.1 PL 410 B
282 8
11.1" .315"
23.5 235±0.2
.93" 9.252±.008"
18±0.5 52.5
.7±.02" 2.07"
PL-Eingänge
.35"
3.6 1±0.5 47.5

9
.14" PL INPUTS .04+.02" 1.87"
ø9.3
DIA.37"
8.268±.008"
210±0.2
8.98"
228
33+2 PL-Ausgänge
1.3"+.08" PL OUTPUTS
Masseanschluß M5

14.4.2 PL 410
282
11.1"
23.5 235±0.2
.93" 9.252±.008"
18±0.5 52.5
.7±.02" 2.07"
PL-Eingänge
.35"
3.6 1±0.5 47.5

9
.14" PL INPUTS .04+.02" 1.87"
ø9.3
DIA.37"
8.268±.008"
210±0.2
8.98"
228
33+2 PL-Ausgänge
1.3"+.08" PL OUTPUTS
Masseanschluß M5

14.4.3 PL 400
2.42"
2.30"
61.5
58.5
1.48"
37.5
14.5 31
.57" 1.22"
360+1
14.2"+.04"
M4 20.5
.8"
.2"
5
3.11"
79
9.252"±.008"
2.64"
67
9.65"+.04"
235±0.2
8.86"+.04"
245+1
225+1
14.5 363+1
.57" 14.3"+.04"
391+1
15.4"+.04"
ø4.5
DIA.177"
10 • 80±0.2 210±0.2 340±0.2
.4" 3.15".008" 8.268".008" 13.386".008"
0

14.5 Panel-mounted handwheels
14.5.1 HR 130
Ø0.2 Befestigungsgewinde M3 x 5
DIA .008" FIXING HOLE M3 x .197"
36–1.5 3x
DIA .3937–.0004" 1.417–.06"
DIA .3937–.0008"
14
.551"
Ø10–0.01
Ø10–0.02
DIA 2.283"
3 x 120°
120°
Ø58
48
12.5 1.890"
DIA 1.4173–.0010"
DIA 1.4173–.0025"
.492"
.630"
16
Ø36 f8
30°
Ø4.4
DIA .173“
19.5+1
.768+.04"
10
.394"

14.5.2 HR 150
0.2 A
.008" A
0.1 A M3 Ø0.3 C
.004" A 36–1.5
SW 5.5 DIA .012" C
1.417–.06"
HEX FLATS
DIA .3937–.0004"
DIA .3937–.0008"
C 14
.551"
Ø10–0.01
Ø10–0.02
A
DIA 2.283"
3 x 120°
120°
Ø58
48
12.5 1.890"
DIA 1.4173–.0010"
DIA 1.4173–.0025"
.492"
.630"
16
B
Ø36 f8
30°
Ø6
DIA .236“
19.5+1
Ø0.2 B
DIA .008" B .768+.04"
10
DIA 1.102“
.394"
Ø28
52
2.047“
Dimensions

14.5.3 Handwheel adapter HRA 110 (for HR 150)
2.28 – .04"
58 – 1
HR 150
2.08"
53
.04 ± .02"
1 ± 0.5
248
9.76"
1.8 – .04"
45 – 1
DIA .24"
Ø6
X
.55"
4.567 ± .008"
4.567 ± .008"
14
8.15 + .08"
116 ± 0.2
116 ± 0.2
207 + 2
9
.35"
230 ± 0.2
9.055 ± .008"
X
Datenausgang HRA
DATA INTERFACE HRA
S1 S2 X31 24V
X23 + –
Masseanschluß M5

14.5.4 Handwheel knobs
Knob, small
18
.709"
SW 5.5
M3
M3
3x
max. 10
7 6
MAX .394" .276" .236"
1
.0394" HR ...
DIA 2.402"
Ø10
Ø61
DIA .394"
SW 14
18
.709" (18)
(.709")
Frontplatte (2)
FRONT PANEL (.079")

Knob, large
12
.472"
SW 5.5
M3
M3
3x
7 6
.276" .236"
max. 15.5
MAX .610"
HR ...
SW 1.5
27
1.063" (12)
48 (.472") 90
1.89" 3.543"
Frontplatte (2) Ø10 F7

FRONT PANEL (.079") DIA .3937 +.0011"
DIA .3937 +.0005"

Knob, ergonomic
12
.472"
SW 5.5
17.7
M3
M3
.697"
3x
10
.394" 7 6
.276" .236"
4
.158"
HR ...
SW 2
(12)
(.472")
6 70
.236" 2.756"
22
.866"
Ø10 H7
Frontplatte (2) DIA .3937 +.0006"
FRONT PANEL (.079")

14.6 Cable adapter
Cable adapter for TS 120

Id.-Nr. 244 891..
8 80
.315" 3.150"
3
DIA.315"
.118"
ø8
DIA2.165"
1.575"
ø55
40
DIA1.858".012"
ø47.2±0.3
max. 7 52
MAX.276" 2.047"
Cable adapter for HR 330 Id.-Nr. 249 889 ..

Cable adapter for HR 332 Id.-Nr. 274 556 ..
M5 38 14 54 23
1.469" .551" 2.126" .906"
1.26"x.59"
2.165"
32x15
55
DIA1.417"
ø36
4
.158"
Mounting when housing thickness S≤4 Mounting when housing thickness S>4
23
.906"
1.732"
1.339"
1.457"
1.732"
.787"
44
34
37
44
20
5.5 S M4 S
.217"

RS-232-C/V.24 Adapter Block
7 78±0.2
.275" 3.071".008" M4
1.5"
38
92 31.5
3.62" 1.24"
Opening for mounting the adapter

78±0.2
3.071*.008"
9 60+1
.83"+.02"
21+0.5
.35" 2.36"+.04" 5
10.5
.41"
.2"

15 Grounding Diagram
Operating panel
Machine Encoders Triggering C X25
1 2 3 4 6 touch probe Adapter
V.24
Optoc.
LE 360
X1 X2 X3 X4 X6 X12 X11
Handwheel
+5V
Insulated X9
LE - Power supply 0V C Display
Unit
VDE 0551
X23 8 x24 Matrix 2
1
+24V +24V SI Keyboard 4mm
Unit
X31 1 stab. supply
0V 0V 0V voltages X27 8 x 0,1A
2 24 Inputs Machine
Power supply Op. Panel
Unit PL 410B
Optoc. Terminal box
X8 Analog Measuring voltage
X23 1 input
2 1,2,3,4
(Spindel) 0V
Optoc.
X1 X26 1-Axis
X14 Spindel 2-Axis
3-Axis
X13 SI C 4-Axis
SI
(Spindle)
Selectable X12 L C
C C Motor control
connection X11 with nominal value
X10 B 0V difference input
X24/2
X24/1
X24/3
X21 X21 X21 X21 X22
V
V
Test point 1 Spindle
X9 X2
(Fault voltg. 0V/ Test point 2
Emergency stop housing) (Fault voltg.with grounded nominal Motor control
controlled value input)
without nominal
value difference
Emergency Stop
+24V- +24V- 0V 0V input
X8 X7 X7 X8 X8 X3-X6
32 Inputs
PLC - Power supply
Emergency Stop
To prevent earth circuits,

64 Inputs
8 x 1,2A
8 x 1,2A
8 x 1,2A
7 x 1,2A
16x0,1A
VDE 0160 the measuring voltages should not be grounded.

7x0,1A
8x0,1A
0,1A
If it must be grounded,
basic insulation ensure that the line is short and noise immune.
3 +24V A grounded nominal input
results in anearth circuit.
Therefore ensure that the 0V
and ground line are short and noise immune
0V
2
6mm
2
2 6mm
6mm 2
6mm
2 B 2
6mm 6mm
1
0
*)
2 2
6mm 6mm
8/95 TNC 360 15 Grounding Diagram 3-75

16 Cable Overview
BF 110 or BE 212 TE 355 A or TE 355 B PL 410 B
TNC 360 C 267 209 01 or 242 370 01 255 015 01 255 016 01 263 371 12
TNC 360 C 25m

VL: Extension cable
– for separation points with connecting cable
– for extending existing connecting cable
VB: Connecting cable between two components
20m that do not have their own cable.
KA: Cable adapter
30.03.95
VB VB VB VB Accessories
Encoders 250 477 .. 242 874 .. 263 954 .. 289 111 ..
KA 50m
296 466 .. VB
60m 296 467 .. HR 410
VL 296 469 01
VL VL 281 429 ..
VL 244 504 .. 263 955 ..
254 640 .. HR 130
254 040 ..
VL
262 006 ..
max. 20 m HR 150
VB HRA 110
270 909 .. 261 097 01 HR 150
Cable assembly
HR 150
257 061 ..
max. 20 m
50m Step switch
4 inputs 270 908 ..
VB
239 760 ..
LE 360 C
1 input
Included with FE 20m

274 545 01
VL
FE 401 B
262 006 ..
251 029 01
RS-232-C Adapter block
VB VL KA 239 758 01
263 954 .. 263 955 .. 274 543 .. 50m
TS 120
VB
265 348 ..
262 004 ..
VB VB
25m
244 005 .. Machine 274 539 ..
operating
panel TS 220
294 242 ..
15-pin male connector 37-pin male connector
243 971 ZY 243 937 ZY
EA 550
VL 262 904 01
262 011 .. VB VB
Connection box 290 109 .. 244 005 ..
251 249 01
30m TS 630
293 714 ..
20m VB VB
20m 290 110 .. 263 954 ..
Nominal value PLC I/ 0 25m
VB output
262 009 ..
8/95 TNC 360 16 Cable Overview 3-77

Machine Integration – Contents 4
1 Machine axes 4-5

1.1 Measuring systems 4-5
1.1.1 Signal period 4-5
1.1.2 Direction of traverse 4-7
1.1.3 Measuring system monitoring 4-8
1.2 Axis designation 4-11
1.2.1 Assignment 4-12
1.2.2 Current tool axis 4-13
1.3 VDU display 4-13
1.4 Traverse ranges 4-15
1.5 Lubrication pulse 4-18
1.6 Axis-error compensation 4-21
1.6.1 Backlash compensation 4-21
1.6.2 Compensation for reversal errors in circular motion 4-22
1.6.3 Linear axis-error compensation 4-23
1.6.4 Nonlinear axis error compensation 4-24
1.6.5 Temperature compensation 4-29
1.7 PLC positioning 4-32
1.8 PLC Axes 4-35
2 Reference marks 4-36

2.1 Passing over the reference marks 4-38
2.1.1 Measuring systems with distance-coded reference marks 4-39
2.1.2 Measuring systems with one reference mark 4-43
2.1.3 Linear measurement via rotary encoder 4-46
2.2 Machine datum 4-49
3 Servo positioning of the NC-axes 4-51

3.1 The position control loop of an NC-machine 4-51
3.2 Servo positioning in TNC controls 4-52
3.2.1 Control with servo lag 4-52
3.2.2 Control with feed forward 4-60
3.3 Offset adjustment 4-63
3.3.1 Offset adjustment by code number 4-63
3.3.2 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment 4-63
3.3.3 Offset adjustment with integral factor 4-64
3.4 Contour behavior in corners 4-66
3.4.1 Radial acceleration 4-66
3.4.2 Constant feed rate in corners 4-66
3.4.3 Constant feed rate in corners with M90 4-67
3.5 Monitoring functions 4-68
3.5.1 Position monitoring for operation with lag 4-69
8/95 TNC 360 1 Machine Axes 4-1

3.5.2 Position monitoring for operation with feed forward control 4-70
3.5.3 Monitoring the analog voltage 4-71
3.5.4 Movement-monitoring 4-71
3.5.5 Standstill monitoring 4-72
3.5.6 Positioning window 4-72
3.6 Controlled axes 4-74
3.6.1 Axis-enable, feed rate enable 4-74
3.6.2 Axes in position 4-75
3.6.3 Axes in motion 4-76
3.6.4 Open control loop 4-77
3.6.5 Actual - nominal value transfer 4-77
4 Spindle 4-79
4.1 Analog output of the spindle speed 4-80
4.1.1 Direction of spindle rotation 4-80
4.1.2 Gear range 4-81
4.1.3 Spindle-override 4-84
4.1.4 Gear change 4-85
4.2 BCD-coded output of spindle speed 4-91
4.3 Spindle-orientation 4-93
4.4 Tapping 4-99
4.4.1 Tapping with floating tap holder for analog spindle-speed output 4-99
4.4.2 Tapping with floating tap holder and coded spindle-speed output 4-102
4.4.3 Rigid tapping 4-103
5 EMERGENCY STOP Routine 4-106

5.1 Connection diagram 4-107
5.2 Flow diagram 4-108
6 Display and Operation 4-109

6.1 Machine datum 4-109
6.2 Graphic simulation 4-112
6.3 Status display 4-113
6.3.1 Position display 4-113
6.3.2 Display mode and traverse direction for rotary axes 4-114
6.3.3 Feed rate display, feed rate display 4-115
6.3.4 Display of M functions 4-117
6.3.5 Display of run duration 4-117
6.3.6 Control is operational 4-118
6.3.7 Cancel status display 4-119
6.3.8 Expanded spindle display 4-119
6.3.9 Generating NC blocks with the actual-position-capture key 4-121
6.4 PLC text window 4-121
6.5 Error messages 4-121
4-2 TNC 360 1 Machine Axes 8/95

6.6 Cycles 4-126
6.6.1 Cycle inhibit 4-126
6.6.2 Pocket milling 4-128
6.6.3 Milling-cycles for pockets with free-programmed contours 4-128
6.6.4 Scaling factor 4-130
6.7 File types 4-132
6.7.1 File types – disable 4-132
6.7.2 Block numbers - step size for ISO programs 4-132
6.8 User parameters 4-132
6.9 Code numbers 4-133
6.10 Programming station 4-134
6.11 Dialog language 4-134
6.12 Decimal sign 4-134
6.13 Memory test 4-135
6.14 End of program run 4-135
6.15 Overwrite Q-parameters overwriting 4-135
7 M Functions 4-137
7.1 Program halt on M functions 4-140
7.2 Program halt on M06 4-140
7.3 M function M89 4-140
8 Key Simulation 4-141

8.1 TNC Keyboard 4-141
8.2 Machine control panel 4-149
9 Touch Probe 4-151

9.1 Interfacing the touch probe 4-151
9.2 Digitizing with TS 120 4-155
9.2.1 Scanning cycles 4-158
9.2.2 Response of the scanning sequence at corners 4-159
9.2.3 Optimizing the scanning sequence 4-161
10 Electronic Handwheel 4-166

10.1 Panel-mounted handwheel HR 130 4-169
10.3.1 Assignment of keys and LEDs to the PLC inputs and outputs 4-170
10.3.2 PLC example 4-171
10.4 Panel-mounted handwheels HR 150 with handwheel adapter HRA 110 4-172
10.4.1 Assignment of the switch setting to the PLC inputs 4-173
10.4.2 PLC Example 4-174
11 Analog Inputs 4-176

12 Incremental Jog Positioning 4-178
13 Hirth Coupling 4-183

13.1 Positioning in the manual operating mode 4-183
13.2 Positioning in controlled operation 4-183
13.3 Program example 4-183
14 Datum Correction 4-194
15 Tool Changer 4-196

15.1 Tool table 4-196
15.1.1 Special Tools 4-197
15.2 Controlling the tool changer 4-197
15.2.1 Output of tool number (Fixed pocket coding) 4-199
15.2.2 Output of pocket number (Variable pocket coding) 4-199
15.3 PLC program example 4-215
15.3.1 Program module TOOL DEF 4-217
15.3.2 Program module TOOL CALL 4-218
15.3.3 Program module STANDBY 4-219
15.3.4 Program module STANDBY BACK 4-219
15.3.5 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN 4-220
15.3.6 Program module MANUAL TOOL OUT 4-221
15.3.7 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN/OUT 4-222
15.3.8 Program module CHANGE 4-223
15.3.9 Program module COMPARE P-CODE WITH ISTREG 4-224
15.3.10 Program module COMPARE GRE1 WITH ISTREG 4-224
15.3.11 Program module COMPUTE SHORTEST PATH 4-226
16 Commissioning and Start-up Procedure 4-227

16.1 Code numbers for commissioning 4-227
16.2 Preparation of the machine 4-227
16.3 Commissioning the control 4-231
16.3.1 Entry of the provisional and pre-defined machine parameters 4-231
16.3.2 Entry of the PLC-program 4-231
16.3.3 Testing the EMERGENCY STOP routine 4-231
16.3.4 Testing the direction of traverse 4-232
16.3.5 Fixing the software limit switch ranges 4-233
16.3.6 Optimizing the control with lag (MP1390 = 1) 4-233
16.3.7 Optimizing the control with feed forward control (MP1390 = 0) 4-237
16.3.8 Optimizing the integral factor 4-242
16.3.9 Adjust the offset 4-243
16.3.10 Adjustment of the monitoring functions 4-243
17 Point-to-Point and Straight-Cut Control 4-246

1 Machine Axes
The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls TNC 360/TNC 335 permit the control of up to four machine
axes and the spindle (see also section "Servo positioning").
The machine parameter MP10 can be set to determine which axes should be operational on the
machine. If necessary, MP10 can be used to select all the axes functions (control, display, pass over
reference marks etc.).
MP10 Active axes

Input range: 1 to 15
Bit 0 X axis +0 = not active

+1 = active
Bit 1 Y axis +0 = not active
+2 = active
Bit 2 Z axis +0 = not active
+4 = active
Bit 3 4th axis +0 = not active
+8 = active
1.1 Encoders
Incremental measuring systems can be attached to the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls.

See also chapter "Mounting and electrical installation ."
1.1.1 Signal period

1 °
The signal period of the attached measuring system in µm or is entered in the machine
1000
parameter MP330.x .
Linear measurement
For linear measurement systems with sinusoidal output signals the signal period is the same as
the graduation period:
Signal period (~) = grating period
The standard linear encoders from HEIDENHAIN have a graduation period of 20 µm

(LS models; except for LS 101 and LS 405: 10 µm) and 100 µm (LB model). If linear measurement is
performed by rotary encoder and ballscrew, the line count of the rotary encoder (see encoder
technical data) as well as the ballscrew pitch must be considered when calculating the signal period:
ballscrew pitch [mm] · 1000 [µm/mm]
Signal period (~) =
line count
Up to 3 decimal places can be entered in MP330.x. If traverse is 60 m/min, the signal period must
not be less than 20 µm, because then the frequency would fall below the lower limit of 300 kHz.

In addition to the signal period, MP 310 can also set a signal subdivision that can be 1-, 2-, 4-, or 256-
fold and should be entered so that in combination with the signal period (MP 330) a display step of 1
µm is achieved. For example, a 4 µm signal period and 4-fold subdivision yields a display step of 1
µm, a 20 µm signal period and 4-fold subdivision results in a display step of 5 µm. In order to attain a
1 µm display step from a 20 µm signal period, you must enter a subdivision factor of 256. The
control internally rounds the result of the division 20 µm/256 up to 1 µm.
The signal at the square-wave input (Spindle input X6) undergoes a control-internal 4-fold evaluation.
Machine parameter MP 340 was introduced to permit including an external signal interpolation via
EXE, or IBV. This information is needed in order to determine the absolute position with scales
featuring distance-coded reference marks. In machine parameter MP340 must defined whether the
ballscrew encoder has 2048 or 4096 lines.
Angular measurement: The signal period for angular measuring system is calculated as follows:
Signal period (~) = line360°

count
· 1000
MP310 Signal subdivision

Entry: 0 to 3
0 = 256-fold
1 = 4-fold
2 = 2-fold
3 = 1-fold
MP 310.0 Signal subdivision axis X

MP 310.1 Signal subdivision axis Y
MP 310.2 Signal subdivision axis Z
MP 310.3 Signal subdivision 4th axis
If the angular measurement is made by gearing up or down this must be taken into account when
calculating the signal period.
MP330 Signal period
Entry: 0.100 to 999.999 [µm] or [ 1000

1°
]
MP330.0 Axis X
MP330.1 Axis Y
MP330.2 Axis Z
MP330.3 4th axis
MP340 Interpolation factor of the EXE at X6

Entry: 0 to 5
0 = No measuring system on X6
1 = EXE without interpolation
2 = Spindle encoder with 2048 lines
5 = EXE with 5-fold interpolation

1.1.2 Direction of traverse
The machine parameters MP210 and MP1040 determine the direction of traverse for the axes. The
direction of traverse for the axes of numerically controlled machine tools are defined by DIN (see
also sections "Axis designation" and "Commissioning and start-up procedure").
MP210 defines the counting direction for the measuring system signals. The counting direction
depends on the mounting orientation of the measuring systems.
MP210 Counting direction of the measuring system signals

Bit 0 X axis +0 = positive

+1 = negative
Bit 1 Y axis +0 = positive
+2 = negative
Bit 2 Z axis +0 = positive
+4 = negative
Bit 3 4th axis +0 = positive
+8 = negative
Machine parameter MP1040 determines the polarity of the nominal value voltage during the positive
direction of traverse.
MP1040 Polarity of the nominal value voltage for the positive direction of traverse
+1 = negative
+2 = negative
+4 = negative
+8 = negative
The NC uses markers to tell the PLC in which direction the axes are to travel.
0 = positive
1 = negative
Marker Function Set Reset
M2160 Traverse direction X axis NC NC

M2161 Traverse direction Y axis
M2162 Traverse direction Z axis
M2163 Traverse direction 4th axis

1.1.3 Encoder monitoring
HEIDENHAIN contouring controls can monitor the signal transmissions of the measuring system.
This measuring system monitoring must be activated by a machine parameter.
Three different conditions can be checked:
Error message
The absolute position of distance-coded reference marks C
The amplitude of the measuring system signals A
The edge separation of the measuring system signals B
If one of the conditions is not fulfilled, it results in the error message:
"Measuring system <axis> defect A/B/C."
For sinusoidal signals the LE monitors the amplitude of the measuring system signals, for square-
wave signals the LE evaluates the fault detection signal (UaS) of the external electronics (EXE or
IBV).
MP30 Checking the absolute position of the distance-coded reference marks


+1 = active
+2 = active
+4 = active
+8 = active
MP31 Checking the amplitude of the measuring system signals


+1 = active
+2 = active
+4 = active
+8 = active
Bit 4 Axis S +0 = not active
+16 = active

MP32 Checking the edge separation of the measuring system signals

+1 = active
+2 = active
+4 = active
+8 = active
Bit 4 Axis S +0 = not active
+16 = active

✎

1.2 Axis designation
The coordinate axes and their directions of travel are standardized in ISO 841.
The directions of traverse may be simply determined by using the "right-hand rule."
+Z
+Y
+X
In the direction of the spindle axis the convention is:

The movement of the tool towards the workpiece is the negative direction of traverse. When
creating an NC program one proceeds as if the tool is moving and the workpiece is always
stationary.
If the machine moves the workpiece, then the direction of movement and the direction of the axis
are opposite to one another. The positive relative directions of movement are then designated +X',
+Y' etc.
+X
+X´
The fourth axis can be used either as an axis of rotation or alternatively as an extra linear axis.
While the three principal axes have the standard designations X, Y and Z, the designations of the
fourth axis can be selected by a machine parameter.
A rotational axis is designated by the letter A, B or C. The correlation with the principle axes and
determination of the direction of rotation is standardized in ISO 841.
+Z
+Y
+C
+B
+X
+A

A secondary linear axis is designated by the letter U, V or W. The correlation with the principle
axes and the direction of travel are also standardized in ISO 841.
+Z
+W +Y
+V
+X
+U
MP410.3 Axis designation for 4th axis

Entry: 0 to 5
0=A
1=B
2=C
3=U
4=V
5=W
1.2.1 Assignment
The measuring system inputs X1 to X4 and X6 and the analog outputs, Output 1 to Output S (on the
connector X8) can be assigned to the individual axes. The assignment is determined by the machine
parameters MP110 and MP120.
The assignment of measuring system input X6 and the nominal value output S to one of the four
axes is only possible when the Spindle Orientation function is not utilized.
MP110 Assignment of the measuring system inputs to the axes
Entry: 0 = measuring system input X1

1 = measuring system input X2
MP110.0 X axis
MP110.1 Y axis
MP110.2 Z axis
MP110.3 4th axis

MP120 Assignment of the analog outputs
Entry: 0 = output 1
1 = output 2
2 = output 3
3 = output 4
5 = output S
MP120.0 X axis
MP120.1 Y axis
MP120.2 Z axis
MP120.3 4th axis
1.2.2 Current tool axis

In the NC block "TOOL CALL" it is determined whether the tool moves parallel to one of the principle
axes X, Y, Z or parallel to the fourth axis. The markers M2100 to M2103 are used to show which of
the four axes is currently defined as the tool axis. The appropriate marker is then set.
M2100 X axis is tool axis NC NC

M2101 Y axis is tool axis
M2102 Z axis is tool axis
M2103 4th axis is tool axis
1.3 VDU display

Machine parameters can be used to select which of the active axes (MP10) should be displayed in
the status window.
The display of the spindle position cannot be activated by MP40. The spindle position is displayed in
the status window when the spindle control loop is closed (see section "Spindle").
MP40 VDU display


+1 = active
+2 = active
+4 = active
+8 = active

✎

1.4 Traverse ranges
For all four axes, three different software traverse ranges can be defined by machine parameters
(e.g. for pendulum machining). The traverse ranges are defined by so-called software limit switches.
The input values for the software limit switches are referenced to the machine datum. The
momentary software limit switch range is selected by the markers (M2817, M2816) and activated
by the strobe marker M2824.
The MOD function "Axis limit" can be used to enter an additional limitation for each traverse range.
In the setting for one traverse range, the software limit switches that are entered via MOD function
as well as the datum are effective for all traverse ranges that are selected through the PLC.
Traverse ranges 1 to 3:
Entry:
Linear axis: – 30 000.000 to + 30 000.000 [mm]
Rotary axis: – 30 000.000 to + 30 000.000 [°]
(Values referenced to the machine datum)
MP910 Traverse range 1: Maximum value

Default values after power-on;
MP920 Traverse range 1: Minimum value

Activated via PLC M2817 = 0, M2816 = 0
MP910.0 Software limit switch X+

MP910.1 Software limit switch Y+
MP910.2 Software limit switch Z+
MP910.3 Software limit switch 4+
MP920.0 Software limit switch X–

MP920.1 Software limit switch Y–
MP920.2 Software limit switch Z–
MP920.3 Software limit switch 4–

Default values after power-on;

Activated by PLC M2817 = 0, M2816 = 1




Activated by PLC: M2817 = 1, M2816 = 0


The markers M2816 and M2817 are used to define the traverse range.
M2816 M2817 Traverse range

0 0 Range 1 (MP910.x; MP920.x)
1 0 Range 2 (MP911.x; MP921.x)
0 1 Range 3 (MP912.x; MP922.x)
The change-over to the selected traverse range must be activated by the strobe marker M2824 by
the PLC. This strobe marker is reset by the NC after the change-over has been carried out.
In the "Manual" and "Electronic handwheel" modes of operation this is done immediately, in all other
modes of operation it is usually done with the next M/S/T strobe. The range must be switched
during an M/S/T strobes.
Example:
M2045
M2482
M2824
In the Manual and Electronic Handwheel modes, the range can be switched immediately.
Set Reset
M2824 Activation of the selected traverse range PLC NC

(M2816/M2817)
If one of the software limit switches is reached, the error message "LIMIT SWITCH ..." appears and
the appropriate marker (M2624 to M2631) is set.

Set Reset
M2624 Limit switch X+ NC NC

M2625 Limit switch X–
M2626 Limit switch Y+
M2627 Limit switch Y–
M2628 Limit switch Z+
M2629 Limit switch Z–
M2630 Limit switch 4+
M2631 Limit switch 4–
Example:
PLC program example of changing the traverse ranges. The PLC input I10 is used as a condition for
change.
I10 = 0 Traverse range 1

I10 = 1 Traverse range 2
.
127 LN I10 ;Traverse range 1
128 AN M555 ;Already done?
129 R M2816 ;Select traverse range 1
130 R M2817 ;Select traverse range 1
131 S M2824 ;Activate change
132 S M555 ;Edge recognition traverse range1
133 R M556 ;Reset edge recognition traverse range2
134 L I10 ;Traverse range2
135 AN M556 ;already done?
136 S M2816 ;Select traverse range2
137 R M2817 ;Select traverse range2
138 S M2824 ;Activate change
139 S M556 ;Edge recognition traverse range2
140 R M555 ;Reset edge recognition traverse range1
.
I10
M2816
M2817
M2824
M555
M556

1.5 Lubrication pulse
The PLC can control the lubrication of the guideway according to the distance traveled on each axis.
In machine parameter MP4060.x the distance after which lubrication should be performed is
registered for each axis. The entry is in units of 65 536 µm.
Example:
Desired traversing distance: 100 m
Value entered = 10065000 000 µm

536 µm = 1 526
If the stored path limit for an axis is exceeded, the NC sets a marker (M2012 to M2015) to "1."
After carrying out the lubrication the PLC must reset the accumulated traverse distance (M2548 to
M2551).
MP4060 Path-dependent lubrication
Input range: 0 to 65 535 (in units of 65 536 µm)
MP4060.0 X axis
MP4060.1 Y axis
MP4060.2 Z axis
MP4060.3 4th axis
Set Reset
M2012 Lubrication pulse X axis, since value of MP4060.0 NC NC

was exceeded
M2013 Lubrication pulse Y axis, since value of MP4060.1
was exceeded
M2014 Lubrication pulse Z axis, since value of MP4060.2
was exceeded
M2015 Lubrication pulse 4th axis, since value of MP4060.3
was exceeded
M2548 Reset of accumulated distance for PLC PLC

lubrication X axis
M2549 Reset of accumulated distance for
lubrication Y axis
lubrication Z axis
lubrication 4th axis

Example:
PLC program example of activating the lubrication for the X axis.
In the machine parameter MP4060.0 the traverse distance after which the X axis should be
lubricated is entered. The duration of the lubrication is defined by the timer T0 (MP4110.0).
The PLC output O24 is to be set for the duration of the X-axis lubrication. In our example the
lubrication is activated as soon as the marker M2012 is set. If , for some reason, the lubrication
should only be activated when the axis is at rest, then this must be taken into account in the PLC
program.
MP4060.0 = 1 000 (approx. 65 m)

MP4110.0 = 100 (approx. 2 sec.).
.
.
45 L M2012 ;Lubrication pulse X axis

46 = T0 ;Start timer for duration of lubrication
47 = M2548 ;Reset accumulated distance
48 L T48 ;Duration of lubrication for X axis
49 = O24 ;Set output for lubrication
.
.
.
M2012
M2548
T0
T48
024

✎

1.6 Axis-error compensation
A HEIDENHAIN contouring control can compensate for mechanical defects in the machine. The
following axis-error compensation is possible:
– backlash compensation,
– compensation of reversal errors in circular motion,
– linear axis-error compensation,
– nonlinear axis-error compensation,
– compensation of thermal expansion.
Either the linear or the nonlinear axis-error compensation can be activated. The other types of
compensation can always be activated in parallel.
1.6.1 Backlash compensation

When using linear measurement by ballscrew and rotary encoder, a small amount of play can occur
between the movement of the table and that of the rotary encoder.
Depending on the design, the movement of the rotary encoder may be advanced or retarded relative
to the table. The professional jargon describes this as positive or negative backlash.
Positive backlash: rotary encoder advanced relative to the table (traverse movement of the table is
too short).
Negative backlash: rotary encoder retarded relative to the table (traverse movement of the table is
too long).
For every change in direction of traverse, the TNC adds the value from machine parameter MP710
to value from the encoder signals.
MP710 Backlash compensation

Input range: – 1.000 to + 1.000 [mm] or [°]
MP710.0 X axis
MP710.1 Y axis
MP710.2 Z axis
MP710.3 4th axis

1.6.2 Compensation for reversal errors in circular motion
The stiction in the axis bearings can lead to reversal errors at the quadrant transitions during circular
movements.
Commercially available devices such as the HEIDENHAIN Double Ball Bar system (DBB) can
diagnose these errors and determine the size and duration of their peaks.
µm
12
9
6
MP711
3
0
3 Spitzenweite
6 Peak width
9
12
91° 92° 93° 94° 95° 96° 97° 98° 99°
The TNC can then compensate for these errors. The size of the reversal error which is to be
compensated is entered in machine parameter MP711, and the portion of the peaks to be
compensated per closed loop cycle time is entered in MP712.
The diagram from the DBB system shows the size and duration of a reversal peak.
The input value for MP712 can be calculated as follows:
– Duration of the reversal peak

Peak width [° ] ⋅ 2π ⋅ Radius [mm] ⋅ 60 s / min
tPr [s] =
360 [° ] ⋅ Feed rate [mm / min]
the peak width is [°] indicated in the diagram;
feed rate [mm/min] is the programmed contouring feed rate.
– Compensation per control loop cycle time (6 ms with TNC 360)

Reversal peaks [mm] ⋅ Control loop cycle time [s]
Compensation [mm] =
0.5 ⋅ tPr [s] ⋅ 103
The compensation value is entered in MP712.
MP711 Size of the reversal peaks in circular motion

Input range: –1.000 to +1.000 [mm]
MP711.0 X axis
MP711.1 Y axis
MP711.2 Z axis
MP711.3 4th axis

MP712 Compensation value per control loop cycle time
Input value 0.000 to 1.000 [mm]
MP712.0 X axis
MP712.1 Y axis
MP712.2 Z axis
MP712.3 4th axis
1.6.3 Linear axis-error compensation

One linear axis-error can be compensated per linear axis (not rotary axes A, B or C). The axis-error is
entered, with the correct sign, in machine parameter MP720. The error is positive if the table travel
is too long, and negative if the travel is too short.
Error
[mm]
0.02
0.01
0
-0.01 Ref. mark 500 1000 Measuring system
[mm]
-0.02
MP720 Linear axis-error compensation

Input range: – 1.000 to + 1.000 [mm/m]
MP720.0 X axis
MP720.1 Y axis
MP720.2 Z axis
MP720.3 4th axis

1.6.4 Nonlinear axis error compensation
Depending on the design of the machine or external factors (e.g. temperature) a nonlinear axis-error
can occur.
Such an axis-error is usually determined by a comparator measuring instrument (e.g. HEIDENHAIN

VM 101A).
For example, the leadscrew pitch error for the Z axis (Z=F(Z)) or the sag as a function of the Y axis
(Z=F(Y)) could be determined.
In the HEIDENHAIN contouring control an axis can only be corrected as a function of one error-
related axis. So in our example either the leadscrew pitch or the sag can be compensated. For each
of the four axes one table of corrections with 64 correction values per table can be entered. The
following definitions must be fixed for this purpose:
Correlation: Correction as a function of which axis?

(X=F(X); X=F(Y) etc.)
Datum point: Distance to the machine datum
The error curve must always start with
correction value = 0 at the datum point.
Distance: Distance between the correction points (grid).
entry of the exponent to base 2
(e.g. entry 11 = 211 = 2,048 mm).
max. input value = 223
When determining the error curve with the aid of a comparator measuring instrument the above
definitions must be already taken into account, whereby it is important to note that the error curve is
continued in positive direction starting at the datum.

Example: Y = F(Z)
Measurement length on Z axis = 1 000 mm
Desired distance between correction points = 1 000 mm : 64 = 15.62 mm
Possible exponent (base 2) = 214 = 16.384 mm

Datum point: - 990
Error in Y
[mm]
0.1
0.08
Datum
0.06
Machine
0.04
datum Z
–976.8928 –950.6784 –924.464 –898.2496
0.02 0 [mm]
–990 –963.7856 –937.5712 –911.3568
–46.2816 –20.0672 +6.1472

-0.02
–33.1744 –6.96 +19.2544
-0.04
-0.06
-0.08
-0.1
-0.12
The errors which have thus been determined can be entered in the form of a table directly into the
HEIDENHAIN contouring control. However, the axis-error compensation is only effective when it is
enabled for a specific axis by the machine parameter MP730.
Before entering the correction table the code number 105 296 must be entered. After the code
number has been entered the control will initially show the correction table for the X axis:
X = F(X)
DATUM POINT +0
SETUP 1
0 X+0 X+0
1 X+0.001 X+0
2 X+0.002 X+0
.
.
.

The orange axis keys can be used to select a different fault-related axis for the X axis. After pressing
the GOTO key, the axis keys can be used to select a correction table for one of the other axes. The
correction value which is entered must not exceed the maximum correction-value difference. The
correction-value difference is calculated as follows:
Max. correction-value difference = distance between correction

64
points [mm]
In our example, the result is
16.384 mm
= 0.256 mm
64
Only the compensation points of the error curve should be entered. The control will automatically
make a linear interpolation between the compensation points. In the example above the correction
table is thus:
Y = F(Z)
DATUM POINT –990
SETUP 14
0 Z–990 Y+0
1 Z–973.616 Y–0.06
2 Z–957.232 Y–0.09
3 Z–940.848
4 Z–924.464
5 Z–908.08 Y–0.12
6 Z–891.696 Y–0.12
7 Z–875.312 Y–0.1
8 Z–858.928 Y–0.09
.
.
.
No entry is necessary in lines 3 and 4 (press the NO ENT key), because there is no visible kink. The
individual lines of the correction table are selected either by the arrow keys or with the GOTO key.
Press the END key to leave the correction table.
Special case: Axis of rotation
In a correction table for a rotary axis, the entered distance between correction points must be large
enough that the 64 correction points will cover a complete revolution of 360°. An angular separation
of at least 5.625° (216) is therefore necessary. For an axis of rotation, correction values will only be
recognized for entries from 0 to 360°.
Input and output of the correction table via the data interface
After entering the code number 105296 the correction table can be entered or read out via the data
interface.
As usual, the data transfer is initiated with the EXT key. The correction table receives the file name
extension ".S".

MP730 Nonlinear axis-error compensation
Bit 0 X axis + 0 = not active

+ 1 = active
Bit 1 Y axis + 0 = not active
+ 2 = active
Bit 2 Z axis + 0 = not active
+ 4 = active
Bit 3 4th axis + 0 = not active
+ 8 = active

✎

1.6.5 Temperature compensation
Exact measurements of machine thermal behavior (center of expansion in the axes, amount of
expansion as a function of temperature) are necessary to compensate the effects of thermal
expansion!
The words W576 to W582 were introduced for thermal expansion compensation As soon as these
words receive a value, the "follow-up tracking" becomes active.
"Follow-up tracking" means that the actual position value changes 1 µm/sec until it has changed by
the full value from the words W576 to W582. This does not change the value in the actual position
display.
The actual thermal expansion can be measured, for example, with a TESTOTERM unit. The values
are transmitted to the PLC through the PLC inputs, further processed in the PLC program and finally
transmitted to the words W576 to W582. The actual value display does not change.
Input range: +32 767 to –32 768 [µm]

W576 Follow-up axis error compensation axis X
W578 Follow-up axis error compensation axis Y
W580 Follow-up axis error compensation axis Z
W582 Follow-up axis error compensation 4th axis
Example: Temperature compensation in the Z axis.
Program description
The 13 TESTOTERM-BCD outputs are transmitted at the TNC control through the PLC inputs I128
to I140 and converted to a binary data format. Then the binary value is multiplied by a correction
factor (linear thermal behavior) and sent to the Z axis. The correction factor is located in MP4210.44.
Main program
L M0
ON M0
S M1 M1 is always set
LW I 128 Read in from TESTOTERM outputs
LW M1180 Instead of inputs, non-volatile markers

A K+8191 Reset bits 13, 14 and 15
W= M1200 Intermediate register TESTOTERM BCD
A K +3840 Reset 1st, 2nd and 4th decade

>> K +8
X K +100 Multiply 3rd decade by 100
= W 252 Intermediate register TESTOTERM binary

LW M 1200 Intermediate register TESTOTERM BCD
A K +240 Block out 1st, 3rd and 4th decade
>> K +4
X K +10 Multiply 2nd decade by 10
+ W252 Intermediate register TESTOTERM binary
= W252 Intermediate register TESTOTERM binary
LW M 1200 Intermediate register TESTOTERM binary

A K + 15 Block out 2nd, 3rd and 4th decade
+ W252 Intermediate register TESTOTERM binary
= W 248 Final register TESTOTERM binary
W= M1220 Control register
LW M1200 Intermediate register TESTOTERM BCD

BT K+12 4th decade sign bit
CMT 133 Module change sign
L W 946 Correction factor MP 4210.44 least significant word

X W 248 Final register TESTOTERM binary
= W580 Z axis datum shift
.
.
EM
Subprogram
LBL 133
L- W248 Final register TESTOTERM binary
= W248 Final register TESTOTERM binary
W= M1220 Control register
EM

✎

1.7 PLC positioning
The four axes of the control can also be positioned by the PLC. The spindle, too, can be positioned
with the aid of the PLC (see section "Spindle"). The positions of the individual axes must be stored as
Doublewords (D528 to D540) before activating the positioning (M2704 to M2707).
The feed for positioning the individual axes is stored in W560 to W566.
The transfer of the positions and of the feed to the PLC is carried out, for example, by
machine parameters (MP4210.X, MP4220.X). All four axes can be traversed simultaneously
[simultaneous activation of all the strobe markers (M2704 to M2706)]. The PLC positioning can be
interrupted by resetting the strobe marker (M2704 to M2706).
The NC resets the strobe marker (M2704 to 2707) when:

− the axes have reached the given position
− NC STOP occurs in the Manual or Handwheel operating mode
− NC STOP and "internal stop" occur in the automatic operating modes
− an EMERGENCY STOP occurs
− an error message occurs that results in a stop
The strobe markers M2704 to M2707 may be set only if an M/S/T strobe is present. The M/S/T
acknowledgment must not occur until the PLC positioning has been completed, i.e. markers M2704
to M2707 have been reset.
Example:
M2045
M2482
M2704
In the Manual mode of operation the strobe markers M2704 to M2707 cannot be set if an axis
direction key is depressed.
The Doublewords D528 to D540 have a multiple usage. They have the following meaning for the
PLC positioning:
Address Function
D528 Position X axis [1/ 1000 mm]

D532 Position Y axis
D536 Position Z axis
D540 Position 4th axis
Feed rate for PLC positioning
W560 Feed rate X axis [mm/min]

W562 Feed rate Y axis
W564 Feed rate Z axis
W566 Feed rate 4th axis

Set Reset
M2704 Activate PLC positioning X axis PLC NC; PLC

M2705 Activate PLC positioning Y axis
M2706 Activate PLC positioning Z axis
M2707 Activate PLC positioning 4th axis
– The positions which are given are referenced to the machine datum (MP960.x).
– Software limit switches are not considered.
– Tool corrections are not calculated.
– The path compensation must be terminated before a PLC positioning.
– PLC positioning is not displayed in the test graphics.

Example: PLC positioning of the Z axis
A PLC positioning in the Z axis is to be initiated with the M function M70. The target position is
stored in the machine parameter MP4210.2. The feed for the PLC positioning is defined in machine
parameter MP4220.2
.
.
.
67 L M0
68 ON M0
69 S M2496 ;Decoded M code output (M1900 to M1999)
70 S M2719 ;Word processing (incompatible with TNC 155/355)
71 L M1970 ;M function M70?
72 A M2045 ;Change signal M function?
73 AN M4 ;Edge marker
74 CMT 110 ;Load position and feed
75 S M2706 ;Activate PLC positioning Z axis
76 S M4 ;Edge marker
77 L M1970 ;M function M70?
78 A M2045 ;Change signal M function?
79 AN M2706 ;PLC positioning Z axis done
80 S M2482 ;Acknowledgment M function done
81 LN M2045 ;No M function?
82 R M2482 ;Acknowledgment reset
83 R M4 ;Edge marker reset
.
.
.
1210 EM ;Main program end
1211 LBL 110 ;Load Z position and feed rate
1212 L D776 ;Load target position from MP4210.2
1213 = D536 ;Target position PLC positioning Z axis
1214 L W964 ;Load feed from MP4220.2
1215 = W564;Feed PLC positioning Z axis
1216 EM
M1970
M2045
M4
M2706
M2482

1.8 PLC Axes
The controlled axes can also be assigned individually to the PLC. On a machine with three NC axes,
for example, the 4th axis could be used independently from the three NC axes to position the
toolchanger. Machine parameter MP60 defines which axis is to be controlled by the PLC.
The positioning of the PLC axes is commanded through a special module in the PLC program:
Module 9120: Starts the positioning of a PLC axis
Module 9121: Stops the positioning of a PLC axis
Module 9122: Polls the status of a PLC axis
Module 9123: Traverses the reference marks in a PLC axis
For a description of each module, see the chapter "PLC Programming."
If a PLC axis has been edited in the NC program, the error message "WRONG AXIS
PROGRAMMED" appears during program run. PLC axes can be moved with the machine axis
direction keys. PLC axes always move in servo-lag mode. Several PLC axes can be started at once.
These axes cannot, however, be interpolated with each other. In MP810 a modulo value can be
entered for the counting mode of the axes. An input value of 0 means that the display value is not
reduced.
MP60 PLC auxiliary axes

Input: 0 to 15
Bit 0 Axis X +0 = normal axis

+1 = PLC axis
Bit 1 Axis Y +0 = normal axis
+2 = PLC axis
Bit 2 Axis Z +0 = normal axis
+4 = PLC axis
Bit 3 4th axis +0 = normal axis
+8 = PLC axis
MP810 Modulo value for reducing the position display values

Input: 0 to 99 999.999 [mm]
MP810.0 Axis X
MP810.1 Axis Y
MP810.2 Axis Z
MP810.3 4th axis

2 Reference Marks
By setting a datum point, a definite positional value (coordinate) is assigned to each axis position for
the machining of the workpiece. Since the actual-position value is established incrementally by the
encoder, this defined assignment of values to positions must be re-established after every power
interruption.
The HEIDENHAIN linear encoders are therefore equipped with one or several reference marks.
When a reference mark is traversed, it generates a signal that identifies the particular position as a
reference point. By traversing the reference marks after a power interruption, the assignment of
positional values to axis positions (and, at the same time, the fixed machine references) that were
most recently determined by datum point setting are re-established.
+Z REF Value REF Value

– 44,985 0
Workpiece
datum 10 20 30 40
0 +X
Workpiece
Machine table
Measuring system
Reference mark = Machine datum
Since it is inconvenient to restore the reference points if large traverses are required to do so,
HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of encoders with distance-coded reference marks. On these
measuring systems the absolute position value is available after crossing two reference marks.
Scale with distance-coded reference marks
The graduation consists of an incremental grating and a parallel track for the reference marks. The
absolute position of each reference mark is encoded by varying the distance between adjacent
reference marks according to a mathematical algorithm.
Scale with one reference mark
Scale with distance-coded reference marks
4-36 TNC 360 2 Reference Marks 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 2 Reference Marks 4-37

2.1 Passing over the reference marks
The reference marks for axes must be traversed after switching on the control. This can be
achieved by
– pressing the external START key. The axis sequence is determined by machine parameter
MP1340.x (automatic passing of the reference marks),
– pressing the external axis direction keys. The sequence is determined by the operator.
Only after passing over the reference mark is...
– the software limit switch activated,

– the most recently set datum point reproduced,
– PLC positioning and positioning with the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92 possible,
– the counter value set to zero for non-controlled axes.
For distance-coded measuring systems the machine datum is the Zero Reference mark. In linear
measurement systems the Zero Reference mark is the first reference mark after the start of the
measuring length; in angular measurement systems the Zero Reference mark is marked.
The direction of traverse and the velocity on passing the reference marks is defined by machine
parameters (MP1320, MP1330.x).
The functional sequence for passing the reference marks can be fixed specifically for each axis by
machine parameters (MP1350.x).
The operating condition "PASS OVER REFERENCE MARKS" is sent to the PLC by the NC (W272).
In order to avoid exceeding the traverse range when passing over the reference marks a trip dog
(reference end position) is necessary. This trip dog must be fixed at the end of the traverse range by
the manufacturer of the machine. The trigger signal from the trip dog is connected to an available
PLC input. In the PLC program this PLC input is combined with the markers for "Reference end
position" (M2556 to M2559).

2.1.1 Measuring systems with distance-coded reference marks
Machine parameter MP1350.x=3
Reference marks
Trip dog
Closed "Reference end
Open position"
Traverse direction MP1320

Sequence "Automatic passing over reference marks" (press the external START key).
MP1350.x = 3
Press the external START key
Trip dog
No "Reference end Yes
position"
closed?
Machine traverse
in direction from
MP1320
Machine traverses in
inverted direction from
Trip dog MP1320
"Reference end position" is Yes
closed before consecutive
reference marks are
passed over
No
Two consecutive reference marks are passed over
Is the machine Yes

outside the software
limit switch range?
Machine moves to
No software limit switch
Machine stops

Reference marks
Trip dog
Closed "Reference end position"
Open
Traverse direction MP1320.x

MP1350.x = 0
Press external START key
No Trip dog Yes

"Reference end position"
closed?
Traverse direction from Invert traverse direction

MP1320.x from MP1320.x
Pass over two consecutive

reference marks
Is the machine
Yes
limit switch range?
Machine moves to
No software limit switch range
Machine stops
If during automatic pass-over the trip dog is not closed until it is in the "Reference end position"
range, the contouring control will ignore the signal. It is therefore necessary that there be at least
two reference marks in the range of the "Reference end position."

2.1.2 Measuring systems with one reference mark
Reference marks
Closed Trip dog

Open "Reference end position"

No Trip dog Yes

closed?
Machine traverse
in direction from
MP1320.x
Machine traverses in
inverted direction from
Trip dog MP1320.x
"Reference end position" is Yes
closed before reference mark
is passed over
No
Reference mark is passed over
Is the machine Yes

limit switch range?
Machine moves to
Machine stops

✎

2.1.3 Linear measurement via rotary encoder
Machine parameter MP1350.x = 2
For linear measurement using a rotary encoder a reference pulse is produced on each revolution of
the encoder. It must be ensured that, after switching on the machine, always the same reference
pulse is evaluated. This can also be achieved by using the trip dog "Reference end position."
Measuring length
Reference pulse
Desired reference pulse
Closed Trip dog

Open

Sequence "Automatic passing over reference marks" (Press the external START key).
No Trip dog Yes

closed?
Machine traverse in direction from

MP1320.x with velocity from
MP1330.x to the trip dog
"Reference end positon"
Machine traverse in inverted direction

from MP1320.x and with reduced velocity from MP1331.x
The first reference pulse after opening of the trip dog

"Reference end position" is evaluated
Is the
machine outside Yes
the software limit
switch range?
Machine moves to
Machine stops

MP1320 Direction for traversing the reference marks
Bit 0 X axis: + 0 = positive

+ 1 = negative
Bit 1 Y axis: + 0 = positive
+ 2 = negative
Bit 2 Z axis: + 0 = positive
+ 4 = negative
Bit 3 4th axis: + 0 = positive
+ 8 = negative
MP1330 Feed rate for traversing the reference marks

Input range: 80 to 30 000 [mm/min]
MP1330.0 X axis
MP1330.1 Y axis
MP1330.2 Z axis
MP1330.3 4th axis
MP1331 Feed rate for leaving the reference end position

(only for rotary encoders MP1350=2)
Input range: 80 to 500 [mm/min]
MP1331.0 X axis
MP1331.1 Y axis
MP1331.2 Z axis
MP1331.3 4th axis
MP1340 Sequence for traversing reference marks

Entry: 0 = no evaluation of the reference mark
1 = X axis
2 = Y axis
3 = Z axis
4 = 4th axis
MP1340.0 1st axis

MP1340.1 2nd axis
MP1340.2 3rd axis
MP1340.3 4th axis

MP1350 Type of reference mark approach
Entry: 0 = measuring system with distance-coded reference marks

1 = measuring system with one reference mark
2 = special sequence (linear measurement via rotary encoder)
MP1350.0 X axis
MP1550.1 Y axis
MP1350.2 Z axis
MP1350.3 4th axis
M2556 Reference end position for X axis PLC PLC

M2557 Reference end position for Y axis
M2558 Reference end position for Z axis
M2559 Reference end position for 4th axis
Address Function Set Reset
W272 Operating mode NC NC

0 = Programming and editing
1 = Manual operation
2 = Electronic handwheel
3 = Positioning with manual entry
4 = Program run, single block
5 = Program run, full sequence
6 = Test run
7 = Pass over reference points
2.2 Machine datum

The reference mark defines a point on the measuring system. The reference points of all axes define
the scale datum. All REF-based displays and positioning movements refer to the machine datum
(see also section "Display and operation").

✎

3 Servo Positioning of the NC Axes
This section describes all the control functions which are important for the control and monitoring of
the NC axes.
Further parameters for the NC axes can be found under "Machine axes."
The control of the spindle (S axis) is described in section "Spindle."
3.1 The position control loop of an NC machine

In CNC machines the servo control is normally implemented as a cascade control (see following
block diagram).
The motor speed control and the current control (both in the drive amplifier) are integrated into the
servo position control (CNC control). The servo controlled system consists of the motor and machine
slide.
CNC Control Servo amplifier Machine
Linear/
Nom. Servo Position Nom. Speed Nom. Current
Drive Tacho angle
pos. lag controller rpm controller cur. regulator
encoder
position
position
current
Actual
Actual
Actual
Actual
Actual
rpm
rpm
Block diagram of the position control loop, here as a cascade control
8/95 TNC 360 3 Servo Positioning of the NC Axes 4-51

3.2 Servo positioning in TNC controls
Two control methods are possible with the control. They can be used alternatively.
1. control with lag (section 3.2.1)

2. control with feed forward (section 3.2.2)
The choice of control method is determined by machine parameter MP1390.
The machine adjustment must always be carried out for both methods of control.
MP1390 Control with lag or feed forward control

Input value: 0 or 1,
1 = operation with lag,
0 = operation with feed forward control.
3.2.1 Control with servo lag

Servo lag refers to the difference (lag) between the nominal position which is defined by the NC and
the actual position of the axes. Control would not be possible without this lag.
In the operating modes "Manual operation" and "Electronic handwheel" the operation is always with
servo lag, regardless of machine parameter MP1390.
In the operating modes "Positioning with manual entry", "Program run, single block" and "Program
run, full sequence" machine parameter MP1390 must be appropriately entered for lag operation.
The advantage of operation with servo lag lies in the "softer" control, which is especially suitable for
machining 3D contours, since corners and radii are smoothed out, depending on the Kv factor
(position loop gain factor) and the machining feed rate.
Depending on how far these "contour errors" can be tolerated, the machine operator or manufacturer
must decide and choose either operation with servo lag or with feed forward control.
Operation with servo lag is depicted in a simplified form in the following block diagram for the X axis.
It shows a part of the cascade control mentioned previously.
All machine parameters which influence the control characteristic are shown here.
4-52 TNC 360 3 Servo Positioning of the NC Axes 8/95

kv factor: MP1810
Kinkpoint: MP1830
Multiplication factor: MP1820
Servo
➂ ➄ amplifier
XNoml+ ➃ sax Vx vx Noml+ +
ax
XS
v ·s
- -
k
sax
=
v
vx Actl
➀ ➁ ➅
X Actl
v U
a·t
s=s0+v·∆t
v=
t t
Acceleration: Integral factor

MP1060 MP1080
YS
➀ The control calculates a nominal velocity value every 6 ms from the feed programmed in the NC
program and the final position (X- , Y-, Z-, 4th axis) , allowing for the acceleration which has been
stored (MP1060). The stored acceleration is valid for the rising as well as the falling slope. If
several axes are traversed simultaneously, then the smallest value for acceleration is effective.
➁ Every 6 ms a nominal path value is calculated from the velocity nominal value.
s = so + v ·∆t s = nominal path value
so = previous nominal path value
v = nominal velocity value
∆t = cycle time 6 ms
➂ The nominal path value is resolved into the individual axis components, depending on which
axes have been programmed.
➃ The axis-dependent nominal path value is compared with the actual value of the positions and
the lag sa is calculated.
sax = xNoml - xActl sax = lag for X axis

xNoml = nominal path value for X axis
xAct l = actual path value for X axis
➄ The lag is multiplied by the kv factor MP1810 and passed on to the drive amplifier as a nominal
velocity value (analog voltage).
vx= kv · sax vx = nominal velocity value for X axis
➅ If the axes are stopped, the integral factor MP1080 is effective as well. It causes an offset
adjustment (see section "Offset adjustment").

The kv factor (position loop gain) determines the control loop response of the machine, and it must
be matched to the machine.
If a very high kv factor is chosen, the lag is very small. However, this can lead to an overshoot when
running into a new position. If the kv factor is too small the new position will be reached too slowly.
The optimal kv factor must be determined by experiment (see the section "Commissioning and start-
up procedure"). The following diagram shows the response for various kv factors.
U [V] MP1810
kv correct
kv too large
kv too small
MP1060 MP1810
t [s]
The acceleration can be programmed by the machine parameter MP1060. It determines the slope of
the ramp on the rising and falling edges.
For axes which are mutually interpolated the kv factor must be the same, in order to avoid contour
distortion!
MP1060 Acceleration
Input value 0.001 to 3.0 [m/s2]
MP1060.0 Acceleration X axis

MP1060.1 Acceleration Y axis
MP1060.2 Acceleration Z axis
MP1060.3 Acceleration 4th axis
The Kv factor MP1810 is, in general, determined by the rapid traverse (MP1010) of the machine and
the lag, using the following formula:
m/min
kv = Ve
sa kv = Position loop gain [ ]
mm
m
ve = Rapid traverse [ ]
min
sa = Servo lag [mm]
or
sa = Ve
kv [mm]

Rapid traverse
[m/min] kv = 2
10
8 kv = 1
6
kv = 0.5
4
2 4 6 8 10 12 sa [mm]
The rapid traverse value stored in machine parameter MP1010 can be reduced by the PLC.
The rapid traverse (maximum traversing speed) must be adjusted by the desired analog voltage (e.g.
9 V) on the servo amplifier (see section "Commissioning and start-up procedure"). For each axis-
specific rapid traverse there is an analog voltage which is stored in the machine parameter MP1050.
The resulting lag error sa thus depends on the analog voltage.
U[V]
10
8
kv = 1, Rapid traverse 10 m/min
6
2 4 6 8 10 12 sa [mm]
A special feed rate for manual operation (Manual feed) is stored in machine parameter MP1020. In
general, it is significantly lower than the rapid traverse. Unlike the rapid traverse, this has no effect
on the servo behavior.

MP1810 Kv factor for operation with lag
Input range 0.1 to 10 [1/min]
MP1810.0 kv factor X axis

MP1810.1 kv factor Y axis
MP1810.2 kv factor Z axis
MP1810.3 kv factor 4th axis
MP1010 Rapid traverse

Input range 80 to 300 000 [mm/min]
MP1010.0 Rapid traverse X axis

MP1010.1 Rapid traverse Y axis
MP1010.2 Rapid traverse Z axis
MP1010.3 Rapid traverse 4th axis
MP1050 Analog voltage for rapid traverse

Input range 4.5 to 9 [V]
MP1050.0 Analog voltage X axis

MP1050.1 Analog voltage Y axis
MP1050.2 Analog voltage Z axis
MP1050.3 Analog voltage 4th axis
MP1020 Manual feed

Input range 80 to 300 000 [mm/min]
MP1020.0 Manual feed X axis

MP1020.1 Manual feed Y axis
MP1020.2 Manual feed Z axis
MP1020.3 Manual feed 4th axis
Address Function
D596 Rapid traverse from PLC
Servo accuracy:
The internal servo accuracy of the control is always 1 µm. The control has, however, a display step
of 5 µm or 1 µm, selectable by machine parameter MP7290. The rounding up or down is only in the
display (see section "Display and operation").
Normally a servo accuracy of 1 µm is sufficient, i.e. the control must be able to generate at least one
voltage step per 1 µm positional deviation.

Calculation of the smallest voltage step:
The controls produce an analog voltage 0 to 10 V.

In the TNC 360 the 10 V analog potential is produced by a 14 Bit A/D converter, giving 16 384
divisions. The resulting smallest potential step is 0.6 mV.
Potential steps per µm positional deviation:

As described above, moving with the rapid traverse (MP1010) results in a certain lag distance s a.
The rapid traverse rate is reached at a definite voltage (MP1050). So one can calculate a definite
potential ∆U per µm of positional deviation (lag).
∆U = MP1050 [mV] / sa [µm]
If ∆U is divided by the smallest voltage step which can be produced (0.6 mV), the result is the
number of voltage steps which are produced per 1 µm positional deviation.
n = ∆U [mV]/0.6 [mV]
Example:
kv = 2 rapid traverse 5 000 [mm/min], U = 9 [V]
5 000 [µm]
sa = = 2 500 [µm]
2
9 000 [mV]
∆U = = 3.6 [mV/µm]
2 500 [µm]
3.6 [mV/µm]
n= = 6 steps/µm positional deviation
0.6 [mV]

Kink point:
For machines with high rapid traverse rates it is usually not possible to raise the k v factor enough to
give an optimal loop characteristic over the entire range of positioning speeds (stop, machining feed
rates, rapid traverse). In such cases one can introduce a kink point, which gives the following
advantages:
– a high kv at lower positioning speeds, i.e. a larger voltage step per µm of positional deviation
– a low kv at higher positioning speeds (above the machining rates).
The position of the kink point is determined by machine parameter MP1830. In the upper range the
kv factor is multiplied by the factor from MP1820.
U [V]
MP1810 · MP1820
MP1830
MP1810 (= kv)
sa
The kink point must lie above the range of machining feeds!
Under these conditions, the lag can be calculated as follows:
sa = Ve
kv
·
[ MP1830 [%] + 100 [%] – MP1830 [%]
100 [%] MP1820 · 100 [%]
]
MP1820 Multiplication factor for the Kv factor
Input value 0.001 to 1
MP1830 Kink point

Input value 0 to 100 [%]

✎

3.2.2 Control with feed forward
Feed forward control means that the nominal velocity value for the machine is varied by a machine
parameter (control element of the nominal velocity). Together with the velocity element which is
calculated from the lag (servo controlled element of the nominal velocity), this gives the final nominal
velocity value.
The lag is very small with this method. Operation with feed forward control has the advantage that
contours can be followed very accurately at a high speed.
Normally, work will be carried out using feed forward control.
In the operating modes "Positioning with manual data input", "Program run, single block" and
"Program run, full sequence" this method of servo control can be selected with the machine
parameter MP1390.
Operation with feed forward control for the X axis can be shown in a simplified form in the following
block diagram.
All machine parameters which influence the servo characteristic are shown here.
Acceleration: MP1060
Transient response: MP1530
Position approach speed: MP1520
➁
vY
v kv factor for
speed pre-control
a·t
MP1520
MP1510
v=
MP1530 t
Servo
vX amplifier
➂ ➀
sax vx + vx Noml+
X Noml+ +
ax
sX
v ·s
- + -
k
sax
=
+
v
vx Actl
X Actl
s=s0+v·∆t
U
sY
➃ t
Integral factor: MP1080

➀ When operating with feed forward control the set velocity value (the analog potential for
the drive amplifier) is formed from three components:
feed forward control,
servo lag,
integral component.
➁ The feed forward control value, which is adjusted to the dynamic characteristics of the
machine by machine parameters, makes it possible to control the loop with a lag distance
which is nearly "0".
➂ Deviations in the actual positional value are compensated as described under "Operation
with lag." The servo follows the pre-compensated curve.
The Kv factor for the feed forward control then comes into play.
➃ If the axes are stopped, the integral factor will also be effective:
it results in an offset correction.
The feed forward control value is adjusted to the dynamics of the machine by three machine
parameters.
Pre-control
U [V]
MP1530
Entry value correct
Entry value too large
9 Entry value too small
MP1060 MP1520
t [ms]
The machine parameter MP1060 determines the acceleration (= slope of the pre-controlled speed
curve).
The machine parameter MP1530 determines the transient response. The larger the value which is
entered, the more the system will tend to oscillate.
MP1520 determines the run-in behavior into the nominal position. The larger the value which is
entered, the more the system will tend to oscillate.
The fine control of the pre-controlled speed set-value is influenced by the Kv factor for feed forward
control MP1510.

U [V]
t [ms]
If the Kv factor is too large, the system will oscillate about the pre-controlled speed set value.
The size of the Kv factor is normally the same as the Kv factor for operation with servo lag
Depending on the dynamic characteristics of the machine it may also be higher (see section
"Commissioning and start-up procedure").
MP1530 Damping factor for transient response

Input value: 0.01 to 0.999
MP1520 Position approach speed

Input value: 0.1 to 10 [m/min]
MP1510 Kv factor for feed forward control

Input value: 0.1 to 10 [1/min]
MP1510.0 Kv factor X axis

MP1510.1 Kv factor Y axis
MP1510.2 Kv factor Z axis
MP1510.3 Kv factor 4th axis

3.3 Offset adjustment
The TNC 360/TNC 335 controls include several possibilities for compensating for an offset voltage
which would cause the axes to drift. The maximum permissible offset voltage in the control is
100 mV. If this voltage is reached or exceeded, then the error message
"Gross positioning error E"
will appear.
The automatic cyclical offset adjustment and the adjustment via integral factor must not be active
simultaneously!
3.3.1 Offset adjustment by code number

An automatic offset adjustment can be activated with the code number 75 368. After entering the
code number the control shows the offset values for the axes X, Y, Z, IV, in the dialog line. The
values indicate the voltage in 0.6 mV units. Thus a display of 10 means 10 x 0.6 mV = 6.0 mV. The
display 0 means no offset. The displayed offset value consists of the offset values that originate in
the motor controller and in the control.
On pressing the "ENT" key the offset values, which are displayed on the VDU, are automatically
compensated, the control puts out an appropriate compensating voltage. Compensation only takes
place if the offset voltage is > 0.6 mV.
To switch off the automatic offset adjustment, enter the code number and press the "NO ENT" key.
The offset values are stored in the control and are non-volatile.
After a control is exchanged, the offset adjustment must be re-activated via code number.
3.3.2 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment
The machine parameter MP1220 can be used to program a time interval, after which an offset
adjustment will be performed cyclically.
An automatic adjustment will be carried out, when the predetermined time has elapsed and the
following conditions are fulfilled:
- all axes are stopped,

- the spindle is not switched on,
the axes are not clamped.
For each adjustment cycle there will be a 1 mV correction if the offset voltage is larger than 1 mV. If
the offset voltage is smaller than 1 mV then compensation will be in steps of 0.6 mV.
MP1220 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment

Input value: 0 to 65536 [s]
0 = no automatic adjustment

3.3.3 Offset adjustment with integral factor
The integral factor MP1080 also results in an automatic offset adjustment. It is only effective in the
stop condition (see block diagram of control loop).
According to the size of the factor the offset voltage will be reduced quickly or slowly.
Even a small amount of play in the drives can lead to instability in the control loop. An integral factor
of 0 is entered in this case.
Voltage MP1080 ·sa = 1000

step
(0.6 mV)
MP1080 ·sa = 500
10
MP1080 ·sa = 150

6
1 2 3 t [s]
MP1080 Integral factor

Input value: 0 to 65535
MP1080.0 Integral factor X axis

MP1080.1 Integral factor Y axis
MP1080.2 Integral factor Z axis
MP1080.3 Integral factor 4th axis

✎

3.4 Contour behavior in corners
3.4.1 Radial acceleration
As well as the normal acceleration (MP1060) there is also a machine parameter for radial
acceleration (MP1070).
The machine parameter limits the feed for circular movements according to the following formula:
v= r [m] · MP1070 [m/s2] v= feed rate for circular movements [m/s]

r= radius [m] (cutter mid-point contour)
It is recommended that a value should be entered which is between the half of and the same as that
in MP1060 (Acceleration). If the programmed feed is lower than that above, then the programmed
feed will be used. MP1070 is effective for operation with lag and with feed forward control.
MP1070 Radial acceleration

Input value: 0,001 to 3.0 [m/s2]
3.4.2 Constant feed rate in corners

Machine parameter MP7460 defines the angle which can still be traversed with constant surface
speed. This machine parameter is effective for corners without a radius compensation, for internal
corners it is also effective with a radius compensation.
MP7460
This machine parameter is effective for operation with feed forward control as well as for operation
with lag. The permissible size of the angle depends on the drives in the machine.
Realistic values are 5° to 15°.

The resulting path is as follows:
Axis standstill
α = Change of axis movement direction
α sa = Servo lag
sa
Path when MP7460 < α

Path when MP7460 > α
MP7460 Constant feed rate in corners

Input value: 0.001 to 179.999°
3.4.3 Constant feed rate in corners with M90

The miscellaneous function M90 was introduced to enable constant surface speed to be achieved in
corners without radius compensation.
This miscellaneous function is only effective in operation with lag!
sa
without M90
with M90

3.5 Monitoring functions
The NC monitors the axis positions and the dynamic behavior of the machine. If the fixed values in
the machine parameters are exceeded, an error message is displayed and the machine is stopped.
Position, standstill, movement and analog voltage are monitored.
If, for some reason, monitoring is not wanted at all, the following markers must be set in the PLC
program:
Set Reset
M2688 No monitoring X axis PLC PLC

M2689 No monitoring Y axis
M2690 No monitoring Z axis
M2691 No monitoring 4th axis
The monitoring can be reactivated by resetting the markers in the PLC.
The monitoring functions can also be switched off conditionally. In the machine parameter MP4130
a PLC input is defined, which is interrogated with a 6 ms cycle time. The condition for activating this
input is stored in MP4131. This function must be activated from the PLC by setting Bit 0 in Word
W522.
MP4130 Fast PLC input to suppress the monitoring functions

Input value: 0 to 255 (No. of the PLC input)
MP4131 Activation condition for fast PLC input from MP4130

Input value: 0 or 1
0 = Activation for Low level

1 = Activation for High level
Set Reset
W522 Bit 0 Monitoring functions suppressed PLC PLC

if PLC input MP 4130 is activated
from MP4130

3.5.1 Position monitoring for operation with lag
The machine parameters MP1710 and MP1720 determine the ranges for the continuous position
monitoring in the machine (lag monitoring). The monitoring is active as soon as the axes are under
the control of the position control loop.
If the limits of parameter MP1710 are exceeded, the error message
"Positioning error"
will appear and the machine stops. The error message can be canceled by the "CE" key.
If the limit of parameter MP1720 is exceeded, the flashing error message
"Gross positioning error A"
appears.
This error can only be canceled by switching off the control. An input value of approx. 1 to 1.4 times
lag for rapid traverse is realistic. MP1720 is larger than MP1710.
MP1710 Position monitoring for operation with lag (cancelable)

Input value: 0.001 to 1000 [mm]
MP1720 Position monitoring for operation with lag (EMERGENCY STOP)


3.5.2 Position monitoring for operation with feed forward control
In operation with feed forward control the ranges for continuous position monitoring are determined
by MP1410 and MP1420 lag monitoring. The monitoring is active as soon as the axes are under the
control of the position control loop.
If the limits of MP1410 are exceeded, the error message
"Positioning error"
will appear, which can be canceled with the "CE" key. If the limit of parameter MP1420 is exceeded,
the flashing error message
"Gross positioning error A"
appears. This error can only be canceled by switching off the control.
If clamped axes cause the error message "Positioning error", a residual voltage can remain at the
nominal value output, since the machine axes can no longer be traversed. MP1150 can be used to
program a time after which the residual voltage becomes zero. After this period a nominal/actual
value transfer is carried out. If the error message is canceled by "CE" before the time has elapsed,
the nominal/actual value transfer is carried out and the residual voltage is switched off. This machine
parameter functions in operation with lag as well as with feed forward control.
MP1410 Position monitoring in operation with feed forward control (cancelable)

MP1420 Position monitoring in operation with feed forward control (EMERGENCY

STOP)
MP1150 Delay time before switching off the residual voltage on error message
"Positioning error"
Input value: 0 to 65.535 [s]

3.5.3 Monitoring the analog voltage
Monitoring of the analog voltage is only possible in operation with feed forward control.
If it exceeds 10 V, the flashing error message
"Gross positioning error B"
is displayed.
3.5.4 Movement monitoring

The movement monitoring functions in operation with feed forward control as well as with lag.
During movement monitoring, the actual path traveled is compared with a nominal path calculated
by the NC at short intervals (several servo cycles). If, during this period, the actual path traveled
differs from the calculated path, the flashing error message
"Gross positioning error C"
is displayed.
In machine parameter MP1140 a voltage can be stored, below which the movement monitoring is
out of action.
If 10 [V] is entered in this machine parameter, the movement monitoring becomes

inactive. It is not possible to operate the machine safely without movement
monitoring.
MP1140 Movement monitoring

Input value: 0.03 to 10 [V]

3.5.5 Standstill monitoring
The Standstill monitoring functions in operation with feed forward control and with lag. The
monitoring functions when the axes have reached the positioning window. The range in which the
axes may move is defined in MP1110.
As soon as position deviation is greater than the value which is stored in MP1110, the flashing error
message
"Gross positioning error D"
is displayed. The message also appears if, on running-in to a position, an overshoot occurs which is
larger than the value in MP1110 or the axis moves in the opposite direction on beginning a
positioning movement.
MP1110 Standstill monitoring

Input range: 0.001 to 30 [mm]
3.5.6 Positioning window

The positioning window defines the limits within which the control considers that a position has
been reached. After reaching the position the control starts the execution of the next block.
The size of the positioning window is defined in machine parameter MP1030.
If the value which is entered is too small, the run-in time and therefore the time between one
program block and the next will be lengthened.
If the axes have reached the positioning window after a movement, the markers M2008 to M2011
and M2017 are set (see section "Axis in position").
MP1030 Positioning window

Input range 0.001 to 2 [mm] or [°]
MP1030.0 X axis
MP1030.1 Y axis
MP1030.2 Z axis
MP1030.3 4th axis

✎

3.6 Controlled axes
The machine parameter MP50 determines which of the four NC axes should be controlled.
MP50 Controlled axes

Input value 0 to 15
Bit 0 X axis +0 = not controlled

+1 = controlled
Bit 1 Y axis +0 = not controlled
+2 = controlled
Bit 2 Z axis +0 = not controlled
+4 = controlled
Bit 3 4th axis +0 = not controlled
+8 = controlled
Further parameters for the NC axes may be found in the section "machine axes."
The PLC functions which are described in the following sections are only effective for controlled
axes.
3.6.1 Axis enable, feed rate enable

After switching on the control voltage the "Axis-enable markers" are automatically set by the NC, so
that the machine axes can be held in closed position loops by the control .
The axis-enable markers can be reset by the NC if the control loop is opened by the PLC, see
section "Open control loop").
Set Reset
M2000 Axis enable X NC PLC, NC

M2001 Axis enable Y
M2002 Axis enable Z
M2003 Axis enable 4
The feed rate enable must be specified for all axes by M2451 and complement marker M2467. If the
feed rate enable is removed, the analog voltage is output as 0 V and the axes immediately stop
moving. The letter "F" is then highlighted in the status display.
Set Reset
M2451 Feed rate enable for all axes PLC PLC

M2467 Complement feed rate enable

3.6.2 Axes in position
If the axes have reached the defined positioning window (MP1030, see section "Positioning
window") after a movement, the "axis in position" markers are set by the NC. This also happens
after switching on the control voltage.
The markers will be reset by the NC only if the axes leave the positioning window when being
traversed in manual operation or automatic operation. This is also valid when passing over the
reference marks. In the "Electronic handwheel" mode of operation the markers M2008 to M2011 are
reset.
The markers also inform the PLC when an axis should be moved. A positioning block resets the
corresponding in-position marker. This makes it possible to unclamp the axis and close the control
loop.
For contours which can be machined with constant feed rate the "Axis in position" markers are not
set.
M2008 X axis in position NC NC

M2009 Y axis in position
M2010 Z axis in position
M2011 4th axis in position

3.6.3 Axes in motion
If the axes are in motion the appropriate "Axis in motion" markers are set by the NC.
Note: The markers are only set in the operating modes "Positioning with manual entry", "Single block"
and "Full sequence."
Set Reset
M2128 X axis in motion NC NC

M2129 Y axis in motion
M2130 Z axis in motion
M2131 4th axis in motion
Example for markers "Axis in position" and "Axis in motion":
P3 .
.
.
L X80 Y20 RL
L X0 RL
P2 L X80 RL
.
P1 P0 .
.
P0 P1 P2 P3
M2008
M2009
M2128
M2129

3.6.4 Open control loop
If, after the execution of an NC block, the control loop for a particular axis is opened and this axis is
clamped, then it is necessary to delay this opening to give the clamp sufficient time to operate. The
markers M2492 to M2495 were introduced for this purpose. If one of these markers is set, and the
appropriate axis is in position, then the next NC block will only then be processed when the "Open
control loop" marker (M2544 to M2547) has been set. After the control loops are opened the
markers M2000 to M2003 are reset by the NC.
As soon as the "Axis in position" marker is reset, the control loop must re-closed so that the axes
can be moved again.
Set Reset
M2544 Open control loop X axis PLC PLC

M2545 Open control loop Y axis
M2546 Open control loop Z axis
M2547 Open control loop 4th axis
M2492 Await open control loop X axis PLC PLC

M2493 Await open control loop Y axis
M2494 Await open control loop Z axis
M2495 Await open control loop 4th axis
3.6.5 Actual - nominal value transfer

If the markers M2552 to M2555 are set, then the actual position value will be transferred to memory
as the nominal position value.
Actual value transfer is possible only in the "Manual" and Electronic handwheel" modes of operation.
Set Reset
M2552 Actual - nominal value transfer X axis PLC PLC

M2553 Actual - nominal value transfer Y axis
M2554 Actual - nominal value transfer Z axis
M2555 Actual - nominal value transfer 4th axis

✎
4-78 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

4 Spindle
The spindle is controlled by the PLC.
The spindle speed (S output) can be either an analog voltage output or a BCD-coded output. The
spindle speed is programmed in rpm in the NC program.
The machine parameter MP3010 determines whether the spindle speed is a BCD-coded output or
an analog output, and whether the spindle orientation should be active.
Up to eight gear ranges can be defined by machine parameters.
Tapping cycles are available for tapping with and without floating tap holder.
MP3010 Spindle-speed output, Spindle orientation

Input value: 0 to 8
0 =No spindle-speed output
1 =BCD-coded output of the spindle speed,

only if the spindle speed changes
2 =BCD-coded output of the spindle speed at every TOOL CALL
3 =Analog output of the spindle speed and gear-change signal,

only when the gear range is changed
4 =Analog output of the spindle speed and gear-change signal

at every TOOL CALL
5 =Analog output of the spindle speed and no gear-change signal
6 =As for Input value 3, but with controlled spindle for orientation
The functions are described in detail in the following sections.
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-79

4.1 Analog output of the spindle speed
For analog output of the spindle speed (S analog) spindle speeds can be programmed from 0 to 99
999.999 rpm. The programmed spindle speed is available as an analog DC voltage of 0 to 10 V on
connector X8 of the logic unit. In addition, gear change signals can be assigned to any PLC outputs
by the PLC program.
For S analog the value 991 must be entered in the machine parameter MP3020!
If the control is operating with S analog, marker M2042 is set. The programmed spindle speed is
stored in D356 in 1/1 000 [rpm]. The nominal spindle speed is stored in Word W320 in rpm. The
actual spindle speed is stored in Word W322 in rpm.
Marker, Function Set Reset

Word
M2042 Analog output of the spindle speed NC NC
D356 Programmed spindle speed NC NC
W320 Nominal spindle speed NC NC
W322 Actual spindle speed NC NC
4.1.1 Direction of spindle rotation

The polarity of the S-analog voltage is defined by machine parameter MP3130. The count direction
of the measuring system signals for the spindle is defined in MP3140. The direction of spindle
rotation can be reversed by setting marker M2489, i.e. the polarity of the analog voltage is inverted.
The S-analog voltage appears at the output as soon as the marker M2485 for M03 or M2486 for
M04 is set. At the same time the miscellaneous function is displayed in the status window of the
control (see section "Display and operation"). Marker M2487 turns off the analog voltage and
displays M05.
If more than one of the markers M2485 to M2487 is set at the same time, this will release the
flashing error message
Error in PLC program 1Q
Marker M2608 can be used to remove the spindle-enable, at the same time M03, M04 or M05 is
displayed inversely. The S-analog voltage will then go to 0 V.
MP3130 Polarity of the S-analog voltage

Input value: 0 to 3
0 =M03 positive voltage

M04 negative voltage
1 =M03 negative voltage

M04 positive voltage
2 =M03 and M04 positive voltage
3 =M03 and M04 negative voltage
4-80 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

MP3140 Count direction of the measuring system signals for the spindle
0 =positive count direction with M03

1 =negative count direction with M03
Set Reset
M2489 Change direction of spindle rotation PLC PLC
M2485 Status display and output of the analog voltage PLC PLC
for M03
M2486 Status display and output of the analog voltage PLC PLC
for M04
M2487 Status display M05 and spindle stop PLC PLC
M2608 Inverse display of M03, M04, M05 and PLC PLC

S analog = 0 V [no spindle-enable)
4.1.2 Gear range

With the aid of the machine parameters MP3510 and MP3210 up to eight gear ranges can be
defined. The nominal speed for S override 100 % and a matching S-analog voltage is entered for
each gear range.
If not all gear ranges are required, then the remaining machine parameters are set to zero.
Machine parameter MP3515 can be used to define a maximum achievable spindle speed for each
gear range which cannot be exceeded by S-override.
The voltage range can be restricted by machine parameter MP3240.1.
MP3120 can determine whether zero spindle speed is permitted, in spite of a minimum producable
analog output voltage.
If an S-analog voltage output 0 V is produced, marker M2005 will be set. This is also the case when
the potential has been turned down to zero with the override potentiometer.
The ramp slope for the S-analog voltage on output of M03, M04 is stored in MP3410.0.
If the spindle voltage is on a rising or falling ramp, marker M2004 will be set. This also happens
when the spindle voltage is altered with the override potentiometer, the voltage changes very
quickly, and the ramp of MP3410.0 cannot be followed.
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-81

MP3510 Spindle speed for gear ranges
Input value: 0 to 99 999.999 [rpm]
MP3510.0 Spindle speed for gear range 1

MP3210 S-analog voltage for gear range

Input value: 0 to 9.999 [V]
MP3210.0 S-analog voltage, gear range 1

MP3240.0 Maximum S-analog voltage output

MP3240.1 Minimum S-analog voltage output

MP3120 Zero spindle speed permitted

Input value 0:S = 0 permitted
Input value 1:S = 0 not permitted
MP3410.0 Ramp slope for spindle for M03, M04, M05

Input range: 0 to 1.999 [V/ms]
Set Reset
M2004 S-analog voltage not on ramp NC NC
M2005 S-analog voltage = 0 V NC NC
M2020 Actual spindle speed below minimum rpm from NC NC
MP3240.1
4-82 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-83

4.1.3 Spindle override
The spindle speed can be altered within certain limits by the spindle override potentiometer. These
limits are fixed by machine parameter MP3310. However, the upper spindle speed limit from
MP3240 cannot be exceeded by spindle override.
The % factor which is adjusted by spindle override is kept in Word W492 and W764. However,
W764 can be changed by the PLC. As soon as a different value is entered here it will be adopted by
the NC. In this way the % factor can be influenced by the PLC .
If W764 is not changed by the PLC, the normal override function remains active.
MP7620 bit 3 determines whether the override is effective in 1% steps or according to a nonlinear
characteristic curve. In the nonlinear curve, the lower range changes in 0.01% steps, and in the
range over 2.5% the step is 0.75%.
The range of override values in W492 and W764 lies between 1 and 150 in 1% steps for the linear
curve, and between 0 and 15 000 for the nonlinear curve.
MP3310.0 Limit with spindle override (maximum)

Input value: 0 to 150 [%]
MP3310.1 Limit with spindle override (minimum)

Word Function Set Reset
W492 % factor – spindle override NC NC

(NC → PLC)
W764 % factor – spindle override NC; PLC NC; PLC

(PLC → NC)
MP7620 Bit 3 Spindle override in 1% steps or according to a non linear characteristic

curve
+0 = 1% steps
+8 = nonlinear curve
4-84 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

The following diagram illustrates the relationships:
U [V]
MP3240.0
=9V
MP3210.1
=8V
MP3210.0
=6V
MP3240.1
=1V
0 250 750 1500 1875 3000 3375 [rpm]

MP3510.0 MP3510.1 MP3515.1
I II
Gear range I: 1 500 rpm at 6 V (MP3510.0; MP3210.0)

Gear range II: 3 000 rpm at 8 V (MP3510.1; MP3210.1)
Upper spindle override limit: 125 % (MP3310.0)
Lower spindle override limit: 50 % (MP3310.1)
Maximal permissible output voltage: 9 V (MP3240.0)
Minimal permissible output voltage: 1 V (MP3240.1)
4.1.4 Gear change

Gear change is controlled by the PLC program. Up to eight gear ranges are available, coded in Word
W256. The NC enters the gear code for the gear ranges one to eight in Word W256, – according to
the programmed spindle speeds in the NC program (see MP3510).
After setting the gear code, the marker M2043 is set by the NC as a strobe signal.
The spindle speed which is programmed in the NC program as TOOL CALL S is stored in
Doubleword D356 and D756 in 1/1000 [rpm] by the NC. If a different spindle speed (from the spindle
speed fixed by the NC) is to be activated by the PLC, the speed must be entered by the PLC in
D756, this can then be activated by marker M2814 .
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-85

A different gear range from that which is selected by the NC can be activated by the PLC setting
Markers M2104 – M2106 and Marker M2814. Marker M2814 is reset by the NC after the gear
change.
Check that the spindle speed selected by the PLC is within the spindle speed limits of the selected
gear range.
The PLC program must transfer the gear code to the machine. The NC waits for the
acknowledgment signal "Gear change completed" (M2480) before continuing the program . As soon
as marker M2480 is set by the PLC the NC resets the strobe signal M2043. The marker M2480 may
only be set in one PLC cycle.
Set Reset
M2043 Gear-code change signal NC NC
M2480 Acknowledgment PLC PLC

“Gear change completed”
M2104 1st bit gear code for S analog (lsb) PLC PLC
M2105 2nd bit gear code for S analog PLC PLC
M2106 3rd bit gear code for S analog (msb) PLC PLC
M2814 Activation of a gear range and spindle speed PLC NC

via PLC
D356 Programmed spindle speed NC
D756 Set spindle speed from the PLC; NC, PLC

programmed spindle speed
W256 G code for S analog NC
An alternating S-analog voltage can be produced for changing gear. For this purpose the marker
M2490 and the marker M2491 must be alternately set and reset by the PLC. This may be achieved
by interrogating a particular timer in the PLC program. The markers M2490 and M2491 are reset to
stop the spindle. The output voltage is defined by MP3240.2.
MP3240.2 Jog voltage for gear change

Input value 0 to 9.999 [V]
Set Reset
M2490 Spindle rotation left (for gear change) PLC PLC

M2491 Spindle rotation right (for gear change) PLC PLC
The direction of spindle rotation after the gear change is determined by the PLC program with the
markers M2485 to M2487 (see "Direction of spindle rotation").
Machine parameter MP3030 can be used to determine whether an axis halt should occur on a TOOL
CALL with only a spindle speed output.
4-86 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

If an axis halt is not permitted, then no PLC positioning, datum correction, spindle
orientation or change of limit switch range may be performed during the S-code
output.
MP3030 Axis halt on TOOL CALL with only a spindle speed output.
1 = No axis halt on TOOL CALL
0 = Axis halt on TOOL CALL
If a non-permissible spindle speed is programmed, the marker M2092 will be set by the NC, and
simultaneously the error message appears:
Wrong spindle speed
Set Reset
M2092 Illegal spindle speed NC NC
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-87

PLC example for gear change and jog-voltage output:
. . .
. . .
. . .
L M2043 ;Gear-code change signal for S analog
CMT 50 ;Module call (output gear code )
. . .
. . .
. . .
L M2043 ;Gear-code change signal for S analog
AN M968 ;Buffer marker for T13
AN T13
AN T14
AN T61 ;Timer 13 for spindle left, running
AN T62 ;Timer 14 for spindle right, running
= T13 ;Set timer 13 (value from MP4110.13)
S M968 ;Set buffer marker for T13
L M2043
AN M969 ;Buffer marker for T14
AN T13
AN T14
AN T61
AN T62
= T14 ;Set timer 14 (value from MP4110.14)
S M969 ;Set buffer marker for T14
L T61 ;Timer 13 running
= M2490 ;Spindle left for gear change
L T62 ;Timer 14 running
= M2491 ;Spindle right for gear change
LN T13
AN T61
R M968 ;Reset buffer marker
LN T14
AN T61
R M968 ;Reset buffer marker
. . .
. . .
. . .
L M2043
A I5 ;Input for acknowledgment signal
S M2480 ;Acknowledgment - gear changed
. . .
. . .
EM ;End main program
LBL50 ;Module start

L M2043 ;Gear-code change signal
L W256 ;Gear-code for S analog
B= 015 ;Outputs 15, 16 and 17 for gear change are
activated
EM ;Module end
4-88 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-89

✎
4-90 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

4.2 Coded output of spindle speed
For coded (binary) output of the spindle speed an S code is entered by the NC in Word W258. At the
same time strobe marker M2044 is set by the NC. The signals are static. The NC delays the
continuation of program run until marker M2481 gives the acknowledgment that the new spindle
speed has been activated. On acknowledgment the change marker M2044 is reset. The S code is
not altered before the next S output.
A spindle speed is entered in the TOOL CALL block with a maximum of four figures in rpm, if
necessary, rounded off by the NC to the nearest standard value. Spindle speeds of 0 to 9 000 are
possible. The spindle speed which has been entered is put out by the control as S Code according to
DIN 66025, as shown in the list of S Codes. With MP3020 the minimum and maximum spindle
speeds and the desired spindle-speed steps can be defined.
The Input value is a 5-figure number, derived as follows:
Minimum spindle speed 00 to 99 (see S-code table)

Maximum spindle speed 00 to 99 (see S-code table)
Spindle-speed step 1 to 9
Example:
The minimum spindle speed is to be 1 rpm (S code 20), the maximum spindle speed is to be
1000 rpm (S code 80). Only every second spindle speed should be programmable. This gives an
input value of 20802 for MP3020. An input value of 991 would mean no limit.
The S code is stored in the PLC in Word W258. The minimum spindle speed from MP3020 is stored
in Word W1008.
Set Reset
M2044 S-code change signal NC NC

M2481 S-code acknowledgment PLC PLC
W258 S-code NC NC
W1008 S-code for minimum spindle rpm NC NC
MP3020 Definition of the spindle speed range

Input value: 0 to 99 999
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-91

S-code table
S code rpm S-code rpm
S 00 0 S 50 31.5
S 01 0.122 S 51 35.5
S 02 0.125 S 52 40
S 03 0.14 S 53 45
S 04 0.16 S 54 50
S 05 0.18 S 55 56
S 06 0.2 S 56 63
S 07 0.224 S 57 71
S 08 0.25 S 58 80
S 09 0.28 S 59 90
S 10 0.315 S 60 100
S 11 0.355 S 61 112
S 12 0.4 S 62 125
S 13 0.45 S 63 140
S 14 0.5 S 64 160
S 15 0.56 S 65 180
S 16 0.63 S 66 200
S 17 0.71 S 67 224
S 18 0.8 S 68 250
S 19 0.9 S 69 280
S 20 1 S 70 315
S 21 1.12 S 71 355
S 22 1.25 S 72 400
S 23 1.4 S 73 450
S 24 1.6 S 74 500
S 25 1.8 S 75 560
S 26 2 S 76 630
S 27 2.24 S 77 710
S 28 2.5 S 78 800
S 29 2.8 S 79 900
S 30 3.15 S 80 1000
S 31 3.55 S 81 1120
S 32 4 S 82 1250
S 33 4.5 S 83 1400
S 34 5 S 84 1600
S 35 5.6 S 85 1800
S 36 6.3 S 86 2000
S 37 7.1 S 87 2240
S 38 8 S 88 2500
S 39 9 S 89 2800
S 40 10 S 90 3150
S 41 11.2 S 91 3550
S 42 12.5 S 92 4000
S 43 14 S 93 4500
S 44 16 S 94 5000
S 45 18 S 95 5600
S 46 20 S 96 6300
S 47 22.4 S 97 7100
S 48 25 S 98 8000
S 49 28 S 99 9000
4-92 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

4.3 Spindle orientation
In order to use the TNC on machines with automatic tool changers an orientation of the spindle (S
axis) is necessary. The orientation is carried out by a miscellaneous function M19 or another M
function and must be initiated by the PLC program. MP3010 determines whether the control
operates with or without spindle orientation.
Spindle-orientation sequence
In normal operation the spindle is not in the position control loop. If the miscellaneous function M19
is activated, marker M2712 (Strobe - spindle orientation) must be set by the PLC program and the
spindle must be switched off. The spindle is driven down the ramp from MP3410.1 to the spindle
speed from MP3520.1. An orientation does not begin until marker M2499 has been reset. When
this spindle speed has been reached, the spindle is under the control of the position control loop and
oriented to the set position of D592, along the ramp of MP3410.1.
During a spindle orientation from a stop position the shortest path is followed, provided the start
position of the spindle is in the positioning window (MP3430). If the start position is outside the
positioning window, then the positioning is carried out according to markers M2656 and M03 or
M04.
If the spindle does not have to remain in the position control loop after reaching the set position,
then the marker M2499 must be set. The spindle is only freed when this marker has been set by the
PLC . If M2499 is set continuously the control loop will be opened immediately after every
orientation, when the positioning window has been reached.
MP3410.1 Ramp slope of the analog voltage for spindle orientation

Input value: 0 to 1.999 [V/ms]
MP3520.1 Spindle speed for spindle orientation

Set Reset
M2656 Spindle orientation from stop PLC PLC

0 = Orientation with M03
M2499 Open spindle control loop PLC PLC
M2712 Activate PLC positioning PLC NC

for spindle orientation
D592 Position spindle orientation

(Strobe M2712)
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-93

Orientation from rotation:
S
[rpm]
Prog. rpm
MP3410.1
MP3410.1
MP3520.1
0 t
M19 Target M function
(M2712 = 1) position (opening the
(M05) control loop
Distance M2499 = 1)
to target position
Orientation from standstill:
S
[rpm]
Prog. rpm
MP3410.0
Stand-
still
MP3520.1 MP3410.1
0 t
M05 M19 Target M function
M2712 = 1 position (opening the
control loop
M2499 = 1)
4-94 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

The nominal position can be defined in a machine parameter MP4210.xx , and is referred to the
reference point. It must be copied into Doubleword D592 with a PLC command. The nominal
position can also be taken from the cycle "Orientation" (CYCL DEF 13). In this case the MSB of D592
must be = 1 and the other Bits set to 0. This can be carried out by the PLC program.
The orientation can be performed to an accuracy of 0.1 degree. This value results from the line count
of the rotary encoder which is incorporated (ROD 426.xx8 with 1024 lines) and the quadruple
evaluation in the TNC. A positioning window is defined by MP3420. If the spindle is within the
positioning window after orientation, marker M2007 will be set.
In order to be able to correct for any misalignment on assembly of the rotary encoder the machine
parameter MP3430 was introduced. The deviation between the nominal and actual position of the
reference mark which is entered here is taken into account during orientation.
The reference mark is instantly evaluated by the NC when the spindle is turned on for the first time.
MP3420 Positioning window for spindle

Input range: 0 to 65 535 [increments]
1 increment is equivalent to about 0.088 degree
360 degrees
=
1024 lines · quadruple-evaluation
MP3430 Reference mark deviation from the desired position (Spindle preset)
Input value: 0 to 360 [degrees]
Set Reset
M2007 Spindle in position NC NC
In order to control the orientation process precisely, a kv factor can be entered individually for each
gear range via MP3440.
MP3440 kv factor for Spindle orientation

Input range: 0.1 to 10 [1/min]
MP3440.0 kv factor gear range 1

8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-95

After the start of spindle orientation the spindle position is displayed in the status window.
The displayed value remains, as long as the spindle is in the closed position control loop.
The display is modulo 360 degrees.
A spindle orientation can also be performed by an initiator. For this, marker M2501 must be set by
the PLC. This marker activates a spindle rotation with a spindle speed defined by machine parameter
MP3520.0 and a direction of rotation according to marker M2656. If the marker M2501 is reset by
the PLC (e.g.. via initiator), then the spindle will stop. The positional value will be displayed in the
status window. "Jog mode" for the spindle can be achieved in this way.
MP3520.0 Spindle speed activated by marker M2501

Set Reset
M2501 Activates spindle speed MP3520.0 PLC PLC

and direction of rotation from marker M2656
Example of a PLC program for spindle orientation with M19/M20
Program description:
Using the M Function M19 to activate a spindle orientation to the value which is determined by the
spindle-orientation cycle.
Using the M Function M20 to activate a spindle orientation to the value which is stored in
MP4210.47.
;Main program
LN M1 ;Generate logic ONE
S M1 ;Buffer marker which is continuously ONE
. . .
. . .
. . .
LN M2045 ;M strobe inactive
R M12 ;Spindle-orientation cycle active
R M2482 ;Acknowledgment of M code
Activation of the orientation to the value from the HEIDENHAIN cycle

L M1919 ;Decoded M function 19
A M2045 ;M-code change signal
AN M12 ;Orientation cycle active
CMT 180 ;Activation of the Orientation from the cycle
S M12 ;Orientation cycle active
4-96 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

Activation of the orientation to the Value of MP4210.47
AN M12 ;Orientation cycle active
CMT 181 ;Activation of the orientation from the MP
S M12 ;Orientation cycle active
Acknowledgment of the orientation

O M1920 ;Decoded M function 20
A M2007 ;Spindle in position
AN M2712 ;Strobe for spindle orientation
S M2482 ;Acknowledgment of M code
. . .
. . .
. . .
EM ;Main program - end
LBL 180; Transfer positional value from the spindle-orientation cycle

L K+O ;Load the constant value ZERO
BS K+31 ;Set Bit 31 to ONE
= D592 ;Position spindle orientation
. . .
. . .
. . .
L M1 ;Buffer marker which is continuously ONE
S M2712 ;Strobe for spindle orientation
. . .
. . .
. . .
EM
LBL 181; Transfer positional value from the machine parameter

L D956 ;MP4210.47 PLC positional value
= D592 ;Position spindle orientation
. . .
. . .
. . .
L M1 ;Buffer marker which is continuously ONE
S M2712 ;Strobe for spindle orientation
. . .
. . .
. . .
EM
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-97

✎
4-98 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

4.4 Tapping
There are two tapping cycles available in the control:
– tapping with floating tap holder and
– tapping without floating tap holder.
Tapping with floating tap holder is possible for both analog and coded spindle-speed output.
Tapping without floating tap holder is only possible for analog spindle-speed output.
The tapping cycle is defined in the NC program and can be called with CYCL CALL (M03). Tapping is
adjusted to the dynamic behavior of the machine by machine parameters.
4.4.1 Tapping with floating tap holder for analog spindle-speed

output
The following diagram shows the sequence of events in the cycle.
MP7120.2
30 ms Dwell time from
(due to CYCL DEF 2.3
software)
S
MP3410.2
0 MP3410.2
MP3410.0
MP3410.0
M03
M05
MP7120.0
M04
Acknow-
ledgement
of M code
M2048
Cycle End of
start cycle
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-99

If the tapping cycle is called, marker M2048 is set by the NC.
After switching on the spindle with M03 and successful acknowledgment (marker M2482) the set
spindle speed should have been reached when the feed commences. Upon switch-on, the spindle
follows the ramp from MP3410.0, on switching off it follows the ramp from MP3410.2. The M
functions that are output by the NC must be acknowledged.
However, if the feed ramp is flatter than the spindle ramp, then the spindle follows the flatter feed
ramp. Switch-off can be delayed by MP7120.2.
Example:
If spindle speed s = 1000 [rpm] = 1.8 [V], the thread ramp is 0.05 [V/ms], and the feed ramp is
steeper than 0.05 [V/ms] then:
1.8 [V]: 0.05 [V/ms] = 36 ms
The spindle is decelerated 36 ms before reaching the total hole depth. The spindle deceleration can
be delayed by the spindle slow-down time.
The restarting of the Spindle with M04 can be delayed by MP7120.0. The ramp follows MP3410.2
again. The restarting of the feed can be delayed with the dwell time which is programmed in the
cycle. The dwell times permit an optimal adjustment of the floating tap holder.
The switch-off of the spindle is again performed by the NC with M05. The switch-off ramp follows
MP3410.0. After this, the spindle is switched on again with M03.
The feed override can only be effective within limits when tapping, otherwise the floating tap holder
may be damaged. MP7110 was introduced for this limit.
MP3410.2 Ramp slope for tapping

MP7120.0 Dwell time for change of direction of spindle rotation

MP7120.2 Spindle run-on time after reaching total hole depth

MP7110.0 Minimum for feed override when tapping

MP7110.1 Maximum for feed override when tapping

Set Reset
M2048 Tapping cycle called NC NC
4-100 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-101

4.4.2 Tapping with floating tap holder and coded spindle-speed
output
The following diagram shows the sequence of events in the cycle:
Dwell time from

CYCL DEF 2.3
S
0
MP7120.1
M03
M05
MP7120.0
M04
Acknow-
ledgement
of M code
M2048
Cycle End of
start cycle
Since, when using the spindle speed output in code, the spindle- and feed ramps cannot be
synchronized by the NC, a machine parameter MP7120.1 was introduced to enable the spindle to be
switched off early. M05 is automatically output by the NC and must be acknowledged.
The machine parameter MP7120.0 (dwell time for change of direction of rotation) and the
programmable dwell time are just as effective as for analog spindle-speed output.
MP7120.1 Advanced switch time of spindle for "tapping" cycle (only active with BCD output
of spindle rpm)
4-102 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

4.4.3 Rigid tapping
Tapping without a floating tap holder is defined in the NC program by "CYCL DEF 17 RIGID
TAPPING" and called by CYCL CALL . Here too the dynamic behavior is determined by machine
parameters.
Before tapping, the axes (e.g. Z and S) are synchronized by a spindle orientation, i.e. each Z position
is assigned to a particular spindle position. This means, that the same thread can be cut more than
once. The fixed assignment of the spindle position depends on the thread pitch which is entered in
the cycle. Because of the fixed thread pitch the correlated Z-dependent spindle position can not be
altered by the operator. The thread pitch can be positive or negative.
Marker M2095 is set at the start of the cycle. With this marker the PLC program can switch on the
spindle, if required, with M03 or M04. The marker M2499 (Close control loop - S-axis) must be set to
zero in acknowledgment. Only then can the orientation take place, and spindle and tool axis move
synchronously until the cycle has been completely processed. Before orientation the NC outputs an
M05. An acknowledgment is necessary.
After this, marker M2095 is reset by the NC and the control loop is opened. The spindle position is
displayed during tapping. The ramps for the drilling process are stored in MP3410.3.
0
Positionierfenster
Positioning window
erreicht (MP7150)
reached (MP7150)
Ramp
Rampefrom
aus orientierter
Oriented Halt
stop
S MP3410.3
0
orientierter
Oriented stopHalt
M05
Acknowledge-
Rückmeldung
ment of
M-Funktion
M function
M2095
Zyklusstart
Cycle Zyklus
End of cycle
Start Ende
M2499
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-103

Machine parameters MP7130 and MP7140 were introduced so that the spindle ramp for tapping
could be better adjusted to the dynamic characteristics of the machine. Machine parameter MP7150
fixes the positioning window for the tool axis. The input value must be less than or equal to
MP1030.2.
A spindle overshoot when accelerating and running into position must be avoided at all costs.
MP7140
Greater
Smaller Greater
MP7130
Smaller
M2095 Rigid tapping is active NC NC

M2499 Open control loop S axis PLC PLC
MP3410.3 Accelerations ramp for rigid tapping

MP7130 Spindle run-in characteristic

Input value: 0.001 to 10 [°/min] (matching MP1520)
MP7140 Transient response of spindle Spindle, t on acceleration

Input value: 0.001 to 1 (matching MP1530)
MP7150 Positioning window for tool axis

MP7160 Suppression of spindle orientation at beginning of Cycle 17

Input: 0 or 1
0 = Spindle orientation is performed
1 = Spindle orientation is not performed
4-104 TNC 360 4 Spindle 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 4 Spindle 4-105

5 EMERGENCY STOP Routine
A PLC input (X42/4) and a PLC output (X21/34; in the PL400, X3/10; and in the PL 410, X8/16) with
the designation "control is ready" are available in the control for the EMERGENCY STOP routine.
If a malfunction is recognized in the control, the TNC switches the "control is ready" output off, a
flashing error message appears on the VDU screen and the PLC program is stopped. This error
message can not be canceled. After removing the fault, the switch-on routine must be gone through
again.
If the input "control is ready" is switched off by an event outside the control, the error message
External EMERGENCY STOP
is displayed and the NC sets the marker M2190 and M2191. This error message can only be
canceled after the control voltage is switched on again.
The external EMERGENCY STOP is evaluated by the control as an external stop. If the external
EMERGENCY STOP is triggered during an axis movement, the moving axis is stopped in a controlled
manner. If the drive amplifiers are blocked by the external EMERGENCY STOP, the nominal-value
output may exceed the position monitoring fixed by the machine parameter. In this case, the error
message "Positioning error" or "Gross positioning error" will be displayed.
Marker M2827 makes it possible to suppress the external EMERGENCY STOP. If marker M2827 is
set, an external EMERGENCY STOP is not sent to the NC, instead all control loops are opened and
the nominal values are immediately set to 0 V.
Set Reset
M2190 Non-flashing error message is displayed NC NC
M2191 "External EMERGENCY STOP" message

is displayed
M2827 Suppress EMERGENCY STOP, open the
control loop, NC stop PLC PLC
4-106 TNC 360 5 EMERGENCY STOP Routine 8/95

5.1 Connection diagram
Under fault conditions the "control is ready" output should switch off the 24-volt supply. Because of
the enormous importance of this function this output is tested by the control every time the mains
power is switched on.
HEIDENHAIN recommends the following wiring:
This diagram represents a proposal for circuitry. The machine tool builder is responsible for
complying with applicable safety regulations.
Logic unit
After control voltage is switched on, the switch is opened
by each microprocessor for a short time.
X21/34 X24/2 X24/1 X22/4

"Control 24V cannot 24V can be Acknowledgement
is ready" be switched switched off "Control is ready"
off
EMERGENCY STOP
buttons k1
+ -
k1
Control 24 V
voltage PLC
on K1
8/95 TNC 360 5 EMERGENCY STOP Routine 4-107

5.2 Flow diagram
The external electronics must meet the specified conditions. In particular, the acknowledgment for
"Control is ready" must reach the TNC 360 after a maximum of 146 ms.
X21/34
X22/4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VDU display
1. Wait for control voltage. RELAY EXT. DC VOLTAGE

MISSING
2. Recognize the control voltage on X22/4 and switch-off

of the "Control is ready" signal on X21/34 (t < 70 ms).
3. Maximum time during which the acknowledgment of

"control is ready" on X22/4 must go to 0 (t < 146 ms).
If exceeded EMERGENCY STOP DEFECTIVE
4. Recognize the acknowledgment and set X21/34

(t < 20 ms).
5. Wait for control voltage. RELAY EXT. DC VOLTAGE

MISSING
6. Normal control operation. Output and acknowledgment

"control is ready" are high.
7. Machine control voltage is switched off externally EMERGENCY STOP
8. After switching on the control voltage again, the

error message can be canceled, followed by
normal control operation.
9. The control switches off the output "control is ready" Flashing error-
(X21/34) after recognizing a fault. message
4-108 TNC 360 5 EMERGENCY STOP Routine 8/95

6 Display and Operation
Machine parameters and PLC markers can be used to influence the control behavior for certain
functions.
All machine parameters and PLC markers which influence the display and the operation of the
control, and for which there is no separate section in this manual, are described in section "Display
and operation" .
6.1 Machine datum

In the operating mode ”Manual operation", a workpiece datum can be defined. NC positioning
blocks normally refer to this datum. If a positioning block should be referenced to the machine
datum instead of the workpiece datum, this must be programmed in M91. On the TNC 360 the
machine datum and scale datum point (= Reference point) are identical. All REF-referenced displays
and positioning movements (PLC positioning or M91) are referenced to the machine datum.
With MP950.x you can define an additional machine-referenced position. If you wish to reference to
this position in a positioning block, you must program it in with M92. MP950.x defines the distance
from this machine-referenced position to the machine datum.
M91 and M92 are active only in the blocks in which they are programmed.
RM
RM RM
Workpiece datum Machine datum
Scale reference point RM = Reference mark
8/95 TNC 360 6 Display and Operation 4-109

MP950 Datum point for positioning blocks with M92
Input range: –30 000.000 to +30 000.000 [mm] or [°]
Values referenced to the machine datum
MP950.0 X axis
MP950.1 Y axis
MP950.2 Z axis
MP950.3 4th axis
4-110 TNC 360 6 Display and Operation 8/95

✎

6.2 Graphic simulation
To check for errors, the execution of part programs can be graphically simulated on the basis of a
programmed blank form. It is possible to choose between three different graphics display modes.
The graphics display on the VDU screen can be altered by machine parameters.
The following alterations are possible:
The 3-plane display mode can be produced according to either European or American convention.
Preferred European Preferred American
Example:
The coordinate system can be rotated by +90° in the machining plane

This is useful when, for instance, the Y axis is fixed as the tool axis.
X Z
Z X
No rotation Rotation by +90°
MP 7310 Graphics display

Input range: 0 to 3
Bit 0 Changeover of
3-plane display + 0 = European convention
+ 1 = American convention
Bit 1 Rotation of the coordinate system
in the machining plane by + 90° + 0 = no rotation
+ 2 = coordinate system rotated by +90°

6.3 Status display
6.3.1 Position display

The display step for the axis positions can be selected for specific axes by machine parameter
MP7290. Regardless of this selection the programming and positioning of the axis position is always
carried out to 0.001 mm or 0.001° precisely.
The input resolution of the TNC 360 is 0.001 mm or 0.001°.
The most recently selected axis is displayed inversely. The PLC is informed (by a marker) which axis
has an inverse display. This information can be evaluated, for example, in connection with hand-
control equipment.
Machine parameter MP7285 can be used to select whether, in the positional display, the tool axis
takes account of the tool length or not.
MP7285 Calculation of the tool length in the position display of the tool axis
Input value: 0 or 1
0 = tool length ignored

1 = tool length taken into account
MP7290 Position display step

Input values: 0 to 4
0 = 0.001 mm or 0.001°
1 = 0.005 mm or 0.005°
2 = 0.010 mm or 0.010°
3 = 0.050 mm or 0.050°
4 = 0.100 mm or 0.100°
M2096 X key last pressed NC NC

M2097 Y key last pressed
M2098 Z key last pressed
M2099 Key IV last pressed

6.3.2 Display mode and traverse direction for rotary axes
Machine parameter MP7470 determines the traverse direction for absolute positioning and the
display mode for rotary axes.
– Display from +0 to +359.999°: After a full turn the display value jumps back to 0°. In this
operating mode it is not possible to set software limit switches.
During absolute programmed movements of rotary axes (including PLC positioning) the table now
takes the shortest path to the target position, provided that Bit 1 of MP 7470 is set. For
incrementally programmed movements, however, the table moves according to the sign of the
programmed value.
– Display from –30 000° to +30 000°: In this operating mode software limit switches may be
entered. Absolute positional values from – 30 000° to + 30 000° can be programmed (166
revolutions).
MP7470 Display mode for rotary axis

Bit 0: +0 = 0 to + 359.999° (no software limit switches)

+1 = –30 000° to +30 000° (software limit switches active)
Bit 1: +0 = Absolute positioning of rotary axes takes the programmed direction to

the target position
+2 = Absolute positioning of rotary axes takes the shortest direction to the
target position

6.3.3 Feed rate setting, feed rate display
In the operating modes "Program run, single block" and "Program run, full sequence" the pro-
grammed contour feed rate is displayed when the feed potentiometer is in the 100 % position. The
feed potentiometer can be used to vary this programmed feed rate from 0 to 150 %.
With the feed rate potentiometer the feed rate can be changed to 0% to 150% of the programmed
feed rate.
The override values are shown in the PLC in word W766 and W494. If the PLC program overwrites a
value in W766, it will become active regardless of the potentiometer setting. W766 must be
overwritten in every PLC scan, since otherwise the normal feed rate would become effective again.
The value range is 0 to 150 in 1% increments, for nonlinear curves it is 0 to 15 000, corresponding to
0 to 150%.
To adjust the override values for auxiliary axes (PLC axes) see PLC module 9124.
With the Doubleword D596 the PLC can limit the maximum possible feed rate by entering a feed
rate value. The new feed rate becomes effective immediately.
In order to ensure compatibility with previous PLC programs, the Doubleword D596 is give the
default value 300 000 mm/min when the control is switched on or after an interruption of the PLC
scan, so that the maximum feed rate from the machine parameter becomes effective. With
"Tapping" (Cycle 2) and "Rigid tapping" (Cycle 17), the Doubleword D596 has no effect.
In the manual operating modes the axis feed rate is displayed, not the contour feed rate. There is a
choice of two display modes:
– The axis-specific feed rate from machine parameter MP1020.X is only displayed after pressing
an axis-direction key. If two axis-direction keys are pressed simultaneously no feed rate will be
shown.
– Even when none of the axis-direction keys is operated one feed rate will be displayed, which
can also be adjusted by the feed potentiometer. The smallest feed rate from MP 1020.X is valid
for all axes. The axis feed rate will also be shown if several axis-direction keys are pressed
simultaneously.
MP7270 Display of the feed-rates in manual operating modes (Manual operation,

Electronic handwheel)
Input value: 0 or 1
0 = Display of the axis feed rate only when an axis-direction key is pressed
axis-specific feed from MP1020.x)
1 = Display of the axis feed rate before operating an axis-direction key
(smallest value from MP1020.x for all axes)

MP7620 Feed rate override
Input: 0 to 7
Bit 0 Feed rate override if rapid traverse key is pressed in

a "Program run" mode
+0 = Override not effective
+1 = Override effective
Bit 2 Feed rate override if rapid traverse key and
machine axis direction key are pressed in the
"Manual" mode
+0 = Override not effective
+4 = Override effective
Bit 3 Spindle and feed rate override
in 1% increments or according to
a nonlinear curve
+0 = 1% increments
+8 = Nonlinear curve
W494 % factor – feed rate override (NC → PLC)

W766 % factor – feed rate override (PLC → NC)
D596 Feed rate from PLC for feed rate limiting

6.3.4 Display of M functions
The miscellaneous functions for control of the spindle (M03, M04, M05) and the coolant (M08, M09)
are displayed in the status display. The display of these M functions is controlled by the PLC, i.e. the
machine tool builder must take this into account when creating the PLC program. The markers
M2485 and M2486 also change the polarity of the analog voltage for the spindle. M2608 switches
off the analog output for the spindle. The programmed spindle speed is, however, still displayed (see
section "Spindle").
M2485 Status display and sign of S analog for M03 PLC PLC
M2486 Status display and sign of S analog for M04
M2487 Status display for M05 and spindle stop
M2508 Status display M08 or M09

0 = Status display M09
M2608 Status display M03, M04, M05 inverse and

S analog output = 0V
M2609 Status display M08, M09 inverse
6.3.5 Display of run duration

The TNC has three timers that measure the duration in seconds of the following states:
– Control (dialog "Control on")
– Program run (dialog "Program run")
– Spindle (dialog "Spindle on")
Control on
This timer starts with the first PLC run after the control reset.
Program run
This timer measures the duration of program run (see User's Manual TNC 360).
Spindle
The spindle operating time starts when the Markers M2485/M2486 are set and stops when they are
reset.
Display of run duration

The three timers can be called by entering the code number 85 7282 (see User's Manual TNC 360)
and can then be reset, depending on MP 7235.
Resetting the run duration timers

All timers are kept in the battery-buffered RAM and are reset after the error message "Operation
parameters erased."

The machine parameter MP 7235 allows a specific resetting of the run duration timers.
MP7235 Resetting the timing

Input value: 0 to 7
Bit 0 Run time – Control on

+0 cannot be reset
+1 can be reset
Bit 1 Run time – Program run

+0 cannot be reset
+2 can be reset
Bit 2 Run time – Spindle

+0 cannot be reset
+4 can be reset
It is not possible to reset a timer during a program run.
6.3.6 Control is operational

If the control is operational, i.e. a positioning or M function is performed, the status window displays
a large asterisk "*". If a current NC program is interrupted with the external stop key, a "*" will flash
in the status display. This information is transmitted to the PLC through the markers M2183 and
M2184. M2183 and M2184 are effective in the operating modes "Positioning with MDI", "Program
run, single block" and "Program run, full sequence."
Set Reset
M2183 Program interruption (display "Control is ready" NC NC

flashes)
M2184 Control is ready ("Control is ready" display

goes on or flashes)

6.3.7 Cancel status display
A machine parameter can be used to decide whether the status display should be reset and the
contents of the Q parameters and the tool data erased with the M functions M02 and M30, as well
as with NC block "END PGM" and the selection of a program. All the programmed values in the
status display, e.g. tool number, tool length, tool radius, scaling factor, datum shift, feed rate etc. will
then be reset. The Q parameters will all be set to 0.
MP7300 Cancel status display, Q parameters, and tool data

Input value: 0 to 7
0 = Cancel status display, Q parameters and tool data when a program is

selected
1 = Cancel the status display, Q parameters and tool data with M02, M30, END
PGM and when a program is selected.
2 = Cancel the status display and tool data when a program is selected
3 = Cancel the status display and tool data with M02, M30, END PGM and when
a program is selected
4 = Cancel the status display and Q parameters when a program is selected
5 = Cancel the status display and Q parameters with M02, M30, END PGM
and when a program is selected
6 = Cancel the status display when a program is selected
7 = Cancel the status display with M02, M30, END PGM and when a program is
selected
6.3.8 Expanded spindle display

A moving bar diagram with the dialog "Spindle power" can be added beneath the status display. The
selected gear range can be shown in the status display next to the spindle speed (e.g.: S1000/2).
With machine parameter MP7274 the display of the current gear range can be selected through the
bit.
Bit 1 determines whether information necessary for spindle power display is measured directly
through the analog input at connector X8 (0 to 4.999 V) or through the PLC Word W600.
In machine parameter MP7275 the reference value of the spindle power is enter at 100%. This
results from the maximum value to be acquired and the maximum percentage factor to be shown.
Maximum value to be aquired

MP7275 = x 100
Maximum percentage factor to be displayed

MP7274 Expanded spindle display
Bit 0 Display of current gear range +0 = No display

+1 = Display
Bit 1 Display of spindle power +0 = Acquisition via analog input
(Value range 0 to 4.999 [V])
+2 = Acquisition via PLC Word W600
(Value range 0 to 65.535)
MP7275 Reference value of displayed spindle power

for acquisition via analog input
Input range: 0 to 4.999 [V]
for acquisition via PLC Word W600

Input range: 0 to 43 690
MP7275 Value for spindle power display
Example 1: Acquisition via analog input
A voltage of 0 to 4.999 volts is acquired via analog input. The spindle power should be displayed
between 0 and 150 %.
0 [V] 3.333 [V] 4.999 [V]

_________________________________________________ _______________
  
0% 100 % 150 %
Example 2: Acquisition via PLC Word W600
The information needed to display the spindle power is acquired through the 8 PLC inputs I100 to
I107. Values between 0 and 127 can be acquired. You wish to display the spindle power between 0
and 150 %. The reference value at 100% results as follows:
127
x 100 = 84.66
150
The information is to be evaluated and displayed through the word W600:

Machine parameters:
MP7274 = 2
MP7275 = 85
PLC Program:
.
.
.
LW I100 ;Read in the status of the PLC inputs I100 to I107.
A K+255 ;Evaluate only the lower 8 bits (PLC inputs)
= W600 ;and transfer for the spindle power display.

6.3.9 Generating NC blocks with the actual-position-capture key
MP7225 was introduced to permit automatic generation of NC blocks in the "Programming and
editing" mode of operation. In plain language dialog (not in ISO programming), the actual-position-
capture key can generate a positioning block with up to 3 axes, without feed rate, radius
compensation or M functions. This positioning block is inserted behind the block currently selected
in the "Programming and editing" mode. The actual positions are transferred to memory as nominal
position values. The axis is selected with the dialog "AXIS SELECTION" in the MOD mode of
operation. Here up to 3 of 4 axes can be selected by pressing the desired axis keys.
The PLC marker M2829 can also generate a block. The marker is reset by the NC.
MP 7225 Generating blocks with the "ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE" key

Input: 0 to 3
0 = no block generation possible
1 = block generation with the "ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE" key
2 = block generation with M2829
Set Reset
M2829 NC block generation PLC NC
6.4 PLC text window

The PLC can display a text above the status line for the circle center. The text length is 16
characters or 32 small characters.
Word W602 causes the text to be displayed.
W 602 A text is displayed in the PLC text window

Bit 0 to 7: Number of PLC error text/dialog
(0 to 199)
Bit 8 to 11: 0000 = Erase display
0001 = Normal display
1111= Inverse display
Bit 12 to 13: 00 = Erase display
01 = Display with small characters
10 = Display with normal characters
Bit 14 to 15: reserved
The text display for PLC Trace (PCTR) was placed up next to * for “Control in operation“ if the actual
value display is small.
6.5 Error messages

Under certain conditions error messages from the NC or the PLC will be displayed on the screen
under the display for the operating mode. Non-flashing error messages can be canceled with the CE
key. In the event of a flashing error message the machine must be switched off and the fault
corrected. If a non-flashing error message is displayed on the screen, marker M2190 will be set.
The machine tool builder determines the conditions under which the PLC will produce error
messages. Up to 100 different PLC error messages can be generated.

The dialogs for PLC error messages can be determined by the manufacturer of the machine. Please
contact HEIDENHAIN about this. The standard version has dialogs with the reserved designations
"PLC: ERROR 0" to "PLC: ERROR 99". These PLC error messages can be activated by the PLC
markers M2924 to M3023.
The error messages can be canceled either by pressing the CE key or by resetting the appropriate
markers.
If several PLC error messages are activated simultaneously, they can be read out one after another
by pressing the CE key.
If the program run is to be stopped on output of a PLC error message, this must be explicitly
programmed in the PLC program (NC STOP).
In order to show a PLC error message as a flashing message, the marker M2815 must also be set.
If marker M2815 is set, but none of the 100 PLC error messages is activated, then the flashing error
message "EMERGENCY STOP PLC" will be displayed.
If, for some reason, the display of the PLC error message is not wanted in the field under the
operating-mode display, the message can also be displayed in the PLC window.
M2815 Flashing PLC error message PLC PLC
M2190 Non-flashing error message NC NC
M2924 PLC error message 0 PLC NC;PLC

M2925 PLC error message 1



✎

6.6 Cycles
The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls permit calling HEIDENHAIN standard cycles within the NC
program (e.g.. pecking, tapping, pocket milling etc.).
In addition, the machine tool builder can program manufacturer cycles and store them in the control
(see chapter "OEM cycles"). The sequence of some cycles can be altered by machine parameters
and PLC markers.
The description of the "Tapping" and "Spindle orientation" cycles can be found in the section
"Spindle."
6.6.1 Cycle inhibit

Machine parameter MP7245 can be used to selectively inhibit the HEIDENHAIN standard cycles.
MP7245.0 Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN Cycles 1 to 15

Bit 1 Cycle 1 + 0 = enable

+ 2 = inhibit
+ 4 = inhibit
+ 8 = inhibit
+ 16 = inhibit
+ 32 = inhibit
+ 64 = inhibit
+ 128 = inhibit
+ 256 = inhibit
+ 512 = inhibit
+ 1024 = inhibit
+ 2048 = inhibit
+ 4096 = inhibit
+ 8192 = inhibit
+ 16 384 = inhibit
+ 32 768 = inhibit

MP7245.1 Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN standard cycles 16 to 31

+ 1 = inhibit
+ 2 = inhibit
+ 4 = inhibit
+ 8 = inhibit
+ 16 = inhibit
+ 32 = inhibit
+ 64 = inhibit
+ 128 = inhibit
+ 256 = inhibit
+ 512 = inhibit
+ 1024 = inhibit
+ 2048 = inhibit
+ 4096 = inhibit
+ 8192 = inhibit
+ 16 384 = inhibit
+ 32 768 = inhibit

6.6.2 Pocket milling
The overlap factor for clearing out a rectangular or circular pocket ( Cycle 4 and Cycle 5) can be
altered by machine parameters.
Stepover
Stepover = (MP7430) x cutter radius
MP7430 Overlap factor for pocket milling

Input range: 0.1 to 1.414
6.6.3 Milling cycles for pockets with free-programmed contours

The sequence for milling cycles for pockets with free programmed contours (Cycles 6, 14, 15, 16)
can be changed by machine parameters.
The choices are:
– Whether a channel should first be milled around the contour and the pocket cleared out afterwards,
or the pocket cleared out first, and then a channel milled round the contour.
– Whether the channel should be milled in a clockwise or anti-clockwise direction.
– Under which conditions programmed pockets should be merged. The choice is between:
merging programmed pockets when the programmed contours overlap, or when the tool center
paths intersect.
– Whether the channel milling should be performed in one operation for all stepovers, or whether
for each peck depth channel milling and clearing out should be performed alternately.
The programmed contours of two pockets have a small overlap.

MP7420 Bit 2 = 0 (entry +0):
The control clears out the pockets separately, since the tool center paths do not intersect.
Material will remain in inside corners.
MP7420 Bit 2 = 1 (entry +4):

The control clears out the pockets jointly, since the programmed contours overlap. No material will
remain in inside corners.
MP7420 Cycles for milling pockets with free programmed contours.

Bit 0 Direction for channel milling +0= Anti-clockwise channel milling of the pocket
contours, clockwise for islands
+1= Clockwise channel milling of the pocket
contours, anti-clockwise for islands
Bit 1 Sequence for clearing +0= First channel milling, then clear out pocket
and channel milling +2= First clear out pocket , then channel milling
Bit 2 Merge programmed +0= Contours merged only if the tool center paths
contours intersect
+4= Contours merged if the programmed contours
overlap
Bit 3 Clearing out and channel +0= Clearing out and channel milling performed in
milling to pocket one operation for all depths
depth, or for each +8= For each peck, first perform channel milling,
infeed depth and then clearing out (depending on Bit 1)
before next peck

6.6.4 Scaling factor
Machine parameters can be used to decide whether the "Scaling factor" cycle only operates in the
machining plane or also parallel to the tool axis.
MP7410 "Scaling factor" cycle active in two or three axes

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Cycle "Scaling factor" operates in all three principle axes

1 = Cycle "Scaling factor" only operates in the machining plane

✎

6.7 File types
With the TNC it is possible to process different types of file with the file management. The types of
file are designated by an extension after the names.
- HEIDENHAIN dialog programs

- ISO programs
ISO files are indicated by the file name extension ISO.
6.7.1 File types – disable

MP7222 determines whether the TNC executes HEIDENHAIN dialog or ISO programs.
This selection can be made either through the MOD functions (see User's Manual for the TNC 360)
or the corresponding file types are disabled directly. If the ISO programming is activated via MOD
functions, marker M2060 is set.
If a file type is disabled all files of that type are erased.
MP7222 Programming language selection: dialog or ISO

Input: 0 to 2
0 = Selection via MOD function

1 = Programming in HEIDENHAIN dialog
2 = Programming in ISO
Set Reset
M2060 ISO programming is selected NC NC
6.7.2 Block numbers - step size for ISO programs

The block-number step size for ISO programs can be fixed by a machine parameter.
MP7220 Block-number step size for ISO programs

6.8 User parameters

With the MOD function up to 16 different machine parameters can be made accessible to the
machine operator as User parameters. The machine manufacturer determines in machine parameter
MP7330.x which machine parameters are to be defined as User parameters. If, for example, you
wish to define MP5030.1 as the first user parameter, you must enter the value 5030.01 in MP
7330.0.

If a User parameter is selected by the operator, a dialog appears on the screen. Machine parameter
MP7340.x determines which dialog should be displayed.
The dialog is taken from the PLC error file (input 0 to 99) or from the dialog file (100 to 199).
MP7330 Determination of the User Parameters

Input range: 0 to 9999.00 (No. of the desired machine parameter).
MP7330.0 User parameter 0

. .
. .
MP7340 Dialogs for User Parameters

Input range:0 to 199 (line number of the PLC dialog)
MP7340.0 Dialog for User parameter 0

. .
. .
6.9 Code numbers

The MOD functions can be used to enter code numbers for the control. These code numbers can be
used to activate certain control functions.
The following code numbers have a fixed meaning:
Code number Function
95 148 Select machine parameter list

807 667 Select PLC mode
105 296 Correction tables for the nonlinear axis-error compensation
86 357 Remove program protection
75 368 Automatic offset adjustment
123 Select the user-available list of machine parameters
531 210 Erase markers M1000 to M2000 and Byte 0 to Byte 127
Special function:
Switch-on the control while pressing the MOD key, then enter the code number.
The entire contents of the RAM memory (MPs, NC programs, PLC programs, all
markers, all bytes) are erased.
857 282 Clock displays

6.10 Programming station
Machine parameters can be used to set the control so that it can be utilized without a machine tool
as a programming station, without the machine. In this setting only the operating modes
"Programming and editing" and "Test run" function. It is possible to select whether the PLC should be
active or not in the "programming station" setting.
MP7210 Programming station

Entry: 0 = Control and programming

1 = Programming station, "PLC active"
2 = Programming station, "PLC inactive"
6.11 Dialog language

The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls are available in ten different dialog languages, see chapter
"Introduction." The dialog language can be altered by a simple software exchange. English, as a
basic language, is stored in every control as a second language and can be selected by machine
parameter.
If the basic language English has been selected, then marker M2041 is set by the NC.
MP7230 Switching the dialog language

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = First dialog language

1 = Basic language - English
M 2041 Basic language - English is selected NC NC
6.12 Decimal sign

The decimal sign can be selected by machine parameter.
MP7280 Decimal sign

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Decimal comma
1 = Decimal point

6.13 Memory test
A machine parameter can be used to select if the RAM and the EPROM memory areas should be
tested upon switching on the control.
MP7690 Memory test at switch-on

Input range: 0 to 3
Bit 0 RAM test + 0 = Memory test at switch-on

+ 1 = No memory test at switch-on
Bit 1 EPROM test + 0 = Memory test at switch-on
6.14 End of program run

In the operating modes "Program run, single block" or "Program run, full sequence", if the end of the
program is reached, the NC sets the marker M2061. This marker is only reset at the start of the next
program.
The information "End of program" can be evaluated by the PLC. This is necessary when operating,
for instance, with a pallet changer.
Set Reset
M2061 END PGM, M02 or M30 has been executed NC NC
6.15 Overwrite Q parameters overwriting

The values in the Q Parameters Q100 to Q107 can be overwritten by the PLC. In this way
information from the PLC can be transferred to the machining program.
The value which is to be transferred is stored in Doubleword D528. The Q parameter which is to be
overwritten is defined in Word W516. The transfer is initiated by the strobe marker M2713.
The Doubleword D528 has a multiple usage. See also sections "PLC positioning" and "Datum shift."
W516 Number of the Q parameter to be overwritten

(Q100 to Q107 = 0 to 7)
D528 Value to be transferred to the Q Parameter
Set Reset
M2713 Activate the transfer of the value from D528 to the PLC NC
Q Parameter defined in W516

✎

7 M Functions
Up to 100 miscellaneous functions (M functions) can be programmed in HEIDENHAIN contouring
controls. The code for these M functions is transferred to the PLC either before or after execution
of the NC block. A number of these M functions have a fixed meaning for the NC. These M
functions are marked with * in the following table. The other M functions are freely assignable.
M func- Effective at: M func- Effective at: M func- Effective at:

tion Beginn- End of tion Beginn- End of tion Beginn- End of
ing of block ing of block ing of block
block- block block
* M 00 ● M 34 ● M 68 ●
M 01 ● M 35 ● M 69 ●
* M 02 ● M 36 ● M 70 ●
* M 03 ● M 37 ● M 71 ●
* M 04 ● M 38 ● M 72 ●
* M 05 ● M 39 ● M 73 ●
1
M 06 ● M 40 ● M 74 ●
M 07 ● M 41 ● M 75 ●
* M 08 ● M 42 ● M 76 ●
* M 09 ● M 43 ● M 77 ●
M 10 ● M 44 ● M 78 ●
M 11 ● M 45 ● M 79 ●
M 12 ● M 46 ● M 80 ●
* M 13 ● M 47 ● M 81 ●
* M 14 ● M 48 ● M 82 ●
M 15 ● M 49 ● M 83 ●
M 16 ● M 50 ● M 84 ●
M 17 ● M 51 ● M 85 ●
M 18 ● M 52 ● M 86 ●
M 19 ● M 53 ● M 87 ●
M 20 ● M 54 ● M 88 ●
1
M 21 ● M 55 ● M 89 ●
M 22 ● M 56 ● * M 90 ●
M 23 ● M 57 ● * M 91 ●
M 24 ● M 58 ● * M 92 ●
M 25 ● M 59 ● M 93 ●
M 26 ● M 60 ● * M 94 ●
M 27 ● M 61 ● M 95 ●
M 28 ● M 62 ● M 96 ●
M 29 ● M 63 ● * M 97 ●
* M 30 ● M 64 ● * M 98 ●
M 31 ● M 65 ● * M 99 ●
M 32 ● M 66 ●
M 33 ● M 67 ●
1 Function is dependent on machine parameter M7440
8/95 TNC 360/TNC 335 7 M Functions 4-137

The evaluation of the M function must be programmed in the PLC. When transferring an M function
to the PLC the code for the M function is stored in Word W260 and the strobe marker M2045 is set.
The execution of the M function must be signaled to the NC by setting the markers M2482. The
next NC block is only processed when the signal is acknowledged and the marker M2045 (strobe
signal for M function) is reset by the NC. The M functions M00 to M99 can also be decoded and
transferred to the markers M1900 to M1999. This function is activated by the marker M2496. The
decoded output is retained for reasons of compatibility. However, HEIDENHAIN recommends M
code evaluation using Word W260.
Set Reset
W260 Code for M function NC
Set Reset
M2045 Strobe signal for M function NC NC

M2482 Acknowledgment of M function, acknowledgment of PLC PLC
M2496 Enable marker for the decoded M code- PLC PLC

transfer to markers M1900 to M1999
M1900 Miscellaneous function M00 NC NC

. .
. .
. .
4-138 TNC 360 7 M Functions 8/95

Example:
Evaluation of the miscellaneous function M03 in the PLC.
PLC output: O10 = Spindle ON/OFF
PLC input: I10 = Acknowledgment of M function
100 LN M1
101 S M1 ;Generate one
.
.
199 L M2045 ;Strobe signal for M function
200 RN M2482 ;Reset acknowledgment of M function
201 CMT 77 ;Evaluation of M function
.
.
901 EM
902 LBL 77
903 CASE W260 ;M code?
904 CM0
905 CM1
906 CM2
907 CM3
.
.
930 ENDC
931 EM
.
.
1170 LBL 3 ;M function M03
1171 L M1
1172 S M2485 ;Status display M03, algebraic sign S analog
1173 R M2486 ;Reset M04
1174 R M2487 ;Reset M05
1175 S O10 ;Spindle ON
1176 L I10 ;Input for acknowledgment of M function?
1177 EM
M2045
M2485
O10
I10
M2482
8/95 TNC 360 7 M Functions 4-139

7.1 Program halt on M functions
Normally, when an M function is produced, the program run in the operating modes "Program
run/full sequence" and "Program run/single block" is interrupted until the PLC acknowledges that the
M function has been performed.
For some applications this can be disadvantageous (e.g. laser cutting machines). In such applications
the program should be executed continuously and not wait for the acknowledgment of the M
function. This function can be selected by machine parameter MP7440, Bit 2. If this function is
selected then PLC positioning, datum correction, spindle orientation or limit switch range change are
all not permitted during the output of the M function.
This function must not be used for milling machines and boring machines.
7.2 Program halt on M06

According to ISO 6983, the M function M06 means a tool change. Machine parameter MP7440, Bit
0 can be used to select whether on transferring M06 to the PLC the program should halt. If the
control is set so that a program halt occurs on M06 then the program must be restarted after the
tool change. This can also be carried out directly by the PLC.
7.3 M function M89

The M function M89 can be used for the modal cycle call. The possibilities for calling a cycle are:
– With the NC block "CYCL CALL".
– With the miscellaneous function M99. M99 is only effective for a single block and must
be reprogrammed for each execution.
– With the miscellaneous function M89 (depending on the machine parameter).
M89 as a cycle call is modally effective, i.e. for every following positioning block
there will be a call of the last programmed machining cycle. M89 is canceled by M99 or
a CYCL CALL block.
If M89 is not defined as a modal Cycle call by machine parameters, then M89 will be transferred
to the PLC as a normal M function at the beginning of the block.
MP7440 Output of M functions

Input range: 0 to 7
Bit 0 Program halt on M06 + 0 = Program halt on M06

+ 1 = No program halt on M06
Bit 1 modal cycle call M89 + 0 = Normal code transfer of
M89 at beginning of block
+ 2 = modal cycle call M89 at end of block
Bit 2 Program halt on + 0 = Program halt until
M functions acknowledgment of M function
+ 4 = No program halt
do not wait for acknowledgment
4-140 TNC 360 7 M Functions 8/95

8 Key Simulation
The HEIDENHAIN contouring control is operated through the keys on the TNC keyboard (TE 355)
and the manufacturer's own machine control panel. The two control panels are joined to connectors
X23 and X27 on the logic unit by a connecting cable (see Chapter "Mounting and electrical
installation ").
The key code from the TNC keyboard is directly evaluated by the NC. PLC inputs and outputs for the
machine control panel are available on connector X27 . These PLC inputs and outputs must be
evaluated by the PLC and the appropriate information passed to the NC.
8.1 TNC keyboard

The key code from the TNC keyboard is directly evaluated by the NC.
All keys on the TNC keyboard can be inhibited by the PLC with M2855 to M2923. If an inhibited key
is pressed, the NC sets the marker M2182 and stores the corresponding key code in Word W274.
The PLC must reset the marker M2182 after evaluating this information.
The keys on the TNC keyboard can also be simulated by the PLC. To achieve, this the appropriate
key code is entered in Word W516 and activated by the strobe marker M2813. After execution of
the key code the NC resets the strobe marker M2813. For a key simulation the operating mode can
be taken from W272.
Set Reset
W272 Operating mode NC NC

4 = Program run/single block
5 = Program run/full sequence
6 = Test run
7 = Pass over reference point
W274 Key code for the operated, inhibited key, NC NC
Signal via M2182
W516 Word with multiple function PLC PLC
Key code for simulation of TNC keys
Activate with M2813
S R
M2182 Inhibited key was operated NC PLC

M2813 Activate the key from W516 PLC NC
8/95 TNC 360 8 Key Simulation 4-141

Marker Function Key code Set Reset
M2855 PGM
NR
inhibit 59 PLC PLC
M2856 L inhibit 60 PLC PLC
RND
M2857 inhibit 61 PLC PLC
CC
C
M2862 MOD inhibit 66 PLC PLC
M2863 P inhibit 67 PLC PLC
PGM
M2865 CALL
inhibit 69 PLC PLC
CR
4-142 TNC 360 8 Key Simulation 8/95

M2873 CT inhibit 77 PLC PLC
M2874 TOUCH
PROBE inhibit 78 PLC PLC
TOOL
M2880 DEF
inhibit 84 PLC PLC
TOOL
M2881 CALL
inhibit 85 PLC PLC
M2882 R-L inhibit 86 PLC PLC
M2883 R+R inhibit 87 PLC PLC
CYCL
M2887 DEF
inhibit 91 PLC PLC
CYCL
M2888 CALL
inhibit 92 PLC PLC
LBL
M2889 SET
inhibit 93 PLC PLC
LBL
M2890 CALL
inhibit 94 PLC PLC

M2891 NO
ENT
inhibit 95 PLC PLC
M2892 STOP inhibit 96 PLC PLC
M2893 EXT inhibit 97 PLC PLC
CL
M2894 PGM
inhibit 98 PLC PLC
DEL
M2897 ENT inhibit 101 PLC PLC
GOTO
M2900 Q inhibit 104 PLC PLC

DEF
M2901 CE inhibit 105 PLC PLC
M2902 IV inhibit 106 PLC PLC
M2903 Z inhibit 107 PLC PLC
M2904 Y inhibit 108 PLC PLC
M2905 X inhibit 109 PLC PLC
M2906 Q inhibit 110 PLC PLC

M2907 0 inhibit 111 PLC PLC
END
M2920 +/ inhibit 124 PLC PLC
M2916 MOD inhibit 120 PLC PLC
M2917 BLK
FORM
inhibit 121 PLC PLC

M2918 MAGN inhibit 122 PLC PLC
M2919 START inhibit 123 PLC PLC
Example:
If the "Position transfer" key is pressed in the operating mode "Positioning with manual entry" , a
linear NC block with all three principal coordinates (X, Y, Z) is to be generated.
66 CASE W272 ;Interrogate - operating mode

. . .
70 CM 3 ;Positioning with manual entry
. . .
75 ENDC
. . .
1102 EM ;End main program
1103 LBL 3 ;Operating mode: Positioning with manual entry

1104 L M10 ;Key simulation active?
1105 SN M2896 ;No, then disable "Positions-transfer" key
1106 L M2182 ;Disabled key operated?
1107 CMT 31 ;Yes, then call key simulation
1108 EM
1109 LBL 31 ;Key simulation

1110 L M10 ;Key simulation active?
1111 R M2896 ;Yes, then enable "Positions-transfer" key
1112 SN M10 ;Otherwise set key simulation active
1113 CASE B200 ;Perform single step
1114 CM 130 ;Key L(line)
1115 CM 131 ;Key X
1116 CM 132 ;Key "Position transfer"
1117 CM 133 ;Key Y
1119 CM 134 ;Key Z
1121 CM 135 ;Key "END BLOCK"
1122 CM 141 ;Reset key simulation
1123 ENDC
1124 EM
1125 LBL 130 ;L(ine)

1126 L K60 ;Key code for L(ine)
1127 = W102
1128 CM 136 ;Simulate key
1129 EM
1130 LBL 131 ;X

1131 L K109 ;Key code for X
1132 = W102
1134 EM
1135 LBL 132 ;"Position transfer"

1136 L K100 ;Key code for "Position transfer"
1137 = W102
1139 EM
1140 LBL 133 ;Y

1141 L K108 ;Key code for Y
1142 = W 102
1144 EM
1145 LBL 134 ;Z

1146 L K107 ;Key code for Z
1147 = W102
1149 EM
1150 LBL 135 ;"END BLOCK"

1151 L K119 ;Key code for "END BLOCK"
1152 = W102
1154 EM

1156 L M2813 ;Strobe key transfer from W516
1157 JPT 137 ;Still set, then wait
1158 L B200 ;Case byte
1159 + K+1
1160 = B200 ;Increment case byte
1161 L W102 ;Buffered key code
1162 = W516 ;To NC
1163 LN M2813
1164 S M2813 ;Set strobe (activate simulation)
1165 EM
1166 LBL 137 ;Return marker

1167 EM
1168 LBL 141 ;End key simulation

1169 L M2813 ;Simulation performed?
1170 JPT 137 ;No, then wait
1171 L K+0
1172 = B200 ;Reset step counter
1173 L M10
1174 R M10 ;Reset marker "Key simulation active"
1175 R M2182 ;Reset marker "Disabled key operated"
1176 EM

✎

8.2 Machine control panel
A manufacturer's specific machine control panel can be connected to the HEIDENHAIN contouring
controls. See Chapter "Mounting and electrical installation".
24 PLC inputs (I 128 to I 151) and 8 PLC outputs (O 0 to O 7) are available on the female connector
X27 for the evaluation of the keys on the machine control panel. The evaluation of the signals from
the machine control panel must be performed in the PLC program. The appropriate markers will be
set thereby. For safety reasons a complement marker must be reset when some functions are
activated. This is especially so for keys with several contacts. If the complement marker is not
properly set or reset, the flashing error message "Error in PLC program" will appear. The displayed
code identifies the marker where the error has occurred.
An axis direction key which has been operated can be stored by marker M2450 (Complement
marker M2466) . This means that the axis will be traversed until NC STOP occurs. This memory
function must be activated by machine parameter MP7680 Bit 0.
MP7680 - Memory function for axis-direction keys, memory function for

Input: 0 or 1
+ 0 = Not stored
+ 1 = Stored
Marker Function Error Set Reset

message
M2448 NC start (edge evaluation) 1A PLC PLC

M2464 Complement NC start
M2449 Rapid traverse 1B

M2465 Complement – rapid traverse
M2488 NC stop (“0” signifies stop) –
M2450 Memory function for axis-direction keys 1C

M2466 Complement – memory function for axis-
direction keys
M2451 Feed release for all axes 1D

M2467 Complement – feed release
M2456 Manual traverse X+ 1I

M2472 Complement - manual traverse X+
M2457 Manual traverse X- 1J

M2473 Complement - manual traverse X-
M2458 Manual traverse Y+ 1K

M2474 Complement - manual traverse Y+
M2459 Manual traverse Y- 1L

M2475 Complement - manual traverse Y-

Marker Function Error Set Reset
message
M2460 Manual traverse Z+ 1M PLC PLC
M2476 Complement - manual traverse Z+
M2461 Manual traverse Z- 1N

M2477 Complement - manual traverse Z-
M2462 Manual traverse 4+ 1O

M2478 Complement - manual traverse 4+
M2463 Manual traverse 4- 1P

M2479 Complement - manual traverse 4-
Marker for spindle control: see Section "Main spindle".
Example:
NC start key with two contacts I 128 and I 129
axis-direction key X+ with one contact I 130
.
71 L I128 ;First contact NC start key
72 = M2448 ;NC start
73 LN I129 ;Second contact NC start key
74 = M2464 ;Complement – NC start
.
100 L I130 ;Axis-direction key X+
101 = M2456 ;Manual traverse X+
102 LN I130
103 = M2472 ;Complement - manual traverse X+
.

9 Touch Probe
The 3-D TS Touch Probes by HEIDENHAIN are available in two versions:
- TS 120 with cable transmission and integrated interface electronics,
- TS 511 with infrared transmission of the switch signal and connected by a separate interface
electronics unit (APE).
The chapter "Mounting and electrical installation" contains instructions for connecting the touch
probes.
9.1 Interfacing the touch probe

Machine parameter MP6010 is used to select either touch probe TS 120 or TS 511. The machine
tool manufacturer must ensure that the spindle is interlocked when the touch probe is in use.
The touch probe can be controlled either with the probing cycles in the "Manual" and "Electronic
Handwheel" modes or by the "Touch Probe" function in the NC program (see TNC 360 User's
Manual). The touch probe is interfaced to the measuring conditions using machine parameters
MP6120 to MP6150.
Touch probe function

"Reference Plane"
F1
F2 Setup clearance
(MP6140)
Max. measuring range
(MP6130)
Touch probe cycles

in the "Manual" and
"Electronic
Handwheel"
operating modes
F2
Max. measuring range

(MP6130)
F1 = Rapid traverse during probing cycle (MP6150)

F2 = Probing feed rate (MP6120)
8/95 TNC 360 9 Touch Probe 4-151

An error message "Touch point inaccessible" appears if the maximum measuring range (MP6130) is
exceeded. Machine parameters MP6140 and MP6150 have no function with the probing cycles in
the "Manual" and "Electronic Handwheel" modes.
The probing sequence must be enabled by the PLC with marker M2503. This marker is set by the
NC after a probing cycle starts and the NC waits until the PLC resets marker M2503 before
executing the probing function.
A number of conditions are transferred to the PLC with markers M2022 to M2072. This information
can be processed further in the PLC program. The probing function is controlled entirely from the
NC.
In all modes when the stylus is deflected and marker M2502 is set, the controller stops the
machine. (This only applies for TS 120!). If M2502 is not set, the controller only detects stylus
deflection if the probing function has started. This is why HEIDENHAIN recommend setting marker
M2502 as soon as the touch probe is in the spindle.
The machine parameter MP7411 determines whether, during execution of the TOUCH PROBE block
the current compensation data for touch probe length and radius is taken from the tool file or from
the probe calibration process. MP7411 is also effective for the tool length compensation in the
digitizing cycles.
MP6010 Selection of the touch probe system

Input: 0 or 1
0 = TS 120
1 = TS 511
MP6120 Probing feed rate

MP6130 Maximum measuring range

Input range: 0.001 to 99 999.999 [mm]
MP6140 Setup clearance above measuring point

Input range: 0.001 to 99 999.999 [mm]
MP6150 Rapid traverse in probing cycle

MP7411 Compensation data for TOUCH PROBE block

Input: 0 or 1
0 = Compensation value from the calibration process
1 = Compensation value from the tool file
4-152 TNC 360 9 Touch Probe 8/95

Set Reset
M2502 NC STOP in all operating modes if stylus PLC PLC

is deflected
M2503 Enable marker for probing functions NC PLC
M2022 Touch probe not ready (no standby NC NC

signal at connector X12)
M2023 Stylus deflected before start of probing NC NC

cycle
M2025 Stylus deflected (probing sequence is NC PLC

executed)
M2026 Probe operation ended or interrupted NC NC
M2027 Battery voltage too low (battery warning NC NC

on connector X12); evaluated only during
the probe operation
Example:
Enable of probing function in the PLC.
.
.
.
489 LN I9 ;I9 = 0 => TS not in holder
490 = M2502 ;stop if stylus deflected
491 ;
492 L M2503
493 AN I9
494 R M2503 ;acknowledge probing cycle
495 ;
496 ;
497 ;safety function
498 ;M03/M04 deactivate if TS not in holder
499 ;
500 L M2485 ;M03 activated?
501 O M2486 ;M04 activated?
502 AN I9 ;touch probe not in holder
503 S M2487 ;display M05
504 R M2485 ;deactivate M03
505 R M2486 ;deactivate M04
506 R M922 ;clear buffered marker M03
507 R M923 ;clear buffered marker M04
508 R M2488 ;NC stop

✎

9.2 Digitizing with TS 120
Digitizing is possible with all HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes. However, because the digitizing
process can take several hours to complete, it is advisable to use the TS 120 touch probe with signal
transmission by cable. The TS 511 touch probe with its infrared signal transmission can be
continuously operated for up to 8 hours on one battery charge.
Technical Requirements
- "Digitizing with TS 120" is possible with TNC 360 using software types 259 90x03 (TNC 360) and
260 02x 04 (TNC 360 C) See also Chapter "Introduction", Section "Software".
- Installing the software module "Digitizing with the TS 120". The ID number of the logic unit
indicates whether the software module is already installed (see Chapter "Introduction", Sections
"EPROM locations", and in Chapter "Mounting and electrical installation", Section "Hardware
components"). If the module is already installed, the software number of the option will appear
beneath the NC and PLC software number, when the system is switched on or when the MOD
key is pressed.
- Interfaced touch probe TS 120.
- The machine must be optimized for "Servo lag operation".
The digitizing sequence is optimized by the machine parameters.
Machine parameter MP6210 is the value for the oscillations executed by the touch probe as it scans
the form. It is governed by the dynamic response of the machine. The dynamic response is in turn
determined by the Kv factor (servo lag operation). The greater the Kv factor, the greater the number
of oscillations.
Machine parameter MP6210 determines the maximum probing feed rate in conjunction with the
programmed probe point interval, P.P.INT from the scanning cycles "Meander" and "Contour Lines":
F [mm/min] = PP.INT [mm] x oscillations [1/s] x 60 [s/min]
This relation gives the formula for calculating the input value of MP6210:
optimized F [mm/min]1)
Oscillations [1/s] =
PP.INT [mm] x 60 [s/min]
1)
The optimized probing feed rate depends on the feed rate in the normal direction (MP6230).

The feed rate in the normal direction (MP6230) is the resultant velocity at which the touch probe is
fed from the non-deflected to the deflected condition perpendicular to the contour and vice versa.
Normal direction
Apart from the oscillation amplitude, the feed rate in the normal direction also determines the
maximum scanning feed rate. If MP6230 is too low, the machine dynamics will be under-utilized and
the scanning feed rate will also be low. If MP6230 is too high the oscillation amplitude will be too
high. In this case the stylus will be seen to lift off from the contour (the stylus "taps" the surface of
the workpiece) and the scanning feed rate no longer increases.
The maximum stylus deflection is defined by machine parameter MP6240. MP6240 will depend on
the length of the stylus used. MP6240 defines the maximum travel by which the stylus retracts on
inside corners. If the touch probe is not "cleared" after the stylus backs out by the travel defined in
MP6240, the touch probe axis (e.g. Z) is retracted in the positive direction. Digitizing continues as
soon as the touch probe is cleared. If the input value is too small, the touch probe system may get
caught up in a repeated attempt to get out of an inside corner.
Machine parameter MP6260 defines an M function that stores technology data such as tool
dimensions, spindle speed, feed rate and certain M functions (e.g. M3, M13). A small program is
generated containing these technology data and the M functions determined by MP6250. If the
program with the digitized data is run in blockwise mode this program is run immediately after the
generated program, the technology data is taken over.
Machine parameter MP6260 determines whether an M90 is added to each NC block (see also
"Constant feed rate in corners with M90" in Section "Servo positioning of the NC axes".
Machine parameter MP6270 defines the output format of the digitized data, i.e. the number of
decimal places to which the coordinates are output.
MP6210 Number of oscillations per second in normal direction.

Input range 0 to 65.535 [1/s]
MP6230 Feed rate in normal direction

MP6240 Maximum deflection of stylus

Input range: 0 to 10.000 [mm]

MP 6254 Numerical value for M function for transferring modal values
Input value: 0 = no take-over
1 to 89 = take-over with M (1 ... 89)
MP6260 Output of M90 for NC blocks with digitized data

Input value: 0 = no M90 output
1 = M90 output in each NC block
MP6270 Rounding of trailing zeros

Input value: 0 = output 0.001 mm steps (1µm)
1 = output 0.01 mm steps (10 µm)

9.2.1 Scanning cycles
Direct access to the position control loop of the TNC controller allows the rapid recording of
measured values (3 to 5 values per second). With a programmed probe point interval of 1 mm, this
produces a scanning feed rate of 180 to 300 mm/min. Three scanning cycles are used for digitizing:
"Range", "Meander" and "Contour Lines".
The "Range" cycle defines the cuboid scanning range and the file where the digitized data are stored.
The "Meander" cycle digitizes a 3-D form meander-wise (line by line) in the pre-defined range.
The "Contour Lines" cycle digitizes a 3-D form level-by-level in contour lines within a pre-defined
range. Level-by-level digitizing is mainly used for forms with steep edges.

The acquired data can be stored in the controller's program memory, on the FE 401 floppy disk unit
or in a PC.
FE 401
Further particulars about scanning cycles will be found in the TNC 360 User's Manual.
9.2.2 Response of the scanning sequence at corners
The scanning sequence responds differently for inside and outside corners. Here the two
parameters PP.INT (maximum probe point interval) and TRAVEL from the "Meander" and "Contour
Lines" scanning cycles operate like a travel limiter. Depending on the values that are entered for
these parameters, either the travel or the probe point interval are limited.
The travel is also responsible for geometrical accuracy at the corners. The smaller the stroke, the
greater the accuracy of corner resolution. If too small a stroke is defined however, it may affect
clearance at acute inside corners (minimum travel = 0.1 mm).
Outside Corners
PP. INT
Contour 1
Travel
2
4
On outside corners, having probed the last point the touch probe moves down the resultant
straight line until it either makes workpiece contact again or hits one of the two limits TRAVEL d or
PP.INT e. In the illustrated example TRAVEL is the limit, and the touch probe returns to the contour
f in the inverse scanning direction. The new scanning direction is defined by the probed points c
and f.

Inside Corners
Max. deflection
of stylus MP6240
Contour
5 PP
. IN
6 4 T
3
1 2
el
v
Tra
PP
. IN
T
On inside corners, having probed the last point c the touch probe continues to oscillate in the same
scanning direction but changes direction because it cannot get clear. It then moves down the
resultant straight line until it either gets clear or hits one of the limits TRAVEL e or PP.INT.e
The touch probe moves in inverse scanning direction to get clear. If the programmed probe point
interval PP.INT f is too small for the probe to clear, it travels paraxially in negative direction by up to
the value of MP6240 (maximum stylus deflection). As soon as the touch probe is clear it returns to
the contour g in the inverse travel direction. The new scanning direction is defined by the probed
points c and g. If the touch probe has failed to clear even after it has backed out by the value of
MP6240 h, the touch probe axis (e.g. Z+) is cleared in the positive direction. If the stylus is still
deflected after it reaches the "clearance height" (see "Range" scanning cycle) the scanning sequence
is aborted and an error message is displayed.

9.2.3 Optimizing the scanning sequence
The following preparations should be made before optimizing machine and controller.
- Set up the flat workpiece with vertical face and plane surface in the machining plane (e.g. XY
plane).
- Probe the surface with probing function "Surface = Datum" ("MANUAL" or "EL. HANDWHEEL
MODE") and enter the reference plane as +0 mm.
- Basic setting of the relevant machine parameters for "Digitizing"
MP6210 = 5 [1/s] Oscillations in normal direction

MP6230 = 30 [mm/min] Feed rate in normal direction
MP6240 = 5 [mm] Maximum stylus deflection
- The interface must be configured according to the type of desired memory for the digitized data
(FE 401 or PC with "Block Transfer" program). See TNC 360 User's Manual.
- Connect FE 401 or PC to the serial data interface if necessary.
- Enter NC program with the scanning cycles "Range" and "Meander" and the scanning direction X
and the probe point interval 1 mm, e.g.
0 BEGIN PGM 1 MM
5 TCH PROBE 5.0 RANGE Define the range

6 TCH PROBE 5.1 PGM NAME:2 to be digitized with
7 TCH PROBE 5.2 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-10 the program name for
8 TCH PROBE 5.3 X+100 Y+100 Z+10 the digitized data and
9 TCH PROBE 5.4 HEIGHT: +25 clearance height (absolute)
10 TCH PROBE 6.0 MEANDER "Meander" scanning in X

11 TCH PROBE 6.1 DIRECTN:X direction with stroke (for
12 TCH PROBE 6.2 TRAVEL:0.5 L.SPAC:1 P.P.INT:1 clearing steep edges), line
13 END PGM 1 MM spacing and probe point
interval

Optimize the X and Y axes by defining the range such that only the level surface of the component is
scanned.
Z
Y
MAX
MIN
Optimize the Z axis by defining the range such that mainly the vertical face is scanned.
Z
Y
MAX
MIN
X

Procedure for Optimizing Machine Parameters
Connect a storage oscilloscope to the nominal

command input of the servo amplifier for the
X axis.
In the
"PROGRAM RUN/FULL SEQUENCE"
mode, select optimization program and operate
the external START KEY.
Machine runs, digitizing starts.
Increase the feedrate [1] with the override po-

tentiometer [2] until X nominal command attains.
maximum value and shows only minor voltage
dips (axis should just still traverse at even
speed).
U[V]
Umax
Increment MP6230
(e.g. by 10 mm/min) t[s]
Are oscillations in
no normal direction visible
(stylus tip is seen to lift off
workpiece surface)?
yes
Decrement MP6230 again

[1] Keep a note of the maximum (e.g. by 10 mm/min)
feedrate that is possible in the
worst axis.
[2] If the override potentiometers Repeat optimizing sequence for Y axis.

are already at 150% and the axis Switch the NC program to scanning
still moves with a steady speed, direction Y [3].
increase MP6210.
[2] The optimizing sequence is geared

to the worst axis. This is why the
Repeat optimizing sequence for Z axis.
feedrate must not be further increased
with the override potentiometer and Change the scanning range accordingly [3].
normal feedrate (MP6230). Pay particular attention to vertical face.

Calculation of Possible Oscillations in Normal Direction
optimised F 1) [mm/min]
MP 6210 [1/s] =
PP.INT 2) [mm] x 60 [s/min]
When the calculated machine parameter MP 6210 is entered the feed override potentiometer is
trimmed to the "attained feed rate".
1)
Maximum possible feed rate noted during optimizing
2)
PP.INT is the programmed maximum probe point interval from the "Meander" scanning
cycle (in the example, PP.INT = 1 mm).

✎

10 Electronic Handwheel
Either a
– an panel-mounted handwheel (HR 130)
– an portable handwheel (HR 330 or HR 331)
– or up to three single-axis integral handwheels (HR 150) via handwheel adapter (HRA 110)
can be connected to HEIDENHAIN contouring controls (see also Chapter "Mounting and electrical
installation "). The operation of the electronic handwheel is described in the TNC 360 User's Manual.
MP7640 determines which handwheel is connected. If a value greater than zero is entered but no
handwheel is connected, the error message "HANDWHEEL?" will appear.
The counting direction for the measuring system signals of the handwheel are entered in machine
parameter MP7650.
Shock and vibration can cause a slight movement of the handwheel and thus lead to an unwanted
traverse movement. In order to avoid this, a threshold sensitivity for the electronic handwheel is
entered in machine parameter MP7660. Setting the Marker M2826 inhibits traverse with the
handwheel, i.e. handwheel pulses are suppressed.
For HR 130, HR 330, and HR 332 one interpolation factor can be selected in the "Handwheel"
operating mode. For HR 150 with HRA 110 up to three can be selected. This interpolation factor
determines the traverse distance per handwheel revolution. In order to ensure that the rapid
traverse rate fixed by the machine parameter MP1010.x is not exceeded, the NC determines the
minimum entry value for the interpolation factor. For the HR 130, HR 330, and HR 332 handwheels,
the NC goes by the smallest value which was entered, i.e. according to the slowest axis.
Machine parameter MP7641 bit 0 defines whether the interpolation factor can be entered through
the TNC keyboard (see User's Manual) or through the PLC module 9036 (see Chapter 7, section
"PLC Modules"). With machine parameter MP7641 bit 2 the interpolation factor for the handwheel
can be defined both from the keyboard and from the PLC module 9036. If bit 2 = 0, the machine
parameters function as before (entry from the keyboard or from PLC module 9036).
If in machine parameter MP7641 bit 3 is set, the PLC can poll the keys (except for the axis keys) in
any mode of operation. This function takes effect before the REF run. The axis keys and the
handwheel pulses do not become effective until handwheel mode is active. After an error the
handwheel is not driven until the handwheel key is pressed.
In the "Programming and editing" mode of operation the axis can be moved by the handwheel if in
machine parameter MP7641 bit 1 = 1. The interpolation factor or the handwheel axis can be
changed only in the "Electronic handwheel" mode, regardless of the handwheel model. Once a
handwheel axis has be selected, it remains active even after a switch of operating modes.
Simultaneous use of the handwheel interface and the RS-232-C interface causes a conflict in baud
rates (38 400 and 19 200 baud) resulting in the error message BAUD RATE NOT POSSIBLE.
For the HR 150 with the HRA 110 handwheel adapter the control sets the interpolation factor
individually for up to three axes.
Interpolation factor Traverse distance per handwheel Effective from rapid traverse rate:
revolution [mm] MP1010.x [mm/min.]
0 20 12 000
1 10 6 000
2 5 3 000
4-166 TNC 360 10 Electronic Handwheel 8/95

3 2.5 1 500
4 1.25 750
5 0.625 80
6 0.312 80
7 0.156 80
8 0.078 80
9 0.039 80
10 0.019 80
Machine parameter MP7670 can be used to select a higher limit than that calculated by the NC.
MP7640 Handwheel
Input: 0 to 6
0 = Machine without electronic handwheel

1 = Portable handwheel HR 330
2 = Panel-mounted handwheel HR 130
3 = Portable handwheel HR 330 (evaluation of keys via PLC)
4 = Portable handwheel HR 332 (evaluation of keys via PLC)
5 = Up to three HR 150 via HRA 110
6 = Reserved
MP7641 Entry of interpolation factor

Input: 0 to 15
Bit 0 +0 = Entry of interpolation factor via TNC keyboard
+1 = Entry of interpolation factor via PLC module 9036
Bit 1 +0 =
+2 = Handwheel active in the Programming and editing mode
Bit 2 +0 =
+4 = Entry of interpolation factor via PLC module and TNC keyboard
Bit 3 +0 =
+8 = Key polling (except axis keys) from the PLC in every operating mode
MP7650 Count direction for handwheel

Input: 0 or 1
0 = positive count direction

1 = negative count direction
MP7660 Threshold sensitivity for electronic handwheel

MP7670 Minimum interpolation factor for handwheel

M2826 Suppress handwheel pulses PLC PLC
8/95 TNC 360 10 Electronic Handwheel 4-167

✎
10 Electronic handwheel
4-168 TNC 360 10 Electronic handwheel 8/95

10.1 Panel-mounted handwheel HR 130
MP7640 = 2

MP7640 = 1 with evaluation of all keys through the NC
MP7640 = 3 with evaluation of the +, – and rapid traverse keys in the PLC
Assignment of keys to the PLC inputs
Key PLC input

+ I160
– I161
”Rapid traverse” I162

MP7640 = 4 with evaluation of all keys in the PLC
MP7645.0 determines whether all 12 keys and their LEDs are accessible via PLC or whether the
axis selection keys and their LEDs are excepted.
MP7645.0 Assignment of handwheel keys for HR 332

Input: 0 or 1
0 = All keys except axis selection keys and their LEDs are
accessible via PLC
1 = All 12 keys and LEDs are accessible via PLC
8/95 TNC 360 10 Electronic handwheel 4-169

10.3.1 Assignment of keys and LEDs to the PLC inputs and outputs
The 12 keys of the HR 332 handwheel are assigned to various PLC inputs and the 12 indicator LEDs
to various PLC outputs according to the input value of the machine parameter MP7645.0.
When a key is pressed, the corresponding PLC input is set. When a PLC output is set, the
corresponding LED lights up.
The PLC inputs I160 and I175 generate signal edges. The positive edge is assigned to markers
M1660 to M1675, the negative edge is assigned to markers M1860 to M1875.
If MP7645.0 = 0 the keys X, Y, Z, IV and their If MP7645.0 = 1 all twelve keys are assigned to
LEDs are assigned to the NC. The remaining the PLC inputs I160 to I171 and all LEDs to the
keys are assigned to the PLC inputs I164 to I170. PLC outputs O96 to O107.
the LEDs are assigned to the PLC outputs O100
to O106.
0O96 0O97 0O98
I160 I161 I162
X O100
IV I164 0O99 O100 O101
I163 I164 I165
Y O102
V I166 O102 O103 O104
I166 I167 I168
Z O103 O104
I167 I168 O105 O106 O107
I169 I170 I171
O101 O105 O106
I165 I169 I170
In the standard version of the HR 332 the keys

assigned the following functions:
X IV
Y V
The key without symbols can be assigned any

function by the PLC program.

10.3.2 PLC example
In the following example the currently selected axis is evaluated so that this axis can be moved with
the +/− keys. This example is for the X axis (MP7640=4, MP7641=0 and MP7645.0 = 0).
Key on HR 332 PLC input or output

+ Key I170
– Key I169
+ LED O105
– LED O106
;Main program
LBL 1
PS K+9 Interrogate the selected handwheel axis with 9035
CM 9035
PL B0
L K+0 Erase the 8 Markers for "manual"
B= M2456 traverse of the axes X to IV
L K$FF Set the 8 complement markers
B= M2472
A MO Erase the PLC outputs
ON MO O100 to O106.
R O100 All LEDs except the
R O101 LED of the selected
R O102 axis are switched off.
R O103
R O104
R O105
R O106
Case B0 Evaluate the selected handwheel axis

CM 10 X axis
CM 11 Y axis
CM 12 Z axis
CM 13 IV axis
ENDC
EM
LBL 10 X axis
LN M2457 If X– is not active
A I170 and the + key is pressed,
S M2456 the axis moves in X+
R M2472 direction.
S O105 LED on the + key lights up.
LN M2456 If X+ is not active

A I169 and the – key is pressed,
S M2457 the axis moves in X–
R M2473 direction.
S O106 LED on the – key lights up.
EM

LBL 11 Y axis
.
.
EM
LBL 12 Z axis
.
.
EM
LBL 13 IV axis
.
.
EM
10.4 Panel-mounted handwheels HR 150 with handwheel adapter

HRA 110
MP7640 = 5
MP7641 determines whether the interpolation factor can be entered directly through the TNC
keyboard or through the PLC module 9036 (see also Chapter 7, Section "PLC Modules").
If the switch for the selection of the interpolation factor is used, the inputs I160 to I167 are to be
evaluated in binary values before using the PLC Modules 9036. The third handwheel can be
assigned to any axis. MP7645.2 determines whether the axis for the third handwheel is selected
through the axis selection key (see MP7645.0) or via the machine parameter MP7645.1.
MP7641 Entry of interpolation factor for HR 150 with HRA 110

Input: 0 or 1
0 = via TNC keyboard

1 = via PLC module 9036
MP7645 Assignment of the third handwheel
MP7645.0 Assignment of third handwheel via axis selection switch

Input: 0 to 2
Switch setting 3rd handwheel
0: 1 (Left-most setting) Z axis

2 IV axis
1: 1 (Left-most setting) X axis

2 Y axis
3 Z axis
4 IV axis
2: 3 Z axis
4 IV axis

If no axis selection switch is connected (see also MP 7645.2), the third handwheel
is permanently assigned to an axis as entered in MP 7645.1.
MP7645.1 Assignment of 3rd handwheel via machine parameter

Input: 0 to 8
0: Simulation of switch setting 1 (Left-most setting)

The third handwheel is assigned from MP7645.0
(Input value 0 or 1).
1: X axis
2: Y axis
4: Z axis
8: IV axis
MP7645.2: Assignment of 3rd handwheel via axis selection switch or MP7645.1

Input: 0 or 1
0: Assignment via axis selection switch

according to MP7645.0
1: Assignment via MP7645.1.

The axis selection switch transmits data to the PLC inputs I168 to I175.
The axis selection switch can therefore also serve other functions.
10.4.1 Assignment of the switch setting to the PLC inputs

The following tables show the assignments of the switch settings of S1 and S2 to the PLC inputs
I160 to I175.
Both switches function with 0V logic. If, for example, the switch S1 is at setting 3, then input I162 is
logically 0 and inputs I160, I161 and I163 to I167 are logically 1.
Step switch S1
Switch for the selection of the interpolation factor
Switch setting PLC input

1 (Left-most setting) I160
2 I161
3 I162
4 I163
5 I164
6 I165
7 I166
8 (Right-most setting) I167

Step switch S2
Step switch for axis selection
Switch setting PLC input

1 (Left-most setting) I168
2 I169
3 I170
4 I171
5 I172
6 I173
7 I174
8 (Right-most setting) I175
10.4.2 PLC Example

In the following example the settings of switch S1 are assigned for the selection of the interpolation
factor through evaluation of the inputs I160 to I167 from the smallest permissible interpolation
factor from MP7670 to the largest interpolation factor = 10. They are then transferred from the PLC
to the NC (MP7640 = 5 and MP7641 = 1).
In this PLC example the minimum interpolation factor is read and processed with the PLC module
9032 from MP7670.
LB I160 Assign the inputs I160 to I167

= B1 to Byte 1 (0V logic, negative logic)
== K0 If all inputs are 0, then

JPT 103 error message
LN B1 Invert Byte 1 (positive logic)

= B2
== K0 If all Bits are 0, then

JPT 103 error message
LBL 100 Loop for bit test of the "inverted inputs"

L B2 I160 to I167 in Byte 2
BT B3
JPT 101 Jump if Bit is set, i.e. input Ixxx = 0V

L B3 prepare next Bit for interrogation, i.e.
+ K+1 read input, if input Ixxx was not 0V.
= B3
JP 100
LBL 101
PS K+7670 Read the smallest interpolation factor

PS K+0 from MP7670 with PLC module 9032
CM 9032

PL B4 Result is in Byte 4
L B3 Current switch setting (0 to 7) plus

+ B4 minimum interpolation factor from MP7670
= B5 is new interpolation factor
<= K+10 If the new factor is greater than 10,

JPT 102
L K+10 ... then the new interpolation factor is set
= B5 to equal 10.
LBL 102
PS K+4 Transfer new interpolation factor

PS B5 to all axis interpolation (PLC ->
CM 9036 NC) factors.
PL B6 Read error code
L B6 If transfer is faulty, then

> K0 error message
JPT 103
EM
.
LBL 103 Error-message subprogram

.
Example:
Switch setting: 4
Minimum interpolation factor: MP 7670 = 5
In this PLC example are the following events:
Inputs: I160 to I162 and I164 to I167 are logically 1
Input: I163 is logically 0
Byte 1: 11110111
Byte 2: 00001000
Byte 3: 3
Byte 4: 5
Byte 5: 8
In the above example, the switch S2 is configured as follows:
Switch setting Interpolation factor
1 (Left-most setting) 5
2 6
3 7
4 8 Present switch setting
5 9
6 10
7 10
8 (Right-most setting) 10

11 Analog Inputs
The function of the TNC 360's analog input for displaying spindle power is described in Section
"Expanded spindle display" (see 6.3.8).
The analog input is located at connector X8 (Pin 2 analog input, Pin 10 0V for analog input).
4-176 TNC 360 11 Analog Inputs 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 11 Analog Inputs 4-177

12 Incremental Jog Positioning
The "incremental jog" function for the electronic handwheel operating mode can be activated through
the PLC program. This function permits the user to enter a jog increment (0.001 to 50 mm) by which
an axis moves whenever a machine axis direction button (e.g. X+) is pressed.
The incremental jog positioning function is activated through the PLC marker M2498. In the
electrical handwheel mode the dialogue "jog increment" is then displayed to prompt the user to enter
the jog increment.
Incremental jog positioning is normally executed through axis direction keys. In order to cause only a
single movement when the button is pressed, the PLC input signal for the axis direction button must
be evaluated for one edge (e.g. positive edge). See also Chapter "PLC programming", Section "Edge
evaluation of the PLC inputs".
This inhibits the function for manual traverse in the electronic handwheel mode when the axis
direction button is pressed for a long time. Each time the button is pressed, the axis moves only
once and only by the entered jog increment.
In the PLC program the start marker and the corresponding complement marker must be taken into
account. If this in not the case the error message "PLC ERROR xx" appears.
Marker Function and input Error Set Reset

message
M2052 Operating mode: Electronic handwheel NC NC
or Word W 272
M2497 Activate the edge evaluation for PLC inputs PLC PLC
M2498 Release jog positioning PLC PLC
M2512 Start jog positioning X+ 2A PLC PLC
M2528 Complement jog positioning X+
M2513 Start jog positioning X− 2B
M2529 Complement jog positioning X−
M2514 Start jog positioning Y+ 2C
M2530 Complement jog positioning Y+
M2515 Start jog positioning Y− 2D
M2531 Complement jog positioning Y−
M2516 Start jog positioning Z+ 2E
M2533 Complement jog positioning Z+
M2517 Start jog positioning Z− 2F
M2534 Complement jog positioning Z−
M2518 Start jog positioning 4th axis + 2G
M2535 Complement jog positioning 4th axis +
M2519 Start jog positioning 4− 2H
M2536 Complement jog positioning 4−
4-178 TNC 360 12 Incremental Jog Positioning 8/95

PLC example:
Axis direction button X+ with contact I138

Axis direction button X− with contact ,133
L M2052 Interrogate operating mode

CMT 10 Electronic handwheel
.
.
EM End of main program
.
.
LBL 10
L M2052 Incremental jog positioning
S M2497 Activate edge evaluation of the PLC inputs
S M2498 Release incremental jog positioning
R M2512 Erase marker for incremental jog positioning in axis X

R M2513
S M2528
S M2529
L M1638 Incremental jog positioning in axis X+

AN ,133
S M2512
R M2528
L M1633 Incremental jog positioning in axis X−

AN ,138
S M2513
R M2529
EM
.
.
.
8/95 TNC 360 12 Incremental Jog Positioning 4-179

✎

✎
8/95 TNC 360 12 Incremental Jog Positioning 4-181

✎

13 Hirth Coupling
Many machine tool use Hirth couplings to clamp rotary axes and swivel heads. A Hirth coupling is a
pair of more or less finely toothed plates that form a rigid rotary connection when pressed together.
The Hirth functions are realized through the PLC program.
A repositioning is performed as PLC positioning or an error message is displayed, depending on

whether the axis with Hirth coupling is positioned automatically or manually. The default values for
grid, positioning accuracy and further parameters for positioning before Hirth clamping are
performed through free machine parameters by transferring the input values to the PLC.
13.1 Positioning in the manual operating mode

When axis 4 is selected and positioned with the electronic handwheel, the "Axis in position" marker
(M2011) is reset. This can be used for de-clamping the Hirth coupling. The same applies for traverse
via axis direction button. When the "Axis is position" marker is set, the nominal position is checked
for its agreement to the Hirth coupling grid. The PLC takes the shortest path to reposition the axis,
i.e. the axis is moved to the nearest grid point.
13.2 Positioning in controlled operation

When the NC is started, the "Axis in position" marker is also reset. This starts an internal
examination of the target position. If the target position is not in the Hirth grid, an error message is
released. After the error message is erased and the NC is restarted, the axis is moved from the
target position to the nearest Hirth grid point.
13.3 Program example

.
.
.
LBL 14 ;HIRTH_AXES
;INITIALIZE HIRTH
L M2180 ;1ST PLC CYCLE AFTER POWER ON
O M2185 ;1ST PLC CYCLE AFTER PLC_PGM COMPILE
S M528 ;INIT_ACTIVE
L M528 ;1ST PLC CYCLE DELAY DUE TO TNC 360
AN M2180 ;1ST PLC CYCLE AFTER POWER ON
AN M2185 ;1ST PLC CYCLE AFTER PLC_PGM COMPILE
JPT 26 ;INIT_HIRTH
;----READ COORDINATES ----
PS K128
PS K2 ;REFERENCE_VALUE
CM 9040 ;READ COORDINATE VALUES
L M3171 ;NP_M3171_MODULE_ERR
S M2955 ;PN_MODULEERRCYCL
S M2815 ;PN_M2815_PLC_EMERGENCY_STOP
;---- HIRTH MODULES FOR THE AXES----
L M595 ;G_HIRTH_ACTIVE_4
8/95 TNC 360 13 Hirth Coupling 4-183

CMT 47 ;HIRTH_4_AXIS
;----CLEAR ERROR MESSAGE----
LN M527 ;HIRTH_ERR_4
AN M527 ;HIRTH_ERR_4
R M2933 ;PN_ERR_HIRTH_NOTINPOS
EM ; END OF HIRTH MODULE
LBL 47 ;HIRTH_4_AXIS
;----CALCULATE LEFT AND RIGHT GRID POINT ---
L D140 ;REFPOS_4TH_AXIS
/ W232 ;GRID_4
PSW
X W232 ;GRID_4
= D152 ;RIGHT_GRID
PLW
+ K1 ;ONE
X W232 ;GRID_4
= D156 ;RIGHT_GRID
;----CALCULATE DIST (DIFFERENCE FROM LEFT AND RIGHT GRID) ---
L D140 ;REFPOS_4_AXIS
- D152 ;RIGHT_GRID
PSW
CM 29 ;GENERATE ABSOLUTE VALUE
PL D160 ;DIF_LEFT
L D140 ;REFPOS_4_AXIS
- D156 ;RIGHT_GRID
PSW
CM 29 ; GENERATE ABSOLUTE VALUE
PL D164 ;DIF_RIGHT
;----COMPARE DISTANCE LEFT > < RIGHT ? ----
L D164 ;LOAD DIF.-RIGHT
< D160 ;LOAD DIF.-LEFT
CMT 49 ;RIGHT GRID IS NEARER
CMF 50 ;RIGHT GRID IS NEARER
;----HIRTH GRID CONTACTED----
L M2 ;MP_EDITOR_ACTIVE
A M2011 ;NP_M2011_4_INPOS
= M597 ;G_HIRTH_4A_INPOS
;----HIRTH-ERROR 4-AXIS----
LN M600 ;MANAL MODE OF OPERATION
AN M2 ;MP_EDITOR_ACTIVE
S M527 ;HIRTH_ERR_4
;----ERASE ERROR WITH NC START----
L I132 ;I_NC_START
R M527 ;HIRTH_ERR_4
;----DISPLAY ERROR----
L M527 ;HIRTH_ERR_4
S M2933 ;PN_ERR_HIRTH_NOTINPOS
;----RELEASE FOR POSITIONING TO THE GRID----
LN M2011 ;NP_M2011_4_INPOS
S M530 ;POSRELEASE_4A
;----MOVE HIRTH-ACHSE TO THE GRID----
L M600 ;MANUAL OPERATING MODE
4-184 TNC 360 13 Hirth Coupling 8/95

AN M2 ;MP_EDITOR_ACTIVE
AN M2707 ;PN_M2707_START_4_POS
AN M527 ;HIRTH_ERR_4
A M530 ;POSRELEASE_4A
CMT 51 ;START_4_PLC_POS
;----INHIBIT FOR POSITIONING TO THE GRID
L M597 ;G_HIRTH_4A_INPOS
R M530 ;POSRELEASE_4A
EM
LBL 49 ;R_4A_GRID
L D164 ;DIF_RIGHT
< W236 ;POS_WINDOW_4
= M2 ;MP_EDITOR_ACTIVE
L D156 ;RIGHT_GRID
= D148 ;PLC_POS
EM
LBL 50 ;L_4A_GRID
L D160 ;DIF_LEFT
< W236 ;POS_WINDOW_4
= M2 ;MP_EDITOR_ACTIVE
L D152 ;RIGHT_GRID
= D148 ;PLC_POS
EM
LBL 51 ;START_4_PLC_POS
L D148 ;PLC_POS
= D540 ;PN_D540_4_PLC_POS
L W966 ;NP_W966_FEED_4_ACHSE
= W566 ;PN_W566_POSFEED_4
LN M2707 ;PN_M2707_START_4_POS
S M2707 ;PN_M2707_START_4_POS
EM
LBL 26 ;INIT_HIRTH
;----READ MP4230 AXIS ACTIVE----
PS K4230 ;MP420
PS K3 ;MP_EDITOR
CM 9032
S M2956 ;PN_MODULEERRSUBM
PLW
<> K0 ;ZERO
= M595 ;G_HIRTH_ACTIVE_4
;----READ MP4239 GRID---
PS K4239 ;MP430
PS K3 ;MP_EDITOR
CM 9032
S M2815 ;PN_M2815_PLC_NOT_AUS

PL W232 ;GRID_4
;----READ MP1030.3 INPOS---
PS K1030 ;MP1030
PS K3 ;MP_EDITOR
CM 9032
PL W236 ;POS_WINDOW_4
L M528 ;INIT_ACTIVE
R M528 ;INIT_ACTIVE
EM
; ABSOLUTE VALUE GENERATION

LBL 29 ;ABSOLUTE VALUE GENERATION
PLW ;READ DATA FROM D-STACK
PSW ;AND WRITE AGAIN
>= K0 ;IF POSITIVE THEN END OF MODULE
JPT 30 ;LABEL END OF MODULE
PLW ;IF NEGATIVE THEN 2ND COMPLEMENT
XON K0 ;ZERO
+ K1 ;ONE
PSW ;STORE DATA ON STACK
EM

✎

✎

✎

✎
4-190 TNC 360 14 Datum Correction 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 14 Datum Correction 4-191

✎

✎

14 Datum Correction
The PLC datum correction function is used to shift the zero or datum point with the PLC program.
Datum corrections are required for machines that have swivel heads, e.g. when swivelling the head
causes a correction in the X/Z axis.
Each axis (X, Y, Z, 4) is assigned a doubleword (D528 to D540) for the correction value. If a value for
the appropriate axis is entered via the PLC program and strobe marker M2716 is set, then a datum
correction will be active at the next M/S/T strobe. The correction is computed in the actual position
display. The display then indicates the shifted system of coordinates.
Example:
Actual position display for X axis without correction = 50

Correction in D528 = +20
Strobe marker M2716 set, i.e. correction is active

New actual position display X= +70
The corrections can be transferred to doublewords, D528 to D540, from different memory areas:
- Enter values in MP4210.0 to MP4210.47 and they will also be in D768 to D956; now copy values
via PLC program into D528 to D540.
If several datum shifts are executed in one axis, the correction values refer to the uncorrected
reference system. In datum compensation with the value 0, previous (axis specific) corrections are
canceled.
D528 Datum correction for X axis

D532 Datum correction for Y axis
D536 Datum correction for Z axis
D540 Datum correction for 4th axis
M2716 Strobe marker for datum correction

PLC example: Datum correction with M20 activated, with M21 deactivated.
.
.
LN M2045
S M10
.
L M1920
A M2045 ;M20 activated
A M10 ;Buffered marker for strobe marker 2716
CMT 200 ;Datum correction call
R M10
L M1921
A M2025 ;M21 activated
A M10 ; Buffered marker for strobe marker 2716
CMT201 ;Deactivate datum correction call
R M10
L M1920
O M1921
A M2045
AN M2716
S M2482 ;Acknowledgment
EM ;End of main program
LBL 200 ;Activate module for datum correction call

L D896 ;Value from MP4210.32
= D528 ;Shift X axis
L K0
= D532 ;Do not shift Y axis
= D536 ;Do not shift Z axis
= D540 ;Do not shift 4th axis
L M10
S M2716
EM
LBL 201 ;Cancel module for datum compensation

L D900 ;Value from MP4210.33
= D528
L K0
= D532 ;Do not shift Y axis
= D536 ;Do not shift Z axis
= D540 ;Do not shift 4th axis
L M10
S M2716
EM
.
.

15 Tool Changer
A tool changer can be operated with the PLC of the HEIDENHAIN contouring control. Tool changers
are often controlled by proximity switches.
Tool data are stored in the tool table and tool management (special tool, tool pocket management
etc.) is handled by the NC. The NC supplies the PLC with the information it needs to control the tool
changer via markers and words.
15.1 Tool table

The operator can edit the tool table (program 0) in the "Programming and editing" mode (see User's
Manual). The tool table can be uploaded and downloaded through the data interface. The tool
number (T), length (L), radius (R), pocket number (P), and special tool (ST) are all defined in the tool
table. Special tools and pocket number are only displayed if MP7266 and MP7480 have been set
accordingly. The pocket numbers can be protected from editing or erasure by setting marker M2594.
BEGIN TOOL MM
T0 P0 L+0 R+0
T1 P1 L+10 R+20
T2 P2 L+50 R+30
T3 L+0 R+0
T4 SP4 L+100 R+300
T5 L+0 R+0
T6 P6 L+50 R+15
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
END TOOL MM
The number of tools in the tool table is defined in machine parameter MP7260. If MP7260 contains
a zero value, then the system will run without a tool table (program "0" does not exist). Tool length
and tool radius are programmed in the NC program with TOOL DEF (see User's Manual).
MP7260 Number of tools in the tool table

0 = no tool table
1 to 99 = number of tools
Set Reset
M2594 Inhibit editing of pocket number in the tool table PLC PLC
in the tool table
4-196 TNC 360 15 Tool Changer 8/95

15.1.1 Special tools
Special tools are oversize tools where pockets on either side in the tool magazine have to be left
vacant .
P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10
The number of pockets to be left vacant on both sides of the tool is defined in machine parameter
MP7264. Special tools are identified by an "S" in the tool table. The numbers of the vacant pockets
are not displayed. Variable pocket coding can be limited for special tools. If marker M2601 is set,
then special tools are returned to their original pocket despite the "variable pocket coding" setting.
MP7264 Number of pockets reserved next to special tool

Input range: 0 to 3
Set Reset
M2601 Special tool to original pocket PLC PLC

despite variable pocket coding
15.2 Controlling the tool changer

Controlling the tool changer, i.e. positioning the changing arm and carousel and the complete
toolchange sequence is performed by the PLC. The NC handles tool pocket assignment and
evaluation of the TOOL DEF and TOOL CALL blocks. The NC and PLC communicate by markers and
words.
The TOOL DEF block can be used to pre-position the tool changer. After a tool has been changed,
the next tool is programmed with TOOL DEF. The PLC evaluates the tool and pocket number and
pre-positions the tool changer at the follow-up tool.
8/95 TNC 360 15 Tool Changer 4-197

Example of NC program:
.
.
.
TOOL CALL 1 Z S500
TOOL DEF 2
L Z+20 R0 F500 M03
.
.
.
TOOL CALL 2 Z S1000
TOOL DEF 3
.
.
.
Variable and Fixed Pocket Coding
The system can be operated with either variable or fixed tool pocket coding.
Machine parameter MP7480 defines whether the tool number or the pocket number is transferred
to the PLC. For variable pocket coding the pocket number must be transferred to the PLC (MP7480
= 3). With fixed pocket coding it is advisable to work with the tool number (MP7480 = 1 or 2).
When executing a TOOL CALL or TOOL DEF block, depending on the setting of MP7480, the NC
transfers either only the tool number or the tool number and the pocket number of the programmed
tool to the Word W262 or W262 and W264, respectively. The strobe marker M2046 (TOOL CALL)
or M2047 (TOOL DEF) is set. The NC does not reset these strobe markers until the PLC sets marker
M2483 (TOOL CALL) or M2484 (TOOL DEF) after processing the tool or pocket number. The
machining program is resumed when strobe markers M2046/M2047 are reset.
If tool number 0 is executed, then NC sets marker M2400 and this is not reset until there is a TOOL
CALL for another tool.
MP7480.0 Output tool or pocket number with TOOL CALL block

Input range: 0 to 3
0= No output
1= Tool number output only when tool number changes (W262)
2= Tool number output with every TOOL CALL block (W262)
3= Output of pocket number (W262) and tool number (W264) only when tool
number changes
Reading and writing to the tool file
If the PLC enters the tool number in Word W512, the associated pocket number is stored in W264
through strobe marker M2715. If the PLC enters the tool number in W512 and the pocket number in
W514, the strobe marker M2714 of the T code and P code is transferred to the NC.

MP7480.1 Output tool or pocket number with TOOL DEF block
Input range: 0 to 3
0= No output
1= Tool number output only when tool number changes (W262)
2= Tool number output with every TOOL DEF block (W262)
3= Output of pocket number (W262) and tool number (W264) only when tool
number changes
W262 Pocket number when MP7480 = 3 NC NC

Tool number when MP7480 = 1 or 2
W264 Tool number when MP7480 = 3 NC NC
W512 T code PLC PLC
W514 P code PLC PLC
Set Reset
M2046 Strobe signal T code (P code) with TOOL CALL NC NC

M2047 Strobe signal 2nd T code (2nd P code) with TOOL DEF NC NC
M2483 Feedback T code (P code) with TOOL CALL PLC PLC
M2484 Feedback T code (P code) with TOOL DEF PLC PLC
M2400 Tool number 0 programmed NC NC
M2063 PGM 0 is selected NC NC
M2597 Binary format for T code and P code in W262 and W264 PLC PLC
15.2.1 Output of tool number (Fixed pocket coding)

Evaluating the tool number is adequate for fixed tool pocket coding. MP7480 is used to select
whether the tool number should be transferred to the PLC with every TOOL CALL (TOOL DEF)
block or only when the tool number changes (input values for MP7480 = 2 or 1). With this setting
the tool number is transferred to the Word W262 when a TOOL CALL or TOOL DEF block is
executed. W264 is not used.
Unlike variable pocket coding, the pocket numbers are displayed in the tool table but are not
changed by the NC.
15.2.2 Output of pocket number (Variable pocket coding)

With variable pocket coding, the NC must transfer the pocket number of the called tool to the PLC
(MP7480 = 3). In this setting, the pocket number is filed in Word W262. In addition to the pocket
number, the NC also transfers the current tool number in W264. Variable pocket management (the
assignment of tool number to pocket number in the tool table) is handled by the NC.
If marker M2612 (suppress pocket exchange in the tool table ) is set before a T strobe is output
(M2046), the pocket numbers are not exchanged. The PLC only acknowledges the T strobe without
having made an exchange in the tool magazine and resets the PLC marker M2612. The new tool
number is displayed highlighted (inversely) in the status and the associated tool data ( length, radius)
are activated. The inverse display of the tool number in the status display remains until a tool has

been physically changed. If the control is switched off and back on again in the above-mentioned
condition, the tool last inserted becomes active again.
The number of tools with a pocket number is defined in machine parameter MP7261. The input
value for MP7261 matches the number of pockets in the tool magazine. This means that more tools
can be defined in the tool table than there is room for in the tool magazine [(MP7260) > (MP7261)]. If
a tool number is programmed and no pocket is defined for it, pocket number 255 (W262) is
transferred on TOOL CALL, and marker M2401 is set.
Only the tool number and the pocket number are transferred when TOOL DEF is programmed. A
TOOL DEF for a manual tool has no relevance in the PLC.
A variety of tool types can be called from the machining program. The following definitions are used
in the examples that follow:
N = Tool for which a pocket number is defined in the tool table. (Normal).
M = Tool for which no pocket number is defined in the tool table. These tools must be changed
by hand. (Manual).
S = Special tool (defined in tool table).
Nine different combinations of toolchange sequence are therefore possible. For many toolchange
sequences, for the tool magazine to be controlled, two pocket numbers (tool numbers) must be
output in succession for one TOOL CALL. This is reported to the PLC by markers M2093 and
M2600. The PLC must evaluate and acknowledge both pocket numbers (tool numbers).
The logic diagrams for the nine different toolchange sequences are shown on the following pages
(activated by TOOL CALL).

N → N: Normal tool follows Normal tool
The pocket number and tool number of the called tool are transferred.
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [new N]
W264 Tool No. [new N]

S → N: Normal tool follows Special tool
With this toolchange two pocket numbers (or tool numbers) must be transferred in succession.
M2093 indicates that another TOOL CALL strobe (M2046) follows.
With M2600 the PLC can determine the sequence in which the pocket numbers are transferred. The
decision will depend on whether a single or double changing arm is in use.
S → N, Single Changing Arm (M2600 = 0):
The pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred first. Tool number 0 tells the
PLC to clear the spindle. After acknowledging with M2483 the pocket number and tool number of
the new tool are transferred.
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [S] Pocket No. [N]
W264 Tool No. Ø Tool No. [N]

S → N, Double Changing Arm (M2600 = 1):
The pocket number and tool number of the new tool are transferred first. After acknowledging with
M2483 the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred. Tool number 0 tells the
PLC to clear the spindle.

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 3RFNHW1R>1@3RFNHW1R>6@
: 7RRO1R17RRO1R

M → N: Normal tool follows Manual tool
With this toolchange sequence two pocket numbers (or tool numbers) must be transferred in
succession. M2093 indicates that another TOOL CALL strobe (M2046) follows.
Irrespective of marker M2600, pocket number 255 and tool number 0 are transferred first. Tool
number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle. Pocket number 255 means that there is no pocket in the
tool magazine for the called tool. After acknowledging with M2483, the pocket number and tool
number of the new tool (called tool) are transferred.

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 3RFNHW1R3RFNHW1R>1@
: 7RRO1R7RRO1R>1@

M → M: Manual tool follows Manual tool
The pocket number 255 tells the PLC that there is no pocket in the tool magazine for the called tool.

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 3RFNHW1R
: 7RRO1R>QHZ0@

N → M: Manual tool follows Normal tool
Irrespective of marker M2600, the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred
first. Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle. After acknowledging with M2483, pocket
number 255 and the tool number of the called tool are transferred. Pocket number 255 tells the PLC
that there is no pocket in the tool magazine for the called tool.

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 3RFNHW1R>1@3RFNHW1R
: 7RRO1R7RRO1R>0@

S → M: Manual tool follows Special tool
Irrespective of marker M2600, the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred
first. Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle. After acknowledging with M2483, pocket
number 255 and the tool number of the called tool are transferred. Pocket number 255 tells the PLC
that there is no pocket in the tool magazine for the called tool.

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 3RFNHW1R>6@3RFNHW1R
: 7RRO1R7RRO1R>0@

S → S: Special tool follows Special tool
Marker 2601 can be used to set whether the special tool is to be returned to its original pocket
despite variable pocket coding.
The same logic diagram applies to single and double changing arms (M2600 = 0 and 1) with variable
pocket coding for special tools (M2601 = 0).

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 3RFNHW1R>QHZ6@
: 7RRO1R>QHZ6@

If the special tool is to return to its original pocket despite variable pocket coding (M2601 = 1), there
is a different pocket number transfer sequence for single and double changing arms (M2600).
S → S, Single Changing Arm (M2600 = 0)
PLC to clear the spindle. After acknowledging with M2483, the pocket number and tool number of
the new tool are transferred.

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 3RFNHW1R>ROG6@3RFNHW1R>QHZ6@
: 7RRO1R7RRO1R>QHZ6@

S → S, Double Changing Arm (M2600 = 1)
M2483, the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred. Tool number 0 tells the

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 3RFNHW1R>QHZ6@3RFNHW1R>ROG6@
: 7RRO1R>QHZ6@7RRO1R

N → S: Special tool follows Normal tool
There is a different pocket number transfer sequence depending on M2600 (single/double changing
arm). M2601 is not relevant.
N → S, Single Changing Arm (M2600 = 0)
PLC to clear the spindle. After acknowledging with M2483, the pocket number and tool number of
the new tool are transferred

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 7RRO1R7RRO1R>6@

N → S, Double Changing Arm (M2600 = 1)
M2483, the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred. Tool number 0 tells the

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 7RRO1R>6@7RRO1R

M → S: Special tool follows Manual tool
Irrespective of marker M2600 and M2601, pocket number 255 and tool number 0 are transferred
first. Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle. Pocket number 255 means that there is no
pocket in the tool magazine for the called tool. After acknowledging with M2483, the pocket number
and tool number of the new tool (called tool) are transferred.

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 3RFNHW1R3RFNHW1R>6@
: 7RRO1R7RRO1R>6@

MP7261 Number of pockets in tool magazine Tool magazine, n
M2093 Another T code (P code) follows with TOOL CALL NC NC
0= Normal tool follows Normal tool

(N -> N)
or Manual tool follows Manual tool
(M -> M)
or Special tool follows Special tool
(S -> S)
1= Special tool follows Manual tool

(M -> S)
or Special tool follows Normal tool
(N -> S)
or Special tool follows Special tool
(S -> S) when M2601 = 1
or Manual tool follows Special tool
(S -> M)
or Manual tool follows Normal tool
(N -> M)
or Normal tool follows Manual tool
(M -> N)
or Normal tool follows Special tool
(S -> N) (see Marker M2600)
M2600 Sequence of tool number or PLC PLC

pocket number transfer (M2093 = 1)
0= Number of old tool first,
then number of new tool (single changing arm)
1= Number of new tool first,
then number of old tool (double changing arm)
M2401 Active tool with pocket number (MP7260/MP7261) NC NC

(active only when MP7480 = 3 and TOOL CALL)
M2402 Active tool without pocket number (MP7260/MP7261) NC NC

(active only when MP7480 = 3 and TOOL CALL)
M2403 Active tool = special tool NC NC
M2601 Special tool to original pocket PLC PLC

despite variable pocket coding

15.3 PLC program example
This section describes a tool changer and contains the basic sequence diagrams of the
corresponding PLC programs. When creating a program (set auxiliary markers etc.) the constraints
on a PLC program sequence must be remembered .
The example describes a tool changer with the following features:

- Up to 99 tools
- Variable pocket coding (MP7480 = 3)
- Special tools are permitted
- Next tool standby with TOOL DEF
- Toolchange with TOOL CALL
- Tools with no pocket number defined in the tool table can be changed by hand
- Double changing arm
- Special tools variable (M2601 = 0)
ISTREG GRE1 GRE2
SPIREG
The following sequence diagram uses variables for greater clarity. In the PLC program these
variables are replaced by byte addresses.
ISTREG = B10 = Pocket number at the toolchange position of the tool magazine
GRE1 = B11 = Pocket number of tool in changing arm facing tool magazine
GRE2 = B12 = Pocket number of tool in changing arm facing spindle
SPIREG = B13 = Pocket number of tool in spindle

Other PLC operands which are used:
M2046 Strobe signal T code (P code) with TOOL CALL NC NC

M2047 Strobe signal T code (P code) with TOOL DEF NC NC
M2093 Another T code (P code) follows with TOOL CALL NC NC
M2403 Special tool called (TOOL CALL) NC NC
M2483 Feedback T code (P code) with TOOL CALL PLC PLC
M2484 Feedback T code (P code) with TOOL DEF PLC PLC
M2600 Sequence of tool number or PLC PLC
pocket number transfer (M2093 = 1)
M2601 Special tool to original pocket despite PLC PLC
variable pocket coding
W262 Pocket number
W264 Tool number
Machine parameters used:
MP7260 = 90 Number of tools in tool table

MP7261 = 12 Number of pockets in tool magazine
MP7264 = 1 Number of pockets vacant beside special tool
MP7480.0 = 3 Output of pocket number and tool number with every TOOL CALL block
MP7480.1 = 3 Output of pocket number and tool number with every TOOL DEF block
The sequence diagram for this tool changer is subdivided into modules.
List of modules (subroutines):
- TOOL DEF Search tool and load in GRE1

- TOOL CALL Automatic tool change
- STANDBY Search tool and load in GRE1
- STANDBY BACK Return tool from GRE1 to magazine
- MANUAL TOOL IN Manual tool follows Normal or Special tool
- MANUAL TOOL OUT Normal or Special tool follows Manual tool
- MANUAL OUT/IN Manual tool follows Manual tool
- CHANGE Take old tool out and put new tool in
- COMPUTE SHORTEST ROUTE
- COMPARE P-CODE WITH ISTREG
- COMPARE GRE1 WITH ISTREG

15.3.1 Program module TOOL DEF
Search tool and load in GRE1
Feedback is
TOOL DEF immediate so
feedback that the NC PGM
can continue
No Message:
P < 255 CANNOT
Manual tool PREPARE
MANUAL
Yes TOOL
No
P = SPIREG Tool already in spindle
Yes
No
P = GRE1 Tool already in GRE1
Yes
Load GRE1
No
GRE1 = 0 STANDBY Module
GRE1 empty
Yes
GRE1 assigned
STANDBY BACK
End
Module

15.3.2 Program module TOOL CALL
Automatic toolchange (main program)
Clear spindle Another TOOL CALL S/N tool

strobe follows
No No No M tool S/N tool out
T=0 M2093 = 0 P = 255 IN Module M-tool in
Yes Yes Yes
M tool
No No M tool M tool out

P = 255 M2093 = 1 OUT Module S-/N-tool in
M tool
Yes Yes
Another
TOOL CALL MAN. OUT/IN M-tool out
strobe follows Module M-tool in
No Tool already
P = SPIREG
in spindle
Yes
P = GRE1 No
Tool already in changing arm
Yes
GRE1 = 0 No CHANGE S-/N-tool out

STANDBY Module S-/N-tool in
Module
Yes Fetch tool to GRE1
STANDBY BACK Unload GRE1 TOOL CALL

Module feedback

15.3.3 Program module STANDBY
Search tool and load in GRE1
No Pocket in magazine found

P = ISTREG
Yes
COMPARE
P-CODE Load ISTREG Load tool from
WITH ISTREG to GRE1 magazine to GRE1
Module
End
15.3.4 Program module STANDBY BACK

Return tool from GRE1 to magazine
GRE1 = No Pocket in magazine found

ISTREG
Yes
COMPARE Bring GRE1 to

GRE1 WITH magazine and Return tool
ISTREG load GRE1 to magazine
Module with zero
End

15.3.5 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN
N -> M or S -> M: Manual tool follows Normal or Special tool.
The old tool is returned to the tool magazine and the operator is prompted to load a manual tool (not
in tool magazine).
Move GRE2 to
No spindle and Old tool out
GRE1 = 0 load SPIREG
to GRE2
Yes
Turn changing As GRE1 is already

arm, load SPIREG zero, this routine has
STANDBY BACK with GRE1, set software relevance only.
Module GRE1 to zero
and return arm
Unload GRE1 Swap over GRE1

and GRE2
registers
STANDBY BACK Bring old tool

Module to magazine
TOOL CALL Move axes to

feedback man. change
position
Prompt user to
load tool and press
No OK key
M2046 = 1
Yes
Strobe set
again OK key No
pressed
Yes
Load T code End

to SPIREG

15.3.6 Program module MANUAL TOOL OUT
M -> N or M -> S: Normal or Special tool follows Manual tool
The operator is prompted to unload the spindle manually as there is no pocket for the current tool in
the magazine. The called tool is loaded automatically.
Move axes to No Tool in GRE1

manual change GRE1 = P
position
Yes
No GRE1
Prompt user to GRE1 = 0 empty
unload tool and
press OK key Yes
Unload GRE1
STANDBY BACK
Module
No
OK key
pressed
Yes STANDBY
Fetch tool to
Module
GRE1
Load zero in
SPIREG
(spindle empty) CHANGE
Module
TOOL CALL
feedback
End
No
M2046 = 1
Yes
TOOL CALL
strobe set again

15.3.7 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN/OUT
M -> M: Manual tool follows Manual tool.
The operator is prompted to unload the spindle and load the new tool manually as there is no pocket
for these tools in the magazine.
Move axis to
manual change
position
Prompt user to
unload old and
load new tool
Press OK key
No OK key
pressed
Yes
Load T code to
SPIREG
End

15.3.8 Program module CHANGE
The spindle is unloaded and the new tool is loaded automatically. This module defines whether the
tool is to be returned to its old pocket in the tool magazine or not (e.g. Special tool).
Move GRE2 to
spindle, load Old tool out
SPIREG to
GRE2
Turn changing
arm, load
SPIREG with Turn changing arm
GRE1, set and load new tool
GRE1 to zero,
retract arm
Swap over No GRE1 to

GRE1 and M2093 = 1 magazine, load Store old tool
GRE2 registers GRE1 with zero in magazine
Yes
Another
TOOL CALL
strobe follows
TOOL CALL
feedback End
Wait No
M2046 = 1
Yes
TOOL CALL
strobe set
again
No
P = ISTREG
Magazine in position
Yes
COMPARE
P-CODE WITH Position tool magazine
ISTREG
Module

15.3.9 Program module COMPARE P CODE WITH ISTREG
The tool magazine is positioned at the search pocket number by the shortest path.
Transfer
P code
to data stack
COMPUTE THE
SHORTEST
PATH IN
M3042
Module
No
P = ISTREG End
Yes
No
M3042 = 1
Yes
Index magazine Index magazine

forward reverse

15.3.10 Program module COMPARE GRE1 WITH ISTREG
The tool magazine is positioned at the pocket number of the tool in GRE1 by the shortest path.
Transfer GRE1
to data stack
COMPUTE THE
SHORTEST
PATH IN
M3042
Module
GRE1 = No
ISTREG End
Yes
No
M3042 = 1
Yes
Index magazine Index magazine

forward reverse

15.3.11 Program module COMPUTE SHORTEST PATH
The program determines the direction in which the tool magazine must move in order to reach the
search pocket number by the shortest path.
The path is filed in marker M3042:
M3042 = 0: reverse
M3042 = 1: forward
Fetch search
pocket from data
stack to NOMREG
Divide number of
mag. pockets by
two and save to
MAGREG
Save absolute
value from
ISTREG-NOMREG
difference to
ABSREG
No
NOMREG >
ISTREG
Yes
No No
ABSREG < NOMREG <
MAGREG ISTREG
Yes Yes
ABSREG > No
MAGREG
Yes
Magazine Magazine
M3042 = 1 forward M3042 = 0 reverse
End

16 Commissioning and Start-up Procedure
This section describes the commissioning procedure for the controls step-by-step. The precise
descriptions of the functions may be found by referring to the appropriate sections.
16.1 Code numbers for commissioning

Certain operating conditions and functions for the commissioning procedure must be selected by
code numbers (see Section "Display and operation").
Code number Function
9 51 48 List of machine parameters (see Chapter "Machine parameters")

80 76 67 PLC operation (see Chapter "PLC programming")
53 12 10 Cancel markers M1000 to M2000 and B0 to B127
7 53 68 Automatic offset adjustment (see Section "Servo positioning")
10 52 96 Non-linear axis error compensation (see Section 1.6.4)
16.2 Preparation of the machine

The machine is prepared without a control being connected.
Follow the sequence below to commission the drive amplifiers:
– Clamp the nominal value lead to 0 V:

Disconnect and short together the nominal value inputs of the drive amplifiers.
0 V must be applied to the input.
– Connect the servo-enable input:

Connect the servo-enable input to 24 V, thus activating the servo.
– Connect the power supply to the drive amplifiers.
– Rough offset adjustment:

If the axis moves even though the nominal value input is clamped to 0 V, the offset
potentiometer must be adjusted such that the axis comes to a stop. After the offset adjustment,
remove the short-circuit bridge on the nominal value input.
– Rough velocity adjustment:

Connect battery supply to the nominal value input. Adjust the battery supply to 9 V and adjust
the drive motor with the tacho-potentiometer to the desired speed (which equals the maximum
rapid traverse rate). The rated speed can be read from the drive motor with a tachometer.
8/95 TNC 360 16 Commissioning and Start-up Procedure 4-227

– Tuning of the drive amplifier:
As far as the control is concerned, the actual servo-loop consists of the drive amplifier, motor
and axis slide (see Section "Servo positioning"). The servo-loop must be tuned before the position
control loop in the control can be optimized.
To achieve this, a battery supply is used to apply a (9 V) step function to the nominal value input
of the drive amplifier. The step response of the tachometer signal can be recorded by an
oscillograph. The axis should be loaded with the permissible workpiece weight during the
acquisition of the step response. The subordinate control loop (current control, spindle speed
control) must be so optimized that the step response shows an overshoot. The following picture
shows the ideal response of the tacho-signal.
Given step
U [V] function 1 Overshoot
Correct
Umax
Tacho-signal
T t [ms]
The following pictures show incorrectly adjusted tacho-signals:
U [V] Several overshoots

Incorrect
Umax
Incorrect!
t [ms]
The P component of the subordinate control loop is too high, or the I component too low.
4-228 TNC 360 16 Commissioning and Start-up Procedure 8/95

U [V]
Umax Incorrect
Too flat
Incorrect!
t [ms]
The P component of the subordinate control loop is too low, or the I component too high.
Determination of the acceleration
The maximum acceleration time T can be deduced from the step response.
U [V]
Umax
T t [ms]
To calculate the acceleration increase T by 10%.
From this it follows that:
vmax
a= vmax = convert velocity at Umax in [m/sec]
T ⋅ 11
.
a = acceleration [sec]
T = Acceleration time [sec]
The step response must be investigated for all axes.

The acquired acceleration values are entered in MP1060.0 to MP1060.3.
After adjustment, switch off the supply voltage to the drive amplifiers.
This concludes the preparation of the drive amplifiers.

✎

16.3 Commissioning the control
The machine must be prepared in accordance with Section 16.2 before the machine parameters for
commissioning can be optimized.
Before connecting the control, the NC and PLC supply voltages and the ground connections should
be tested once more (see Chapter "Mounting and electrical installation ").
16.3.1 Entry of the provisional and pre-defined machine parameters

After switching on the machine for the first time, the control will first of all display the message
"Operation parameters erased", which means that the machine parameters still have to be entered
(see "Machine parameters").
Most machine parameters can be pre-defined and entered according to the machine parameter list
and the functional descriptions. The parameters which affect the control loop must be assigned
provisional values (see Section 16.3.6).
In order to avoid lengthy delays on restarting during the commissioning of the control, the memory
test can be suppressed by MP7690 (see Section "Display and operation").
16.3.2 Entry of the PLC program

A complete PLC program for all machine functions must be created for commissioning and stored
either in EPROM or RAM (see "PLC programming").
Machine parameter MP4010 (see Section "Display and operation") selects whether the processing
uses a PLC program from EPROM or from RAM.
The PLC program in RAM is used for commissioning purposes. It only makes sense to create an
EPROM when all functions are operating without error. In case of doubt, please contact your
HEIDENHAIN customer service agency
16.3.3 Testing the EMERGENCY STOP routine

Since the EMERGENCY STOP circuit is very important for the machine it is vital that it is tested!
– Test the Function "Control operational" according to Section "EMERGENCY STOP routine".
– Test the EMERGENCY STOP circuit by pressing the EMERGENCY STOP keys and by traversing
past the EMERGENCY STOP limit switches.

16.3.4 Testing the direction of traverse
Test the controls for the direction of traverse according to the following diagram (effective machine
parameters: MP210 count direction of the measuring system signals, MP1040 polarity of the
nominal value voltage, MP1320 direction of traverse on passing over the reference marks).
START
Line voltage on
"Cross positioning error"

Yes or incorrect
traverse direction
after passing over
Change ref. marks?
MP210
MP1040
MP1320
No
Erase POWER INTERRUPTED error message with CE

Line
voltage
Control voltage on; off
axes are in the control loop
Gross
positioning error Yes
(MP1040 or
MP210 incorrect)
?
No
No Start reference (Both types of

Reference traverse with traverse with referencing must
machine START button axis direction keys be performed!)
?
Yes
Traverse Axis traverse

No direction correct? direction correct? No
(as defined (defined in MP1040
in MP1320) and MP210)
Yes
Test the traverse direction of Test the traverse direction

referencing in each axis in each axis
This flow diagram must be worked through for every axis!

16.3.5 Fixing the software limit switch ranges
Determine the software limit switch ranges (see Section "Machine axes") as follows:
In "Manual operation" mode select the REF

display with the MOD key.
↓
Positional displays show the distance to the
machine datum .
↓
Move all axes with the aid of the direction keys or
the handwheel in positive and negative direction to
just before the EMERGENCY STOP limit switches. Note the
values in the positional displays and their sign.
↓
Enter the noted values in MP910 or MP920.
↓
Select actual value display with MOD key.
16.3.6 Optimizing the control with lag (MP1390 = 1)

The following provisional values can be entered for the machine parameters which determine the
control characteristics:
Machine parameter Function Provisional entry value
MP1050 Analogs voltage for rapid 9V

traverse
MP1060 Acceleration As measured on the machine
(see "Preparation of the machine")
MP1810 kv factor 1
MP1820 Multiplication factor 1
max. mach. speed · 100 %
Entry value =
MP1830 Kink point Rapid traverse
These values can usually be further optimized.

kv factor
Adjust the kv factor (MP1810) so that the voltage characteristic is as described in Section "Servo
positioning". If a different kv factor is required for rapid traverse to that for the machining feed rate, it
must be optimized separately.
Optimize kv factor for the machining feed rate (X axis)

Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer
of the servo-amplifier of X axis.
Enter following program in

"PROGRAMMING AND EDITING"
operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F2)...
X 0 R0 F2)...
CALL LBL 1 REP 100/100
Press machine START button in the

operating mode. Machine runs.
Note: Set feed override to 100%.
MP1810: Increase entry value until position loop oscillates or

until an overshoot occurs after the acceleration ramp.
U [V]
➀
t [s]
➀ Machining feed
MP1810 (kv factor): Reduce entry value until no oscillations are detectable.
U [V]
t [s]
Repeat adjustment for axes Y, Z, and IV.

1)
Program the traverse paths for the axis concerned as large as possible.
2)
Enter the max. feed rate for machining.
For axes which are mutually interpolated the kv factor must be the same.
In this case the worst axis determines the entry value.

Optimize kv factor for the rapid traverse rate
Check multiplication factor kv (MP1820 = 1) and characteristic kink

Max. machining feed x 100%
(MP1830= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rapid traverse

of the servo-amplifier of X axis.

operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F MAX
X 0 R0 F MAX

"PROGRAM RUN/SINGLE BLOCK"
operating modes. Machine runs.
Does the tacho signal show overshoot?
U [V]
t [s]
Yes No
Reduce multiplication factor Characteristic kink

MP1820 in steps until overshoot not required.
can no longer be detected.
Repeat adjustment for axes Y, Z and IV.
1)
The worst axis determines the entry value for MP 1820.

✎

16.3.7 Optimizing the control with feed forward control (MP1390 = 0)
The following provisional values can be entered for the machine parameters which determine the
control characteristics:
Machine parameter Function Provisional entry value
MP1050 Analog voltage for rapid traverse 9V

MP1060 Acceleration As measured on the machine
(see "Preparation of the machine")
MP1510 kv factor 1
MP1520 Position approach 0.5 [m/min]
MP1530 Transient response 0.1
These values can usually be further optimized.
Optimize kv factor

of the servo-amplifier of the X axis.

operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F MAX
X 0 R0 F MAX

operating mode.
Machine runs.
kv factor MP1510: Increase entry value until position loop oscillates.

U [V]
t [ms]
kv factor MP1510: Reduce entry value until no oscillations can be detected.
U [V]
t [ms]
1)

Optimizing acceleration
If the maximum acceleration of the servo loop cannot be determined with the battery supply, the
acceleration can be optimized as follows:
Connect storage oscilloscope to

tachometer of servo-amplifier of X axis.
Enter following values for

position supervision
MP1410: 0.5
MP1420: 30

operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F MAX
X 0 R0 F MAX
MP1060
Increase "acceleration"
in small steps.

operating mode.
Control stops machine. No

Error display
"POSITIONING ERROR"
?
Yes
Enter acceleration from MP1060.0
in MP1060.1 to 1060.4.
Move the Y, Z and IV axes with
the acceleration value found.
Reduce values, if necessary.
Enter the 0.7 to 0.9-fold factor of

the determined values
as acceleration in MP1060.
1)

Optimizing transient response
MP1530 affects the form of the acceleration ramp in all axes .

Tacho U [V]
voltage
MP1530 correct
MP1530 too large
MP1530 too small
t [ms]
Since MP1530 is effective for all axes, the worst axis determines the entry value. No axis should
show an overshoot.
Connect storage oscilloscope to

tachometer of servo-amplifier of X axis.

operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F MAX
X 0 R0 F MAX

operating mode.
Machine runs.
MP1530: Increase entry value until overshoot occurs.

U [V]
t [ms]
MP1530: Reduce entry value until overshoot stops.

U [V]
t [ms]
Check axes Y, Z and IV and correct MP1530, if necessary.

1)

Optimize the position approach
For all axes, MP1520 influences the slope of the run-in characteristic when close to the nominal
position
U [V]
MP1520 correct
MP1520 too large
MP1520 too small
t [ms]
Since MP1520 is effective for all axes, the worst axis determines the entry value. No axis should
show an overshoot of the nominal position.
If MP1520 is made too small, the approach times to the nominal position will be significantly longer.
So MP1520 must be carefully optimized!

of servo-amplifier of X axis.

operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F MAX
X 0 R0 F MAX

operating mode.
Machine runs.
MP1520: Increase entry value until the position is clearly traversed when
approaching. The overshoot can also be observed in the actual value display.
Tacho voltage U [V]
t [ms]
MP1520: Reduce the entry value until the position is no longer traversed.
U [V]
t [ms]
Check axes Y, Z and IV and correct MP1530, if necessary.
1)

16.3.8 Optimizing the integral factor
MP7290: "0" (display step = 1 µm)
Machine stands in position, under servo control.
↓
MP1080 integral factor (for X axis):
raise entry value 1) , until the
Servo positioning becomes noticeably unstable
(observe the actual value display).
↓
MP1080: reduce the entry value in small steps
until the servo positioning is steady again 2).
↓
Repeat adjustment for Y axis, Z, and IV.
Whether or not an integral factor is possible in connection with the automatic offset adjustment with
MP 1220 can only be judged when observing the complete machine.
The optimum solution must be found during the commissioning procedure.
1) First entry value 100, raise subsequent values in steps of 100.

2) For drives which are not quite free of backlash the entry value should be "0".

16.3.9 Adjust the offset
The rough offset adjustment has already been carried out on the servo amplifier. A fine offset
adjustment can be performed with the offset adjustment possibility described in Section "Servo
positioning".
16.3.10 Adjustment of the monitoring functions

The following entry values are recommended for the monitoring functions (see Section "Servo
positioning"):
Machine parameter Function Entry value
MP1710 Position monitoring 1.2 × lag in rapid traverse

MP1720 Position monitoring (EMERGENCY STOP) 1.4 × lag in rapid traverse
MP1410 Position monitoring 0.5 [mm]
MP1420 Position monitoring (EMERGENCY STOP) 10 [mm]
MP1140 Movement monitoring 0.5 [V]
MP1030 Positioning window 0.01 [mm]
MP1110 Standstill monitoring 0.2 [mm]
If the drives of the machine permit narrower limits, these may be entered.

✎
16 Commissioning and start-up procedure
4-244 TNC 360 16 Commissioning and start-up procedure 8/95

✎
16 Commissioning and start-up procedure
8/95 TNC 360 16 Commissioning and start-up procedure 4-245

17 Point-to-Point and Straight-Cut Control
The LE 360 logic unit is used as a control for simple machine tools with common drive.
All functions for which two or more axes must be interpolated are inhibited with machine parameter
MP7215, while certain other machine parameters are without function.
MP7215 Contouring control or point-to-point and straight-cut control

Input: 0 to 3
Input value 0: Contouring control
Input value 1: Point-to-point and straight-cut control
Contouring functions inhibited
Basic rotation inhibited
ISO inhibited
MP 1070 without function

Input value 3: Position display inhibited, otherwise same as input value 1

(only nominal, REF, lag, distance-to-go display possible)
Set Reset
M2040 Control is point-to-point and straight-cut control NC NC
Machines with common drive
On machines with common drive is necessary to set the analog voltages for the axis drives to a
common output through machine parameter MP120 (see Section 1.2.1).
Example for MP120:
Input for all axes: 0 ^

= Output 1
X axis MP 120.0 = 0
Y axis MP 120.1 = 0
Z axis MP 120.2 = 0
This means that the analog voltage for the X, Y and Z axis is sent to output 1.
After an axis is positioned, its control loop must be opened through the PLC program and its axis
must be clamped (see Section 3.6.4).
4-246 TNC 360 17 Point-to-Point and Straight-Cut Control 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 17 Point-to-Point and Straight-Cut Control 4-247

Machine parameters – Contents 5
1 What is a Machine Parameter? 5-2

1.1 User parameters 5-2
2 Input/Output of Machine Parameters 5-3
3 List of Machine Parameters 5-4

3.1 Measuring systems and machines 5-4
3.2 Positioning 5-8
3.3 Operation with feed forward control 5-10
3.4 Operation with servo lag 5-10
3.5 Spindle 5-11
3.6 Integrated PLC 5-13
3.7 Setting the data interfaces 5-14
3.8 Measuring with a 3D touch probe 5-16
3.9 Digitizing with TS 120 (only with digitizing option) 5-16
3.10 Tapping 5-17
3.11 Display and operation 5-17
3.12 Machining and program run 5-21
3.13 Hardware 5-23
4/96 TNC 360 5-1

1 What is a Machine Parameter?
A contouring control must have access to specific data (e.g., paths of traverse, acceleration) before
it can execute its programmed instructions.
The machine tool builder provides these data in so-called machine parameters. In addition, machine
parameters can be used to activated certain functions, which are possible with HEIDENHAIN
contouring controls, but are required only on certain types of machines (e.g. automatic tool
changing).
The machine parameters are grouped according to function:
Machine parameters Functional group

0 to 999 Measuring systems and machine axes
1000 to 1399 Positioning
1400 to 1699 Operation with feed forward control
1700 to 1999 Operation with servo lag
3000 to 3999 Spindle
4000 to 4999 Integrate PLC
5000 to 5999 Setting the data interface
6000 to 6199 Measuring with a 3D touch probe
6200 to 6299 Digitizing with TS 120
7100 to 7199 Tapping
7200 to 7399 Display and programming
7400 to 7599 Machining and program run
7600 to 7699 Hardware
If there is more than one input value for a single function (e.g., a separate input for each axis), the
parameter number is provided with indices.
Example:
MP330 Grating period

MP330.0 Grating period for axis X
MP330.1 Grating period for axis Y
MP330.2 Grating period for axis Z
MP330.3 Grating period for axis 4
The indices are assigned to the corresponding axes according to a fixed pattern.
1.1 User parameters

The MOD function "User Parameters" permits the control operator to easily access and change
certain machine parameters. The machine tool builder can define up to 16 different machine
parameters as user parameters through MP 7330 / MP 7340 (see Chapter "Machine Integration",
Section "Display and operation").
5-2 TNC 360 1 What is a Machine Parameter? 4/96

2 Input/Output of Machine Parameters
To call the machine parameter editor, press the MOD key and select "code number."
Enter the code number 95148 to access the complete set of machine parameters.
The accesses a limited set of the machine parameters. This set of parameters can be safely
entrusted to access by the control user (see User's Manual) The machine parameters that can be
changed with the code number 123 are indicated in the list below with CN 123.
To exit the machine parameter editor, press the END key.
If the machine parameters have not yet been entered in a HEIDENHAIN contouring control (e.g.,
during commissioning), the TNC presents the list of machine parameters after the memory test.
Now the input values must be entered either by hand on the keyboard or through the data interface.
The data interface is activated by pressing the EXT key. It is preset to RS-232-C format and FE1
mode. This default setting can be changed through the MOD functions (see Chapter "Data
Interface").
A number is entered for each machine parameter. This value can be, for example, the acceleration
in m/s2 of an individual axis, or the analog voltage in volts.
Some machine parameters have multiple functions. The input values for these machine parameters
are calculated according to the function to be activated.
Up to 16 different functions can be activated/deactivated in one machine parameter with bits 0 to

15. The input value is the sum of the decimal values of the bits representing the desired functions.
Bit Significance Decimal value
0 20 1
1 21 2
2 22 4
3 23 8
4 24 16
5 25 32
6 26 64
7 27 128
8 28 256
9 29 512
10 210 1 024
11 211 2 048
12 212 4 096
13 213 8 192
14 214 16 384
15 215 32 768
Incorrect entries are indicated with the error message "entry value incorrect."
4/96 TNC 360 2 Input/Output of Machine Parameters 5-3

3 List of Machine Parameters
3.1 Measuring systems and machines
Machine Function and input Reaction/ Page

parameter CN 123
MP10 Active axes RESET 4-5

+1 = active
+2 = active
+4 = active
+8 = active
MP30 Checking the absolute position of the 4-8

distance-coded reference marks

+1 = active
+2 = active
+4 = active
+8 = active
MP31 Checking the amplitude of the measuring 4-8

system signals

+1 = active
+2 = active
+4 = active
+8 = active
Bit 4 S axis +0 = not active
+16 = active
5-4 TNC 360 3 List of Machine Parameters 4/96

Machine Function and input Reaction/ Page
parameter CN 123
MP32 Checking the edge separation of the measuring 4-9
system signals

+1 = active
+2 = active
+4 = active
+8 = active
Bit 4 S axis +0 = not active
+16 = active
MP40 VDU display 4-13

+1 = active
+2 = active
+4 = active
+8 = active
MP50 Controlled axes 4-74
Bit 0 X axis +0 = not controlled

+1 = controlled
Bit 1 Y axis +0 = not controlled
+2 = controlled
Bit 2 Z axis +0 = not controlled
+4 = controlled
Bit 3 4th axis +0 = not controlled
+8 = controlled
MP60 PLC axes 4-35
Input: 0 to 15
Bit 0 Axis X +0 = normal NC axis

+1 = PLC axis
Bit 1 Axis Y +0 = normal NC axis
+2 = PLC axis
Bit 2 Axis Z +0 = normal NC axis
+4 = PLC axis
Bit 3 4th axis +0 = normal NC axis
+8 = PLC axis
4/96 TNC 360 3 List of Machine Parameters 5-5

Machine Function and input Reaction / Page
parameter CN 123
MP110.0 Assignment of the measuring system inputs RESET 4-12
to to the axes
MP110.3 Input range: 0 to 5
MP120.0 Assignment of the nominal value outputs RESET 4-13
to Input range: 0 to 5
MP120.3
0 = output 1
1 = output 2
2 = output 3
3 = output 4
5 = output S
MP210 Count direction of the measuring system signals RESET 4-7
+1 = negative
+2 = negative
+4 = negative
+8 = negative
MP310 Signal subdivision 4-6
Input range: 0 to 3
0 = 256-fold
1 = 4-fold
2 = 2-fold
3 = 1-fold
MP330.0 Signal period REF 4-6
to
MP330.3 Input range 1000 to 1000,000 in [µm] or [ 1000
1°
]
MP340.0 Interpolation factor of the EXE at X6 4-6
to Input: 0 to 5
MP340.4
0 = No measuring system on X6
1 = EXE without interpolation
5 = EXE with 5-fold interpolation

parameter CN 123
MP410.3 Axis designation for axis 4 RESET 4-12
Input range: 0 to 5
0=A
1=B
2=C
3=U
4=V
5=W
MP710.0 Backlash compensation 4-21
to Input range: –1.000 to +1.000 [mm]
MP710.3
MP711.0 Size of the reversal peaks in circular motion 4-22
to Input range: –1.000 to 1.000 [mm]
MP711.3
MP712.0 Compensation value per control loop cycle time 4-23
to Input range: 0.000 to 1.000 [mm]
MP712.3
MP720.0 Linear axis-error compensation 4-23
to Input range:
MP720.3 – 1.000 to + 1.000 in [mm/m]
MP730 Non-linear axis-error compensation 4-27

+1 = active
+2 = active
+4 = active
+8 = active
MP810 Modulo value for display of the PLC axes 4-35
Input: 0.000 to 99 999999 [mm]
MP810.0 Axis X
MP810.1 Axis Y
MP810.2 Axis Z
MP810.3 Axis 4
MP910.0 Traverse range 1: Maximum value 4-15
to Input range:
MP910.3 –99 999.999 to +99 999.999 [mm] or [°]
to Input range:
MP911.3 –99 999.999 to +99 999.999 [mm] or [°]
to Input range:
MP912.3 –99 999.999 to +99 999.999 [mm] or [°]

parameter CN 123
MP920.0 Neg. software limit switch for traverse range 1: 4-15
to Input range:
MP920.3 –99 999.999 to +99 999.999 [mm] or [°]
to Input range:
MP921.3 –99 999.999 to +99 999.999 [mm] or [°]
to Input range:
MP922.3 –99 999.999 to +99 999.999 [mm] or [°]
MP950.0 Datum point for positioning blocks with M92 4-110
to Input range:
MP950.3 –99 999.999 to +99 999.999 [mm] or [°]
Values referenced to machine datum
3.2 Positioning
parameter CN 123
MP1010.0 Rapid traverse 4-56
to Input range: 80 to 300 000 [mm/min]
MP1010.3
MP1020.0 Manual feed 4-56
to Input range: 80 to 300 000 [mm/min]
MP1020.3
MP1030.0 Positioning window 4-72
to Input range: 0.001 to 2 [mm] or [°]
MP1030.3
MP1040 Polarity of the nominal value voltage for the 4-7
positive direction of traverse

+1 = negative
+2 = negative
+4 = negative
+8 = negative
MP1050.0 Analog voltage for rapid traverse 4-56
to Input range: 4.5 to 9 [V]
MP1050.3
MP1060.0 Acceleration 4-54
to Input range: 0.001 to 3.0 [m/s2]
MP1060.3
MP1070 Radial acceleration 4-66
Input range: 0.001 to 3.0 [m/s2]
MP1080.0 Integral factor 4-64
to Input range: 0 to 65 535
MP1080.3

parameter CN 123
MP1110 Standstill monitoring 4-72
MP1140 Movement monitoring 4-71
Input value: 0.03 to 10 [V]
MP1150 Delay time before switching off the residual 4-70
voltage on error message "Position error"
MP1220 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment 4-63
Input value 0 to 65 536 [s]
0 = no automatic adjustment
MP1320 Direction for traversing the reference marks 4-48
Bit 0 Axis X +0 = positive

+1 = negative
Bit 1 Axis Y +0 = positive
+2 = negative
Bit 2 Axis Z +0 = positive
+4 = negative
+8 = negative
MP1330.0 Feed rate for traversing the reference marks 4-48
to
MP1330.3 Input range: 80 to 30 000 [mm/min]
MP1331.0 Feed rate for leaving the reference end position 4-48
to (only for rotary encoders MP1350 = 2)
MP1331.3 Input range: 80 to 500 [mm/min]
MP1340.0 Sequence for traversing reference marks REF 4-48
MP1340.3
0 = no evaluation of the reference marks
1 = axis X
2 = axis Y
3 = axis Z
4 = 4th axis
MP1350.0 Type of reference mark approach REF 4-49
MP1350.3
0 = measuring system with distance-coded
reference marks
1 = measuring system with one reference mark
2 = special sequence (linear measurement
via rotary encoder)
3 = measuring system with distance-coded
reference marks; after REF end position
traverse direction is changed

parameter CN 123
MP1390 Control with lag or feed forward control 4-52
Input range: 0 or 1
1 = operation with lag

0 = operation with feed forward control
3.3 Operation with feed forward control

parameter CN 123
MP1410 Position monitoring in operation with feed forward 4-70
(cancelable)
MP1420 Position monitoring in operation with feed forward 4-70
(EMERGENCY STOP)
MP1510.0 kv factor for feed forward control 4-62
to Input value: 0.1 to 10 [m/min/mm]
MP1510.3
MP1520 Position approach speed 4-62
Input value: 0.1 to 10 [m/min]
MP1530 Damping factor for transient response 4-62
Input value: 0.01 to 0.999
3.4 Operation with servo lag

parameter CN 123
MP1710 Position monitoring for operation with lag 4-69
(cancelable)
MP1720 Position monitoring for operation with lag 4-69
(EMERGENCY STOP)
MP1810.0 kv factor for operation with lag 4-56
to Input range: 0.1 to10 [m/min/mm]
MP1810.3
MP1820 Multiplication factor for the kv factor 4-58
Input value: 0.001 to 1
MP1830 Kink point 4-58

3.5 Spindle
parameter CN 123
MP3010 Spindle-speed output, Spindle orientation RESET 4-79
Input value: 0 to 8
0 = No spindle-speed output
1 = BCD-coded output of the spindle speed,

only if the spindle speed changes
2 = BCD-coded output of the spindle speed

at every TOOL CALL
3 = Analog output of the spindle speed, but gear-

change signal only if the gear range changes
4 = Analog output of the spindle speed and

gear-change signal at every TOOL CALL
5 = Analog output of the spindle speed and

no gear-change signal
6 = As for input value 3, but with controlled

spindle for orientation


MP3020 Definition of the spindle speed range 4-91
Input value: 0 to 99 999
MP3030 Axis-halt on TOOL CALL with only a spindle speed 4-87
output
Input value: 0 or 1
1 = No axis halt on TOOL CALL

0 = Axis halt on TOOL CALL
MP3120 Zero spindle speed permitted 4-82
Input value: 0 or 1
0 = 0 rpm permitted
1 = 0 rpm not permitted

parameter CN 123
MP3130 Polarity of the S-analog voltage 4-80
Input value: 0 to 3
0 = M03 positive voltage

M04 negative voltage
1 = M03 negative voltage

M04 positive voltage
2 = M03 and M04 positive voltage
3 = M03 and M04 negative voltage

MP3140 Count direction of the measuring system signals 4-81
for the spindle
Input value: 0 or 1
0 = Positive count direction with M03
1 = Negative count direction with M03
MP3210.0 S-analog voltage for gear range 4-82
to Input value: 0 to 9.999 [V]
MP3210.7
MP3240.0 Maximum S-analog voltage output 4-82
Input: 0 to 9.000 [V]
MP3240.1 Minimum S-analog voltage output 4-82
MP3240.2 Jog voltage for gear change 4-86
MP3310.0 Limit with S override (maximum) 4-84
MP3310.1 Limit with S override (minimum) 4-84
MP3410.0 Ramp slope for spindle for M03, M04, M05 4-82
Input range: 0 to 1.999 [V/ms]
MP3410.1 Ramp slope of the analog voltage for 4-93
Spindle orientation
MP3410.2 Ramp slope for tapping 4-100
MP3410.3 Accelerations ramp for rigid tapping 4-104
MP3420 Positioning window for spindle 4-95
1 increment is equivalent to about 0.088°

MP3430 Reference mark deviation from the desired 4-95
position (Spindle preset)
Input value: 0 to 360 [°]
MP3440.0 kv factor for spindle orientation 4-95
to Input range: 0.1 to 10 [m/min/mm]
MP3440.7

parameter CN 123
MP3510.0 Spindle speed for gear ranges 4-82
to Input value: 0 to 99 999.999 [rpm]
MP3510.7
MP3520.0 Spindle speed activated by marker M2501 4-96
MP3520.1 Spindle speed for spindle orientation 4-93
3.6 Integrated PLC

parameter CN 123
MP4010 PLC program from RAM or from EPROM RESET 7-21
Input: 0 or 1
0 = EPROM operation
1 = RAM operation
MP4060.0 Path dependent lubrication 4-18
to Input range: 0 to 65 535
MP4060.4 (units of 65 536 µm)
MP4110.0 Time for timers 7-19
to Input range: 0 to 65 535 [PLC cycles]
MP4110.47
(TNC 360: 20 ms)
MP4120.0 Preset value for counters C0 to C31 7-21
to Input range: 0 to 65 535 [PLC cycles]
MP4120. 31
MP4130 Fast PLC input to suppress the monitoring 4-68
functions
Input value: 0 to 255 [No. of the PLC input]
MP4131 Activation condition for fast PLC input from 4-68
MP4130
Input value: 0 or 1
MP4210.0 Set a number in the PLC (D768 to W 988) 7-17
to Input range:
MP4210.47 –99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999 [mm] or [°]
MP4220.0 Set a number in the PLC in the word range W960 7-17
to to W966
MP4220.3 Input: 0 to 65 535

parameter CN 123
MP4230.0 Set a number in the PLC via module 9032 7-17
to Input value: -30 000 000 to + 30 000 000
MP4230.31
to
MP4239.0
to
MP4239.31
MP4310.0 Set a number in the PLC, in the Word range W976 7-17
to to W988
MP4310.6 Input range: 0 to 65 535
3.7 Setting the data interfaces

parameter CN 123
MP5010.0 Control characters for "blockwise transfer" CN 123 8-26
Character for program end and beginning
The character for program end also applies for
"Standard data interface"
MP5010.1 ASCII characters for data input CN 123 8-27

MP5010.2 ASCII characters for data output CN 123 8-27
MP5010.3 ASCII characters for beginning and end of the CN 123 8-26
command block
MP5010.4 ASCII characters for positive acknowledgment or CN 123 8-26
negative acknowledgment
MP5010.5 ASCII character for data transmission ended CN 123 8-26

parameter CN 123
MP5020 Operating mode EXT: interface configuration CN 123 8-28
Bit 0 7 or 8 Data bits

+0 = 7 Data bits
+1 = 8 Data bits
Bit 1 Block Check Character
+0 = BCC character optional
+2 = BCC character not control character
Bit 2 Transmission stop through RTS
+0 = not active
+4 = active
Bit 3 Transmission stop through DC3
+0 = not active
+8 = active
Bit 4 Character parity
+0 = even
+16 = odd
Bit 5 Character parity
+0 = not required
+32 = required
Bit 6/7 Stop bits
Bit 6 Bit 7
+0 = 1½ Stop bits 0 0
+64 = 2 Stop bits 1 0
+128 = 1 stop bit 0 1
+192 = 1 stop bit 1 1
Bit 8 RTS in quiescent state low
Bit 9 No EOT after ETX received
MP5030.0 Operating mode EXT: data transmission protocol CN 123 8-28
Input: 0 or 1
0 = "Standard data transmission"

1 = "Blockwise transfer"
MP5040 Data transfer rate for PLC interface CN 123 8-42
Input range: 0 to 9
0= 110 baud 5= 2 400 baud

1= 150 baud 6= 4 800 baud
2= 300 baud 7= 9 600 baud
3= 600 baud 8= 19 200 baud
4= 1200 baud 9= 38 400 baud

3.8 Measuring with a 3D touch probe
parameter CN 123
MP6010 Selection of the touch probe system CN 123 4-152
Input: 0 or 1
0 = TS 120
1 = TS 511
MP6120 Probing feed rate CN 123 4-152
MP6130 Maximum measuring range CN 123 4-152
Input range: 0.001 to 99 999.999 [mm]
MP6140 Safety clearance above measuring point CN 123 4-152
Input range: 0.001 to 99 999.999 [mm]
MP6150 Rapid traverse for probe cycle CN 123 4-152
3.9 Digitizing with TS 120 (only with digitizing option)

parameter CN 123
MP6210 Number of oscillations per second in normal 4-156
direction
Input range: 0 to 65.535 [1/s]
MP6230 Feed rate in normal direction 4-156
MP6240 Maximum deflection of stylus 4-156
Input range: 0 to 10.000 [mm]
MP6250 Numerical value for M function for transferring 4-157
modal values
Input 0 to 89
0 = no transfer
1 ... 89 number of the M function
MP6260 Output of M90 for NC blocks with digitized data 4-157
Input: 0 or 1
0 = no output of M90
1 = output of M90 in every NC block
MP6270 Rounding of trailing zeros 4-157
Input: 0 to 1
0 = Output in 0.001 mm increments (1 µm)
1 = Output in 0.01 mm increments (10 µm)

3.10 Tapping
parameter CN 123
MP7000 Acknowledgment of display "Power interruption" –
0 = manual with "CE"
1 = automatic after 3 sec (for positioning module)
MP7110.0 Minimum for feed override when tapping 4-100
Input range: 0 to 150 [%]

MP7110.1 Maximum for feed override when tapping 4-100
Input range: 0 to 150 [%]
MP7120.0 Dwell time for change of direction of spindle 4-100
rotation
Input range: 0 to 65.535 [s]
Advanced switch time of spindle for "tapping" cycle 4-102
(only active with BCD output of spindle rpm)

MP7120.2 Spindle run-on time after reaching total hole depth 4-100
MP7130 Spindle run-in characteristic 4-104
Input range: 0.001 to 10 [°/min]
(matching MP1520)
MP7140 Transient response of spindle on acceleration 4-104
Input range: 0.001 to 1
(matching MP1530)
MP7150 Positioning window for tool axis 4-104
MP7160 Suppress spindle orientation at the beginning of 4-104
Cycle 17
Input: 0 or 1
0 = Orient the spindle
1 = Suppress spindle orientation
3.11 Display and operation

parameter CN 123
MP7210 Programming station CN 123 4-134
Input values: 0 to 2 RESET
0 = Control and programming
1 = Programming station, "PLC active"
2 = Programming station "PLC inactive"

parameter CN 123
MP7215 Contouring control or point-to-point and straight-cut CN 123 4-246
control
Input range 0 to 3
0 = Contouring control (TNC 360)
1 = Point-to-point and straight cut (TNC 335)
2 = Position display inhibited, otherwise same as 1
MP7220 Block number step size for ISO programs CN 123 4-132
MP7222 Programming language selection: dialog or ISO CN 123 4-132
Input: 0 to 2
0 = Selection via MOD
1 = Only dialog
2 = Only ISO
MP7225 Generating blocks with the "ACTUAL POSITION 4-121
CAPTURE" key (not in ISO programming)
Input: 0 to 3
0 = no block generation possible
1 = block generation with the "ACTUAL POSITION
CAPTURE" key
2 = block generation with M2829
MP7230 Switching the dialogue language CN 123 4-134
Input: 0 or 1
0 = First dialog language
1 = Basic language (English)
MP7235 Resetting the timing 4-118
Input: 0 to 4
0 = No resetting
1 = Reset switch-on duration
2 = Reset run time of automatic operation
4 = Reset run time of spindle
MP7240 Inhibit program input for [Program name] = [OEM 9-5
cycle number in EPROM].
Input: 0 or 1
0 = Inhibited
1 = Not inhibited
MP7245.0 Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN cycles 1 to 15 4-126
MP7245.1 Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN standard cycles 4-127
16 to 30
MP7250 Difference between Q parameter number for "CALL- 9-5
active" and "DEF-active" block in OEM cycles
Input 0 to 50
MP7251 Number of global Q parameters that can be 9-5
transferred from OEM cycle to the calling program
Input: 0 to 100

parameter CN 123
MP7260 Number of tools in the tool table CN 123 4-196
Input: 0 to 99 RESET
0 = No central tool file
1 - 99 number of tools, tool file is active
MP7261 Number of pockets in the tool magazine CN123 4-
Input: 0 to 99 RESET 214
MP7264 Number of pockets reserved next to special tool CN 123 4-197
Input: 1 to 3 RESET
MP7270 Display of the feed rates in manual operating CN 123 4-116
modes (Manual operation, Electronic handwheel)
Input: 0 or 1
Bit 0 = 0 Display of the axis feed rate only when

an axis direction key is pressed
Bit 0 = 1 Display of the axis feed rate before
operating an axis-direction key (smallest
value from MP1020.X for all axes)
Bit 1 = 1 Abortion after NC stop in manual
operating mode (control-in-operation
symbol off)
MP7274 Expanded spindle display 4-120
Input: 0 to 3
Bit 0 Display of current gear range
+0 No display
+1 Display
Bit 1 Display of spindle power
+0 Acquisition via analog input
+2 Acquisition via PLC word W600
MP7275 Reference value of displayed spindle power for 4-120
acquisition via analog input
Input: 0 to 4.999 [V]
for acquisition via word W600

Input: 0 to 43 690
Input value is equivalent to 100%

MP7280 Decimal sign CN 123 4-134
Input: 0 or 1
0 = Decimal comma
1 = Decimal point
MP7285 Calculation of the tool length for the position CN 123 4-113
display of the tool axis
Input: 0 or 1
0 = Tool length is not calculated

1 = Tool length is calculated

MP7290 Position-display step 4-113
Input: 1 to 4
0 = 0.001 mm or 0.001°
1 = 0.005 mm or 0.005°
2 = 0.010 mm or 0.01°
3 = 0.050 mm 0r 0.05°
4 = 0.100 mm or 0.1°
MP7300 Cancel status display, Q parameters, and tool data CN 123 4-119
Input: 0 to 7
0 = Status display, Q parameters and tool data

canceled through program selection
1 = Status display, Q parameters and tool data
canceled through M02, M30, END PGM and
program selection
2 = Status display and tool data canceled through
program selection
3 = Status display and tool data canceled through
M02, M30, END PGM and program selection
4 = Status display and Q parameters canceled
through program selection
5 = Status display and Q parameters canceled
through M02, M30, END PGM and program
selection
6 = Status display canceled through program
selection
7 = Status display canceled through M02, M30,
END PGM and program selection
MP7310 Graphics display CN 123 4-112
Input range: 0 to 3
Bit 0 Changeover of 3-plane display

+ 0 = European preferred
+ 1 = American preferred
Bit 1 Rotation of the coordinate system in the
machining plane + 90°
+ 0 = no rotation
+ 2 = coordinate system rotated by +90°
MP7330.0 Determination of the User Parameters 4-133
to Input range: 0 to 9999.00 (Number of the desired
MP7330.15 machine parameter)
MP7340.0 Dialogues for User Parameters 4-133
MP7340.15 0 to 99 from PLC error messages
100 to 199 from dialogue texts

3.12 Machining and program run
parameter CN 123
MP7410 ”Scaling factor” cycle active in two or three axes CN 123 4-130
Input: 0 or 1
0 = Cycle ”Scaling factor” operates in all three

principle axes
1 = Cycle ”Scaling factor” only operates in the
machining plane
MP7411 Compensation data for TOUCH PROBE block 4-152
Input: 0 or 1
0 = Compensation value from the calibration

process
1 = Compensation value from the tool file
MP7420 Cycles for milling pockets with free-programmed CN 123 4-129

contours
Bit 0 Slot milling direction for

+ 0 = Anti-clockwise slot milling of the
pocket contours, clockwise for
islands
+ 1 = Clockwise slot milling of the
pocket contours, anti-clockwise
for islands
Bit 1 Sequence for clearing out and – slot
milling
+ 0 = First slot milling, then clear out
pocket
+ 2 = First clear out pocket, then
slot milling
Bit 2 Merge programmed contours
+ 0 = Contours merged only if the tool
center paths intersect
+ 4 = Contours merged if the
programmed contours overlap
Bit 3 Clear out and slot milling to pocket depth,
or for each feed
+ 0 = Clearing out and slot milling
performed in one operation for
all feeds
+ 8 = For each peck, first perform slot-
milling and then feed clearing out
(depending on Bit 1) before next
peck
MP7430 Overlap factor for pocket milling CN 123 4-128
Input: = 0.1 to 1.414

parameter CN 123
MP7440 Output of M functions CN 123 4-140
Input range: 0 to 7
Bit 0 Program halt on M06

+ 0 = Program halt on M06
+ 1 = No program halt on M06
Bit 1 modal cycle call M89
+ 0 = normal code transfer of M89 at
beginning of block
+ 2 = modal cycle call M89 at end of
block
Bit 2 Program halt on M functions
+ 0 = Program halt until
acknowledgment of M function
+ 4 = No program halt (does not wait
for acknowledgment)
Bit 3 and Bit 4: no function
Bit 5 +0
+ 1 = Setting the marker axis in position
between 2 NC blocks, if there is
delay time here (e.g. programmed
dwell time)
MP7460 Constant contouring speed at corners CN 123 4-67
Input: 0.001 to 179.999°
MP7470 Display mode for rotary axis (not for PLC help axes) CN 123 4-114
Input: 0 to 3
Bit 0 Display mode

+0 = 0 to + 359.999 [°] (no software
limit switch)
+1 = – 30 000.000 to + 30 000.000
(software limit switch active)
Bit 1 Positioning the rotary axis

+0 = according to the sign
+2 = always by the shortest path
(useful only when Bit 0 = 0)
MP7480.0 Output of tool or pocket number in TOOL CALL 4-198
block
Input: 0 to 3
0 = No output
1 = Output of tool number only when tool number
changes (W262)
2 = Output of tool number with every TOOL CALL
block (W262)
3 = Output of pocket number (W262) and tool
number (W264) only when tool number changes

parameter CN 123
MP7480.1 Output of tool or pocket number in TOOL DEF 4-199
block
Input: 0 to 3
0 = No output
1 = Tool number output only after tool number
change (W262)
2 = Tool number output with each TOOL DEF
block (W262)
3 = Output of pocket number (W262) and tool
number (W264) only after tool number change
3.13 Hardware
Machine Function and input Reaction Page
parameter / CN 123
MP7620 Feed rate and spindle override CN 123 4-84
Input: 0 to 15 4-116
Bit 0 Feed rate override is rapid traverse button

is pressed in the "program run" mode
+0 = Override not active
+1 = Override active
Bit 2 Feed rate override if rapid traverse buttons
and machine direction buttons are pressed
in "manual" operating mode
+0 = Override not active
+4 = Override active
Bit 3 Spindle and feed rate override in 1%
increments or according to a non-linear
characteristic curve
+0 = 1% increments
+8 = non-linear characteristic curve
MP7640 Handwheel CN 123 4-167
Input: 0 to 6
0 = No handwheel
1 = HR 330
2 = HR 130
3 = HR 330 with evaluation of keys via PLC
4 = HR 332 with evaluation of keys via PLC
5 = Up to three HR 150 via HRA 110
6 = HR 410

parameter / CN 123
MP7641 Entry of interpolation factor and handwheel 4-107
activation 4-172
Input: 0 to 15
Bit 0 = 0 Entry of interpolation factor via TNC

keyboard
= 1 Entry of interpolation factor via PLC
module 9036
Bit 1 = 1 Handwheel active in the Programming
and editing mode
Bit 2 = 1 Entry of interpolation factor via PLC
module 9036 and TNC keyboard
Bit 3 = 1 Polling handwheel keys from the PLC
in every operating mode
MP7645.0 Assignment of handwheel keys for HR 332 if 4-169

MP7640 = 4: 4-172
Input value: 0 or 1
0 = All keys and LEDs, except axis selection keys
and their LEDs, are selectable via PLC
1 = All 12 keys and LEDs are selectable via PLC
If MP 7640 = 5:
Assignment of 3rd handwheel via axis selection
switch
Input value: 0 to 2
Switch 3rd handwheel

0 = 1 (left stop) Z axis
2 4th axis
1 = 1 (left stop) X axis
2 Y axis
3 Z axis
4 4th axis
2 = 3 Z axis
4 4th axis
MP7645.1 Assignment of 3rd handwheel via machine parameter 4-173
Input: 0 to 8
0 = Assignment of 3rd handwheel via MP7645.0
1 = 3rd handwheel X axis
2 = 3rd handwheel Y axis
4 = 3rd handwheel Z axis
8 = 3rd handwheel 4th axis
MP7645.2 Assignment of 3rd handwheel via axis selection 4-173
switch or MP7645.1
Input: 0 to 1
0 = Assignment via axis selection switch according
to MP 7645.0
1 = Assignment via MP 7645.1

parameter / CN 123
MP7650 Count direction for handwheel 4-167
Input: 0 or 1
0 = Positive count direction

1 = Negative count direction
MP7660 Threshold sensitivity for electronic handwheel 4-167
Input value: 0 to 65 535 [increments]
MP7670 Minimum interpolation factor for handwheel 4-167
MP7670 Interpolation factor for handwheel HR410
Input: 0 to 10
MP7670.0 Interpolation factor at low speed
MP7670.1 Interpolation factor at medium speed
MP7670.2 Interpolation factor at high speed
MP7671 Manual feed rate in "handwheel" operation mode
with HR 410
Input: 0 to 1000 [% to MP1020]
MP7671.0 Low speed
MP7671.1 Medium speed
MP7671.2 High speed
MP7680 Memory function for axis-direction keys 4-149
0 = not stored
1 = stored
MP7690 Memory test at switch-on 4-135
Input range: 0 to 3
Bit 0 RAM test

+ 0 = Memory test at switch-on
Bit 1 EPROM test
+ 0 = Memory test at switch-on

1 List of Markers
The markers listed in italics have been retained to insure compatibility with the TNC 355. It is
recommended, however, that these functions be activated through the new word functions.
Marker Function Set Reset Page

M2000 Axis enable X NC PLC 4-74
M2001 Axis enable Y NC PLC 4-74
M2002 Axis enable Z NC PLC 4-74
M2003 Axis enable 4 NC PLC 4-74
M2004 S-analogue voltage not on ramp NC NC 4-82
M2005 S-analogue voltage = 0 V NC NC 4-82
M2007 Spindle in position NC NC 4-95
M2008 X axis in position NC NC 4-75
M2009 Y axis in position NC NC 4-75
M2010 Z axis in position NC NC 4-75
M2011 4th axis in position NC NC 4-75
M2012 Lubrication pulse X axis, since value of MP4060.0 NC NC 4-18
was exceeded
M2013 Lubrication pulse Y axis, since value of MP4060.1 NC NC 4-18
was exceeded
M2014 Lubrication pulse Z axis, since value of MP4060.2 NC NC 4-18
was exceeded
M2015 Lubrication pulse 4th axis, since value of MP4060.3 NC NC 4-18
was exceeded
M2022 Touch probe not ready (no standby signal at connector X12) NC NC 4-153
M2023 Stylus deflected before start of probing cycle NC NC 4-153
M2025 Stylus deflected (probing sequence is executed) NC PLC 4-153
M2026 Probe operation ended or interrupted NC NC 4-153
M2027 Battery voltage too low (battery warning on connector X12); NC NC 4-153
evaluated only during the probe operation
M2032 T Code 1st bit (lsb) NC NC 7-123
M2033 T Code 2nd bit NC NC 7-123
M2034 T Code 3rd bit NC NC 7-123
M2035 T Code 4th bit NC NC 7-123
M2039 T Code 8th bit (msb) NC NC 7-123
M2040 The control functions as point-to-point and straight-cut control NC NC 4-246
M2041 Basic language (English) is selected NC NC 4-134
M2042 Analogue output of the spindle speed NC NC 4-80
M2043 Change signal for gear code NC NC 4-86
M2044 Change signal for S code NC NC 4-91
M2045 Change signal for M function NC NC 4-138
4/96 TNC 360 1 List of Markers 6-1

M2046 Strobe signal T code (P code) with TOOL CALL NC NC 4-199
M2047 Strobe signal 2nd T code (2nd P code) with TOOL DEF NC NC 4-199
M2048 Tapping cycle called NC NC 4-100
M2049 Parallel editing NC NC –
M2050 Operating mode: Programming and editing NC NC 7-123
M2051 Operating mode: Manual NC NC 7-123
M2052 Operating mode: Electronic handwheel NC NC 7-123
M2053 Operating mode: Positioning with manual data input NC NC 7-123
M2054 Operating mode: Program run/single block NC NC 7-123
M2055 Operating mode: Program run/full sequence NC NC 7-123
M2056 Operating mode: Test run NC NC 7-123
M2057 Operating mode: Traversing the reference marks NC NC 7-123
M2058 Repeat last operating mode key NC NC –
M2060 ISO program is selected NC NC 4-132
M2061 END PGM, M02 or M30 has been executed NC NC 4-135
M2063 "PGM 0" is selected NC NC 4-199
M2064 S Code 1st bit (lsb) 7-123
M2065 S Code 2nd bit 7-123
M2066 S Code 3rd bit 7-123
M2067 S Code 4th bit 7-123
M2071 S Code 8th bit (msb) 7-123
M2072 M Code 1st bit (lsb) 7-123
M2073 M Code 2nd bit 7-123
M2074 M Code 3rd bit 7-123
M2075 M Code 4th bit 7-123
M2079 M Code 8th bit (msb) 7-123
M2080 Minimum rpm from MP3020 1st bit (lsb) 7-123
M2081 Minimum rpm from MP3020 2nd bit 7-123
M2082 Minimum rpm from MP3020 3rd bit 7-123
M2083 Minimum rpm from MP3020 4th bit 7-123
M2087 Minimum rpm from MP3020 8th bit (msb) 7-123
M2088 Increment from MP3020 1st bit (lsb) 7-123
M2089 Increment from MP3020 2nd bit 7-123
M2090 Increment from MP3020 3rd bit 7-123
M2091 Increment from MP3020 4th bit (msb) 7-123
M2092 Illegal spindle speed NC NC 4-87
M2093 Another T code (P code) follows with TOOL CALL NC NC 4-214
M2095 Rigid tapping is active NC NC 4-104
6-2 TNC 360 1 List of Markers 8/95

M2096 X key last pressed NC NC 4-113
M2097 Y key last pressed NC NC 4-113
M2098 Z key last pressed NC NC 4-113
M2099 Key IV last pressed NC NC 4-113
M2100 X axis is tool axis NC NC 4-13
M2101 Y axis is tool axis NC NC 4-13
M2102 Z axis is tool axis NC NC 4-13
M2103 4th axis is tool axis NC NC 4-13
M2104 G Code S Analog 1st bit (lsb) PLC PLC 4-86
M2105 G Code S Analog 2nd bit PLC PLC 4-86
M2106 G Code S Analog 3rd bit (msb) PLC PLC 4-86
M2112 T Number (P Number) 1st decade (lsb) 7-124
M2113 T Number (P Number) 1st decade 7-124
M2114 T Number (P Number) 1st decade 7-124
M2115 T Number (P Number) 1st decade (msb) 7-124
M2116 T Number (P Number) 2nd decade (lsb) 7-124
M2117 T Number (P Number) 2nd decade 7-124
M2118 T Number (P Number) 2nd decade 7-124
M2119 T Number (P Number) 2nd decade (msb) 7-124
M2128 X axis in motion NC NC 4-76
M2129 Y axis in motion NC NC 4-76
M2130 Z axis in motion NC NC 4-76
M2131 4th axis in motion NC NC 4-76
M2136 X axis reference mark not yet traversed NC NC –
M2137 Y axis reference mark not yet traversed NC NC –
M2138 Z axis reference mark not yet traversed NC NC –
M2139 4th axis reference mark not yet traversed NC NC –
M2149 Strobe marker for Q parameter transfer with FN19 NC NC –
M2150 Unit of measure of the NC program (0 = mm, 1 = inch) NC NC –
M2160 Traverse direction X axis 0 = positive 1 = negative NC NC 4-7
M2161 Traverse direction Y axis 0 = positive 1 = negative NC NC 4-7
M2162 Traverse direction Z axis 0 = positive 1 = negative NC NC 4-7
M2163 Traverse direction 4th axis 0 = positive 1 = negative NC NC 4-7
M2176 Code operating mode (lsb) 7-124
M2177 Code operating mode 7-124
M2178 Code operating mode 7-124
M2179 Code operating mode (msb) 7-124
M2180 1st PLC scan after switch-on NC NC –
M2182 Inhibited key was operated NC PLC 4-141
M2183 Program interruption NC NC 4-118
("Control operational" display flashes)
M2184 Control operational NC NC 4-118
("Control operational" display goes on or flashes)
M2185 1st PLC scan after interruption of the PLC program NC NC –
M2186 Code number 84159 entered NC PLC 7-124
M2190 Non-flashing error message is displayed NC NC 4-122
M2191 "External EMERGENCY STOP" message is displayed NC NC 4-106

M2192 Markers controllable NC NC 7-124
to by MP4310.0, MP 4310.1 and MP 4310.2
M2239
M2240 Inhibit OEM cycle 68 PLC PLC 9-5
M2400 Tool number 0 programmed NC NC 4-199
M2401 Active tool with pocket number (MP7260/MP7261) NC NC 4-214
M2402 Active tool without pocket number (MP7260/MP7261) NC NC 4-214
M2403 Active tool = special tool NC NC 4-214
M2408 Cycle 13 is executed
M2448 NC start (edge evaluation) PLC PLC 4-149
M2449 Rapid traverse PLC PLC 4-149
M2450 Memory function for axis-direction keys PLC PLC 4-149
M2451 Feed release for all axes PLC PLC 4-74
M2452 Activate PLC positioning X axis PLC NC 7-124
M2453 Activate PLC positioning Y axis PLC NC 7-124
M2454 Activate PLC positioning Z axis PLC NC 7-124
M2455 Activate PLC positioning 4th axis PLC NC 7-124

M2456 Manual traverse X+ PLC PLC 4-149
M2457 Manual traverse X– PLC PLC 4-149
M2458 Manual traverse Y+ PLC PLC 4-149
M2459 Manual traverse Y- PLC PLC 4-149
M2460 Manual traverse Z+ PLC PLC 4-150
M2461 Manual traverse Z- PLC PLC 4-150
M2462 Manual traverse 4+ PLC PLC 4-150
M2463 Manual traverse 4– PLC PLC 4-150
M2464 Complement – NC start PLC PLC 4-149
M2465 Complement – rapid traverse PLC PLC 4-149
M2466 Complement – memory function for axis-direction keys PLC PLC 4-149
M2467 Complement – feed release PLC PLC 4-75
M2468 Complement PLC positioning X axis NC PLC 7-124
M2469 Complement PLC positioning Y axis NC PLC 7-124
M2470 Complement PLC positioning Z axis NC PLC 7-124
M2471 Complement PLC positioning 4th axis NC PLC 7-124
M2472 Complement – manual traverse X+ PLC PLC 4-149
M2473 Complement – manual traverse X– PLC PLC 4-149
M2474 Complement – manual traverse Y+ PLC PLC 4-149
M2475 Complement – manual traverse Y– PLC PLC 4-149
M2476 Complement – manual traverse Z+ PLC PLC 4-150
M2477 Complement – manual traverse Z– PLC PLC 4-150
M2478 Complement – manual traverse 4+ PLC PLC 4-150
M2479 Complement – manual traverse 4– PLC PLC 4-150
M2480 Acknowledgment ”Gear change completed” PLC PLC 4-86
M2481 S code acknowledgment PLC PLC 4-90
M2482 Acknowledgment of M function PLC PLC 4-138
M2483 Acknowledgment T code (P code) with TOOL CALL PLC PLC 4-199
M2484 Acknowledgment T code (P code) with TOOL DEF PLC PLC 4-199
M2485 Status display and sign of S analogue for M03 PLC PLC 4-81
M2486 Status display and sign of S analogue for M04 PLC PLC 4-81
M2487 Status display for M05 and spindle stop PLC PLC 4-81
M2488 NC stop (”0” signifies stop) PLC PLC 4-149
M2489 Change direction of spindle rotation PLC PLC 4-81
M2490 Spindle rotation left (for gear change) PLC PLC 4-86
M2491 Spindle rotation right (for gear change) PLC PLC 4-86
M2492 Await open control loop X axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2493 Await open control loop Y axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2494 Await open control loop Z axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2495 Await open control loop 4th axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2496 Enable marker for the decoded M code transfer to markers PLC PLC 4-138
M1900 to M1999
M2497 Activate the edge evaluation for PLC inputs PLC PLC 7-21
Rising-edge marker M1500 to M1659
Falling-edge marker M1700 to M1859
M2498 Release jog positioning PLC PLC 4-178
M2499 Open spindle control loop PLC PLC 4-93

M2501 Activates spindle speed MP3520.0 and direction of rotation PLC PLC 4-96
from marker M2656
M2502 NC STOP in all operating modes if stylus is deflected PLC PLC 4-153
M2503 Enable marker for probing functions NC PLC 4-153
M2508 Status display M08 or M09 PLC PLC 4-117
M2510 Spindle potentiometer fixed to 100% PLC PLC –
M2511 Feed rate potentiometer fixed to 100% PLC PLC –
M2512 Start jog positioning axis X+ PLC PLC 4-178
M2513 Start jog positioning axis X– PLC PLC 4-178
M2514 Start jog positioning axis Y+ PLC PLC 4-178
M2515 Start jog positioning axis Y– PLC PLC 4-178
M2516 Start jog positioning axis Z+ PLC PLC 4-178
M2517 Start jog positioning axis Z– PLC PLC 4-178
M2518 Start jog positioning axis 4+ PLC PLC 4-178
M2519 Start jog positioning axis 4– PLC PLC 4-178
M2527 Activate spindle orientation PLC NC 7-124
M2528 Complement jog positioning axis X+ PLC PLC 4-178
M2529 Complement jog positioning axis X– PLC PLC 4-178
M2530 Complement jog positioning axis Y+ PLC PLC 4-178
M2531 Complement jog positioning axis Y– PLC PLC 4-178
M2532 Complement jog positioning axis Z+ PLC PLC 4-178
M2533 Complement jog positioning axis Z– PLC PLC 4-178
M2534 Complement jog positioning axis 4+ PLC PLC 4-178
M2535 Complement jog positioning axis 4– PLC PLC 4-178
M2543 Complement spindle orientation NC PLC 7-124
M2544 Open control loop X axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2545 Open control loop Y axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2546 Open control loop Z axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2547 Open control loop 4th axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2548 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication X axis PLC PLC 4-18
M2549 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication Y axis PLC PLC 4-18
M2550 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication Z axis PLC PLC 4-18
M2551 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication 4th axis PLC PLC 4-18
M2552 Actual – nominal value transfer X axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2553 Actual – nominal value transfer Y axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2554 Actual – nominal value transfer Z axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2555 Actual – nominal value transfer 4 axis PLC PLC 4-77
M2556 Reference end position for X axis PLC PLC 4-49
M2557 Reference end position for Y axis PLC PLC 4-49
M2558 Reference end position for Z axis PLC PLC 4-49
M2559 Reference end position for axis 4 PLC PLC 4-49

M2560 BCD numerical values for PLC positioning, tool number, spindle PLC PLC 7-124
to orientation and Q parameters
M2589
M2594 Inhibit editing of central tool file (L and R possible) PLC PLC –
M2597 Tool number: output mode PLC PLC –
0 = binary 1 = BCD
M2600 Sequence of tool number or pocket number transfer PLC PLC 4-214
(M2093 = 1)
M2601 Return special tool to its original pocket in spite of variable PLC PLC 4-214
pocket coding
M2608 Inverse display of M03, M04, M05 and S analogue = 0 V PLC PLC 4-117
M2609 Status display M08, M09 inverse PLC PLC 4-117
M2610 Tool number shown inverted in status display PLC PLC –
M2611 Acknowledgment of Q parameter transfer with FN19 PLC PLC –
M2612 Suppress exchange of pocket number PLC PLC 4–200
M2614 Suppress PLC functions (M/S/T/Q strobe) by the NC PLC PLC –
M2615 Re-evaluate reference mark of the spindle PLC NC
M2624 Limit switch X+ NC NC 4-17
M2625 Limit switch X– NC NC 4-17
M2626 Limit switch Y+ NC NC 4-17
M2627 Limit switch Y– NC NC 4-17
M2628 Limit switch Z+ NC NC 4-17
M2629 Limit switch Z– NC NC 4-17
M2630 Limit switch 4+ NC NC 4-17
M2631 Limit switch 4– NC NC 4-17
M2656 Spindle orientation from stop PLC PLC 4-93
M2688 No monitoring X axis PLC PLC 4-68
M2689 No monitoring Y axis PLC PLC 4-68
M2690 No monitoring Z axis PLC PLC 4-68
M2691 No monitoring axis 4 PLC PLC 4-68
M2704 Activate PLC positioning X axis PLC NC 4-33
M2705 Activate PLC positioning Y axis PLC NC 4-33
M2706 Activate PLC positioning Z axis PLC NC 4-33
M2707 Activate PLC positioning 4th axis PLC NC 4-33
M2712 Activate PLC positioning for spindle orientation PLC NC 4-93
M2713 Activate the transfer of the value from D528 to the PLC NC 4-135
Q Parameter defined in W516
M2714 Strobe marker write to tool file PLC NC –
M2715 Strobe marker read from tool file PLC NC –
M2716 Strobe marker for datum correction PLC NC 4-194
M2719 Deactivate the TNC 355 mode PLC PLC 7-121

M2800 Key code PLC PLC 7-124
to
M2807
M2808 Strobe marker for key code PLC PLC 7-124
M2809 Activate numerical value transfer from PLC to NC PLC PLC 7-124
M2810 Data format of a numerical value in M2560 to M2576 7-124
M2813 Activate the key from W516 PLC NC 4-139
M2814 Activation of a gear range and spindle speed via PLC PLC NC 4-86
M2815 Flashing PLC error message PLC PLC 4-122
M2816 Select traverse range PLC PLC 4-16
M2817 Select traverse range PLC PLC 4-16
M2818 Q number (msb) PLC PLC 7-124
M2819 Activate datum correction PLC NC 7-124
M2824 Activation of the selected traverse range PLC NC 4-16
(M2816/M2817)
M2825 External EMERGENCY OFF via PLC PLC PLC –
M2826 Suppress handwheel pulses PLC PLC 4-167
M2827 Suppress EMERGENCY OFF, open the control loop, NC stop PLC PLC –
M2829 NC block generation PLC NC 4–121
M2832 Key code of the pressed inhibited key NC NC 7-124
to
M2839
M2855 Inhibit keys PLC PLC 4-142
to
M2923
M2924 Activate PLC error messages PLC NC; 4-122
to PLC
M3023
M3168 Overflow during multiplication NC PLC 7-59
M3169 Division by 0 NC PLC 7-60
M3170 MODULO incorrectly executed NC PLC 7-61
M3171 M3171 is set when transfer incorrectly executed 7-103
- 118
M3172 Reserved for errors that the PLC programmer would like to –
intercept
M3200 Values from MP4310.3 to MP4310.6 7-125
to
M3263

2 List of Words
Word
Words Function Page
W256 G code for S analogue 4-86
W258 S code 4-91
W260 Code for M function 4-138
W262 Pocket number when MP7480 = 3 4-199
Tool number when MP7480 = 1 or 2
W264 Tool number when MP7480 = 3 4-199
W272 Operating mode 4-141
4 = Program run/single block
5 = Program run/full sequence
6 = Test run
7 = Pass over reference point
W274 Key code for the operated, inhibited key, Signal via M2182 4-141
D276 Code number entered in MOD mode –
D280 1st value FN19 –
D284 2nd value FN19 –
W320 Nominal spindle speed 4-80
W322 Actual spindle speed 4-80
D356 Programmed spindle speed (NC → PLC) 4-80
D360 Programmed feed rate (NC → PLC) –
D388 Current feed rate (NC → PLC) –
W392 Analog voltage of the analog input (0 to 5 V) –
W492 % factor – spindle override (NC → PLC) 4-84
W494 % factor – feed rate override (NC → PLC) 4-116
W512 T code –
W514 P code –
W516 Word with multiple function 4-135
Key code for simulation of TNC keys
Activate with M2813
Number of the Q parameter to be overwritten (Q100 to Q107 = 0 to 7)
W522 Monitoring functions suppressed if PLC 4-68
input from MP4130 is activated
D528 Value to be transferred to the Q parameter 4-135
Datum correction for X axis 4-194
Position of X axis [1/1000 mm] 4-32
D532 Datum correction for Y axis 4-194
Position Y axis 4-32
D536 Datum correction for Z axis 4-194
Position Z axis 4-32
D540 Datum correction for 4th axis 4-194
Position 4th axis 4-32
W560 Feed rate X axis [mm/min] 4-33
W562 Feed rate Y axis 4-33
W564 Feed rate Z axis 4-33
4/96 TNC 360 2 List of Words 6-9

Words Function Page
W566 Feed rate 4th axis 4-33
W576 Follow up axis error compensation 4-29
to Input range: +32 767 to –32 768 [µm]
W582
W576 Axis X
W578 Axis Y
W580 Axis Z
W582 Axis 4
D592 Position spindle orientation (Strobe M2712) 4-93
D596 Feed rate from PLC for feed rate limitation 4-116
W600 Value for spindle power display 4-120
W602 PLC text window 4-121
W604 Reserved
W608 Axis specific inhibition of the reference pulse –
D756 Set spindle speed from the PLC; programmed spindle speed 4-86
W764 % factor – spindle override (PLC → NC) 4-84
W766 % factor – feed rate override (PLC → NC) 4-116
D768 Input values from MP4210.0 to MP4210.47 7-15
to
D956
W960 Input values from MP4220.0 to MP4220.4 7-17
to
W968
W976 Input values from MP 4310.0 to MP4310.6 7-17
to
W988
W1008 S code for minimum rpm 4-91
W1010 Number of tool magazine pockets –
6-10 TNC 360 2 List of Words 8/95

PLC Programming – Contents 7
1 PLC-functions 7-5
1.1 Select PLC-operation 7-5
1.2 PLC – Main menu 7-6
1.2.1 PLC-program editing 7-6
1.2.2 Erase PLC-program 7-8
1.2.3 Transfer program from EPROM 7-8
1.2.4 Translate PLC program 7-8
1.2.5 Utilization 7-8
1.3 Test functions for the PLC-program 7-9
1.6.1 TRACE-function 7-9
1.3.2 TABLE function 7-10
1.3.3 Transferring the PLC-program 7-10
2 Program creation 7-12

2.1 Program structure 7-12
2.1.1 Command 7-12
2.1.2 Module technique 7-13
2.2 Address allocation 7-14
2.2.1 Operand directory 7-14
2.2.2 Addressing the word memory 7-14
2.3 Data transfer PLC → NC and NC → PLC 7-15
2.4 Timers and counters 7-17
2.4.1 Timers 7-17
2.4.2 Counters 7-20
2.5 Edge evaluation of the PLC-inputs 7-21
2.6 EPROM-creation 7-21
2.7 Error-messages 7-24
2.7.1 Syntax errors within a command line 7-24
2.7.2 Syntax errors in the course of a program 7-24
2.7.3 Run-time errors 7-25
3 Commands 7-27
3.1 Load and Assign Commands 7-27
3.1.1 LOAD L 7-27
3.1.2 LOAD NOT LN 7-29
3.1.3 LOAD TWO'S-COMPLEMENT L– 7-31
3.1.4 LOAD BYTE LB 7-32
3.1.5 LOAD WORD LW 7-32
3.1.6 LOAD DOUBLEWORD LD 7-32
3.1.7 ASSIGN = 7-34
3.1.8 ASSIGN BYTE B= 7-36
3.1.9 ASSIGN WORD W= 7-36
8/95 TNC 360 7-1

3.1.10 ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD D= 7-36
3.2 Set-commands 7-39
3.2.1 SET S 7-39
3.2.2 RESET R 7-40
3.2.3 SET NOT SN 7-41
3.2.4 RESET NOT RN 7-42
3.3 Logic Gates 7-44
3.3.1 AND A 7-44
3.3.2 AND NOT AN 7-46
3.3.3 OR O 7-48
3.3.4 OR NOT ON 7-50
3.3.5 EXCLUSIVE OR XO 7-52
3.3.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT XON 7-54
3.4 Arithmetic Commands 7-57
3.4.1 ADDITION + 7-57
3.4.2 SUBTRACTION – 7-58
3.4.3 MULTIPLICATION x 7-59
3.4.4 DIVISION / 7-60
3.4.5 REMAINDER MOD 7-61
3.5 Comparisons 7-63
3.5.1 EQUAL TO == 7-63
3.5.2 LESS THAN < 7-64
3.5.3 GREATER THAN > 7-65
3.5.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO <= 7-66
3.5.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO >= 7-67
3.5.6 UNEQUAL <> 7-68
3.6 Parentheses with logical gating 7-70
3.6.1 AND [ ] A[ ] 7-70
3.6.2 AND NOT [ ] AN[ ] 7-70
3.6.3 OR [ ] O[ ] 7-70
3.6.4 OR NOT [ ] ON[ ] 7-70
3.6.5 EXCLUSIVE OR [ ] XO[ ] 7-71
3.6.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT [ ] XON[ ] 7-71
3.7 Parentheses with arithmetic commands 7-74
3.7.1 ADDITION [ ] +[] 7-74
3.7.2 SUBTRACTION [ ] –[] 7-74
3.7.3 MULTIPLICATION [ ] x[] 7-74
3.7.4 DIVISION [ ] /[] 7-74
3.7.5 REMAINDER [ ] MOD [ ] 7-75
3.8 Parentheses with comparison commands 7-78
3.8.1 EQUAL TO [ ] == [ ] 7-78
3.8.2 LESS THAN [ ] <[] 7-78
3.8.3 GREATER THAN [ ] >[] 7-78
3.8.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO [ ] <= [ ] 7-78
7-2 TNC 360 8/95

3.8.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOL [ ] >= [ ] 7-79
3.8.6 NOT EQUAL TO [ ] <> [ ] 7-79
3.9 Shift Commands 7-82
3.9.1 SHIFT LEFT << 7-82
3.9.2 SHIFT RIGHT >> 7-83
3.10 Bit Commands 7-85
3.10.1 BIT SET BS 7-85
3.10.2 BIT RESET BC 7-86
3.10.3 BIT TEST BT 7-87
3.11 Stack Operations 7-89
3.11.1 Load Data onto the Data Stack PS 7-89
3.11.2 Acquire data from the data stack PL 7-90
3.11.3 Load logic accumulator onto the data stack PSL 7-90
3.11.4 Load word accumulator onto the data stack PSW 7-91
3.11.5 Acquire logic accumulator from the data stack PLL 7-91
3.11.6 Acquire word accumulator from the data stack PLW 7-91
3.12 Jump Commands 7-94
3.12.1 Unconditional Jump JP 7-94
3.12.2 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 1 JPT 7-94
3.12.3 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 0 JPF 7-94
3.12.4 Call Module CM 7-96
3.12.5 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 CMT 7-96
3.12.6 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 CMF 7-96
3.12.7 End of Module, Program End EM 7-98
3.12.8 Jump Label LBL 7-98
3.13 CASE statement 7-100
3.13.1 Indexed call module CASE 7-100
3.13.2 End indexed Call Module ENDC 7-100
4 PLC-Modules 7-103
4.1 Module 9000: Copy a marker-block 7-103
4.2 Module 9001: Copy a Word-block 7-103
4.3 Module 9010: Indexed reading of Byte
Module 9011: Indexed reading of Word
Module 9012: Indexed reading of Doubleword 7-104
4.4 Module 9020: Indexed writing of Byte
Module 9021: Indexed writing of Word
Module 9022: Indexed writing of Doubleword 7-105
4.5 Module 9032: Transfer machine parameter values to the PLC 7-106
4.6 Module 9035: Transfer status information to the PLC 7-107
4.7 Module 9036: Transfer PLC status information to the NC 7-108
4.8 Module 9040: Transfer coordinate values to the PLC 7-109
4.9 Data transfer by the PLC 7-109
4.9.1 Module 9100: Assign data interface 7-110
4.9.2 Module 9101: Enable data interface 7-110
8/95 TNC 360 7-3

4.9.3 Module 9102: Interface status 7-111
4.9.4 Module 9105: Transmit binary data via data interface 7-112
4.9.5 Module 9106: Receive binary data via data interface 7-113
4.9.6 Module 9120: Position an auxiliary axis 7-114
4.9.7 Module 9121: Stop an auxiliary axis 7-115
4.9.8 Module 9122: Poll the status of an auxiliary axis 7-115
4.9.9 Module 9123: Traverse the reference point of an auxiliary axis 7-116
4.9.10 Module 9124: Override for PLC axis 7-117
4.9.11 Module 9125: Run an NC block 7-118
5 Compatibility with TNC 355 7-121

5.1 PLC Program Conversion 7-122
5.2 Compatibility Markers 7-123
5.3 Incompatibility 7-125
5.3.1 PLC Macros 7-125
5.3.2 Non-implemented markers 7-128
5.3.3 PLC Cycle Time 7-128
7-4 TNC 360 8/95

1 PLC Functions
The integrated PLC in the TNC 360/TNC 335 contains its own Text Editor for creating the list of
instructions for the PLC program. Commands and comments are entered via the ASCII keyboard on
the control panel (see Section "Programming and editing files").
The functions TRACE and TABLE, as well as a Syntax check on entering the PLC commands and a
logical test with the Function COMPILE can make it easier to find faults in the PLC program (see
section "Test functions").
5 ms are available for a PLC run. Up to 4000 logic commands, equivalent to 28 KB, can be
processed within this period (executable memory). A new PLC run commences every 24 ms, i.e.
every 24 ms the inputs are read and outputs are set.
The following section shows how to start PLC operation.
1.1 Select PLC operation

PLC operation covers all functions for creating and testing the PLC programs.
It can be selected as follows, using the code number 807 667.
Select NC operating mode

"Programming and editing"
↓
Press MOD
key
↓
Enter code number 807 667
↓
ENT key
↓
PLC operation is selected
(Main menu)
PLC operation can be stopped by pressing the END key.
8/95 TNC 360 1 PLC Functions 7-5

1.2 PLC – Main menu
Enter the code number 807 667 to call the following screen display (main menu):
ERASE PLC PROGRAM

TRANSFER PROGRAM FROM EPROM
PLC EDITING MODE
PLC PROGRAM TRACE MODE
TABLES I/O/C/T/M
TRANSLATE PLC PROGRAM
UTILIZATION
Select the required mode with the cursor keys ↑ and ↓ and activate by pressing ENT. To exit the
menu and return to the original NC mode, press the END key again.
1.2.1 PLC program editing

In the operating mode PLC EDITING MODE an instruction list can be compiled or edited.
After the ENT key is pressed, the editor identifies itself with
"0 EM"
"0" stands for program line 0 and "EM" for End of Module.
When entering an instruction, "EM" automatically moves downward by one line.
With this control it is possible to reassign the functions of TNC operating keys by entering the code
number 807 667. The new key assignments are indicated on a special tactile membrane that is
place over the TNC keyboard. The tactile membrane is included with this Technical Manual.
The PLC editing mode can be exited by pressing the END key.
A complete instruction list comprises:
.Line numbers
.Command from command store (see Section "Commands")
.Operand type
.Operand number
.Comment
The line number is automatically generated on entering a command.
The command, operand type, operand number and the comment must be transferred with ENT. The
cursor then jumps to the next positions within the instruction. The instruction is completed after the
comments are entered. If no comment is to be entered, the position is simply concluded the ENT.
Lines that are to contain only a comment should be started with the character ";" instead of a
command. A comment can therefore cover several lines if each line commences with ";". A line
contains a maximum of 26 characters for the comment and may include all numeral, letters and
other characters on the keyboard.
A "find function" makes is easier to find certain operands.
7-6 TNC 360 1 PLC Functions 8/95

If you wish to find a certain marker in the program listing, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
a marker and press GOTO. Enter the number of the desired marker. Then press ENT to find the
marker.
Key assignments for the PLC editor
+ [ < X 7 8 9
*
_ / ] = > Y 4 5 6
Z 1 2 3
$
EXT
DEL
MOD ENT $ 0 · +/
GOTO END
$ CE ;
A B C D E
NO
ENT F G H I
T U V W J K L M N
O P Q R S
TE 335 A / TE 355 A
T U V W X 7 8 9
Y 4 5 6
+ [ <
*
_ Z 1 2 3
/ ] = >
$ 0 · +/
END
CE ;
DEL
$
EXT MOD ENT
GOTO
$
A B C D E J K L M N
NO
ENT F G H I O P Q R S
TE 335 B/TE 335 B

1.2.2 Erase PLC program
In the operating mode ERASE PLC PROGRAM, a PLC program contained in the RAM can be deleted
by pressing ENT.
1.2.3 Transfer program from EPROM

In the operating mode TRANSFER PROGRAM FROM EPROM, a program that is stored in the
EPROM can be copied into the RAM by pressing ENT (see also MP 4010).
1.2.4 Translate PLC program

A PLC program created with the PLC editor and stored in RAM must first be compiled in the
TRANSLATE PLC PROGRAM mode before it can be tested.
Press ENT to start translation.
If a PLC program is already in the RAM prior to TNC switch-on, it is automatically translated.
Errors in the program can be found during the translation run (see Section "Program creation", "Error
messages").
1.2.5 Utilization
In the UTILIZATION mode of operation the occupied PLC processing time and the vacant PLC
memory are displayed.
The vacant memory is derived from the total memory and the occupied memory.
The vacant PLC memory is displayed in bytes or in percent of the maximum memory (28 KB).
100 % processing time corresponds to 2.5 ms (from 24 ms PLC cycle time). The maximum possible
processing time is determined by the manufacturer and equals 5 ms. The current processing time
indicates the duration of the last PLC scan. If the current processing time exceeds 5 ms, the blinking
error message
ERROR IN PLC PROGRAM 53
will appear.
Please note that the processing time increases by 20% during active V.24 data transfer, and by 5%
during handwheel operation. A PLC program should therefore be tested during active V.24 and
handwheel operation in order to ensure that it will never exceed maximum processing time.

1.3 Test functions for the PLC program
1.3.1 TRACE function

The TRACE function makes it possible to check the logical states of the markers, inputs, outputs,
timers and counters.
If this function is selected, the following menu appears:
SELECT I/O/C/T/M
DISPLAY TRACE BUFFER
START TRACE
END TRACE
SELECT I/O/C/T/M
Those inputs (I), outputs (O), counters (C), timers (T) or markers (M) whose logical states are to be
checked can be entered into a table in the SELECT I/O/C/T/M function. A maximum of 16 markers,
timers etc. can be simultaneously verified. Each position is interrogated via dialogue. Erroneous
entries can be deleted by pressing DEL.
The memory for the trace mode (TRACE BUFFER) has space for 1024 individual states per operand,
i.e. 1024 PLC processes are recorded. In order to record the required time duration of the user, a
TRIGGER condition can be entered for each operand:
"1" = Recording when operand is logically "1"

"0" = Recording when operand is logically "0"
If the trigger position is verified with the NOENT key, it means that a trigger condition is not
required. 512 states are recorded before and after a trigger event. The trigger event is regarded as
fulfilled only when the conditions for all operands are simultaneously fulfilled with TRIGGER.
Example: M2064 1
M2065 0
M2066 1
I5
Trigger event: M2064 logical "1"
M2065 logical "0"
M2066 logical "1"
The state of I5 has no significance for the trigger event: it is, however, recorded.
If no trigger condition is entered for the operands, the states of the operands are continually
recorded and, after ending the trace mode, the last 1024 states are displayed.
To exit the SELECT I/O/C/T/M function, press END.

DISPLAY TRACE BUFFER
With the DISPLAY TRACE BUFFER function the logic states 0 or 1 of the selected operands are
graphically displayed in a diagram. With simultaneous triggering, the counter is reset to 0 (upper left
in screen). By using the cursor keys ← and →, 512 logic states can be observed before and after the
trigger event.
This can be used to determine, for example, whether a marker, output etc. was set too late or too
early. Taking the PLC processing time of 24 ms into account, a time displacement in ms can be
detected.
START TRACE
With this mode, TRACE is started. Until the trigger event occurs, the display PC TR blinks in the
status field. Then the display goes out.
END TRACE
If the trigger event does not occur, the trace can be aborted with the END TRACE function. In this
case, the last 1024 states of the selected operands are stored.
1.3.2 TABLE function

In the TABLES I/O/C/T/M function the states of inputs (I), outputs (O), counters (C), timers (T) and
markers (M) can be dynamically displayed on the screen. If the desired operand number is selected
with the cursor keys, the operand can be changed with Set (S) or Reset (R), provided that it was not
defined through the PLC program. The individual tables for inputs, outputs, etc. are selected with
the corresponding letter.
1.3.3 Transferring the PLC program PLC program

Data transmission can be activated with the EXT key from the main menu.
The following menu appears:
READ-IN SELECTED PROGRAM

OUTPUT ASCII
OUTPUT ASCII UNFORMATTED
OUTPUT ASCII WITH CROSS-REF
BINARY OUTPUT
PLC programs written on a computer can be transferred into the PLC RAM with the RS-232-C
interface. To load a program, select READ IN SELECTED PROGRAM. With the OUTPUT ASCII
function the PLC program can be transferred from the RAM to an external device. It can be
transferred with the cross references of all its operands.
It is also possible to transfer the program in unformatted or binary form by selecting the
corresponding menu items (see Section "Program creation", "EPROM creation").

✎

2 Program Creation
The PLC program can be created directly on the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls. For this, the PLC
Editor must be called with the code number 807 667 (see Section "PLC functions").
The PLC program can also be written in ASCII code on a PC and then transferred to the control.
2.1 Program structure
2.1.1 Command
A command is the smallest unit in a PLC program. It consists of the
operation portion and the Operand portion.
A I 28 ;Comment
Operation Operand Operand

designation address;
(A, AN...) (I, O, M, T, C, constant value
B, W, D, K)
Operand
The operation describes the function which is to be performed. It explains what is done with the
Operands.
The Operand shows what is to be operated on. It consists of the Operand abbreviation and a
parameter (Address). Register and memory contents can be gated, erased and loaded by using PLC
commands.
Both Bit and Word processing are possible. In Word processing it is possible to address memory
contents with a length of 8 Bits (Byte), 16 Bits (Word) or 32 Bits (Doubleword) (see Section
"Commands").
7-12 TNC 360 2 Program Creation 8/95

2.1.2 Module technique
It is good practice to make the maintenance of the PLC programs easier by creating the program
with the most transparent structure possible. This can be best achieved by dividing the PLC program
into individual Modules (structured programming).
Only the most important PLC functions should be programmed in the main routine.
Individual PLC functions such as spindle orientation and key simulation are programmed in their own
Modules.
0 L M2719
1 SN M2719 ;Activate the strobes for Word processing
2 L M2497
3 SN M2497 ;Activate the edge evaluation
4 L M2496
5 SN M2496 ;Activate transfer of decoded M codes
;(M1900 to M1999)
. . .
. . .
. . .
20 L M1919 ;M Function M19
21 A M2045 ;Change signal for M function
22 AN M12 ;Spindle orientation already active?
23 CMT 180 ;Spindle orientation
24 LM 2182 ;Disabled key operated?
25 CMT 31 ;Yes, then call key simulation
. . .
. . .
. . .
150 EM ;End Main program
. . .
. . .
. . .
200 EM
201 LBL 180 ;Spindle orientation
. . .
. . .
. . .
259 EM
. . .
. . .
. . .
Error conditions in the machine should be interrogated in the PLC program and a plain language error
message should be displayed on the VDU screen. See Chapter "Machine integration", Section
"Display and operation" and Chapter "PLC programming", Section "Modules".
8/95 TNC 360 2 Program Creation 7-13

2.2 Address allocation
2.2.1 Operand directory

Operand Abbreviation Address range
Marker M (Marker) 0 to 3263

Input I (Input) I0 to I31; I128 to I151;
I64 to I126 (PL 400) or up to I127 (PL 410)
Output O (Output) O0 to O30;
O32 to O62(PL 400/PL 410)
Counter C (Counter) Set counter : C0 to C31
Counter contents: C48 to C79
Release count pulse: C96 to C127
Timer T (Timer) Timer start: T0 to T47
Timer running: T48 to T95
Byte B (Byte) 0 to 1023 (8 Bit)
Word W (Word) 0 to 1022 (16 Bit)
Doubleword D (Doubleword) 0 to 1020 (32 Bit)
Constant K - 2 147 483 647 to + 2 147 483 647
2.2.2 Addressing the word memory

The memory for the Operands B (8 Bit), W (16 Bit), D (32 Bit) is only 8 Bit wide. Since the Operands
can be 8,16 or 32 Bit wide, an overlap of the memory areas will occur, which must be taken into
account in addressing the memory.
8 bit
D0 W0 B0 7 0 ➞ High-Byte for W; Highest-Byte for D

B1 ➞ Low-Byte for W
W2 B2
B3 ➞ Lowest-Byte for D
D4 W4 B4
B5
.. .. ..
. . .
D1020 W1020 B1020
..
. B1021
W1022 B1022
B1023
In Byte addressing every address from 0 to 1023 is accessible. In Word addressing, every second
address from 0 to 1022 is accessible and in Doubleword addressing every fourth from 0 to 1020.
The address parameter gives the High Byte for a Word Address (W) , or the Highest Byte for a
Doubleword address (D).
Markers M1000 to M2000 and Bytes B0 to B127 are non-volatile, i.e. the contents of this memory
are maintained when the supply voltage is switched off.

After entry of the code number 531 210, the markers M1000 to M2000 and Bytes B0 to B127 and
the machine parameters are erased.
B0 to B127 Freely available, not deleted with RESET

B128 to B255 Freely available, deleted with RESET
B256 to B511 Data transfer NC → PLC
B512 to B767 Data transfer PLC → NC
B768 to B1023 Machine parameters → PLC
2.3 Data transfer PLC → NC and NC → PLC

PLC → NC
The Q parameters Q100 to Q107 transfer numbers from the PLC to the part program. This means
that Q100 to Q107 can be overwritten by the PLC. The numerical value is registered in Doubleword
D528 and the Q parameter numbers 0 to 7 are defined in Word W516. The numbers 0 to 7
correspond to parameters Q100 to Q107. The transfer is activated with the strobe marker M2713.
The Q parameter values are transferred with the next M/S/T strobe.
M2713 Activate the transfer of the value from D528 PLC NC

to the Q Parameter defined in W516
Address Function
D 528 Doubleword with multiple function, here data for transfer from the
PLC to the NC
W516 Q Parameter No. for numerical transfer from PLC to NC
(0 – 7 = Q100 – Q107)
NC → PLC
Sixty different machine parameters are reserved for data transfer in the PLC. These machine
parameters are kept in the Doublewords D768 to D956 and the Words W960 to W968 and W976 to
W988. For example, PLC positioning, datum shifts, feed rates for PLC positioning or coding for the
release of certain PLC functions can be filed in these machine parameters. These numerical values
are evaluated in the PLC program.
Address Function
D768 Value from MP4210.0

Address Function









Address Function
W960 Value from MP 4220.0

MP4210.0 Set a number in the PLC

to MP4210.47 Input range: –99 999.999 to +99 999.999
MP 4220 Setting a number in the PLC: In the Word range W960 to W968
to MP4220.4 Input range: 80 to 30 000
MP4230.0 Set a number in the PLC via module 9032

to MP4230..31 Input range: –30 000 000 to +30 000 000
to
MP4239.0
to MP4239.31
MP4310.0 Set a number in the PLC: in the Word range W976 to W988
to MP4310.6 Input range: 0 to 65 535
2.4 Timers and counters
2.4.1 Timers
48 timers are available in the PLC. These 48 timers are controlled by special markers with the
abbreviation symbol T. The time period for the timer is defined in the machine parameter MP4110.X.
The time unit corresponds to the PLC cycle time.
The timers are started by setting the markers T0 to T47 which also sets the timers to the value from
MP4110.X. This activation may only be performed for a single PLC run, as otherwise the timers will
be restarted by every succeeding run.
The markers T48 to T95 (timer running) will remain set for the period defined in the machine
parameters.

Example:
Start of Timer 1
Period in MP4110.1 = 9 (PLC cycles)
T1
T49

Timer start Timer running Machine parameter
T0 T48 MP4110.0
T1 T49 MP4110.1
T2 T50 MP4110.2
T3 T51 MP4110.3
T4 T52 MP4110.4
T5 T53 MP4110.5
T6 T54 MP4110.6
T7 T55 MP4110.7
T8 T56 MP4110.8
T9 T57 MP4110.9
T10 T58 MP4110.10
T11 T59 MP4110.11
T12 T60 MP4110.12
T13 T61 MP4110.13
T14 T62 MP4110.14
T15 T63 MP4110.15
T16 T64 MP4110.16
T17 T65 MP4110.17
T18 T66 MP4110.18
T19 T67 MP4110.19
T20 T68 MP4110.20
T21 T69 MP4110.21
T22 T70 MP4110.22
T23 T71 MP4110.23
T24 T72 MP4110.24
T25 T73 MP4110.25
T26 T74 MP4110.26
T27 T75 MP4110.27
T28 T76 MP4110.28
T29 T77 MP4110.29
T30 T78 MP4110.30
T31 T79 MP4110.31
T32 T80 MP4110.32
T33 T81 MP4110.33
T34 T82 MP4110.34
T35 T83 MP4110.35
T36 T84 MP4110.36
T37 T85 MP4110.37
T38 T86 MP4110.38
T39 T87 MP4110.39
T40 T88 MP4110.40
T41 T89 MP4110.41
T42 T90 MP4110.42
T43 T91 MP4110.43
T44 T92 MP4110.44
T45 T93 MP4110.45
T46 T94 MP4110.46
T47 T95 MP4110.47
MP4110.x Time for timers

Input range: 0 to 65 535 [PLC cycles] (= 24 ms on TNC 360/TNC 335)

2.4.2 Counters
32 counters are available in the PLC. Each of these 32 counters is controlled by special markers with
the abbreviation symbol C. After setting a marker from the range C0 to C31 the counter is loaded
with the value from machine parameter MP4120.X. The marker range C48 to C79 indicates whether
the count has been completed or not. The marker range C96 to C127 is used to start the counter
(counter release pulse).
Example: Logic diagram for counter C1
Contents of machine parameter MP4120.1 = 10 (PLC cycles)
C1
C49
C97
C0 C48 C96 MP4120.0
C1 C49 C97 MP4120.1
C2 C50 C98 MP4120.2
C3 C51 C99 MP4120.3
C4 C52 C100 MP4120.4
C5 C53 C101 MP4120.5
C6 C54 C102 MP4120.6
C7 C55 C103 MP4120.7
C8 C56 C104 MP4120.8
C9 C57 C105 MP4120.9
C10 C58 C106 MP4120.10
C11 C59 C107 MP4120.11
C12 C60 C108 MP4120.12
C13 C61 C109 MP4120.13
C14 C62 C110 MP4120.14
C15 C63 C111 MP4120.15
C16 C64 C112 MP4120.16
C17 C65 C113 MP4120.17
C18 C66 C114 MP4120.18
C19 C67 C115 MP4120.19
C20 C68 C116 MP4120.20
C21 C69 C117 MP4120.21
C22 C70 C118 MP4120.22
C23 C71 C119 MP4120.23
C24 C72 C120 MP4120.24
C25 C73 C121 MP4120.25
C26 C74 C122 MP4120.26
C27 C75 C123 MP4120.27
C28 C76 C124 MP4120.28
C29 C77 C125 MP4120.29
C30 C78 C126 MP4120.30
C31 C79 C127 MP4120.31
MP4120.x Pre-set value for counters C0 to C31

Input range: 0 to 65 535 [PLC cycles]
2.5 Edge evaluation of the PLC inputs

The edge evaluation for the PLC inputs can be activated by marker M2497. Edge evaluation means
that if the signal at the PLC input changes, a certain marker will be set for the duration of a PLC run.
If marker M2497 is set, the following markers will be set if the signals change at the PLC inputs.
Marker for rising edges at the PLC inputs:
Marker PLC inputs

M1500 to M1531 I0 to I31
M1564 to M1626 I64 to I126 (PL 400) or I127 (PL410)
M1628 to M1651 I128 to I151
Marker for falling edges at the PLC inputs:
Marker PLC inputs

M1700 to M1731 I0 to I31
M1764 to M1826 I64 to I126 (PL 400) or I127 (PL410)
M1828 to M1851 I128 to I151

M2497 Activate the edge evaluation for PLC inputs PLC PLC
Rising-edge marker M1500 to M1651
Falling-edge marker M1700 to M1851
2.6 EPROM creation

Machine parameter MP4010 selects whether the PLC program is run from the RAM area of the
control or the EPROM area.
During the creation and test of the PLC program the control should operate from the RAM area.
HEIDENHAIN recommends that an EPROM is created for the PLC program before delivering the
machine to the customer (see also Chapter "Introduction").
MP4010 PLC program from RAM or from EPROM

Input: 0 or 1
0 = EPROM operation
1 = RAM operation
A PC and the MEGA PROMMER Software (Version 2.12.or later) are necessary for programming
the PLC EPROMS.
The PLC files from the RAM area in the control can be transferred to the PC via the data interface
(see Chapter "Data interface").The output is initiated from the control in binary code (see Section
"PLC functions").

The PLC files are then transferred to the PC in the Motorola EXORMAX S2 Record (MOD) format.
With the MEGA PROMMER these data can be read in the MOD format and the EPROM
programmed.
Please contact the HEIDENHAIN customer service if you have further questions.

✎

2.7 Error messages
Error messages aid the programmer in creating the instruction list and testing of the program.
2.7.1 Syntax errors within a command line

These errors may occur when editing a line or on reading it in via the interface.
0 No valid command.
1 Operand for jump is not a Label. (Can only happen when reading in via the interface.
For a Jump command a type abbreviation is available for the Operand).
2 Invalid Operand type (the command cannot be combined with this Operand).
4 Operand outside the permissible range (the stated number is too high, or odd address for
Word or Doubleword).
5 No Limiter after command. (Can only happen when reading in via the interface. The comment
after the command was not designated by ";" or "*").
6 Line end not found (Can only happen when reading in via the interface. Comment too long).
2.7.2 Syntax errors in the course of a program

These errors are recognized during the compilation process. The Editor points to the line where the
error was found. If the PLC program is compiled on switching-on (for example, because the control
was switched off immediately after editing the PLC program) then a flashing message "ERROR IN
PLC PROGRAM" will be displayed. Remedy: switch off and on again, and call the PLC Editor with
the code number. The Editor indicates the position of the error.
7 Called Label has not been defined.

8 No End program condition found (the program does not contain an EM instruction, or it
contains a JP instruction without a following LBL instruction).
9 Program is too long (RAM overflow) (insufficient memory for the program code which is to be
generated).
10 Assign within parentheses (an =, S, SN, R, RN, or PS instruction or a Jump command has
been programmed, although arithmetic parentheses are open).
11 Excessive nesting of parentheses (more than 16 parentheses successively opened).
12 Jump within a gating sequence (an unconditional jump has been programmed, although the
gating sequence was not closed with an Assign ).
13 "Close parentheses" without "open parentheses" (a "close parentheses" command was
programmed, although no parentheses were open).
14 Label within parentheses (a LBL instruction has been programmed, although parentheses are
open).
15 Label within a gating sequence (a LBL instruction has been programmed, although the
previous gating was not closed with an Assign).
16 Jump within parentheses (a jump instruction has been programmed, although parentheses
are open).
17 Parentheses open at end of block (an EM instruction has been programmed, although
parentheses are open).
18 Label defined twice.
19 Word Assign missing (a Logic instruction has been programmed, although the previous Word
gating was not closed with an Assign).

20 Logic Assign missing (a Word instruction has been programmed, although the previous Logic
gating was not closed with an Assign)
21 Word Accumulator not loaded (a Word Assign or gating has been programmed, although the
Word Accumulator does not contain a definite value).
22 Logic Accumulator not loaded (a Logic Assign has been programmed, although the Logic
Accumulator does not contain a definite value).
23 Accumulators not loaded on "open parentheses" (an A[, AN[, O[, ON[, or XON[ command has
been programmed, although neither the Word nor the Logic Accumulator has been gated or
loaded).
24 Incorrect type of the parentheses result (a different type has been calculated in the
parentheses from that which was defined at the "open parentheses" command, i.e. Logic
instead of Word or vice versa).
25 Conditional jump with incorrect Logic Accumulator (a conditional jump has been programmed,
although the Logic Accumulator does not contain a definite value).
26 Empty CASE instruction.
27 "END CASE" missing.
2.7.3 Run time errors

These errors only appear when the PLC program is executed. A flashing error message "ERROR IN
PLC PROGRAM NR" is displayed. After switching the control off and on again, the Editor can be
accessed by using the code number. The message ”INPUT ERROR” is then displayed and the
Editor stands at the erroneous line or, if the program run time has been exceeded, at the jump
instruction which was last processed.
50 Excessive nesting (too many Modules nested inside one another).

51 STACK underflow (an attempt to acquire data from the STACK, although it was empty).
52 STACK overflow (an attempt to load too much data onto the STACK).
53 Time out (the permissible program run time has been exceeded by more than twice. Check
the subprogram structure).
54 CASE Arguments are larger than the number of entries in the table.

✎

3 Commands
3.1 Load and Assign Commands
3.1.1 LOAD (L) L

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: L (LOAD)
Logic Byte/Word Double Constant

Execution time [µs] 1.2 2.0/1.6 1.6 1.2
Number of bytes 4 6 4 6
Logic execution with LOAD command
Operands: M, I, O, T, C
Operation:
The addressed operand is copied into the Accumulator. A load command is always used at the start
of a logic chain, in order to enable subsequent gating commands. The same function is achieved
when the gating commands A, O, XO are used at the start of a logic chain, however this should
only be used when compatibility with the TNC 355 is required.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Output O2. Thus the logic
state of Input I4 is loaded into the Accumulator to enable subsequent gating commands.
Initial state: Input I4 = 1

Input I5 = 0
Output O2 = ?
Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
... x x x x x x X x x x x x x x
1 L I4 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
2 A I5 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with AND.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to output O2.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-27

Word execution with the LOAD command
Operands: B, W, D, K
Operation:
The addressed Operand (B, W, D) or a Constant (K) is copied into the Word Accumulator. In addition,
the Accumulator is filled, if necessary, according to the sign bit. In contrast to logic execution the
start of a word gating chain must always be with the L command. It is not possible to use a gating
command.
Example:
A Constant and Byte B5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte B8.
Initial state: Byte B5 = 2A (hex)

Constant: 54 = 36 (hex)
Byte B8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 7 0
... x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K+54 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
2 A B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00101010
3 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00100010
Line 1: The Constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with AND.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to Byte B8.
7-28 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.1.2 LOAD NOT (LN) LN
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: LN (LOAD NOT)

Logic execution with the LOAD NOT command
Operation:
The complement of the addressed operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. A load command is
always used at the start of a logic chain in order to enable subsequent gating commands. The same
function is achieved when the gating commands AN, ON, XON are used at the start of a logic chain,
however this should only be used when compatibility with TNC 355 is required.
Example:
The inverted logic state of Input I4 and Input I5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to
Output O2. Thus the inverted logic state of Input I4 is loaded into the Accumulator to enable
subsequent gating commands.

Input I5 = 1
Output O2 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 LN I4 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Line 1: The inverted operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to Output O2.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-29

Word execution with the LOAD NOT command
Operation:
The complement of the contents of the addressed Operand (B, W, D) or Constant (K) is loaded into
the Word Accumulator. In addition, the Accumulator is filled, if necessary, according to the sign bit.
In contrast to logic execution a word gating chain must always start with a load command. It is not
possible to use a gating command.
Example:
The complement of Byte B6 and Byte B5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte
B8.

Byte B6 = B6 (hex)
Byte B8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 7 0
1 LN B6 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 10110110
2 A B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 00101010
3 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 00001000
Line 1: The inverted contents of Byte B6 are loaded into the Word Accumulator.
7-30 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.1.3 LOAD TWO'S COMPLEMENT (L–) L–
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: L– (LOAD MINUS)

Execution time [µs] ---- 2.4/2.0 2.2 1.8
Number of bytes ---- 8 6 8
Operation:
The contents of the addressed Operand (B, W, D) or a Constant (K) are loaded into the Word
Accumulator as a two's complement. In addition, the Accumulator is filled, if necessary, according to
the sign bit. The two's complement allows negative numbers to be stored. i.e. a number loaded with
the L– command appears in the Accumulator with an inverted sign.
This command may only be used with Word execution.
Example:
The contents of Byte B5 is to be negated, added to Byte B6 and the result assigned to Byte B8.
Initial state: Byte B5 = 15 (dec)

Byte B6 = 20 (dec)
Byte B8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 7 0
1 L– B5 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 (–15) (+15) 00001111
2 + B6 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 (+ 5) (+20) 00010100
3 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 (+ 5) (+5) 00000101
To aid understanding of this example, the contents of the Accumulator and operands are shown as
decimal values in parentheses.
Line 1: The contents of Byte B5 are loaded into the Accumulator and the sign of the value is
inverted.
Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B6 are added.
Line 3: The result is assigned to Byte B8.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-31

3.1.4 LOAD BYTE (LB) LB
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: LB (LOAD BYTE)
Execution time [µs] 30.0

Number of bytes 18
Operation:
With the command LB, 8 Markers, Inputs, Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering
are loaded into the Word Accumulator. Each operand occupies 1 bit in the Accumulator. The
designated operand address occupies the LSB in the Accumulator, the designated address + 1 the
LSB + 1 and so on. In this way, the last affected operand occupies the MSB!
If necessary, the Accumulator is filled according to the sign bit.
3.1.5 LOAD WORD (LW) LW

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: LW (LOAD WORD)

Number of bytes 18
Operation:
With the command LW, 16 Markers, Inputs, Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering
3.1.6 LOAD DOUBLEWORD (LD) LD

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: LD (LOAD DOUBLE WORD)

Number of bytes 16
Operation:
With the command LD, 32 Markers, Inputs, Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering
7-32 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Example for the Commands LB, LW and LD:
Via the Inputs I3 to I10, a binary coded value is to be read in and assigned to Byte B8 for further use.
Initial state: Input I3 = 1 Input I7 = 0

Input I4 = 1 Input I8 = 1
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 I10 I3
1 LB I3 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 01100111
7 0
2 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 01100111
Line 1: Inputs I3 to I10 are loaded into the Word Accumulator (Bit 0 to Bit 7).
Line 2: The Accumulator Contents are assigned to Byte 8.
The Commands LW and LD are processed in the same way except that 16 or 32 operands are used
accordingly.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-33

3.1.7 ASSIGN (=)=
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: = (ASSIGN)

Execution time [µs] 1.2 1.2/1.2 1.6 ----
Number of bytes 4 4 4
Logic execution with the ASSIGN command
Operation:
ASSIGN in conjunction with the Logic Operands (M, I, O, T, C) copies the contents of the Logic
Accumulator to the addressed operand. The = command is only used at the end of a logic chain in
order that a gating result is available. The command may be used several times in succession (see
example).
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 should be gated with AND and the result assigned to Outputs O2 and O5.

Input I5 = 0
Output O2 = ?
Output O5 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
4 = O5 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
7-34 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Word execution with the ASSIGN command
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
ASSIGN in conjunction with the Word Operands (B, W, D) copies the contents of the Word
Accumulator to the addressed operand. The = command is only used at the end of a gating chain in
order that a gating result is available. The command can be used several times in succession (see
example).
Example:
A Constant (K) and the contents of Byte B5 should be gated with AND and the result assigned to
Byte B8 and Byte B10.

Constant 54 = 36 (hex)
Byte B8 = ?
Byte B10 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 7 0
1 L K+54 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
2 A B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00101010
3 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00100010
4 = B10 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00100010
Line 1: The Constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-35

3.1.8 ASSIGN BYTE (B=) B=
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: B= (ASSIGN BYTE)

Number of bytes 14
Operation:
With the command B=, 8 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers, Inputs, Outputs,
Timers or Counters with ascending numbering. Each bit corresponds to 1 operand. The LSB in the
Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address, the LSB + 1 to the designated address +
1 and so on. The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB.
3.1.9 ASSIGN WORD (W=) W=

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: W= (ASSIGN WORD)
Execution time [µs] 50

Number of bytes 14
Operation:
With the command W=, 16 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers, Inputs,
Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering. Each bit corresponds to 1 operand. The
LSB in the Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address, the LSB + 1 to the designated
address + 1 and so on. The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB.
3.1.10 ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD (D=) D=

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: D= (ASSIGN DOUBLE)

Number of bytes 14
Operation:
With the command D=, 32 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers, Inputs, Outputs,
Timers or Counters with ascending numbering. Each bit corresponds to 1 operand. The LSB in the
Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address, the LSB + 1 to the designated address +
1 and so on. The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB.
7-36 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Example:
A bit pattern, as defined in Word W8 , is to be assigned to Outputs O5 to O20.
Initial state: Word W8: 36 FF (hex)
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L W8 ... 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00110110 11111111
O20 ... ... O5
2 W= O5 ... 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00110110 11111111
Line 1: The contents of Word W8 are loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are assigned to the Outputs O5 to O20.
The Commands B= and D= are processed in the same way except that 8 or 32 bits are used
accordingly.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-37

✎
7-38 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.2 Set commands
3.2.1 SET (S) S

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: S (SET)
Operand changed Operand unchanged

Execution time [µs] 2.0 to 2.40 1.0 to 1.4
Number of bytes 8 (6)
Byte value in parentheses:

With certain preceding program sequences, the command may be shortened.
Operation:
The function of the command depends on the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 1, the addressed operand is set to 1, otherwise the operand remains unchanged. An
S command is used at the end of a logic chain so that the gating result may influence the operand.
The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
Input I4 and input I5 should be gated with OR.
If the gating result is 1, output O2 and marker M500 should be set.
Initial state: Input I4 =1

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Marker M500 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 O I5 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
3 S O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
4 S M500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Line 1: The contents of the operand are loaded into the Accumulator.
Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with OR.
Line 3: The gating result = 1: output O2 is set.
Line 4: The gating result = 1: marker M500 is set.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-39

3.2.2 RESET (R) R
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: R (RESET)


With certain preceding program sequences the command may be shortened.
Operation:
The function of the command is dependent on the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 1, the addressed operand is set to 0, otherwise the operand remains unchanged. An
R command is used at the end of a logic chain, in order that a gating result may influence the
operand. The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 should be gated with OR.
If the gating result = 1, Output O2 and Marker M500 should be reset.

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Marker M500 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
3 R O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
4 R M500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with OR.
Line 3: The gating result = 1: Output O2 is reset.
Line 4: The gating result = 1: Marker 500 is reset.
7-40 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.2.3 SET NOT (SN) SN
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: SN (SET NOT)


Operation:
The function of the command is dependent upon the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 0 , then the addressed operand is set to 1, otherwise the operand remains
unchanged. An SN command is used at the end of a logic chain, in order that a gating result may
influence the operand. The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR.
If the gating result = 0, Output O2 and Marker M500 are set.

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Marker M500 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
3 SN O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1
4 SN M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1

Line 3: The gating result = 0: Output O2 is set.
Line 4: The gating result = 0: Marker 500 is set.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-41

3.2.4 RESET NOT (RN) RN
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: RN (RESET NOT)


Operation:
The function of the command is dependent upon the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 0, then the addressed operand is set to 0, otherwise the operand remains
unchanged. An RN command is used at the end of a logic chain, in order that a gating result may
influence the operand. The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR.
If the gating result = 0, Output O2 and Marker M500 are reset.

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Marker M500 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
3 RN O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
4 RN M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0

Line 3: The gating result = 0: Output O2 is reset.
Line 4: The gating result = 0: Marker M500 is reset.
7-42 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-43

3.3 Logic Gates
3.3.1 AND (A) A

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: A (AND)

Logic execution with the AND command
Operation:
This command functions in different ways according to its position in the program:
a) At the start of a logic chain the command functions as an L command, i.e. the logic state of the
operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355
control which did not have the special L command. In PLC programs for the TNC 360/TNC 335, a
logic chain should always be started with a load command (see L, LN, L–).
b) Within a logic chain the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand (M, I,
O, T, C) are gated with AND. The gating result is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Output O2.

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
... x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0

7-44 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Word execution with the AND Command
Operation:
The contents of the Word Accumulator and the contents of the operand (B, W, D, K) are gated with
AND. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit), 8, 16
or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus: Bit 0 of the Accumulator is gated with bit 0 of the operand

Bit 1 of the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 of the operand and so on.
The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator.
Example:
The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 should be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte B8.

Byte B6 = 36 (hex)
Byte B8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L B6 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00110110
2 A B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00101010
3 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00100010
Line 1: The contents of Byte B6 are loaded into the Accumulator.

8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-45

3.3.2 AND NOT (AN) AN
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: AN (AND NOT)

Logic execution with the AND NOT command
Operation:
a) At the start of a logic chain the command functions as an LN command, i.e. the complement of
the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355
control which did not have the special LN command. In PLC programs for the TNC 360/TNC 335 a
b) Within a logic chain, the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand (M,
I, O, T, C) are gated with AND NOT.
The gating result is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 should be gated with AND NOT and the result assigned to Output O2.

Input I5 =1
Output O2 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 AN I5 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with AND NOT.
7-46 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Word execution with the AND NOT command
Operation:
AND NOT. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit),
8, 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus: Bit 0 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 0 in the operand.

Bit 1 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 in the operand and so on.
Example:
The contents of Word W4 and Word W6 should be gated with AND NOT and the result assigned to
Word W8.
Initial state: Word W4 = 36 AA (hex)

Word W6 = 3C 36 (hex)
Word W8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L W6 ... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00111100 00110110
2 AN W4 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 00110110 10101010
3 = W8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 00001000 00010100

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with AND NOT.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to Word W8.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-47

3.3.3 OR (O) O
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: O (OR)

Logic execution with the OR command
Operation:
control which did not have the special L command. In PLC programs for the TNC 360/TNC 335 a
I, O, T, C) are gated with OR. The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR and the result assigned to Output O2.

Input I5 = 1
Output O2 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1

7-48 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Word execution with the OR command
Operation:
OR. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit), 8, 16 or
32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus: Bit 0 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 0 in the operand

Example:
The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 are to be gated with OR and the result assigned to Word W8.

Byte B6 = 36 (hex)
Word W8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L B6 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00110110
2 O B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 00101010
3 = W8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 00000000 00111110

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with OR.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-49

3.3.4 OR NOT (ON) ON
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: ON (OR NOT)

Logic execution with the OR NOT command
Operation:
a) At the start of a logic chain this command functions as an LN command, i.e. the complement of
the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355
I, O, T, C) are gated with OR NOT. The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR NOT and the result assigned to Output O2.

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 ON I5 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with OR NOT.
7-50 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Word execution with the OR NOT command
Operation:
OR NOT. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit), 8,
16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.

Example:
The contents of Word W4 and Word W6 are to be gated with OR NOT and the result assigned to
Word W8.

Word W8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L W6 ... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00111100 00110110
2 ON W4 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 00110110 10101010
3 = W8 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 11111101 01110111

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with OR NOT.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-51

3.3.5 EXCLUSIVE OR (XO) XO
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: XO (EXCLUSIVE OR)

Logic execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR command
Operation:
control which did not have the special L command. In PLC programs for the TNC 360/TNC 335 a
O, T, C) are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR. The result of the operation is stored in the Logic
Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR and the result assigned to Output O2.

Input I5 = 1
Output O2 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 XO I5 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR.
7-52 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Word execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR command
Operation:
EXCLUSIVE OR. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit;
D = K = 32 bit), 8, 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.

Example:
The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR and the result assigned
to Word W8.
Initial state Byte B5 = 2A (hex)

Byte B6 = 36 (hex)
Word W8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L B6 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00110110
2 XO B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 00101010
3 = W8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 00000000 00011100

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-53

3.3.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT (XON) XON
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: XON (EXCLUSIVE OR NOT)

Execution time [µs] 2.0 2.0 3.0 2.6
Logic execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR NOT command
Operation:
a) At the start of a logic chain this command functions as a LN command, i.e. the complement of the
O, T, C) are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT. The result of the operation is stored in the Logic
Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Marker M500 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT and the result assigned to
Output O2.

Marker M500 = 0
Output O2 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 L M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
2 XON I4 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and the Input I4 are gated with
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT.
7-54 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Word execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR NOT command
Operation:
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K
= 32 bit), 8, 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.

The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
The contents of Word W4 and Word W6 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT and the result
assigned to Word W8.

Word W8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L W6 ... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00111100 00110110
2 XON W4 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 00110110 10101010
3 = W8 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 11110101 01100011

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-55

✎
7-56 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.4 Arithmetic Commands
3.4.1 ADDITION (+) +

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: + (PLUS)

Operation:
With arithmetic functions the operand is firstly expanded to the size of the Accumulator (32 bits).
Then the contents of the operand are added to the Word Accumulator. The result of the operation is
stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further.
Example:
A constant and a stored value in Word W6 are to be added. The result is then stored in Doubleword
D8.
Initial state: Constant = 100 000 (dec)

Word W6 = 200 (dec)
Doubleword D8 = ?
In the interests of clarity the contents of the Accumulator and operand are shown in decimal
notation.
The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents
(2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K100000 1 0 0 0 0 0
2 + W6 1 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 0
3 = D8 1 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0
Line 1: The Constant is loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and Word W6 are added.
Line 3: The result is assigned to Doubleword D8.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-57

3.4.2 SUBTRACTION (–) –
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: – (MINUS)

Operation:
Then the contents of the operand are subtracted from the contents of the Word Accumulator. The
result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further.
Example:
A stored value in Word W6 is to be subtracted from a Constant. The result is then stored in
Doubleword D8.
Initial state: Constant = 100 000 (dec)

Word W6 = 200 (dec)
Doubleword D8 = ?
In the interests of clarity the contents of the Accumulator and the operand are shown in decimal
notation. The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator
contents (2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K100000 1 0 0 0 0 0
2 – W6 9 9 8 0 0 2 0 0
3 = D8 9 9 8 0 0 9 9 8 0 0

Line 2: The contents of Word W6 are subtracted from the Accumulator.
7-58 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.4.3 MULTIPLICATION (x) x
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: x (MULTIPLY)

Execution time [µs]* ---- 10.2/9.4 --- 9.8
* Only a maximum processing time can be entered with the arithmetic operations X, / and MOD.
The processing time may be shorter, depending on the operands.
Operation:
Then the contents of the operand are multiplied with the contents of the Word Accumulator. The
result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further. If the result
of multiplication causes an overflow, Marker M3168 is set, otherwise it is reset.
Example:
A Constant and a value stored in Word W6 are to be multiplied. The result is then stored in
Doubleword D8.
Initial state Constant = 100 (dec)

Word W6 = 20 (dec)
Doubleword D8 = ?
contents (2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K100 1 0 0
2 x W6 2 0 0 0 2 0
3 = D8 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are multiplied by the contents of Word W6.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-59

3.4.4 DIVISION (/) /
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: / (DIVIDE)

Execution time [µs] *) **) ---- 20.2/19.8 --- 19.8
*) see Multiplication
**) An error in division and modulo (divisor = 0) results in a execution time of 3.8 µs.
An error condition (Divisor = 0) results in an execution time of 1.0 to 1.8 µs.
Operation:
With arithmetic functions the operand is firstly expanded to the size of the Accumulator (32 bits) .
Then the contents of the Word Accumulator are divided by the contents of the operand. The result
of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further. If division by 0 is
attempted, the Marker M3169 is set, otherwise it is reset.
Example:
A Constant is to be divided by the value stored in Word W6 . The result is then assigned to
Doubleword D8.
Initial state: Constant = 100 (dec)

Word W6 = 20 (dec)
Doubleword D8 = ?
contents (2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K100 1 0 0
2 / W6 5 2 0
3 = D8 5 5

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are divided by the contents of Word W6.
7-60 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.4.5 REMAINDER (MOD) MOD
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: MOD (MODULO)

Execution time [µs] ---- 20.6 to 20.2 20.2
*) see Multiplication
**) see Division
An error condition (Divisor = 0) results in an execution time of 1.0 to 1.8 µs.
Operation:
Then the REMAINDER is determined from a division of the contents of the Word Accumulator by
the contents of the operand. The REMAINDER is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be
processed further. If the MOD command is not correctly executed then the Marker M3170 is set,
otherwise it is reset.
Example:
The REMAINDER of a division of the value stored in Word W6 by a constant is to be determined.
The REMAINDER is then stored in Doubleword D8.
Initial state: Word W6 = 50 (dec)

Constant K = 15 (dec)
Doubleword D8 = ?
contents (2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L W6 5 0
2 MOD K15 5 5 0
3 = D8 5 5

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are divided by the constant and the integer
REMAINDER is left in the Accumulator.
Line 3: The REMAINDER is assigned to Doubleword D8.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-61

✎
7-62 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.5 Comparisons
3.5.1 EQUAL TO (==) ==

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: == (EQUAL)
Byte/Word/Double Constant
Execution time [µs] 1.8 to 2.4 2.0
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
With this command, a direct transfer from Word to Logic processing occurs. The contents of the
Word Accumulator and the contents of the addressed operand are compared. If the Word
Accumulator and the operand are equal, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.
If they are not equal the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The comparison takes place over the number
of bits corresponding to the operand, i.e. B = 8 bit, W = 16 bit and D = K = 32 bit.
Example:
A constant is to be compared with the contents of Doubleword D8. The result is then assigned to
Marker M500.
Initial state: Constant = 16 000

Doubleword D8 = 15 000
The Accumulator and operand contents are shown in decimal notation. The 10 bit wide Accumulator
allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents (2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 == D8 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
3 = M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Doubleword D8 are compared
( Accumulator = Operand ? ).
As the condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.
Line 3: The contents of the Logic Accumulator (The result of the comparison) are
assigned to Marker M500.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-63

3.5.2 LESS THAN (<) <
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: < (LESS THAN)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
Word Accumulator are compared with the contents of the addressed operand. If the Word
Accumulator is smaller than the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.
If the Word Accumulator is greater than or equal to the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.
The comparison takes place over the number of bits in the operand, i.e. B = 8 bit, W = 16 bit and D
= K = 32 bit.
Example:
Marker M500.

x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 < D8 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
2 = M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared
(Accumulator < Operand ?).
As the condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.
7-64 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.5.3 GREATER THAN (>) >
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: > (GREATER THAN)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
Accumulator is greater than the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.
If the Word Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The
comparison takes place over the number of bits in the operand, i.e. B = 8 bit, W = 16 bit and D = K
= 32 bit.
Example:
Marker M500.

x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 > D8 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
2 = M500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared (Accumulator
> Operand ? ). As this condition is fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-65

3.5.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO (<=) <=
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: <= (LESS EQUAL)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is
set to 1. If the Word Accumulator is greater than the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The
comparison takes place over the number of bits in the operand, i.e. B = 8 bit, W = 16 bit and D = K
= 32 bit.
Example:
Marker M500.

x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 <= D8 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
2 = M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared (Accumulator <=
Operand). As this condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.
7-66 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.5.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO (>=)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: >= (GREATER EQUAL)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
With this command, a direct transfer from Word to Logic execution occurs. The content of the Word
Accumulator is compared with the content of the addressed operand. If the Word Accumulator is
greater than or equal to the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1. If
the Word Accumulator is smaller than the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The
comparison takes place over the number of bits corresponding to the operand i.e. B=8 bit, W=16 bit
and D=K=32 bit.
Example:
A constant is to be compared with the content of Doubleword D8. The result is then assigned to
marker M500.

Accumulator and operand contents are entered here in decimal notation. The ten-position
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content (2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand Content
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 >= D8 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
2 = M500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and operand are compared according to the
following criteria: Word Accumulator >= Operand. As this condition is fulfilled, the Logic
Accumulator is set to 1.
Line 3: The content of the Logic Accumulator (result of the comparison) is assigned to marker
M500.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-67

3.5.6 UNEQUAL (<>)<>
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: <> (NOT EQUAL)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
With this command, a direct transfer from Word to Logic execution occurs. The content of the Word
Accumulator is compared with the content of the addressed operand. If the Word Accumulator and
the operand are not equal, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1. If the Word
Accumulator is equal to the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The comparison takes place
over the number of bits corresponding to the operand i.e. B=8 bit,W=16 bit and D=K=32 bit.
Example:
marker M500.
Output state Constant = 16 000

Accumulator and operand contents are entered here in decimal notation. The ten position
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content (2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand

Content
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 <> D8 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
2 = M500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

Line 2: Contents of the Word Accumulator and operand are compared according to the following
criteria: Word Accumulator <> Operand. If this condition is fulfilled, the Logic Accumulator
is set to 1.
Line 3: The contents of the Logic Accumulator [result of the comparison] is assigned to
marker M500.
7-68 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-69

3.6 Parentheses with logical gating
Execution time and code length are summarized respectively for the "open parentheses" and
corresponding "close parentheses" commands.
3.6.1 AND [ ] (A[ ]) A[ ]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: A[ ] (AND [ ])
Logic Byte/Word/Double
Execution time [µs] 1.6 2.6
Number of bytes 6 6
Operands: none
3.6.2 AND NOT [ ] (AN[ ]) AN[ ]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: AN[ ] (AND NOT [ ])
Number of bytes 6 6
Operands: none
3.6.3 OR [ ] (O[ ]) O[ ]
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: O[ ] (OR [ ])
Number of bytes 6 6
Operands: none
3.6.4 OR NOT [ ] (ON[ ]) ON[ ]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: ON[ ] (OR NOT [ ])
Number of bytes 6 6
Operands: none
7-70 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.6.5 EXCLUSIVE OR [ ] (XO[ ]) XO[ ]
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: XO[ ] (EXCL: OR [ ])
Number of bytes 6 6
Operands: none
3.6.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT [ ] (XON[ ]) XON[ ]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: XON[ ] (EXCL: OR NOT [ ])
Number of bytes 8 8
Operands: none
Function of Parentheses with Logic Commands:

The execution sequence in a ladder may be altered by the use of parentheses. The "open
parentheses" command loads the contents of the Accumulator onto the Program Stack. If the Logic
Accumulator is addressed in the previous command, prior to a "parentheses open" instruction, the
content of the Logic Accumulator is loaded into the Program Stack. By addressing the Word
Accumulator, the content of the Word Accumulator will be distributed.
The "close parentheses" instruction initiates the gating of the buffered value from the Program Stack
with the Logic Accumulator and/or the Word Accumulator, depending on which Accumulator was
addressed prior to the "parentheses open" instruction. The result is then available in the
corresponding Accumulator. The maximum nesting level is 16 parentheses.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-71

Examples for the commands AND [ ], AND NOT [ ], OR [ ], OR NOT [ ], EXCLUSIVE OR [ ],
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT [ ].
With the use of parentheses, an instruction listing may be developed according to the following logic
block diagram.
M500 ο
OR
M501 ο
AND ο O12
I0 ο
OR
I1 ο
Initial state: Marker M500 = 0Input I0 = 0 Output O12 = ?

Marker M501 = 1Input I1 = 1
bit 31 7 0
2 O M501 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
3 A [ ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x
6 ] ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x
7 = O12 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Program-stack:
xxxxxxxx 1 xxxxxxx
bit 15 7 0
Line 1: Marker state M500 is loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
Line 2: The Logic Accumulator is gated with Marker M501.
Line 3: Open parentheses: the Accumulator contents are buffered on the Program Stack.
Line 4: Input state I0 is loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
Line 5: The Logic Accumulator is gated with Input I1.
Line 6: Close parentheses: Accumulator content is gated with the content of the Program Stack,
according to the command (A[, O[, NO[ ...).
Line 7: The result of the complete logical process is assigned to Output O12.
Note:
The functional sequence is in principle the same for word execution, with the exception that the
whole Accumulator is written onto the Stack.
7-72 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-73

3.7 Parentheses with arithmetic commands
Execution time and code length are summarized respectively for the "open parentheses" and
corresponding "close parentheses" commands.
3.7.1 ADDITION [ ] (+[ ]) +[]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: + [ ] (PLUS [ ])
Execution time [µs] ----- 2.6
Number of bytes ----- 6
Operands: none
3.7.2 SUBTRACTION [ ] (–[ ]) – [ ]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: – [ ] (MINUS [ ])
Execution time [µs] ----- 3.2
Operands: none
3.7.3 MULTIPLICATION [ ] (x[ ]) X[]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: x [ ] (MULTIPLY [ ])
Execution time [µs] *) ----- 11.0
Operands: none
3.7.4 DIVISION [ ] (/[ ]) / [ ]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: / [ ] (DIVIDE [ ])
Execution time [µs] *) **) ----- 20.2
In the event of an error (Divisor = 0) in the Division and MODULO functions, the execution time will
be in the range 0.9 to 1.3 µs.
Operands: none
*) See Multiplication
**) See Division
7-74 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.7.5 REMAINDER [ ] (MOD[ ]) MOD [ ]
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: MOD [ ] (MODULO [ ])
Execution time [µs] *) **) ----- 20.6
*) See Multiplication
**) See Division
In the event of an error (Divisor = 0) in the Division and MODULO functions, the execution time will
be in the range 0.9 to 1.3 µs.
Operands: none
Function of Parentheses with Arithmetic Commands:

With arithmetic commands, only word execution is possible. The execution sequence in a ladder
may be altered by the use of parentheses. The "open-parentheses" command loads the content of
the Word Accumulator onto the Program Stack. Then the Accumulator is available for the calculation
of intermediate results. The "close parentheses" instruction initiates the gating of the buffered value
from the Program Stack with the content of the Word Accumulator. The result is again loaded into
the Accumulator. The maximum nesting level is 16 parentheses.
Example for the commands ADD [ ], SUBTRACT [ ], MULTIPLY [ ], DIVIDE [ ], DIVISION

REMAINDER [ ]
The following example demonstrates how parentheses influence the result of the operation.
Initial state: Constant = 1000 (decimal)

DoublewordD12 = 15000 (decimal)
DoublewordD36 = 100 (decimal)
DoublewordD100 =?
The specification of Accumulator and operand contents is given in decimal notation. The ten-place
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content of (2 147 483 647).
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-75

Command sequence without parentheses:
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L D12 1 5 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0
2 + K1000 1 6 0 0 0
3 / D36 1 6 0 1 0 0
4 = D100 1 6 0 1 0 0
Commend sequence with parentheses:
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L D12 1 5 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0
2 + [ 1 5 0 0 0
3 L K1000 1 0 0 0
4 / D36 1 0 1 0 0
5 ] 1 5 0 1 0
6 = D100 1 5 0 1 0 1 5 0 1 0
Program-stack:
1 5 0 0 0
Line 1: The content of Doubleword D12 is loaded into the Word Accumulator.
Line 2: Open parentheses: buffer the Accumulator content in the Program Stack.
Line 3: A constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.
Line 4: The content of the Word Accumulator is divided by the content of Doubleword D12.
Line 5: Close parentheses: Accumulator content is gated, corresponding to the command (+[, -[, x[
...) with the content of the Program Stack.
Line 6: The result of the complete logical process is assigned to Doubleword D100.
7-76 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-77

3.8 Parentheses with comparison commands
Execution time and code length are summarized respectively for the "open parenthesis" and the
corresponding "close parenthesis" commands.
3.8.1 EQUAL TO [ ] (==[ ]) (== [ ]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: == [ ] (EQUAL [ ])
Execution time [µs] ---- 3.0 to 3.2
Number of bytes ---- 6
Operands: none
3.8.2 LESS THAN [ ] (<[ ]) <[]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: < [ ] (LESS THAN [ ])
Operands: none
3.8.3 GREATER THAN [ ] (>[ ]) >[]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: > [ ] (GREATER THAN [ ])
Operands: none
3.8.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO [ ] (<=[ ]) <= [ ]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: <= [ ] (LESS EQUAL [ ])
Operands: none
7-78 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.8.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOL[ ] (>=[ ]) >= [ ]
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: >= [ ] (GREATER EQUAL [ ])
Operands: none
3.8.6 NOT EQUAL TO [ ] (<>[ ]) <> [ ]

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: <> [ ] (NOT EQUAL [ ])
Operands: none
Function of parentheses with comparison commands:

The execution sequence in a ladder may be altered by the use of parentheses. The "open-
parentheses" command loads the contents of the Word Accumulator onto the Program Stack. The
Accumulator is now available for the calculation of intermediate results.
The "close-parentheses" instruction initiates the gating of the buffered value from the Program Stack
with the content of the complete Word Accumulator. The result is loaded again into the
Accumulator. The maximum nesting depth is 16 parentheses.
A direct transition from Word to Logic execution takes place with comparison commands. If the
comparison condition is "true", the Logic Accumulator is set to "1". If the condition is not fulfilled, the
Logic Accumulator is set to "0".
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-79

Example:
Initial state: Constant = 1000 (decimal)

Doubleword D12 = 15000 (decimal)
Doubleword D36 = 10 (decimal)
Output O15 = ?
The Accumulator contents and operand contents are shown in decimal notation. The ten-position
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content of 2 147 483 647.
The Accumulator is again represented in binary notation after program line 5, as the transition to
logic execution occurs here.
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L D12 1 5 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0
2 >= [ 1 5 0 0 0
3 L K1000 1 0 0 0
4 x D36 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
bit 31 . . . 7 0
5 ] x x x x 1 x x x x x x x
6 = O15 x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Program-stack:
1 5 0 0 0
Line 1: The content of Doubleword D12 is loaded into the Word Accumulator.
Line 2: Open parentheses: buffering of the Accumulator content in the Program Stack.
Line 3: Loading of a Constant into the Word Accumulator.
Line 4: The content of the Word Accumulator is multiplied by the content of Doubleword D12.
Line 5: Close parentheses: Word Accumulator content is gated, corresponding to the
command(==[, >=[, <=[ ...) with the content of the Program Stack . The transition from
Word to Logic processing occurs in this program line. The Logic Accumulator is set or
reset, depending on the result of the comparison.
Line 6: The result of the complete logical process is assigned to output O15.
7-80 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-81

3.9 Shift Commands
3.9.1 SHIFT LEFT (<<) <<

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: << (SHIFT LEFT)
Execution time [µs] 2.0 + 0.2 x n 2.0 + 0.2 x n
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
Since the sign bit (MSB) is included with this command, it is grouped in with arithmetic commands.
For this reason and out of time considerations, this command should not be used for the isolation of bits.
A SHIFT LEFT instruction causes the contents of the Word Accumulator to be multiplied by two. For this
purpose, the bits in the Accumulator are simply shifted by one place to the left. The number of the shift
operations is determined via the operand. Thus the set bits, which are shifted beyond the Accumulator to
the left, are lost; the Accumulator is filled with nulls from the right-hand side. With operand contents
greater than 32, the operand value Modulo 32 is used, i.e. the integer remainder from the division (operand
value)/32.
Example:
The content of the Doubleword D8 is to be shifted four times to the left and then stored in D12.
Initial state: Doubleword D8 = 3E 80 (hex)

Doubleword D12 = ?
The Accumulator content is shown here in binary notation, and the operand content in hexadecimal
notation.
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx
1 L D8 00000000 00000000 00111110 10000000 00 00 3E 80
2 << K+1 00000000 00000000 01111101 00000000
3 << K+1 00000000 00000000 11111010 00000000
4 << K+1 00000000 00000001 11110100 00000000
5 << K+1 00000000 00000011 11101000 00000000
6 = D12 00000000 00000011 11101000 00000000 00 03 E8 00
Line 1: Load Doubleword D8 into the Accumulator.

Line 2 to 5: The content of the Word Accumulator is shifted to the left by the number of bits
specified in the operand. The complete operation can also be undertaken with the
command << K+4.
Line 6: The result is stored in the Doubleword D12.
7-82 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.9.2 SHIFT RIGHT (>>) >>
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: >> (SHIFT RIGHT)
Execution time [µs] 2.0 + 0.2 x n 2.0 + 0.2 x n
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
Since the sign bit (MSB) is included with this command, it is grouped in with arithmetic commands.
For this reason and out of time considerations, this command should not be used for the isolation of bits.
A SHIFT RIGHT instruction causes the contents of the Word Accumulator to be divided by two. For this
purpose, the bits in the Accumulator are simply shifted by one place to the right. The number of the shift
operations is determined via the operand. Thus the set bits, which are shifted beyond the Accumulator to
the right, are lost; the Accumulator is filled according to the sign, from the left-hand side. With operand
contents greater than 32, the operand value Modulo 32 is used, i.e. the integer remainder from the division
(operand value)/32.
Example:
The content of the Doubleword D8 is to be shifted four times to the right and then stored in D12.

Doubleword D12 = ?
The Accumulator content is shown here in binary notation and the operand content in hexadecimal
notation.
Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand

Content
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
1 L D8 00000000 00000000 00111110 10000000 00 00 3E 80
2 >> K1 00000000 00000000 00011111 01000000
3 >> K1 00000000 00000000 00001111 10100000
4 >> K1 00000000 00000000 00000111 11010000
5 >> K1 00000000 00000000 00000011 11101000
6 = D12 00000000 00000000 00000011 11101000 00 00 03 E8

Line 2 to 5: The content of the Word Accumulator is shifted to the right by the number of bits
specified in the operand. The complete operation can also be undertaken with the
command >> K+4.
Line 6: The result is stored in Doubleword D12.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-83

✎
7-84 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.10 Bit Commands
3.10.1 BIT SET (BS) BS

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: BS (BIT SET)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
With this command, each bit in the Accumulator can be acted on. The addressed bit is set to "1"
through the use of the BS command. The selection (addressing) of the corresponding bit is derived
from the content of the specified Operand or a Constant. In the bit numbering, bit 0 corresponds to
the LSB and bit 31 the MSB. For operand contents larger than 32, the operand value Modulo 32 is
used, i.e. the integer remainder from the division (operand value)/32.
Example:
Load Doubleword D8 in the Accumulator, set the bit 0 of the Accumulator to "1" and store the result
in Doubleword D12.

Doubleword D12 = ?
Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation.
xx xx xx xx
1 L D8 00 00 3E 80 00 00 3E 80
2 BS K+0 00 00 3E 81
3 = D12 00 00 3E 81 00 00 3E 81

Line 2: The bit specified in the operand is set to 1.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-85

3.10.2 BIT RESET (BC) BC
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: BC (BIT CLEAR)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
With this command, each bit in the Accumulator can be acted on. The addressed bit is set to "0"
through the use of the BC command. The selection (addressing) of the corresponding bit is derived
Example:
Load Doubleword D8 in the Accumulator, set bit 0 of the Accumulator to "0" and store the result in
Doubleword D12.

Doubleword D12 = ?
Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation.
xx xx xx xx
1 L D8 00 00 3E 81 00 00 3E 81
2 BC K+0 00 00 3E 80
3 = D12 00 00 3E 80 00 00 3E 80

Line 2: The bit specified in the operand is set to "0".
7-86 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.10.3 BIT TEST (BT) BT
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: BT (BIT TEST)
Number of bytes 8 0
Operation:
With this command, the status of each individual bit in the Accumulator may be interrogated. With
BT commands, a direct transition from Word to Logic execution takes place. The BIT TEST tests the
status of a bit from the Word Accumulator and then acts correspondingly on the Logic Accumulator.
If the tested bit is "1", then the Logic Accumulator is also set to "1"; if it is "0" ,it is set to "0". The
program continues in logic execution. The selection (addressing) of the corresponding bit is derived
Example:
Load Doubleword D8 in the Accumulator, and assign the logic state of bit 0 to an Output.

Output O12 = ?
Word Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation, the Logic
Accumulator in binary representation.
xx xx xx xx
1 L D8 00 00 3E 81 00 00 3E 81
2 BT K+0 00 00 3E 81
3 = O12 x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1

Line 2: The bit specified in the operand is tested as to its status.
Line 3: The Logic Accumulator is assigned to Output O12.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-87

✎
7-88 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.11 Stack Operations
It should be noted that with Stack operations all read/write operations on the Data Stack take place
according to the LIFO principle (Last In – First Out).
3.11.1 Load Data onto the Data Stack (PS)PS

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PS (PUSH)

Logic Execution with the PS Command
Operation:
With the PS command, data can be buffered. Thus the addressed operand is loaded onto the Data
Stack. Since the Data Stack is organized as 16 bit, a minimum width of one Word must be used in
writing to it. During this the operand value is copied into bit 7 of the current address in the Data
Stack. The free bits of the reserved memory are undefined or unused. In the event of a Stack
overflow, an error message will be issued.
Memory allocation in the Data Stack:
Bit 15 7 0
x x x x x x x x L x x x x x x x
Word Execution with the PS Command
Operation:
With the PS command, data can be buffered. Thus the addressed memory area (B, W, D, K) is
copied into the current address of the Data Stack. With Word execution, two Words are reserved as
standard on the Data Stack per PS command. The operand is extended in the Stack with sign
justification corresponding to the MSB. In the event of a Stack overflow, an error message will be
issued.
Memory allocation in the Data Stack upon saving of:
Bit 31 15 7 0
Byte X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X B B B B B B B B
Word X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X W WW WW WW W W W W WW WW W
Doubleword DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
Constant K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-89

3.11.2 Acquire data from the data stack (PL)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PL (PULL)

Execution time [µs] 3.4 3.8 4.2 ----
Number of bytes 20 20 18 ----
Logic Execution with the PL Command
Operation:
The PL command complements the PS command. Data which are saved with PUSH can be taken
from the Data Stack again with PULL. With logic execution, bit 7 is copied from the current address
of the Data Stack into the addressed operand with a PL command. If the Stack is empty, an error
message will be issued.
Logic Execution with the PL Command
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
The PL command complements the PS command. Data which are saved with PUSH can be taken
from the Data Stack again with PULL. With Word execution, two Words are copied from the current
address of the Data Stack into the addressed memory area with a PL command. If the Stack is
empty, an error message will be issued.
3.11.3 Load logic accumulator onto the data stack (PSL) PSL
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PSL (PUSH LOGICACCU)

Number of bytes 20
Operands: none
Operation:
The Logic Accumulator can be buffered with the PSL command. For this purpose, the Logic
Accumulator is loaded onto the Data Stack. Since the Data Stack is organized as 16 bits, it must be
written to with a minimum width of one Word. During this the content of the Logic Accumulator is
copied into the current address of the Data Stack. The free bits of the reserved memory are
undefined or unused. In the event of a Stack overflow, an error message will be issued.
Memory allocation in the Data Stack:
Bit 15 7 0
x x x x x x x x L x x x x x x x
7-90 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

3.11.4 Load word accumulator onto the data stack (PSW) PSW
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PSW (PUSH WORDACCU)

Number of bytes 20
Operands: none
Operation:
The content of the Word Accumulator can be buffered with the PSW command. For this purpose,
the Word Accumulator is copied into the Data Stack. The content of the Word Accumulator (32 bit)
reserves two Words on the Data Stack. In the event of a stack overflow, an error message will be
issued.
3.11.5 Acquire logic accumulator from the data stack (PLL) PLL
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PLL (PULL LOGICACCU)

Number of bytes 16
Operands: none
Operation:
The PLL command complements the PSL command. With a PLL instruction, bit 7 from the current
address of the Data Stack is copied into the Logic Accumulator. If the stack is empty, an error
message will be issued.
3.11.6 Acquire word accumulator from the data stack (PLW)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PLW (PULL WORDACCU)

Number of bytes 16
Operands: none
Operation:
The PLW command complements the PSW command. With a PLW instruction, two Words are
copied from the Data Stack into the Word Accumulator. If the stack is empty, an error message will
be issued.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-91

Examples for the commands PS, PL, PSL, PSW, PLL, PLW
The Module 15 is to be called at a specific point in the program. After the return into the main
program, the original Accumulator content is again required for further program run.
Accumulator contents prior to the Call Module: 1A 44 3E 18
Line Instruction Accumulator Contents

.
.
49 . 1 A 4 4 3 E 1 8
50 PSW 1 A 4 4 3 E 1 8
52 CM 15
54 PLW 1 A 4 4 3 E 1 8
55 .
.
.
Data stack:
1 A 4 4
3 E 1 8
Line 50: Save the Word Accumulator onto the Data Stack.
Line 52: Subprogram 15 is called up.
Line 54: The original Accumulator contents are transferred back from the Data Stack and
is available for further program run.
Note:
The sequence for stack operations is the same for all commands. Only the data width varies.
7-92 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-93

3.12 Jump Commands
3.12.1 Unconditional Jump (JP) JP

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: JP (JUMP)
Jump processed Jump not processed

Execution time [µs] 2.2 ----
Number of bytes 8
Operands: jump address (LBL)
Operation:
A JP command instructs the processor to continue the program at the specified jump address
(Label). This command interrupts a logic sequence.
3.12.2 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 1 (JPT)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: JPT (JUMP IF TRUE)

Byte information in brackets:
A shorter command is employed in certain high-priority program sequences.
Operation:
A JPT command is a conditional jump command. If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the program is
continued from the specified jump address (Label). If the Logic Accumulator is "0" the jump is not
processed. This command interrupts a logic sequence.
3.12.3 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 0 (JPF) JPF

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: JPF (JUMP IF FALSE)

Operation:
A JPF command is a conditional jump command. If the Logic Accumulator is "0", the program is
continued from the specified jump address (Label). If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the jump is not
processed. This command interrupts a logic sequence.
7-94 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Example for the commands JP, JPT, JPF
A certain program section is to be skipped, depending on Input 15.
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 JPT 10 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x
3 L I3
4 O M500
5 = O20
6 LBL 10
•
•
•
Line 1: Load the operand contents in the Accumulator.

Line 2: Dependent on Input I5, a program jump is processed.
Line 3: Skipped in this example.
Line 6: Jump address: The program run is continued from here.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-95

3.12.4 Call Module (CM) CM
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: CM (CALL MODULE)
Number of bytes 22
Special Library Call:
Number of bytes 24
Operation:
A Call Module instructs the processor to leave the main program and process the Module
designated by the jump address (LBL). Modules are independent subprograms and are terminated
by the command EM. They can also be called at multiple points in the main program. This command
interrupts a logic sequence.
3.12.5 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 (CMT) CMT

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: CMT (CALL MODULE IF TRUE)
Number of bytes 28


Operation:
A CMT command is a conditional Call Module. If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the Module with the
specified jump address (Label) is processed. If the Logic Accumulator is "0", the main program
continues without a Call Module. This command interrupts a logic sequence.
3.12.6 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 (CMF) CMF

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: CMF (CALL MODULE IF FALSE)
Number of bytes 28
7-96 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Operation:
A CMF command is a conditional Call Module. If the Logic Accumulator is "0", the Module with the
specified jump address (Label) is processed. If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the main program
continues without a Call Module. This command interrupts a logic sequence.
Example for the commands CM, CMT, CMF
A certain Module is to be called, depending on Input I5.

Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 CMF 10 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x
•
•
•
499 EM
500 LBL 10
502 OM 500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
503 = O20 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
504 EM
Line 1: Load the operand contents in the Accumulator.

Line 2: Dependent on Input I5, the Call Module is processed.
Line 499: End Module of the main program.
Line 500: Start of the Module, identified by LBL.
Line 501: Instruction in the subprogram.
Line 504: End Module: Effects the return to the main program.
Line 3: The main program continues at this point once the Module is processed.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-97

3.12.7 End of Module, Program End (EM) EM
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: EM (END OF MODULE)

Number of bytes 4
Operands: none
Operation:
Every program and/or every subprogram (Module) is terminated with an EM command. An EM
command in a Module initiates the return jump to the Call Module (CM, CMT, CMF). The program is
continued with the instruction following the Call Module. The command EM is handled as program
end criterion; thus subsequent program instructions can be reached using a jump address.
3.12.8 Jump Label (LBL) LBL

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: LBL (LABEL)
Execution time [µs] 0

Number of bytes 0
Operands: 0 to 511
Operation:
The jump label defines a program position as an entry point for the CM and JP commands. Jump
labels may be allocated addresses in the range 0 to 511.
7-98 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

✎
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-99

3.13 CASE statement
3.13.1 Indexed call module (CASE) CASE

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: CASE (CASE OF)
Byte Word
Number of bytes 46 44
4 Bytes must be added to the length for each entry in the table (CM).
Operands: B, W
Operation:
With the CASE command, a specific subprogram may be selected from a list of Call Modules (CM).
These CM commands immediately follow the CASE command and are internally numbered in an
ascending sequence from 0 to a maximum of 127. The content of the operands (B, W) addresses
the required Module.
3.13.2 End indexed Call Module (ENDC) ENDC

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: ENDC (ENDCASE)
Byte Word
Execution time [µs] 0 0
Number of bytes 0 0
Operands: none
Operation:
The ENDC command is used in conjunction with the CASE command. It must immediately follow
the list of CM commands.
7-100 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

Structure of a CASE statement:
Internal Addressing (0 to max. 127)

1 CASE B 150
2 CM 100 <------- (0)
3 CM 200 <------- (1)
4 CM 201 <------- (2)
5 CM 202 <------- (3)
6 CM 203 <------- (4)
7 CM 204 <------- (5)
8 CM 300 <------- (6)
9 ENDC
Line 1: Command + operand; The internal address of the required Module must be loaded into the
operand
Line 2: Call Module for operand contents 0
Line 9: End of the CASE statement
8/95 TNC 360 3 Commands 7-101

✎
7-102 TNC 360 3 Commands 8/95

7
4 PLC Modules
A range of PLC Modules is available for certain PLC functions that cannot be performed with the
PLC commands, or only in a complicated way. They are described below in more detail.
4.1 Module 9000: Copy a marker block

Module 9000 can be used to copy a block with a certain number of markers, beginning with the start
address, in ascending order to another marker range, beginning at a certain target address.
Care must be taken that the blocks do not overlap, and that there is adequate space for the copied
block after the target address.
Module call:
PS K/B/W/D 1st Marker of the block to be copied (start address)

PS K/B/W/D 1st Marker of the target address for copying
PS K/B/W/D Length of the marker block
CM 9000
If the block is not copied correctly, marker M3171 will be set.
4.2 Module 9001: Copy a Word block

Module 9001 can be used to copy a block with a certain number of Bytes, Words or Doublewords,
beginning with the start address, in ascending order to another area, beginning at a defined target
address.
The length is always given in Bytes.
Care must be taken that the blocks do not overlap, and that there is adequate space for the copied
block after the target address.
Module call:
PS K/B/W/D 1st Byte of the block which is to be copied (start address)

PS K/B/W/D 1st Byte of target address for copying
PS K/B/W/D Length of the block in Bytes
CM 9001
If the block is not copied correctly, marker M3171 will be set.
8/95 TNC 360 4 PLC Modules 7-103

4.3 Module 9010: Indexed reading of Byte
Module 9011: Indexed reading of Word
Module 9012: Indexed reading of Doubleword
Modules 9010, 9011 and 9012 can be used to read a Byte, Word or Doubleword, and load the result
onto the STACK. This allows indexed reading of the Word memory when a Variable is used to define
the memory location.
Module call:
PS K/B/W/D Address of a Byte, where the contents address another Byte, the contents of
which are to be copied to the target address.
CM9010
PL B Target address - Byte
PS K/B/W/D Address of a Word, where the contents address another Word, the contents of
which are to be copied to the target address.
CM9011
PL W Target address - Word
PS K/B/W/D Address of a Doubleword, where the contents address another Doubleword,

the contents of which are to be copied to the target address.
CM 9012
PL D Target address - Doubleword
The addresses which are given must lie within the valid range (0 to 1023). For Word addressing the
address must be divisible by two, for Doubleword addressing by four.
If the Byte, Word or Doubleword is not read correctly, marker M3171 will be set.
Example for Module 9010:
Word memory STACK
B10 35 ..
.
35 (80) PS B10
CM9010
B35 80
PL
.. B100
.
B100 80
7-104 TNC 360 4 PLC Modules 8/95

4.4 Module 9020: Indexed writing of Byte
Module 9021: Indexed writing of Word
Module 9022: Indexed writing of Doubleword
Modules 9020, 9021 and 9022 can be used to write the contents of a Byte, Word or Doubleword to
a given address in the Word memory. This makes indexed writing possible in the Word memory,
when a variable is used to define the memory cell.
Module call:
PS K/B/W/D Address of a Byte whose contents address another Byte into which the value of a
second Byte is entered.
PS K/B/W/D Address of the Byte where the value to be transferred is stored.
CM 9020
PS K/B/W/D Address of a Word, where the contents address another Word, where a value is to
be entered from a second Word.
PS K/B/W/D Address of the Word, where the value to be transferred is stored.
CM 9021
PS K/B/W/D Address of a Doubleword, where the contents address another Doubleword

where a value is to be entered from a second Doubleword.
PS K/B/W/D Address of the Doubleword, where the value to be transferred is stored.
CM 9022
The addresses which are given must lie within the valid range (0 to 1023). For Word addressing, the
address must be divisible by two, and for Doubleword addressing by four.
If the Byte, Word or Doubleword is not transferred correctly marker M3171 will be set.
Example for Module 9020:
Word memory STACK
B10 35 ..
.
120 PS B10
PS B100
B35 120 35
CM9020
..
.
B100 120

4.5 Module 9032: Transfer machine parameter values to the PLC
Module 9032 can be used to transfer the value of a machine parameter, designated by its number
and index, to the PLC.
The value of the machine parameter is transferred to the PLC as an integer. The decimal point is
shifted by the number of possible places after the decimal point. An index must always be defined.
For machine parameters without index, enter the value zero.
Module call:
PS K/B/W/D Number of the machine parameter, the value of which is to be read

PS K/B/W/D Machine parameter index
CM 9032
PL B/W/D Address for machine parameter value
If the machine parameter is read incorrectly, marker M3171 will be set.

4.6 Module 9035: Transfer status information to the PLC
Module 9035 can be used to transfer NC status information such as the selected handwheel axis,
number and type of handwheel axes (bit coded) and handwheel interpolation factor to the PLC.
Module call:
PS B/W/D/K Type of NC status information

CM 9035
PL B/W/D NC status value
If the data are incorrectly transferred, marker M3171 is be set.
Type of NC status information: NC status value:
0 ... 8 Not yet implemented

9: Selected handwheel axis –1: No axis or several axes
0: X axis
1: Y axis
2: Z axis
3: IV axis
10: Number and type of Bit 0 +0 = X axis with handwheel axis
handwheel axes +1 = X axis is handwheel axis
Bit 1 +0 = Y axis is not handwheel axis
+2 = Y axis is handwheel axis
Bit 2 +0 = Z axis is not handwheel axis
+4 = Z axis is handwheel axis
Bit 3 +0 = IV axis is not handwheel axis
+8 = IV axis is handwheel axis
11: Handwheel interpolation 0 ... 10
factor X axis
factor Y axis
factor Z axis
factor IV axis

4.7 Module 9036: Transfer PLC status information to the NC
Module 9036 transfers all or individual axes from the PLC to the NC (for display of interpolation
factors and handwheel functions).
Module call:
PS B/W/D/K Type of PLC status information

PS B/W/D/K PLC status value
CM 9036
PL B/W/D Status messages that are filed in the STACK:
0: PLC status information was transferred
1: Incorrect type of PLC status information
2: Transferred PLC status information incorrect
3: Write inhibited (e.g. through MP)
When the PLC status information has been transferred, Marker M3171 is reset.
Type of NC status information: PLC status value:
0: Handwheel interpolation factor 0 ... 10

X axis
Y axis
Z axis
IV axis
all axes
all axes
6 to 9 reserved
10: jog distance limitation 0 to 50 mm

<0 or >50 = limit canceled

4.8 Module 9040: Transfer coordinate values to the PLC
Module 9040 transfers axis coordinates for all the NC axes to the PLC. Actual value, nominal value,
reference value, servo lag and distance-to-go can be transferred. The values are loaded in the format
1/1000 mm or 1/1000°, beginning at the given target address, in five Doublewords for the X, Y, Z,
and 4th axes.
Module call:
PS K/B/W/D Target address for axis coordinates

PS K/B/W/D Coordinate type
0 = Actual value
1 = Nominal value
2 = Reference value
3 = Servo lag
4 = Distance-to-go
CM 9040
Regardless of whether individual axes are disabled by MP10, the values for all axes will always be
read in. The coordinate value for an axis is undefined until the reference point for this axis has been
passed over.
If the transfer is incorrect, marker M3171 will be set.
4.9 Data transfer by the PLC

The modules described in this section enable the PLC to transfer data via the RS-232-C/V.24 or
RS-422/V.11 data interfaces (see Chapter "Data Interface" for transfer parameters).
The PLC assigns and enables the data interfaces with modules 9100 and 9101. The current status
of the data interface is interrogated by module 9102.
The transmitting and receiving buffers for the PLC are both 128 characters long. Each STRING
terminates in an END character in the transmitting or receiving buffer and therefore a STRING can
contain a maximum of 127 characters. Modules 9105 and 9106 can be used to transfer a block of
binary values (bytes) from the word memory.
Example: Transferring a binary block
. When transferring binary data from address

➞ B126 11111010 = $ FA B126 in word memory, the ASCII characters "F",
. 10000001 = $ 81 "A", "8", "1" etc. are transmitted in succession via
. . the interface.
.
.
. When binary data are transferred, every byte
contains two ASCII characters. Therefore the
transmitting and receiving buffers are 63 bytes
long.

4.9.1 Module 9100: Assign data interface
Module 9100 assigns one of the interfaces (RS-232-C/V.24 or RS-422/V.11, for TNC 360 the
RS-232-C) to the PLC, configures the transfer parameters and switches the interface to receive
mode. The interface is also initialized and any fault indicators are reset. The data interface cannot be
used by the input/output program of the NC operator interface because it is assigned to the PLC.
The following constraints should be observed:
- The assignment of an interface to the PLC is canceled whenever the PLC program is transferred.
- Configuration for 19 200 baud is not possible. The baud rate is set in MP 9040. The data format is
7 data bits, one even parity bit.
Module call:
PS K/B/W/D Interface 0 = RS-232-C/V.24

(1 = RS-422/V.11)
CM 9100
If the module is incorrectly processed the interface is not assigned to the PLC and marker M3171 is
set.
Potential errors:
- The interface is already assigned by the input/output program of the user interface.
- The call parameters of the module are outside the permitted range.
- The required baud rate is not available because of the way the other serial interface is
configured. (19 200 baud).
4.9.2 Module 9101: Enable data interface

Module 9101 cancels the assignment of an interface to the PLC and makes it again available for the
user's interface input/output program. Interface receive readiness is canceled.
Module call:

(1 = RS-422/V.11)
CM 9101
Marker M3171 is set if the assignment is not canceled.
Potential errors:
- The interface was not assigned to the PLC.


4.9.3 Module 9102: Interface status
Module 9102 reports all relevant status information about the data interfaces in bit-encoded form.
The "Interface ready" information is not updated until the interface is assigned to either the PLC or
the NC. If the interface is not assigned, the module reports the status that was valid prior to the last
interface enable.
Module call:

(1 = RS-422/V.11)
CM 9102
PL B/W/D The status of the interface is bit-encoded and filed into the addressed storage area
from the STACK.
The following states are possible:
Bit 0 = 1 The interface is assigned to the NC.

Bit 1 = 1 The interface is assigned to the PLC.
Bit 2 = 1 The interface is ready.
Bit 3 = 1 The transmitting buffer is empty.
Bit 4 = 1 A transmit error has occurred.
Bit 5 = 1 The receiving buffer is full.
Bit 6 = 1 A receive error has occurred.
Bit 7 = 1 The character for end of text (<EXT> or defined in MP5201.2) was received, i.e.
the interface is no longer ready to receive.
All higher-order bits in the STACK are deleted, combinations are possible.
Marker M3171 is set if the call parameters of the module are outside the permitted range.

4.9.4 Module 9105: Transmit binary data via data interface
Module 9105 transfers a block of binary data from the word memory via the interfaces.
The appropriate interface must be assigned to the PLC with module 9100 before module 9105 is
called.
Module call:

(1 = RS-422/V.11)
PS K/B/W/D Address of first byte in binary block

(start address: 0 to 1023)
PS K/B/W/D Length of binary block in bytes (0 to 63)

CM 9105
If the module is incorrectly processed the block of binary data is not transferred and marker M3171
is set.
Potential errors:
- The call parameters are outside the permitted range.

- The interface is not assigned to the PLC.
- The transmitting buffer is not empty.
- A part of the binary block is above address 1024
(e.g. Start of binary block: 1020
Length of binary block: 60
=> End address 1080 is above the upper limit of 1024)
- The previous transfer contained an error but the interface was not re-assigned with module 9100.

4.9.5 Module 9106: Receive binary data via data interface
Module 9106 reads a block of binary data from the receiving buffer of an interface into the word
memory of the PLC. This process clears the receiving buffer.
The length of the received binary block is fed back as the output.
The appropriate interface must be assigned to the PLC with module 9100 before module 9106 is
called.
Module 9106 can only be run within a SUBMIT program.
Module call:

(1 = RS-422/V.11)
PS K/B/W/D Address of first byte

in binary block
(Start address: 0 to 1023)
CM 9106
PL B/W/D Length of binary block in bytes
If the module is incorrectly processed the block of binary data is not read into the word memory and
marker M3171 is set.
Potential errors:
- The interface is not assigned to the PLC.
- The receiving buffer contains no data.
- The number of characters in the receiving buffer is uneven or greater than 126.
- The binary block cannot be stored at the specified address because it is too long (start address +
length > 1024).
- The data in the receiving buffer contain characters that cannot be interpreted as hexadecimal
values. Only the characters 0 to 9, A to F and control characters are permitted.

4.9.6 Module 9120 Position an auxiliary axis
A positioning movement is started by entering a target position (in the reference system), a feed
rate, and a flag register. The axis is positioned in complete dependence on other processes in the
control. However, it's path is not interpolated with other axes.
Constraints:
− The entered axis must have been activated through MP10 and declared as auxiliary axis through
MP60.
− The values for rapid traverse, analog voltage for rapid traverse, acceleration etc. must be
correctly set in the machine parameters.
− For axes with automatic display value reduction (modulo value in MP810.x) the axis is always
moved in the direction of the shorter path to the target position, except when the target position
is entered as an incremental value.
− There is no monitoring to prevent violation of the limit switch limits!
− The axis must be stationary. Any movement must first be canceled with module 9121.
− If the axis was in reference run mode, this condition is canceled. The positioning movement is
always added to the current counter value.
− If the modules 9120, 9121 and 9122 are called repeatedly for the same axis during a PLC scan,
the last command is executed.
− If in this axis the "positioning error" status is set, it is erased.
Possible errors:
− The transferred axis does not exist.
− The transferred axis was not declared through MP10 and MP60 to be an auxiliary axis.
− The axis is already being positioned.
Call:

PS B/W/D/K<Target position> (in the reference system, format 0.001 mm)
PS B/W/D/K<Flag register> Bit 0 = 1: Target position incremental
= 0: Target position absolute
CM9120
1: The transferred axis does not exist
2: The axis is not configured as an auxiliary axis
3: The axis was already positioned
4: The absolute position is outside the modulo range
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Positioning was correctly started

= 1: Faulty positioning

4.9.7 Module 9121 Stop an auxiliary axis
A positioning movement that has been started with Module 9120 or Module 9123 can be canceled
at any point with Module 9121.
Constraints:
MP60.
Possible errors:
− The entered axis is already stationary.
Call:

CM9121
0: Positioning movement is canceled
1: Transferred axis does not exist
3: The entered axis was already stationary
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Positioning movement is stopped

4.9.8 Module 9122 Poll the status of an auxiliary axis

For a certain axis a bit-encoded status word is transferred that provides information on the
momentary condition of this axis.
Constraints:
− Status changed resulting from commands sent by the PLC to control the auxiliary axes (Modules
9120, 9121, 9123) are not recognized until the next PLC scan.
− After switch-on, Bit 1 (axis over reference point) is erased.
− It is possible to position the axis even without first crossing over the reference mark.

Possible errors:
The transferred axis does not exist.
Call:

CM9122
PL B/W/D <Status>
Bit 0: 1= Axis is auxiliary axis
Bit 1: 1= Axis has traversed the reference point
Bit 2: 1= Axis is positioned
Bit 3: 1= Axis direction is negative
Bit 4: 1= Positioning error has occurred
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Status was transferred

4.9.9 Module 9123 Traverse the reference point of an auxiliary axis
This module starts a positioning movement in a given direction that continues until a reference point
has been traversed or the positioning movement has been canceled with the module 9121. Because
of the possible problems finding a target position during referencing (direction reversal, etc.) it is
necessary to stop when the reference point has been found.
Constraints:
MP60.
− The values for rapid traverse, analog voltage for rapid traverse, acceleration etc. must be
correctly set in the machine parameters.
− There is no monitoring to prevent violation of the limit switch limits!
− The axis must be stationary. Any movement must first be canceled with module 9121.
− Feed rate override is not accounted for.
− The condition "reference mark not yet traversed" is set for the axis.
− An already existing reference point in this axis is erased, but not the position value of the axis.
This is not re-initialized until the reference point has be traversed.
− If in this axis the "positioning error" status is set, it is erased.
− The positioning movement is immediately canceled when the reference point is reached. Due to
the braking path of the axis, however, it stops somewhat behind the reference point in the
direction of traverse.

Possible errors:
− The axis is already being positioned.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K<Axis> (0.to.3 for X/Y/Z/4)
PS B/W/D/K<Flag register> Bit 0 = 1: negative traverse direction
= 0: positive traverse direction
CM9123
1: The transferred axis does not exist
2: The axis is not declared as an auxiliary axis
3: The axis was already positioned
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Positioning was started

4.9.10 Module 9124 Override for PLC axis
An override value can be entered to influence the traversing speed of a PLC axis.
Constraints:
MP60.
− The override value can lie between 0% and 100.00% (resolution 0.01%) and must be transferred
as an integer (0 ... 10 000).
− When movement starts, the last transferred override value is considered.
− After a reset or after an interruption of the PLC program the override value in each PLC axis is
set to 100.00%.
− It is also possible to call the module while a PLC axis is moving.
− The module can be called in the same PLC scan in addition to a module from the group
(9120/9121/9123). It does not become effective, however, until the previously called module is
finished.
Possible errors:
- The transferred axis does not exist.
- The transferred axis was not declared through MP10 and MP60 to be an auxiliary axis.
- The transferred override value is incorrect.

Call:
PS B/W/D/K<Axis> (0..3 for X/Y/Z/IV)

PS B/W/D/K<Override> (Format 0,01%)
CM 9124
0: Override was set
1: Transferred axis is invalid
2: The axis is not defined as a PLC axis
3: Override value is incorrect
Error status after Call: M3171 =0: Override was set

=1: For error condition see above
4.9.11 Module 9150 Run an NC block

With module 9150 the PLC can, during an active M/S/T output, define an NC block that is then
executed after acknowledgment of the M/S/T strobe before the control continues with the NC
program. An NC program can also be defined if a program is not being run. It is then executed
immediately.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Command code>
PS B/W/D/K <Address the parameter block in the B/W/D range>
CM 9150
Error code: 0 = NC block was inserted

1 = NC program was started, but no M/S/T strobe
2 = Unknown error code
3 = False address in the B/W/D range
Error status after call: M3171 = 0 NC block was inserted

= 1 for error condition see above
At present the command code <0> is implemented for TOOL CALL
Parameters :
B<Adr+0> active elements bit-coded
Bit 0 =1: Tool number, otherwise modal
Bit 1 =1: Tool axis, otherwise modal
Bit 2 =1: Spindle rpm, otherwise modal
Bit 3 =0
Bit 4 =0
B<Adr+1> Tool axis (0/1/2/3 = X/Y/Z/IV)
W<Adr+2> Tool number
D <Adr+ 4> Spindle rpm (format 0.001 rpm)

✎

✎

5 Compatibility with TNC 355
The flag ranges for the TNC 355 have also been used for the TNC 360 to enable PLC routines
created for the TNC 355 to be run on the TNC 360 as well.
However there are many functions that can be programmed much more simply with PLC words
with the TNC 360. PLC marker M2719 must be set to activate the strobes for word processing.
M2719 Deactivate the TNC 355 mode PLC PLC

0 = Activate strobes for marker range
1 = Activate strobes for word processing
M2719 = 1 M2719 = 0
Meaning Marker Data Marker Data
Start PLC Pos. X 2704 D528 2452 M2560 to M2564
Start PLC Pos. Y 2705 D532 2453 M2565 to M2569
Start PLC Pos. Z 2706 D536 2454 M2570 to M2574
Start PLC Pos. IV 2707 D540 2455 M2575 to M2579
Read out strobe for 2713 D528 2809 M2560 to M2576
values in Q
parameter (Q100
to Q107)
Read out strobe – – 2599 M2560 to M2567
tool number M2112 to M2119
Read in strobe tool – – 2598 M2560 to M2567
number M2572 to M2579
Strobe datum 2716 D528 to D540 2819 MP4210.32 to
correction MP4210.46
Spindle orientation 2712 D592 2527 M2585 to M2589
HEIDENHAIN recommend programming the PLC functions over the word range only. This makes
the PLC program easy to read and a lot shorter.
8/95 TNC 360 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 7-121

5.1 PLC Program conversion
PLC programs created for the TNC 355 can also be used on the TNC 360.
When these PLC programs are downloaded to the TNC 360 the following command codes are
automatically modified:
U → A
UN → AN
E → I
A → O
Z → C
An EM block is automatically appended at the end of the PLC program.

The programmer must ensure that the PLC program starts with a logic sequence.
7-122 TNC 360 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 8/95

5.2 Compatibility markers
The table below lists the PLC markers that have only been retained for compatibility with the
TNC 355. However the various PLC functions should be programmed with the TNC 360 using the
appropriate PLC words.
Marker Function Set Reset TNC 360/335
M2032 T Code 1st bit (lsb) NC NC
M2033 T Code 2nd bit NC NC
M2034 T Code 3rd bit NC NC
M2035 T Code 4th bit NC NC W262
M2036 T Code 5th bit NC NC W264
M2037 T Code 6th bit NC NC
M2038 T Code 7th bit NC NC
M2039 T Code 8th bit (msb) NC NC
M2050 Operating mode: Programming and editing NC NC
M2051 Operating mode: Manual NC NC
M2052 Operating mode: Electronic handwheel NC NC
M2053 Operating mode: Positioning with manual input NC NC
M2054 Operating mode: Program run/Single block NC NC W272
M2055 Operating mode: Program run/Full sequence NC NC
M2056 Operating mode: Test run NC NC
M2057 Operating mode: Traversing the reference marks NC NC
M2064 S Code 1st bit (lsb)
M2065 S Code 2nd bit
M2066 S Code 3rd bit
M2067 S Code 4th bit
M2068 S Code 5th bit W258
M2071 S Code 8th bit (msb)
M2072 M Code 1st bit (lsb)
M2073 M Code 2nd bit
M2074 M Code 3rd bit
M2075 M Code 4th bit
M2076 M Code 5th bit W260
M2079 M Code 8th bit (msb)
M2080 Minimum rpm from MP3020 1st bit (lsb)
M2081 Minimum rpm from MP3020 2nd bit
M2082 Minimum rpm from MP3020 3rd bit W1008
M2083 Minimum rpm from MP3020 4th bit
M2087 Minimum rpm from MP3020 8th bit (msb)
M2088 Increment from MP3020 1st bit (lsb)
M2089 Increment from MP3020 2nd bit —
M2090 Increment from MP3020 3rd bit
M2091 Increment from MP3020 4th bit (msb)

M2104 G Code S Analog 1st bit (lsb) W256
M2105 G Code S Analog 2nd bit
M2106 G Code S Analog 3rd bit (msb)
M2112 T Number (P number) 1st decade (lsb)
M2113 T Number (P number) 1st decade
M2114 T Number (P number) 1st decade
M2115 T Number (P number) 1st decade (msb) W262
M2116 T Number (P number) 2nd decade (lsb) W264
M2117 T Number (P number) 2nd decade
M2118 T Number (P number) 2nd decade
M2119 T Number (P number) 2nd decade (msb)
M2176 Code operating mode (lsb)
M2177 Code operating mode W272
M2178 Code operating mode
M2179 Code operating mode (msb)
M2186 Code number 84159 entered NC PLC D276
M2192 Markers controllable by MP4310.0, MP4310.1 and NC NC W976
to MP4310.2 to
M2239 W986
M2452 Activate PLC positioning X axis PLC NC M2704
M2453 Activate PLC positioning Y axis PLC NC M2705
M2454 Activate PLC positioning Z axis PLC NC M2706
M2455 Activate PLC positioning 4th axis PLC NC M2707
M2468 Complement PLC positioning X axis NC PLC
M2469 Complement PLC positioning Y axis NC PLC —
M2470 Complement PLC positioning Z axis NC PLC
M2471 Complement PLC positioning 4th axis NC PLC
M2527 Activate spindle orientation PLC NC M2712
M2543 Complement spindle orientation NC PLC —
M2560 BCD numerical values for PLC positioning, tool PLC PLC D528
to number, spindle orientation and Q parameters to
M2589 D544
M2597 Tool number: output mode, 0 = binary, 1 = BCD PLC PLC —
M2598 Transfer of the tool number PLC PLC
M2599 Transfer of the tool number PLC PLC
M2800 Key code PLC PLC W516
to
M2807
M2808 Strobe marker for key code PLC NC M2813
M2809 Activate numerical value transfer from PLC to NC PLC PLC M2713
M2810 Data format of a numerical value in M2560-M2576 PLC PLC —
M2817 Q number (lsb) PLC PLC W516
M2818 Q number (msb) PLC PLC W516
M2819 Activate datum correction PLC NC M2716
M2832 Key code of the pressed inhibited key NC NC W274
to
M2839

M3200 Values from MP4310.3 to MP4310.6 NC NC W 976
to to
M3263 W 968
5.3 Incompatibility
It has not been possible to maintain compatibility in all areas of the PLC programs. This is because
the TNC 355 differs considerably from the TNC 360 both in memory organization and ergonomics.
5.3.1 PLC Macros

The following macro programs are available in the TNC 355 for controlling the toolchanger.
M3264 Convert tool number or pocket number to binary code

M3265 Increment actual value of pocket number
M3266 Decrement actual value of pocket number
M3267 Compare actual and nominal values of pocket number
These macro programs are no longer available in the TNC 360/TNC 335. The following PLC
subroutines can be used in place of the macro programs.
Convert tool number or pocket number to binary code
M2032 to M2039 -> M3024 to M3031

LBL 200 ;M3264 (TNC 355)
L W262 ;T code in binary
B= M3024 ;file in bit area
== K+O
= M3043 ;T code == O
LB M3200 ;low byte from MP4310.3
= B255 ;load MP4310.3
LB M3024
> B255
= M3044 ;Tcode > MP4310.3 1 byte
EM
Increment actual value of pocket number
(M3032 to M3039) = (M3032 to M3039) + 1

LBL 210 ;B265 (TNC 355)
= B255 ;number of mag. pockets
LB M3032 ;actual value
+ K+1 ;increment by 1
B= M3032 ;
<= B255 ;less than or equal to actual value

JPT 211
L K+1 ;load 1 as actual value
B= M3032 ;
EM
Decrement actual value of pocket number
(M3032 to M3039) = (M3032 to M3039) - 1

LBL 220 ;M3266 (TNC 355)
= B255 ;number of mag. pockets
LB M3032 ;actual value
- K+1 ;decrement by 1
B= M3032 ;
JPT 211
L B255 ;load number of mag. pockets
B= M3032 ;as actual value
LBL221
EM
Compare actual and nominal values of pocket number
LBL230 ;M3267 (TNC 355)

LB M3032 ;read actual value from markers
= B250 ;actual value
LB M3024 ;read nominal value from markers
= B252 ;nominal value
LW M3200 ;read reduction and tool max
= W254 ;high byte reduc. byte 254, low byte max. T byte 255
L B250
== B252 ;test actual/nominal for parity
= M3040 ;actual== nominal
JPT 231 ;if actual==nominal then end
L B250 ;actual - nominal=>B248
- B252
= B248
> K+0
JPT 232
L- B248
= B248 ;B248:=Abs(actual - nominal)
LBL232
; Compute reduction
L B255
- B254
<= B248
O[
L B248
<= B254
]
= M3041 ;Reduction reached
; Compute shortest path

L B255 ;Max. tool's
>> K+1 ;DIV 2
= B255 ;Max. tool's DIV 2
L B252 ;nominal value

> B250 ;actual value
A[
L B248 ;Abs (actual - nominal)
<= B255 ;Max. tool's Div 2
]
O[
L B252 ;nominal value
< B250 ;actual value
A[
L B248 ;Abs (actual - nominal)
>= B255 ;Max. tool's Div 2
]
]
= M3042 ;direction marker
LBL231
EM

5.3.2 Non-implemented markers
Marker Function
M2021 Nominal/actual speed difference over ranged
M2024 Touch probe ready
M2188 Checksum error for non-volatile Q parameters
M2288 X axis was moving when program aborted
M2289 Y axis was moving when program aborted
M2290 Z axis was moving when program aborted
M2291 Axis 4 was moving when program aborted
M2510 Deactivate spindle override
M2511 Deactivate feed rate override
M2526 Switch X/Y or Z to 4th axis
M2542 Complement for M2526
M2590 Define the axis to be switched to 4th axis (lsb)
M2591 Define the axis to be switched to 4th axis (msb)
M2592 Tool number from M2560 to M2567
M2593 Go to Hirth grid after NC STOP
M2596 Select central tool file during active program run mode
M2602 Define reference point traverse
M2603 Axis sequence for reference point traverse (lsb)
M2604 Axis sequence for reference point traverse
M2607 Axis sequence for reference point traverse (msb)
M2657 Display a second auxiliary function
M2664 No standstill monitoring X axis
M2665 No standstill monitoring Y axis
M2666 No standstill monitoring Z axis
M2667 No standstill monitoring axis 4
M2820 Update the central tool file
M2821 Strobe for updating the central tool file
M2822 Strobe for % factor for spindle voltage
M2823 Select ramp pairs for S analog
5.3.3 PLC Cycle time

The contouring controls of the TNC 355, TNC 360 and TNC 335 have different PLC cycle times. This
must be remembered when using the timers and counters.
Contouring Control PLC Cycle Time

TNC 355 without 20 ms
extended memory
TNC 355 with 22 ms
extended memory
TNC 360 24 ms
TNC 335 24 ms

Data Interface – Contents 8
1 Introduction 8-3
1.1 Principles of data transfer 8-4
1.1.1 Serial/parallel 8-4
1.1.2 Asynchronous data format 8-5
1.1.3 Checking data 8-7
1.1.4 Data transfer rate 8-8
1.2 Handshaking 8-9
1.2.1 Hardware handshaking 8-9
1.2.2 Software handshaking 8-9
2 TNC data interfaces 8-10

2.1 General 8-10
2.2 RS-232-C/V.24 interface 8-10
2.2.1 Hardware 8-10
2.2.2 Signal levels 8-11
2.2.3 Signal designation 8-11
2.2.4 Pin layouts 8-13
2.3 Data interface functions 8-14
2.3.1 Saving/reading files 8-14
2.3.2 Output to external devices 8-15
2.3.3 Reading in and simultaneously executing programs (DNC operation) 8-15
2.3.4 Communication between TNCs 8-15
2.4 Data transmission protocols 8-15
2.4.1 Standard transmission protocol 8-16
2.4.2 Data transfer with Block Check Character (BCC) 8-17
2.5 Configuration of the interface 8-22
2.5.1 Selection of the interface 8-22
2.5.2 Freely configurable interfaces 8-22
2.6 External programming 8-28
2.7 Interfacing with other equipment 8-28
3 Standard Data Transmission Protocol 8-29

3.1 General information 8-29
3.1.1 Calling the program directory 8-29
3.1.2 Outputting a selected program 8-31
3.1.3 Outputting all programs 8-31
3.1.4 Reading in selected program 8-31
3.1.5 Reading in all programs 8-33
3.1.6 Reading in an offered program 8-34
8/95 TNC 360 8-1

4 Data transfer with BCC 8-35
4.1 General 8-35
4.1.1 Calling a program directory 8-36
4.1.2 Outputting a selected program 8-37
4.1.3 Outputting all programs 8-37
4.1.4 Reading in a selected program 8-38
4.1.5 Reading in all programs 8-39
4.1.6 Reading in an offered program 8-40
5 Data transfer by PLC 8-42

5.1 Configuration of PLC data interface 8-42
6 Error messages 8-43

6.1 TNC error messages 8-43
6.2 HEIDENHAIN peripherals' error codes 8-44
6.3 Data transmission software error messages 8-45
8-2 TNC 360 8/95

1 Introduction
When operating a computer system (PC, Controller), a wide variety of peripherals, such as printers,
external memories (floppy-disk drives; hard disks) or other computer systems, can be used in
conjunction with the Central Processing Unit (CPU).
A data interface makes is possible for the CPU and the peripherals to communicate.
Communication requires facilities for transferring data to the peripherals and of course, physical
connection via a transmission line. Peripheral device control and communication, via the interface, is
generally the responsibility of the computer system. The computer system therefore has to meet
certain requirements.
The interfaces, which primarily consist of the physical links between the computer system and the
peripherals, need appropriate software in order to control the transfer of information between the
individual units. The relationship between hardware and software, which fully defines an interface, is
illustrated by the following diagram:
,QWHUIDFH
Computer Software Hardware Software Peripheral
e.g. PC, e.g. Printer,

Controller external memory
The "hardware" in the diagram covers all the physical components, such as circuit construction, pin
layout, electrical characteristics, etc. The "software" includes, for example, the drivers for the output
modules and is associated with both the operating software of the computer system and the
peripherals.
Due to the wide variety of computers, controllers and peripherals, standard interfaces have been
introduced, which, in an ideal situation, enable extremely varied devices to be connected to each
other.
Such standards include, for example, the RS-232-C/V.24 interface, which is described in detail later.
8/95 TNC 360 1 Introduction 8-3

1.1 Principles of data transfer
Since all information is conveyed as data, one first needs to become familiar with a few of the
principles of data transfer. The term "Data" is used to describe all of the information which the
computer is capable of collecting and processing.
1.1.1 Serial/parallel
Data can be transmitted in either serial or parallel format.
Basically, data is coded in the computer system, e.g. as bytes (8 bits) and supplied to the interface in
parallel.
In the case of serial data transmission, the parallel information from the computer system has to be
converted into a serial data-flow by using an USART (Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter).
The receiver accepts the serial data-flow and converts it back again into parallel information.
Sender Empfänger
Transmitter Receiver
Speicher Schnittstellen-Puffer Schnittstellen-Puffer Speicher
Memory Interface buffer Interface buffer Memory
0 MSB 0 0 MSB 0
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
1 LSB 1 1 LSB 1
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1
Übertragungsstrecke
Transmission path
A parallel interface, on the other hand, does not need a USART: just a line driver. Typically, the
connection between the computer system and a peripheral consists of a 36-way ribbon cable. Its
maximum length is generally about 3 meters.
8-4 TNC 360 1 Introduction 8/95

Sender Empfänger
Speicher Schnittstellen-Puffer Schnittstellen-Puffer Speicher
Memory Interface buffer Interface buffer Memory
0 MSB 0 0 0 MSB 0
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
1 LSB 1 1 1 LSB 1
Transmission path
One obvious advantage of serial data transmission becomes apparent when long distances have to
be covered. With parallel transmission, the cost of the cable increases with every additional bit
which has to be transmitted. In addition, the effect of interference on adjacent wires from sharp
signal edges and electrical coupling is far greater over long lines than it is with serial transmission
which is relatively slower and uses fewer wires.
The comparatively slow speed of serial data transmission is, at the same time, its greatest
drawback. Since the individual bits are sent along the line one after the other and each transfer takes
a specified time, it takes far longer to send a binary word to the receiver than it would if conveyed by
parallel transmission. As it happens, most peripheral devices work fairly slowly and cannot in fact
cope with data transmitted at high speed. Serial data transmission is generally adequate for devices
such as external memories or mechanical printers, especially as such devices have a large internal
buffer for incoming characters.
1.1.2 Asynchronous data format

In order for communication to be established between two devices involved in data interchange,
they have to use a common language.
In the field of computer engineering, this language consists of digital coding of letters, figures and
control characters.
One of the most common codes is the ASCII code (American Standard Code for Information
Interchange) which codes all characters with seven bits.
In all, it is possible to code 27 = 128 characters. According to the ASCII code, the control character
"Line Feed" or <LF> is coded with the following combination of bits:
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 = 10 dec = 0A hex
MSB LSB

The letter 'z' is represented by the following combination of bits:
1 1 1 1 0 1 0 = 122 dec = 7A hex

MSB LSB
i.e. when the letter "z" is transmitted via a serial interface, the appropriate bits are sent one after the
other. The ASCII code is shown in full in the Appendix.
Proper data transmission requires the device concerned to interpret incoming data correctly and, in
particular, to determine the start of a transmission. For this purpose, there is a synchronization
process which ensures that the receiver detects the first bit of a character correctly. With an
asynchronous data format, a start bit is sent before each data word and the word is then ended by
one or two stop bits. One feature of this data format is that, starting from a quiescent state,
transmission of a data word can begin at any time.
A quiescent state exists before switch-on and is reverted to after each transmission. Before a data
bit can be transmitted this has to be communicated to the receiver. Otherwise, if the first bit of the
data word has the same value as the quiescent state, the receiver will not notice any difference
from the quiescent state.
A so-called "start bit" is used for this purpose:
For the duration of a single bit, the transmitter emits a logic value which clearly differs from the
quiescent state and which gives the receiver an opportunity to prepare its polling logic to read in the
data bit. After the start bit has been sent, the data word is transmitted, bit by bit, starting with the
LSB (Least Significant Bit). After the MSB (Most Significant Bit) of the data word, a so-called "parity
bit" is inserted (see Section 1.1.3 "Checking data").
The parity bit is followed by one or two stop bits. These final stop bits ensure that the receiver has
enough time to recognize the transmitter again before the start of the next character.
Synchronization is repeated before each character.
The synchronization is repeated before every word and is valid for one character frame.
Character frame
Quiescent state Quiescent stat
Start 1st Bit2nd Bit3 rd Bit4th Bit5th Bit6th Bit7th BitParity 1 or 2

bit LSB MSB bit stop bits
Data bits

1.1.3 Checking data
With an asynchronous character frame, transmission errors can be detected by using a parity-check
procedure. A parity bit is sent in addition to the data bits. The evaluation of this bit enables the
receiver to check the parity of received data.
The parity bit can take three different forms; the same form of parity must be set at both interfaces.
– No parity check
Error detection is dispensed with.
– Even parity
The transmitter counts bits with a value of 1. If the number is odd, the parity bit is set to 1,
otherwise it is cleared to 0. The sum of the set data bits and the parity bit is therefore always even.
Upon receiving a word, the receiver counts all of the set bits, including the parity bit. If this count
yields an odd number, there is a transmission error and the data word must be repeated, or an error
message will be displayed.
– Odd parity
In this case, the parity bit is so chosen by the transmitter that the total number of all the set bits is
odd. In this case, an error will be detected if the receiver observes an even number of set bits in its
evaluation.
Example:
Parity bit
1 Even parity
Letter: "z" 1111010
0 Odd parity

1.1.4 Data transfer rate
The data transfer rate of an interface is given in 'baud' and indicates the number of bits of data
transmitted in one second.
[ Bits]
1 baud = 1
Common baud rates are:

110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19 200 and 38 400 baud.
The time taken to transmit one bit (tB) can be calculated from the baud rate:
"1"
"0"
t
tB
1
tB =
bits
Baud rate[ ]
s
For example, a baud rate of 19,200 baud will have a bit duration of tB = 52.083 µs.
The number of characters transmitted per second can be calculated from the baud rate and the
transmission format:
bits
Baud rate[ ]
s
Characters per second =
Number of bits per character
Example:
With a transmission format of seven data bits, one start bit, two stop bits and a data transfer rate of
exactly 300 baud:
300 Baud
= 30 characters per second
10 bits
will be transmitted.

1.2 Handshaking
A "handshake" procedure is often used in connection with interfaces. This means that two devices
are, as it were, working "hand in hand" in order to control data transfer. A distinction is drawn
between "software handshaking" and "hardware handshaking".
Either hardware or software handshaking can be chosen for communication between two units.
1.2.1 Hardware handshaking

With this procedure, control of data transfer is executed by electrical signals. Important information,
such as "Clear To send" (CTS), "Clear to receive", "Start transmission" and "Stop transmission", is
signaled by the hardware.
For example, when a computer character is to be transmitted, the CTS signal line (see Section 2.2
"RS-232-C/V.24 interface") is checked to see whether it is active (ON). If it is, the character is
transmitted. Otherwise the computer will delay transmission until the CTS line is switched to active.
Hardware handshaking requires, as a minimum, two data lines - TxD and RxD, the RTS control line
and the CTS signal line and a ground connection.
1.2.2 Software handshaking

With software handshake, control of data transfer is achieved by appropriate control characters
transmitted via the data line. One such handshake is the XON/XOFF method, which is in widespread
use on the RS-232-C/V.24 interface. The meaning "XON" is assigned to an ASCII code control
character (DC1) and the meaning "XOFF" to another (DC3). Before transmitting a character, the
computer checks whether the receiving unit is transmitting the XOFF character. If it is, it delays
transmission until it receives the character XON, indicating that the connected unit is ready to
receive further characters.
Apart from the data lines (TxD, RxD), and ground, no other lines are needed for software
handshaking.

2 TNC data interfaces
2.1 General
The TNC 360 has a data interface, the RS-232-C/V.24. The HEIDENHAIN FE 401 floppy disk unit, ME
101 magnetic tape unit and external devices with appropriate data interfaces (computers, printers,
readers, punches) can be connected via the RS-232-C/V.24 interface.
Two transmission protocols are available for data transfer:
– Standard data transmission protocol

– Data transfer with Block Check Character (BCC)
The data format and control characters concerned are freely configurable within the framework of
this protocol.
2.2 RS-232-C/V.24 interface

RS-232-C is the designation of a serial interface based on the EIA standard of the same name and is
usable for transmission rates up to 19 200 bits/sec. Data transfer is executed asynchronously, with a
start bit before each character and one or two stop bits after each character. The interface is
designed for transmission distances of up to 20 meters.
The RS-232-C interface has been adopted with slight modifications and has been introduced into
Europe as the V.24 interface. The relevant German standard is DIN 66020.
2.2.1 Hardware
The physical connection between two RS-232-C/V.24 interfaces is an asymmetrical line, i.e. the
common ground connection between transmitter and receiver is used as a return wire.
Physical connections:
Sender Empfänger
TxD RxD
RxD TxD
Transmission path
8-10 TNC 360 2 TNC data interfaces 8/95

2.2.2 Signal levels
The RS-232-C/V.24 interface must differentiate between two different signal lines and their levels.
Data lines:
The data signals are defined as being logic "1" (MARK) over the range -3V to -15V and as logic "0"
(SPACE) over the range +3V to +15V.
Control and signal lines:

These signals are defined as being ON (High) over the range +3V to +15V and as OFF (Low) over the
range from -3V to -15V.
For all of the signals, the voltage range from -3V to +3V is not defined as a logic level and can
therefore not be evaluated.
U [V] Datensignale Steuer- und Meldesignal

Data signals Control and message signal
+ 15
"0" HIGH
SPACE ON
+ 13
0
– 13
"1" LOW
MARK OFF
– 15
2.2.3 Signal designation

The RS-232-C/V.24 interface distinguishes between data lines, control/signal lines and the earth
conductor.
Data lines:
TxD Transmitted data

RxD Received data
8/95 TNC 360 2 TNC data interfaces 8-11

Control/signal lines:
DCD (Data Carrier Detect): Received signal level. The DCD signal indicates
to the transmitter that the information received
at the receiver lies within the defined level.
The DCD signal (pin 8) is not used by the TNC,

i.e. the TNC delivers no signal from pin 8.
DTR (Data Terminal Ready): This signal shows that the TNC is ready for service
(e.g. receiving buffer full => DTR = Low).
DSR (Data Set Ready): Peripheral ready for service.
RTS (Request to Send): Hardware handshake:

Output of the receiving unit
CTS (Clear to Send): Hardware handshake:

Output of the transmitting unit
Earth conductor (cables for power supply):
Chassis GND: Casing connection

Signal GND: 0-Volt lines for all signals
Chassis GND
Transmitted data TxD
Received data RxD
Switch on transmission unit RTS
Transmission readiness CTS
Operational readiness DSR
Received signal level DCD
Terminal unit ready for service DTR
Signal ground GND
Peripheral TNC

2.2.4 Pin layouts
The differences between the pin layouts of the logic unit and the adapter block of the TNC should be
noted! The corresponding pin layouts are shown below (see the Chapter "Mounting and electrical
installation").
V.24-Adapter-Block
LE
RS-232-C Adapter block
• • •ws/br •
Chassis GND 1 1 • 1 1 WH/BN •
ge
•ws/br
WH/BN 1 1 GND Chassis
TXD 2 2 2 2 GN 2 2 RXD
gn YL
RXD 3 3 3 3 3 3 TXD
rs GY
RTS 4 4 4 4 4 4 CTS
gr PK
CTS 5 5 5 5 5 5 RTS
br BL
DSR 6 6 6 6 6 6 DTR
rt RD
Signal GND 7 7 7 7 7 7 GND Signal
8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19
bl BN
DTR 20 20 20 20 20 20 DSR
Note: The LE and adapter block are connected with crossed lines.
A 9-pin plug on a PC should have the following pin layout:
Pin Allocation
1 Do not use
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 Do not use

2.3 Data interface functions
The data interfaces on the TNC can be used to save data and files and read them back in again, to
output programs to external devices (e.g. printers), to read in programs and simultaneously execute
them and to carry out data transfer (communication) between TNCs.
2.3.1 Saving/reading files

The following table lists all the files which can be saved to external memory (floppy disk unit,
magnetic tape unit and PC) and can be read back in from them.
File Identification
HEIDENHAIN-dialog NC program H
ISO NC program D
Machine parameters M
Correction table S
PLC program P
After the appropriate key numbers for the PLC, the machine parameters and the correction table
have been entered, these files can be written-to or read-from via the data interfaces.
Data transfer is initiated with the EXT key as usual.
Current values of Q parameters, PLC error messages and dialogs can also be outputted via the two
interfaces (NC program: FN 15: PRINT).
The magnetic tape unit is only suitable as an external data carrier to a limited extent, because only
one file can be stored per cassette side. However, this file can contain several programs.
Using the floppy disk unit, up to 256 programs (approximately 25,000 program blocks) can be
stored. This represents a storage capacity of approximately 790 kilobytes.
When transmitting and receiving a file the appropriate code file is outputted and read in again
complete with a Block Check Character (BCC).
If the file is stored in an external computer using HEIDENHAIN's TNC.EXE data transfer software, a
new file extension is generated. This extension consists of the code and the letters NC.
Example:
If a ISO program is stored, it is given the file extension *.DNC.

2.3.2 Output to external devices
Any external device, e.g. computers, printers, readers and punches, can be addressed via the
interface. For this purpose, the TNC has a freely configurable interface mode (EXT) which, within
certain limits, permits any setting of the data format and control characters of the required data
transmission protocol.
The setting selected at the external devices must of course match the TNC. On printers, this is done
by setting the DIP-switches or adjusting the transmission parameters.
If data transfer to a computer is desired, appropriate data-transfer software must be installed. To

help in this, HEIDENHAIN offer their TNC.EXE data transfer software, which permits transfer
between TNC and a PC using a fixed transmission protocol.
2.3.3 Reading in and simultaneously executing programs (DNC

operation)
In PROGRAM RUN mode, machine programs can be transmitted with "Block transfer" from an
external memory via the serial data interface and be executed simultaneously (DNC operation). This
allows machine programs which exceed the storage capacity of the control unit to be executed.
After the program has started, executed blocks are erased and further blocks are continuously called
from the external memory.
If the program blocks are read into the TNC faster than they can be executed, the entire NC memory
is initially fully loaded. If it is full, transfer is suspended until a storage space of one NC block is
vacated by execution. Only then is transfer resumed, until once again the memory is filled.
For DNC operation the data transfer protocol must be set with Block Check Character BCC (data
checking).
2.3.4 Communication between TNCs

For certain applications, it is necessary for TNCs to be able to exchange data or to communicate
with each other. This is made possible by the RS-232-C/V.24 interface.
The simplest form of data exchange is the transfer of files (e.g. NC programs) from one TNC to
another. To do this, the same transmission format (ME mode) must be set at both control units and
transfer started. It must be ensured that the receiving control unit is the first to start.
For the application "Positioning module", i.e. further NC axes are required, the positioning values
have to be transmitted from the master logic unit to the slave logic unit. On this basis, data can be
transferred to another TNC via the data interface, using PLC modules at the PLC level (see Section 5
"Data transfer by PLC").
2.4 Data transmission protocols

The TNC enables data and files to be transferred using two different protocols (which can be
selected via the interface setup or the machine parameters).

These transmission protocols can be selected in three different operating modes, as follows:
– ME Standard transmission protocol to match HEIDENHAIN

magnetic tape unit (7 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit)
Data transmission rate: 2400 baud
– FE Transmission with Block Check Character and with fixed control
characters (7 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit)
Freely configurable baud rate
– EXT Freely configurable operating modes: data format, transmission
protocol and control characters can be freely set via machine
parameters. Freely configurable baud rate.
The following applies to data transmission protocols:
– If a file which is read in is already stored in the TNC, is displays the message
"ERASE=ENT / OVERREAD=NOENT".
In this case the TNC aborts transmission with the appropriate handshake and does not continue
transfer until after acknowledgment.
In the event of an attempt to erase write-protected files, the error message "PROTECTED PGM" is
displayed and the dialog "OVERREAD=ENT/END=NOENT". In this case, either the next file can be
read in or the transfer can be aborted.
– If a file has been read out and the data transfer menu has been terminated with the END key,
the TNC outputs characters <ETX> and <EOT> (or ASCII characters according to setting in
MP5010 in operating modes EXT).
– If a transmission is terminated with the END-key, the error message "PROGRAM INCOMPLETE" is
issued.
2.4.1 Standard transmission protocol

With this protocol, first of all the TNC transmits the character <NUL> exactly 50 times. This is
followed by the individual program blocks, which each end with the characters <CR> and <LF>.
These blocks are transmitted in order, but they are not error checked. If the receiver's data buffer is
full, the receiver has two alternatives for stopping and recommencing transmission:
– Software handshake - Stopping transfer by sending character <DC3> (XOFF), continuing transfer
by sending character <DC1> (XON).
– Hardware handshake - By putting appropriate voltage level on the RTS and CTS control and signal
lines of the RS-232-C/V.24 interface.

Example: protocol for dialog program:
<NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL>.. 50 times
0 BEGIN PGM 1 MM<CR><LF> 1st program block
1 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+3<CR><LF> 2nd program block
.
.
.
26 END PGM 1 MM <CR><LF> Program end
<ETX><EOT> Close data transfer menu
Example of software handshake:
Peripheral unit Transmission path TNC
.
.
.
12 Z+Z FMAX <CR> <LF>
Receiving buffer full
<DC3>
Receiving buffer again

ready to accept data
<DC1>
13 Z10 F100 M03 <CR> <LF>

.
.
.
Hardware handshake (see Section "Freely configurable interfaces").
2.4.2 Data transfer with Block Check Character (BCC)

This protocol, specific to HEIDENHAIN, works with different control characters and with additional
data checking when transmitting.
In the freely configurable operating modes (EXT), the following control characters - <SOH>,
<ETB>, <STX>, <ACK>, <NAK>, <ETX>, <EOT> - can be defined as arbitrary ASCII characters
(see Section "Freely configurable interfaces").

When a file is transferred, the first block, called the "header", is sent. It consists of the following
characters:
<SOH>"H" "Name" "M" <ETB>BCC<DC1>
<SOH> (Start of Header): This character indicates the start of the header.
The header contains 'H' - the code for the program (see Section "Saving/reading files"), 'Name' - the
program name and 'M' - the transmission mode(E=input/A=output).
This header ends with character <ETB>, ending a data transfer block.
The subsequent BCC (Block Check Character) provides additional confidence.
In addition to the parity check of the individual characters (see Section "Checking data"), a parity
check is carried out on a complete transmitted block. The BCC always supplements the individual
bits of the transmitted characters of a data transfer block to give even parity.
Example for formation of BCC:
Character Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

SOH 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
H 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
5 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
E 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
ETB 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
BCC 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
In this example, the HEIDENHAIN dialog (code 'H') has been used to write program '15' which is
read in via the data interface ('E'). A parity bit is also formed for the BCC (with even parity, the parity
bit of the BCC in this example is given a value '1').
The character <DC1> is sent after the BCC. This character (XON) is needed for a few devices,
explicitly to demand a reply from them in order to start transfer again.
At the end of each block, a check is conducted to see whether the block has been correctly
transferred. To do this, the receiver forms a BCC from the received block and compares it with the
received BCC. If the received and calculated BCCs are identical, the receiver sends character
<ACK> (= positive ACKnowledgment), i.e. the data block has been transferred without error.

If the two BCCs are not identical, the receiver sends character <NAK> (= Not AcKnowledged), i.e.
the data block has been incorrectly transferred and the same block must be sent again. This process
is repeated up to three times. An error message ("TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT N") is
displayed, and transfer is aborted.
If, however, this header is acknowledged with <ACK>, the first data block can be transmitted:
<STX>0 BEGIN PGM 1 MM <ETB> BCC <DC1>.
The start of a data block is always indicated by control character <STX>. The other control
characters in this block are identical to the control characters of the header.
If the block is acknowledged with <ACK>, the next program block is sent. In the event of a <NAK>,
the same block must be repeated, and so on...
If the last program block has been sent successfully (acknowledged with <ACK>), transmission
ends with characters <ETX> (End of Text) and <EOT> (End of Transmission).
Table of control characters:

Character Meaning Description
SOH Start of Header SOH indicates the start of the
transfer of the data header. The
header is a sequence of characters
which contains the program number
and information concerning the type
of program and transmission mode.
STX Start of Text STX indicates the start of the
program block.
ETB End of Text Block ETB ends a data transfer block. The
character following ETB is used for
data checking (BCC).
DC1 Start data transfer (XON) DC1 starts data transfer after a stop.
DC3 Stop data transfer (XOFF) DC3 stops data transfer.
ETX End of Text ETX is sent at the end of the
program.
EOT End of Transmission EOT ends data transmission and
produces the quiescent state. This
character is sent by the TNC at the
end of program input, and as an error
to external devices
ACK ACKnowledged ACK is sent by receiver when a data
block has transferred without error.
NAK Not AcKnowledged NAK is sent by the receiver when a
data block has transferred
incorrectly. The transmitter must
transmit the data block again.

Example:
A pallet file with the name "8455" is to be sent to a peripheral unit (e.g. FE 401).
FE 401 Transmission path TNC

<SOH> <L> PPP <A> <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
.
.
. <STX> "1st line" <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK> .
.
.
.
.
.
<STX> "10th line" <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<NAK>
<ACK>
<ACK> .
.
.
.
. .
. .
. <STX> "last line" <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ETX> <EOT>

The software handshake is very easy to achieve when transmitting with a BCC. The receiver sends
neither a positive (<ACK>) nor a negative acknowledgment (<NAK>), and the transmitter waits until
it receives one of these characters. When the buffer in the receiver is again capable of accepting
data, it again sends an <ACK> and the transmitter continues its data transmission.
It is also possible, however, to conduct the software handshake with control characters <DC1> and
<DC3>. If hardware handshake (EXT) has been selected, it is identical to standard data transfer and
to data transfer with a BCC (see Section "Freely configurable interfaces").

2.5 Configuration of the interface
2.5.1 Selection of the interface

The following settings can be selected with the appropriate data format and the data transmission
protocol.
In addition to the three freely configurable operating modes EXT, there are two fixed modes (ME
and FE). The FE mode must be set if the HEIDENHAIN floppy disk unit or an external computer
using the TNC.EXE transmission software is connected. In this mode, the transmission protocol with
Block Check Character is rigidly defined.
The ME operating mode matches the HEIDENHAIN ME 101/ME 102 magnetic tape unit and must
be selected if this is to be connected.
In this mode, the standard transmission protocol is set.
However, there is one important difference:
The character <EOT> is never sent because this character cannot be processed by the magnetic
tape unit.
2.5.2 Freely configurable interfaces

The operating mode EXT is freely configurable via the machine parameters.
The data format and the type of handshake are set in the MP 5020.
Data bits
Bit 0 can be set to determine whether transmission is to be with 7 or 8 data bits. Transmission with
7 bits is normally used, but 8 bits are needed, especially for printer interfacing.
BCC
If calculation of the BCC produces a number less than $20 (i.e. a control character) then a "Space"
character ($20) is sent in addition immediately before <ETB>. The BCC will consequently always be
greater than $20 and cannot therefore be recognized as a control character.

Hardware handshaking
Bit 2 can be set to determine whether the TNC stops transfer from an external device by using RTS.
– Data output TNC -> EXT

When the receiving buffer is full, the external device resets the RTS signal. The TNC thereby
detects that the peripheral unit receiving buffer is full because of the CTS input.
TNC EXT
+ +
RTS CTS
– –
Receiving
+ buffer full +
CTS RTS
– –
Data Data Data
+ +
TxD RxD
– –
Start
+ +
RxD TxD
– –
+ Positive voltage level

– Negative voltage level
– Data input EXT -> TNC

When the receiving buffer is full, the TNC removes the RTS signal, which is detected by the
peripheral device at its CTS input.
TNC EXT
Receiving
+ buffer full +
RTS CTS
– –
+ +
CTS RTS
– –
+ +
TxD RxD
– –
+ +
RxD TxD
– –
Start
+ Positive voltage level

– negative voltage level
The DTR and DSR signals from the TNC indicate the operational status of the TNC and peripheral
(these cannot be set via the machine parameters).

DTR: Polled by peripheral; it is logic "1" if TNC is ready for service.
DSR: Polled by TNC.
LOW level => ext. data input/output not ready.
HIGH level => ext. data input/output ready.
Software handshaking
Bit 3 determines whether the TNC stops transfer from an external device with control character
<DC3>. Transfer is resumed with character <DC1>.
If transfer is stopped with character <DC3>, up to 12 characters can still be stored. The remaining
incoming characters are lost. Software handshake is normally recommended when interfaces are
connected to an external device.
The following pin layout is possible for the external device:
Peripheriegerät V.24-Adapter-Block LE
Peripheral unit RS-232-C Adapter block
• • • • •ws/br •
GND 1 1 • • 1 1 • 1 1 WH/BN • •ws/br
WH/BN 1 1 GND Chassis
ge GN
TXD 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 RXD
gn Yl
RXD 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 TXD
rs GY
RTS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 CTS
gr PK
CTS 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 RTS
br BL
DSR 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 DTR
rt RD
GND 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 GND Signal ground
8 8 • 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
bl BN
DTR 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 DSR
A HEIDENHAIN standard cable, ref. 242 869, is recommended.
If the TNC is transmitting data, it reacts both to hardware and software handshakes, regardless of
the setting in the MP5020.
If the TNC is receiving data, and no transmission stop is set in the MP5020, the TNC stops the
peripheral unit with the software handshake.
If transmission stop by both RTS and by DC3 is active, the TNC stops transfer with the hardware
handshake.
Character parity
Bits 4 and 5 determine the type of parity check (see Section "Checking data").
Stop bits
Bits 6 and 7 determine the number of stop bits sent at the end of a character.

MP 5020 Operating mode EXT: Interface configuration
Bit 07 or 8 data bits

+0 = 7 data bits
+1 = 8 data bits
Bit 1Block check character
+0 = any BCC
+2 = BCC not control character
Bit 2Transmission stop by RTS
+0 = not active
+4 = active
Bit 3Transmission stop by DC3
+0 = not active
+8 = active
Bit 4Character parity
+0 = even
+16 = uneven
Bit 5Character parity
+0 = not desired
+ 32 = desired
Bit 6/7 Stop bits
Bit 6 Bit 7
+0 = 1 1/2 stop bits Bit 0 0
+64 = 2 stop bits Bit Bit 1 0
+128 = 1 stop bit Bit Bit 0 1
+192 = 1 stop bit Bit Bit 1 1
For operating modes EXT, MP5030 defines the transmission protocol.
MP5030.0 Operating mode EXT: Data transfer protocol

Input: 0 or 1
0 = "Standard data transfer"

1 = "Transfer blockwise"

For the control characters for the data transmission protocols (<SOH> <ETB>, <STX>, <ETX>,
<EOT>, <ACK> <NAK>), any other ASCII characters can be chosen using the following machine
parameters (for table of ASCII characters, see Appendix). If these machine parameters are loaded
with a zero, the standard settings given in brackets are active (as for FE operation).
Two control characters are encoded in one machine parameter.
The input is as follows:
Input value Decimal code (1st control character) + 256 * Decimal code (2nd control character)
MP5010 Control characters for data transmission protocol
MP5010.0 1st control character for End of Text (ETX)

2nd control character for Start of Text (STX)
MP5010.3 1st control character for End of Transmission Block (ETB)

2nd control character for Start of Heading (SOH)
MP5010.4 1st control character for "Acknowledgment of reception" (ACK)

2nd control character for Start of Heading (SOH)
MP5010.5 Control character for "End of Transmission" (EOT)

Example: The following ASCII characters are to be transmitted for start and end of text:
End of text: ? = 63 dec
Start of text: ! = 33 dec
Input:
MP5010.0 = 63 + 256 * 33 = 8511
When selecting ASCII characters, it must be ensured that the control characters are not arbitrarily
mixed and that no figures or letters which occur in the transferred text are used.
For the file type, when transferring with Block Check Characters (see Section 2.3.1 "Saving/reading
files"), an ASCII character must be entered for the file which is being output or input. With an input
value of zero, the TNC automatically enters the correct type of file in the file header.

The ASCII characters for input and output identification can also be freely defined.
MP5010.1 1st ASCII character for data file during data input
2nd ASCII character for input identification (E)
MP5010.2 1st ASCII character for file type during data output
2nd ASCII character for output identification (A)
Example: If an ISO program should be output in the EXT mode, then:

MP5010.2 = 68
(or MP5010.2 = 0)

2.6 External programming
In the case of external programming and subsequent transfer, attention should be paid to the
following:
– <CR><LF> or <LF> must be programmed at the start of the program and after each program
block
– After the end-of-program block <CR> <LF> and, in addition, the end-of-text control character must
be programmed.
– Blank characters between the individual words can be omitted in NC programs (HEIDENHAIN
dialog).
– When reading in DIN blocks, '*' is not needed at the end of the block
– Comments are separated from the NC block by a semicolon ';'
– Comments are stored only in PLC programs
– Comments located in front of the program are not stored
– Block numbers do not need to be programmed - they are generated by the TNC (only for dialog
programming)
2.7 Interfacing with other equipment

Any other external devices can be interfaced with the TNC by using configurable operating modes
EXT. For this purpose, machine parameters 5020 to 5030 permit relatively free adjustment of the
data format, the data transmission protocol and the control characters.
Consider the example of interfacing EXT with a printer using a serial interface (Example: NEC
P7PLUS).
The following setting is selected at the printer itself (see the Operating Manual of the printer
concerned):
– Serial interface
– Data bits
– Even character parity
– XON/XOFF protocol (software handshake)
– 9600 baud
The following settings (EXT) are made at the TNC:
MP5020 = 169 8 data bits (+1)

Any BCC character (+0)
Transfer stop by RTS not active (+0)
Transfer stop by DC3 active (+8)
Character parity even (+0)
Character parity wanted (+32)
1 stop bit (+128)
MP5030 = 0 Standard data transfer
In the TNC, the EXT operating mode must still be assigned to the RS-232 interface and the baud rate
set to 9600 (see the TNC 360 User's Manual).

3 Standard Data Transmission Protocol
3.1 General information

This protocol is set as standard in operating mode ME and can also be optionally selected for
operating modes EXT via the machine parameters. In the following, the control characters which are
sent and received with this protocol are listed for the various transmission alternatives. When
outputting a file, the <NUL> character is sent exactly 50 times at the start of the file. When reading
in, however, the control unit ignores this character. Therefore it is of no importance how often the
peripheral unit sends the <NUL> character before the file.
If, however, ME mode is set instead of EXT, attention must be paid to the following:
All the programs in a file which end with the end-of-text character <ETX> are stored in the magnetic
tape unit ME. The ME transmits this file with all the programs to the control unit. The TNC then
selects the appropriate program and stores it.
A further important difference between EXT mode in the standard protocol and ME mode is that the
<EOT> character is never sent in ME mode because the magnetic tape unit is incapable of
processing this character.
In this protocol, if an error is to be signaled to the TNC, the following sequence of instructions must
be sent:
<ESC> <1> 'ERROR NUMBER'
Listed below are the transmission protocols for the various alternatives for data output and input.
EXT mode is set:
– Control character for "End of Text" - <ETX>

– Control character for "End of Transmission" - <EOT>
– Software handshake
3.1.1 Calling the program directory

Using the menu item "Program Directory", the list of file names can be requested from an external
memory and displayed in the TNC.
If the external directory is requested, the TNC sends control character <DC1>.
If the request is immediately interrupted with the END key, the TNC sends characters <ETX><EOT>
and no directory is read in.
If the request is not interrupted, the peripheral unit sends all of the external programs in order. Their
names are then shown in the TNC.
8/95 TNC 360 3 Standard Data Transmission Protocol 8-29

<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>

1st line of file <CR> <LF>
.
1st file .
.
Last line of file <CR> <LF>

<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>
. .
2nd file .
.
.
.
.
.
<DC1>
.
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>
1st line of file <CR><LF>
Last .
file .
.
<ETX>
<EOT>
8-30 TNC 360 3 Standard Data Transmission Protocol 8/95

3.1.2 Outputting a selected program
The TNC outputs all of the program lines in order. The peripheral unit can stop transmission with
character <DC3> and start it again with character <DC1>.

<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>. . .
. .
. .
. . 5th line of file <CR> <LF>
<DC3>
<DC1>
6th line of file <CR> <LF>
.
.
.
3.1.3 Outputting all programs

The procedure is similar to the protocol described in Section 3.1.2 "Outputting a selected program".
The TNC arranges all the programs in order and transmits them. No control character is sent
between the individual files.
3.1.4 Reading in selected program

If a file is read in from a peripheral unit (e.g. a PC), the corresponding name must be indicated in the
TNC and the TNC be started first, i.e. the TNC outputs the character <DC1>. Transmission of the file
concerned is then initiated at the peripheral unit.
When the entire file has been transferred, the TNC sends character <EOT>.

<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>

. .
. .
. .
Last line of file <CR> <LF> <ETX>
<EOT>
In this transfer method, the TNC can stop transmission with <DC3> and continue it with <DC1>.
If the file name in the first line of the file and the name indicated in the TNC are not identical, the
TNC reads each block in and searches for the file name concerned.
If the END PGM-block has been read in, and the selected name is not known, the TNC remains
static without an error message, and transfer must be terminated with the END key.
Example: Reading in program 100.H.

100.H "START"
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL>
1st line PGM100 <CR> <LF>
. .
. .
. .
Last line PGM 100 <CR> <LF> <ETX>
<EOT>
If, in this case, the last PGM-block ends without the <ETX> character, transfer is terminated
without an error message but the data is not stored. This means that a program on the data
medium with incorrect program name will be overlooked.

3.1.5 Reading in all programs
If both the peripheral unit and the TNC have been started, the following protocol is followed:

<DC1>
<NUL>
Last line of file 1 <CR .
.
1st line of file 1 <CR> <LF .
<DC1>
<NUL>
1st line of file 2 <CR .
.
.
Last line of file 2 <CR
<DC1>
<NUL>
1st line of last file <CR
.
.
Last line of last file <CR> <L .
<EOT>
If several programs are gathered together in a file which ends with <ETX> then these programs are
read in without being requested by <DC1>.
Data read-in does not stop until a program has ended with <ETX>.

3.1.6 Reading in an offered program
After commencement of transfer, the peripheral unit sends the first program module until the
receiving buffer of the TNC is full. The TNC then stops transmission with <DC3> and awaits
acknowledgment from the user. If the file is to be transferred, the TNC sends <DC1> and the
program is read in and stored. Otherwise the file is in fact read in but not stored. If hardware
handshaking is set, transfer by using the RTS signal is stopped and restarted.

<DC1>
<NUL>
1st line of file 1 <CR
<DC3> Polling:
<DC1> Read in
Yes / No
2nd line of file 1 <CR

.
.
. .
.
.
Last line of file 1 <CR> <L
.
.
. <DC1>
<NUL>
.
. .
.
.
.
Last line of last file <CR> <L
<EOT>

4 Data transfer with BCC
4.1 General
HEIDENHAIN TNCs, as well as allowing data transfer with the standard data transmission protocol,
also allow data transfer with a Block Check Character (BCC).
This protocol is set for the following modes:
- FE mode
- EXT mode (choice)
The data transmission protocols are identical in these modes.
In the following, the transmission protocols are listed for the various file input and output
possibilities. FE mode is set.
If an error occurs at a peripheral device, the following block must be sent to the TNC.
<SOH>"Error text"<ETB>BCC
<SOH> "Error" <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK> <EOT>
The received error message is displayed in the TNC, but can be acknowledged and erased with the
CE key.
8/95 TNC 360 4 Data transfer with BCC 8-35

4.1.1 Calling a program directory
If the "Program Directory" menu item is selected, the TNC outputs a header without a program
name. The peripheral then starts to output the files to the TNC, but, after the first file block has been
sent, the TNC immediately requests the next file.
<SOH> <N> <E> <ETB> BCC <DC
<ACK>
<STX> Name 1 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ACK>
<STX> Name 2 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
.
. .
. .
.
<STX> Last name <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ETX>
<EOT>
The program names read in are displayed in the TNC.
8-36 TNC 360 4 Data transfer with BCC 8/95

4.1.2 Outputting a selected program
The following protocol is followed:
<SOH> <N> Name <A> <ETB> BCC <D
<ACK>
<STX> 1st line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1

.
. .
. .
.
<ACK>
. <STX> Last line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1
.
.
<ACK>
<ETX> <EOT>
The program name may contain up to eight characters.
4.1.3 Outputting all programs

The files are output in order, as in Section 4.1.2 "Outputting a selected program". Control characters
<ETX><EOT> are sent to the peripheral device between files.

4.1.4 Reading in a selected program
If a file is to be read in from an external memory, the TNC sends a header with the file name
concerned, whereupon the peripheral sends the file.
<SOH> <N> Name <E> <ETB> BCC <D
<ACK>
<STX> 1st line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
.
.
. .
.
.
<STX> Last line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ETX>
<EOT>

4.1.5 Reading in all programs
In this case the TNC sends a header without a program name, and the peripheral unit sends the first
file. The TNC again outputs a header without a program name, the next program is sent and so on.
<SOH> <H> <E> <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<STX> 1st line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
. <ACK>
.
.
.
.
<STX> Last line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1> .
<ACK>
<ACK>
.
. .
. .
.
<STX> Last line of last file <ETB>
BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ETX>
<EOT>
If the control is set to ISO programming, the central tool file (if activated via machine parameters)
will also be read in.

4.1.6 Reading in an offered program
In this mode, the TNC first of all sends a header without a program name. The peripheral unit then
starts data transfer, until it is stopped by the TNC. The TNC interrupts transfer by not sending a
positive acknowledgment (no <ACK>) and awaits acknowledgment.
If a positive acknowledgment is given, then the program is read in. Otherwise a header is
immediately sent again.

<ACK>
<ACK>
<STX> 2nd line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<STX> 3rd line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1>

"Read in program Yes/No"
<ACK> Yes
.
<STX> 4th line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1> .
. .
.
.
<STX> 3rd line PGM2 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
"Read in program Yes/No"
<ACK>
.
. <ACK>
.
.
<STX> Last line of last PGM <ETB> .
BCC <DC1> .
<ACK>
<ACK> <ETX>
<EOT>
The number of blocks transmitted before the TNC stops to await acknowledgment will depend on
the transfer rate set. At a low data transfer rate, the TNC will stop after the first block.

5 Data transfer by PLC
Using PLC modules (for description see Chapter "PLC programming", Section "PLC modules"), data
can be transferred by the PLC via the RS-232-C/V.24 or RS-232-C/V.24 data interface. These
modules, for example, permit communication between two logic units at PLC level via the interface.
5.1 Configuration of PLC data interface

When data is transmitted by the PLC, use of the interface is inhibited by the input/output program of
the user interface. The user has the possibility of configuring the PLC interface according to the FE
or ME mode, or to configure it freely.
The appropriate control characters and the data format for EXT are set in the machine parameters,
which are described in detail in Section "Freely configurable interfaces". In addition, the baud rate for
transfer can be selected via MP5040.
MP5040 Data transfer rate for PLC interface

Input range: 0 to 9
0 = 110 baud 5 = 2400 baud
1 = 150 baud 6 = 4800 baud
2 = 300 baud 7 = 9600 baud
3 = 600 baud 8 = 19 200 baud
4 = 1200 baud 9 = 38 400 baud
8-42 TNC 360 5 Data transfer by PLC 8/95

6 Error messages
6.1 TNC error messages

Listed below are the error messages for data transfer, which are displayed at the TNC. In most
cases the messages are self-explanatory.
Error messages occurring only in ME mode:
WRONG MODE
TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT
WRONG PROGRAM DATA
ME: END OF TAPE
DATA CARRIER FULL
DATA CARRIER EMPTY
DATA CARRIER WRITE-PROTECTED
General error messages:
INTERFACE ALREADY ASSIGNED

Transfer is already taking place via interface, or data transfer has not been completed.
PROGRAM INCOMPLETE
Transfer has been interrupted or the file has not ended correctly (no END character or END block).
EXT. OUTPUT/INPUT NOT READY
Interface is not connected; peripheral unit is switched off of faulty.
TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT X
X can assume the values A to H, K or L (error codes).
The error message TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT N is displayed if, in the case of data transfer
with Block Check Character (BCC), a Not acknowledged (control character <NAK>) has been
received three times.
The remaining error codes (A to H) in this error message indicate that an error has been detected in
the received module. The error can have the following causes, with no assignment to the code
letters:
– Same baud rate not set at TNC and peripheral unit

– Parity bit wrong
– Incorrect data frame (e.g. no stop bit)
– Receiving module of interface faulty
Error code K or L is only displayed for transfer with standard data transmission protocol:
K: When an error was transmitted to TNC, character <1> not sent after the <ESC> character.
L: The wrong error number was received after the error sequence <ESC><1>. (Error number
range: 0 to 7).
8/95 TNC 360 6 Error messages 8-43

6.2 HEIDENHAIN peripherals' error codes
These error messages refer to the FE 401 floppy disk unit and to magnetic tape unit ME 101/
ME 102. With the FE 401 floppy disk unit connected, one of the following error codes could be
outputted by the TNC:
Error code Meaning

ERR: 001 Wrong instruction code
ERR: 002 Illegal program name
ERR: 003 Defective data transmission
ERR: 004 Program incomplete
ERR: 010 Program not on floppy disk

ERR: 011 Program protected against erasure
ERR: 012 Program storage in progress
ERR: 013 Program directory full
ERR: 014 Floppy disk full
ERR: 100 Floppy disk not formatted

ERR: 101 Sector number too large
ERR: 102 Drive not ready
ERR: 103 Floppy disk write-protected
ERR: 104 Data on floppy disk defective
ERR: 105 Sectors not found
ERR: 106 Check sum defective
ERR: 107 Disk controller faulty
ERR: 108 DMA faulty
If a magnetic tape unit is connected, the following error codes could be sent to the TNC and an
appropriate error message outputted:
Error code Error message

<ESC><1><0> TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT
<ESC><1><1> DATA CARRIER MISSING
<ESC><1><2> DATA CARRIER WRITE-PROTECTED
<ESC><1><3> WRONG OPERATING MODE
<ESC><1><4> WRONG PROGRAM DATA
<ESC><1><5> DATA CARRIER EMPTY
<ESC><1><6> PROGRAM INCOMPLETE
<ESC><1><7> ME: END OF TAPE
A detailed description of these peripherals can be found in the appropriate operating manual.
8-44 TNC 360 6 Error messages 8/95

6.3 Data transmission software error messages
If data is transferred using the HEIDENHAIN - TNC.EXE data transmission program then the
following error messages might be displayed at the TNC:
DATA CARRIER @: IS FULL

Data carrier >@:< full.
FILE NAME NOT PROGRAM NAME

Name of NC program and name of file do not match.
INSTRUCTION NOT ALLOWED

Request instruction issued by control unit is not allowed.
PROGRAM INCOMPLETE
NC program does not contain an end block.
PROGRAM NOT PRESENT

File requested by control unit does not exist in currently configured access path.
PROTECTED FILE
File which is protected with read-only or hidden attribute is likely to be overwritten.
SEARCH FEATURE NOT ALLOWED

Search feature not included in number of acceptable characters.
TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT

Attempts to transmit block to control unit has failed four times.
TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT N

There was no acknowledgment ACK within a defined time
A precise description of this software is given in the User's Manual of the transmission software.
8/95 TNC 360 6 Error messages 8-45

OEM Cycles – Contents
1 Introduction 9-2
1.1 Creating OEM cycles 9-3
1.2 Dialogues for OEM cycles 9-6
1.3 Output in binary code 9-6
2 "Bolt Hole Circle" OEM-Cycle Example 9-7
3 Calling OEM Cycles 9-8

3.1 Calls in a HEIDENHAIN dialogue program 9-8
3.2 Calls in an ISO program 9-9
8/95 TNC 360 9-1

1 Introduction
OEM cycles (customized macros) are programmed in HEIDENHAIN dialogue as NC programs.
OEM cycles cannot be created in ISO format!
By using these cycles in a main program created in the HEIDENHAIN dialogue or in accordance with
ISO, repetitive machining tasks or machine-specific functions can be executed with a single call. The
execution of OEM cycles can be influenced by parameter transfer (see also TNC User's Manual).
OEM cycles can be divided into "DEF-active" and "CALL-active" OEM cycles. The DEF-active cycles
are effective immediately upon definition, without CYCL CALL, M89 or M99. The CALL-active cycles
must be called with a CYCL CALL, M89 or M99.
Up to 32 different OEM cycles can be produced, tested and stored in the NC program memory.
In order not to tie up the NC program memory (RAM) with the OEM cycles and their dialogues, it is
possible to store this data in the PLC EPROM.
Permitted functions in OEM cycles
– Tool call.
– M functions apart from M02, M30, M06, without program-run stop.
– Nesting OEM cycles:
Other OEM cycles or standard cycles can be called in the OEM cycles (nesting depth four levels).
– Calling OEM cycles from a main programs that is transmitted "blockwise" and executed
simultaneously. The OEM cycles must be stored in the control unit memory (EPROM or RAM).
– Calling HEIDENHAIN dialogue or ISO programs in OEM cycles. The called programs are not
displayed.
Functions not permitted in OEM cycles
– M functions M02, M30, M06 with program-run stop.

– Programmed STOP block.
– Definition of cycle 14 "Contour":
Cycle 14 "Contour" must be defined in the main program.
– Repetition of sections of program with CALL LBL ... REP .../...:
OEM cycles with program-section repeats stored in PLC EPROM cannot be executed. However,
program-section repeats can also be programmed via the Q parameter function (IF ... GOTO LBL
...) (see the "Bolt hole circle" example).

1.1 Creating OEM cycles
Programming an OEM-cycle and is only possible if the program number is in the range 99 999 968 to
99 999 999. Each of these program names is permanently assigned a cycle number (e.g. program
number 99999968 represents OEM-cycle 68).
After creating a program with the above number and pressing LBL SET and then ENT, the control
asks whether you wish to program a DEF-active or CALL-active cycle.
DEF-active cycle
If the OEM cycles are to be active in the NC program immediately after the definition, a "DEF-active"
OEM-cycle is programmed with the ENT key, e.g. cycle for coordinate transformation.
CALL-active cycle
If the OEM cycles are to be activated later in the NC program via CYCL-CALL, M98 or M99, a CALL-
active OEM-cycle is programmed with the NO ENT key, e.g. for a machining cycle.
Up to 15 dialogue numbers can then be input. The first dialogue number is always assigned to the
designation of the OEM cycles. The remaining numbers are assigned to the Q parameters in
ascending order.
If fewer than 15 dialogues are to be programmed, the dialogue block can end with END. If more
than 15 parameters are to be entered (maximum 32), the DLG DEF block or the DLG CAL block
must be entered repeatedly in the OEM cycle. Only five entries are evaluated in the third DLG block
The parameter assignment can be shifted via MP7250 so that DEF-active and CALL-active cycles do
not address the same parameters Q1 to Q14.
Example cycle:
0 BEGIN PGM 99999968 MM
1 DLG-DEF 0/2/8/99
.
.
.
15 END PGM 99999968 MM
Using machine parameter MP7240, it is possible to inhibit program input for [Program number] =
[OEM cycles number].
If MP7240 has a value 0, no program with the program number of an OEM-cycle which is held in the
EPROM can be input or read into the NC program memory.
If MP7240 has a value 1, the program-number range of the OEM cycles can also be used when the
OEM cycles are held in the PLC EPROM. If a OEM cycles is generated in the NC program memory
and if at the same time there is a OEM cycles with the same number in the PLC EPROM, then the
OEM cycles in the NC program memory will be executed at a cycle call.

In the NC program, when defining the OEM cycles created with dialogue support, Q parameters are
assigned specified input values. The Q-parameter numbers are automatically generated by the TNC
(Q1 to Q32). In order to prevent the same Q-parameter numbers being generated for DEF-active and
CALL-active cycles, the difference between Q-parameter numbers can be specified with MP7250.
The input values of the OEM cycles are assigned in ascending order of magnitude to the Q
parameters Q1 to Q14. The input values for the cycle are assigned to Q parameters Q[1 + MP7250]
to Q[14 + MP7250].
Example for MP7250 = 30
Parameter number in OEM-cycle with

CALL-active DEF-active
Cycle parameter 1 Q1 Q31
. . .
. . .
. . .
MP7251 determines whether the values of the Q parameters which are changed in the OEM cycles
by calculation or assignment are globally transferred to the calling program (e.g. in the case of
"nesting" of OEM cycles). With machine parameter MP7251, the range of Q parameters from Q[100
- MP7251] to Q99 is defined as "global".
Example for global local Q parameters:

MP7251 = 40
Q [100 – 40] = Q60 => Q60 to Q99 are global Q parameters and
Q1 to Q59 are local Q parameters
MP7251 = 40 MP7251 < 40

Q1 = local Q60 = global Q1 = local Q60 = local
BEGIN PGM 100 MM
FN0: Q1 = +1 +1 +0 +1 +0
FN0: Q60 = +5 +1 +5 +1 +5
CYCL DEF 69.0 OEMCYCLE 1 +1 +5 +1 +5
CYCL DEF 69.1 Q1 = +2 +2 +5 +2 +5
BEGIN PGM 99999969 MM

DLG–DEF 0/32
FN1: Q1 = Q1 + 10 +12 +5 +12 +5
FN1: Q60 = Q60 + 10 +12 +15 +12 +15
END PGM 99999969 MM
STOP +2 +15 +2 +5
END PGM 100 MM

MP7240 Inhibit program input for [Program number] = [OEM-cycle number in
EPROM].
Input value 0 or 1
0 = inhibit
1 = not inhibit
MP7250 Difference between Q-parameter number for "CALL-active" and "DEF-active"

block in OEM cycles
MP7251 Number of global Q parameters transferred from OEM-cycle to calling

program.
OEM cycles stored in the PLC EPROM can be inhibited in the PLC program via flags M2240 to
M2271. Inhibited cycles cannot be defined in NC programs.
If programs with definitions of inhibited or non-existent OEM cycles are transferred to the control
unit, an error message "PGM 999999.. UNAVAILABLE" is generated during program call. The
program cannot be run.
Flag Function Set Reset
M2240 Inhibit OEM-cycle 68 PLC PLC

. .
. .
. .

1.2 Dialogues for OEM cycles
The dialogue numbers defined in the OEM-cycle determine the text to be displayed from the PLC
EPROM
The following dialogue texts for the designation of the OEM-cycle and the input parameters are files
in the standard PLC-EPROM.
Dialogue number in OEM-cycle Standard dialogue in PLC EPROM
0 USER CYCL
1 CYCL PARAMETER 01
2 CYCL PARAMETER 02
. .
. .
. .
99 CYCL PARAMETER 99
Instead of these standard dialogues up to 100 customized dialogues can be filed in the PLC-EPROM.
1.3 Output in binary code

If the OEM cycles have been fully tested, they can be output together with the PLC program in
binary form for EPROM programming. It is possible to output both the files located in the PLC
EPROM and those in the NC program memory in binary code. An accurate description of file output
via the data interface is given in Chapter "PLC-programming".

2 "Bolt Hole Circle" OEM-Cycle Example
The following "Bolt hole circle" program is an example of an OEM-cycle. (This cycle has not been
loaded in the control unit!) The Z-axis acts as the tool axis. The first hole in the circle is at 0o. The
OEM-cycle calculates the angular position of the holes from the number of holes. The drilling
positions are approached in succession in an anti-clockwise direction, and the holes are made
automatically with an in-feed. Before the cycle is called, the tool is held at the safety clearance.
Y Input parameters:
Q1 = Number of holes
Q2 = Radius of bolt hole circle
Q3 = X coordinate of center of bolt hole circle
Q4 = Y coordinate of center of bolt hole circle
Q2 Q5 = Safety clearance for Z axis
(negative input)
0° Q6 = Hole depth in Z axis (negative input)
Q7 = Drilling feed
Q4
Q3 X
"Bolt hole circle" OEM-cycle

0 BEGIN 99999968 MM
1 DLG-CALL 0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 Dialogue block
2 FN1: Q6 = +Q6 + +Q5 Distance traversed in Z
3 FN4: Q50 = +360 DIV + Q1 Angle increment
4 FN0: Q60 = +0 Start angle
5 CC X+Q3 Y+Q4 Center of bolt hole circle
6 LBL 11 Jump label
7 LP PR +Q2 PA +Q60 R0 FMAX Approach drilling position
8 L IZ +Q6 FQ7 Drilling with feed
9 L IZ –Q6 FMAX Clear
10 FN 1: Q60 = +Q60 + +Q50 Next angle
11 FN12: IF +Q60 LT +360 GOTO LBL 11 Last bore?
12 END PGM 99999968 MM
Dialogues for "Bolt hole circle" OEM-cycle
Dialogue DIALOGUE
No.
0 BOLT HOLE CIRCLE
1 NUMBER OF HOLES?
2 RADIUS?
3 X COORDINATE CC?
4 Y COORDINATE CC?
5 SAFETY CLEARANCE?
6 TOTAL HOLE DEPTH?
7 DRILLING FEED RATE?
8/95 TNC 360 2 "Bolt Hole Circle" OEM-Cycle Example 9-7

3 Calling OEM Cycles
OEM cycles in the NC program memory or PLC EPROM can be defined, called and executed both in
HEIDENHAIN dialogue programs and in ISO programs.
3.1 Calls in a HEIDENHAIN dialogue program

In the HEIDENHAIN dialogue program, OEM cycles are defined as standard cycles (see "Dialogue
Programming" in the TNC 360 User's Manual).
The dialogue for cycle definition is initiated with the CYCL DEF key. The desired cycle is selected
either by skimming through the pages using the vertical arrow keys or by GOTO and input of the
cycle number (e.g. 68). The cycle is entered with the ENT key.
The individual parameters are input via the numeric keyboard and entered with ENT.
In the case of a "DEF-active" OEM-cycle, the cycle is effective immediately after definition. Once
defined, a "CALL-active" OEM-cycle can be called and hence activated either via "CYCL CALL" or
M99.
Example:
0 BEGIN PGM 1000 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z–20 Definition of blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 For test/program-run graphics
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+2 Tool definition
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S1000 Tool call
5 L Z+2 R0 FMAX M3 Approach safety clearance
6 CYCL DEF 68.0 Bolt hole circle Definition of cycle 68 "Bolt hole circle"
7 CYCL DEF 68.1 Q1=+8 Q2=+40 Q3=+60
8 CYCL DEF 68.2 Q4=+50 Q5=–2 Q6=–20
9 CYCL DEF 68.3 Q7=+100
10 CYCL CALL Call cycle
11 END PGM 1000 MM
9-8 TNC 360 3 Calling OEM Cycles 8/95

3.2 Calls in an ISO program
In an ISO program, OEM cycles are not called via a G- function but via key "D" and the cycle number
(e.g. D88).
The individual parameters are input via the numeric keyboard and entered with ENT.
In the case of a "DEF-active" OEM-cycle, the cycle is effective immediately after definition. Once
defined, a "CALL-active" OEM-cycle can be called and hence activated either via G79 or M99.
Example:
% 1000 G71*
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z–20* Definition of blank
N20 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0* For test/program-run graphics
N30 G99 T1 L+0 R+2* Tool definition
N40 T1 G17 S1000* Tool call
N50 G00 G40 G90 Z+2 M3* Safety clearance
N60 D68 P1+8 P2+40 P3+60 Call of cycle 68 "Bolt hole circle"
P4+50 P5–2 P6–20 P7+100*
N70 G79* Cycle active
N99999 % 1000 G71*
8/95 TNC 360 3 Calling OEM Cycles 9-9

Positioning Module – Contents
1 PLC Positioning Module 10-2

1.1 Introduction 10-2
1.2 Hardware 10-3
1.3 EMERGENCY STOP routine 10-5
1.4 Reference signal evaluation 10-6
1.5 Connecting the positioning module 10-6
8/95 TNC 360 10-1

1 PLC Positioning Module
1.1 Introduction
A hardware version of the LE 360 – the LE 234.003 – can be used in conjunction with the
TNC 407/TNC 415 as a positioning module.
In this way the TNC 407/TNC 415 can be expanded by up to 4 auxiliary axes. PLC inputs and outputs
of the LE 234.003 can also be used.
The positioning module can be used for controlling tool changers and pallet feed as well as rotary
axes and swivel heads.
The NC software of the TNC 360 can also be run on the LE 234.003, i.e. all the functions of the TNC
360 are also possible with the positioning module.
This Technical Manual is therefore also applicable to the LE 234.003.
10-2 TNC 360 1 PLC Positioning Module 8/95

1.2 Hardware
The differences in the hardware of the LE 234.003 from the LE 360 C are:
- the connector X25 contains the RS-232-/V.24 and the RS-422/V.11 interfaces
- The measuring system input X4 (sine-wave) has been dropped
- The measuring system input X5 (square-wave) has been added
Control-loop board
X1 = Measuring system 1 (∼)
X1
X11 X2 = Measuring system 2 (∼)
X21 X24 X3 = Measuring system 3 (∼)
X5 = Measuring system 5 ( )
X2 X6 = Measuring system S ( )
24V
X12 X8 = Nominal value output 1,2,3,4,S
X25
X9 = Visual display unit (only for
X3 commissioning)
X31
X22
X8 B = Signal ground
X26
X21 = PLC output

X5
X22 = PLC input
X23 = TNC keyboard (TE)
X6 X23 X27 (only for commissioning)
X9 X24 = Power supply 24 V for PLC
X25 = Data interface RS-422/V.11
(RS-232/V.24)
X31 = Power supply 24 V for LE
B
X11, X12 and X26 are not needed,
X4 is not available.
Connecting cable
LE 234.003 LE 407/415
Id.-Nr. 265 479 ..
max. 50 m
Pin layout
8/95 TNC 360 1 PLC Positioning Module 10-3

X25 Data interface RS-422/V.11 and RS-232/V.24-C
Flange socket with female insert (25-pin)
Pin Number Assignment Assignment

RS-422/V.11 RS-232/V.24-C
1 Screen
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 CTS
5 RTS
6 DTR
7 GND Signal
8 Vacant
___
9 RxD
___
10 CTS
___
11 TxD
___
12 RTS
___
13 DSR
___
14 DTR
15 DTR
16, 17, 18 Vacant
19 GND Signal
20 DSR DSR
21 RxD
22 CTS
23 TxD
24 RTS
25 Housing Ext. screen
GND housing
X5 Measuring system input 5 ( )

___
1 Ua2
2 + 5V (UP)
3 Ua0
___
4 Ua0
5 Ua1
___
6 Ua1
___
7 UaS
8 Ua2
9 (contact spring) Screen = Housing
10 0 V (UP)
11 0 V (UP)
12 + 5V (UP)

1.3 EMERGENCY STOP routine
After the TNC has been switched on, the internal EMERGENCY STOP switch-off is checked, i.e. for
each processor the power supply is briefly switched off.
Appropriate circuitry must ensure that the positioning module does not function if an error occurs
during the NC check, i.e. that the voltage for the acknowledgment is mutually switched off. The
circuit illustrated below can fulfill this function. The check is started at the same time that the control
voltage is switched on.
LE 407/415

X41/34 X44/2 X44/1 X42/4

"Control 24V Cannot 24V Can be Acknowledgement
operational" be switched switched off "Control operational"
off
EMERGENCY STOP
buttons k1
Control
voltage + –
k1
on
24 V
k3 PLC
K1
LE 234.003

X21/34 X24/2 X24/1 X22/4

"Control 24V Cannot 24V Can be Acknowledgement
operational" be switched switched off "Control operational"
off
EMERGENC STOP
buttons k3
+ –
k1
Control 24 V
voltage PLC
on K3
8/95 TNC 360 1 PLC Positioning Module 10-5

1.4 Reference signal evaluation
After the reference signal evaluation in the NC axes, the reference signal evaluation of the PLC axes
must be started, either automatically or (e.g. with NC switch-on) or manually with special keys. PLC
positioning is not possible until the reference signals have been evaluated.
1.5 Connecting the positioning module

The positioning module hardware is connected at the RS-422/V.11 interface with a special cable (Id.-
Nr. 265 479).
The software is connected through the PLC of the master control (TNC 407 or TNC 415). The
modules 9100, 9101, 9102, 9105 and 9106 were developed for this purpose. They make it possible
to activate the RS-422/V.11 data interface and to transmit and receive binary data.
These modules are described in Chapter 7 "PLC-programming".
The PLC program for the positioning module can be written either with the LE 234.003 itself (which
must be connected to the BE 212 visual display unit and the TE 355 A/B keyboard), or on a PC with
the PLC programming software from HEIDENHAIN.
Please contact your HEIDENHAIN representative if you have any questions regarding the PLC
programming software.

7-Bit ASCII Code
Character DEC OCT HEX

NUL 000 000 00
SOH 001 001 01
STX 002 002 02
ETX 003 003 03
EOT 004 004 04
ENQ 005 005 05
ACK 006 006 06
BEL 007 007 07
BS 008 010 08
HT 009 011 09
LF 010 012 0A
VT 011 013 0B
FF 012 014 0C
CR 013 015 0D
SO 014 016 0E
SI 015 017 0F
DLE 016 020 10
DC1 (X-ON) 017 021 11
DC2 018 022 12
DC3 (X-OFF) 019 023 13
DC4 020 024 14
NAK 021 025 15
SYN 022 026 16
ETB 023 027 17
CAN 024 030 18
EM 025 031 19
SUB 026 032 1A
ESC 027 033 1B
FS 028 034 1C
GS 029 035 1D
RS 030 036 1E
US 031 037 1F
SP 032 040 20
! 033 041 21
" 034 042 22
# 035 043 23
$ 036 044 24
% 037 045 25
& 038 046 26
´ 039 047 27
( 040 050 28
) 041 051 29
* 042 052 2A
+ 043 053 2B
, 044 054 2C
- 045 055 2D
. 046 056 2E
/ 047 057 2F
8/95 TNC 360/TNC 335 7-Bit ASCII Code 11-1

0 048 060 30
1 049 061 31
2 050 062 32
3 051 063 33
4 052 064 34
5 053 065 35
6 054 066 36
7 055 067 37
8 056 070 38
9 057 071 39
: 058 072 3A
; 059 073 3B
< 060 074 3C
= 061 075 3D
> 062 076 3E
? 063 077 3F
@ 064 100 40
A 065 101 41
B 066 102 42
C 067 103 43
D 068 104 44
E 069 105 45
F 070 106 46
G 071 107 47
H 072 110 48
I 073 111 49
J 074 112 4A
K 075 113 4B
L 076 114 4C
M 077 115 4D
N 078 116 4E
O 079 117 4F
P 080 120 50
Q 081 121 51
R 082 122 52
S 083 123 53
T 084 124 54
U 085 125 55
V 086 126 56
W 087 127 57
X 088 130 58
Y 089 131 59
Z 090 132 5A
[ 091 133 5B
\ 092 134 5C
] 093 135 5D
^ 094 136 5E
– 095 137 5F
11-2 TNC 360 7-Bit ASCII Code8/95

` 096 140 60
a 097 141 61
b 098 142 62
c 099 143 63
d 100 144 64
e 101 145 65
f 102 146 66
g 103 147 67
h 104 150 68
i 105 151 69
j 106 152 6A
k 107 153 6B
l 108 154 6C
m 109 155 6D
n 110 156 6E
o 111 157 6F
p 112 160 70
q 113 161 71
r 114 162 72
s 115 163 73
t 116 164 74
u 117 165 75
v 118 166 76
w 119 167 77
x 120 170 78
y 121 171 79
z 122 172 7A
{ 123 173 7B
¦ 124 174 7C
} 125 175 7D
~ 126 176 7E
DEL 127 177 7F
8/95 TNC 360/TNC 335 7-Bit ASCII Code 11-3

✎
11-4 TNC 360 7-Bit ASCII Code8/95

Subject Index
A
Acceleration........................................................................................................................ 4-55
Acceleration, determination................................................................................................ 4-229
Acceleration, optimizing ..................................................................................................... 4-238
Acknowledgment of S-code ............................................................................................... 4-92
Active axes ......................................................................................................................... 4-6
Actual - nominal value transfer ........................................................................................... 4-78
Actual position capture ....................................................................................................... 4-121
ADDITION (+) ................................................................................................................... 7-57
ADDITION [ ] (+[ ]) ............................................................................................................ 7-74
Address allocation .............................................................................................................. 7-14
Addressing the word memory............................................................................................ 7-14
Ambient temperature ......................................................................................................... 3-8
Analog inputs...................................................................................................................... 4-176
Analog voltage .................................................................................................................... 4-56
AND (A)............................................................................................................................. 7-44
AND [ ] (A[ ])...................................................................................................................... 7-70
AND NOT (AN).................................................................................................................. 7-46
AND NOT [ ] (AN[ ])........................................................................................................... 7-70
Angle encoders................................................................................................................... 3-19
Angular measurement ........................................................................................................ 4-7
APE..................................................................................................................................... 3-30
Arithmetic Commands........................................................................................................ 7-57
Assembly hints ................................................................................................................... 3-8
ASSIGN (=) ....................................................................................................................... 7-34
ASSIGN BYTE (B=) ........................................................................................................... 7-36
ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD (D=) ......................................................................................... 7-36
ASSIGN WORD (W=) ....................................................................................................... 7-36
Assignment of the analogue outputs ................................................................................. 4-14
Assignment of the measuring system inputs .................................................................... 4-13
Automatic cyclical offset adjustment ................................................................................. 4-64
Axes in motion.................................................................................................................... 4-77
Axes in position .................................................................................................................. 4-76
Axis designation ................................................................................................................. 4-12
Axis-direction keys, memory function for........................................................................... 4-149
Axis-enable ......................................................................................................................... 4-75
Axis-error compensation .................................................................................................... 4-22
B
Backlash compensation...................................................................................................... 4-22
Baud ................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Baud rate ............................................................................................................................ 8-8
BCC .................................................................................................................................... 8-18
BIT RESET (BC) ............................................................................................................... 7-86
Bit Commands.................................................................................................................... 7-85
BIT SET (BS) ..................................................................................................................... 7-85
BIT TEST (BT) ................................................................................................................... 7-87
Block Check Character ....................................................................................................... 8-18
Block-number step size for ISO programs ......................................................................... 4-133
Buffer battery ..................................................................................................................... 3-16
8/95 TNC 360 Subject Index 12-1

C
Call Module (CM).............................................................................................................. 7-96
Cascade control .................................................................................................................. 4-52
CASE Statement................................................................................................................. 7-100
Change signal, S-code ........................................................................................................ 4-92
Checking absolute position of distance-coded REF marks................................................. 4-9
Checking amplitude of measuring system signals ............................................................. 4-9
Checking data ..................................................................................................................... 8-7
Checking edge separation of measuring system signals ................................................... 4-10
CN 123................................................................................................................................ 5-14 – 5-23
Code for M function ........................................................................................................... 4-138
Code number...................................................................................................................... 4-134; 5-3
Coded output of spindle speed .......................................................................................... 4-92
Commands ......................................................................................................................... 7-27
Commissioning................................................................................................................... 4-227
Comparisons....................................................................................................................... 7-63
Compatibility markers......................................................................................................... 7-123
Compatibility with TNC 355................................................................................................ 7-121
Compensation for reversal errors....................................................................................... 4-23
Configuration of the interface............................................................................................. 8-22
Connection box................................................................................................................... 3-23
Constant feed rate in corners ............................................................................................. 4-67
Constant feed rate in corners with M90 ............................................................................ 4-68
Contour Lines ..................................................................................................................... 4-158
Control is ready................................................................................................................... 4-107
Control with feed forward control ...................................................................................... 4-61
Control with feed forward control, optimizing .................................................................... 4-237
Control with lag, optimizing ................................................................................................ 4-233
Control with servo lag......................................................................................................... 4-53
Controlled ........................................................................................................................... 4-75
Cooling................................................................................................................................ 3-8
Correction table .................................................................................................................. 4-25; 4-26
Counters ............................................................................................................................. 7-20
Counting direction .............................................................................................................. 4-8
Current tool axis ................................................................................................................. 4-14
Cycle call............................................................................................................................. 4-140
Cycle inhibit ........................................................................................................................ 4-127
Cycles ................................................................................................................................. 4-127
D
Data bits ............................................................................................................................. 8-22
Data interface ..................................................................................................................... 3-32
Data transfer....................................................................................................................... 8-4
Data transfer by PLC .......................................................................................................... 8-42
Data transfer by the PLC .................................................................................................... 7-109
Data transfer PLC ............................................................................................................... 7-15
Data transfer rate ............................................................................................................... 8-8
Data transfer with Block Check Character (BCC) ............................................................... 8-17
Data transmission protocol................................................................................................. 8-29
Data transmission protocols............................................................................................... 8-15
Datum................................................................................................................................. 4-110
Datum correction................................................................................................................ 4-194
DBB Double Ball Bar system.............................................................................................. 4-23
12-2 TNC 360 Subject Index 8/95

Decimal sign ....................................................................................................................... 4-135
Degree of protection .......................................................................................................... 3-11
Dialog language .................................................................................................................. 4-135
Dialogues for OEM cycles.................................................................................................. 9-6
Digitizing feed rate in normal direction ............................................................................... 4-156
Digitizing with TS 120......................................................................................................... 4-155
Digitizing, maximum deflection of stylus ........................................................................... 4-156
Digitizing, number of oscillations in normal direction ......................................................... 4-156
Digitizing, optimizing the scanning sequence .................................................................... 4-161
Digitizing, scanning Cycles ................................................................................................. 4-158
Dimensions......................................................................................................................... 3-58
Direction of traverse ........................................................................................................... 4-8
Direction of traverse for referencing .................................................................................. 4-49
Display "Control is ready".................................................................................................... 4-119
Display of current gear range ............................................................................................. 4-121
Display spindle power ........................................................................................................ 4-120
DIVISION (/) ...................................................................................................................... 7-60
DIVISION [ ] (/[ ]) ............................................................................................................... 7-74
E
Edge evaluation of the PLC inputs ..................................................................................... 7-21
Electrical noise immunity.................................................................................................... 3-8
EMERGENCY STOP ........................................................................................................... 4-109
EMERGENCY STOP DEFECTIVE ....................................................................................... 4-109
EMERGENCY STOP routine ............................................................................................... 4-107
EMERGENCY STOP routine, testing.................................................................................. 4-231
Encoder cables ................................................................................................................... 3-21
Encoder inputs.................................................................................................................... 3-20
Encoder monitoring ............................................................................................................ 4-9
Encoders............................................................................................................................. 3-19; 4-6
End indexed Call Module (ENDC) ..................................................................................... 7-100
End of Module, Program End (EM)................................................................................... 7-98
EPROM creation................................................................................................................. 7-21
EPROM operation............................................................................................................... 7-21
EPROM sockets ................................................................................................................. 2-9
EPROM test ....................................................................................................................... 4-136
EQUAL TO (==) ................................................................................................................ 7-63
EQUAL TO [ ] (==[ ]) ......................................................................................................... 7-78
Error messages .................................................................................................................. 4-122
EXCLUSIVE OR (XO) ........................................................................................................ 7-52
EXCLUSIVE OR [ ] (XO[ ]) ................................................................................................. 7-71
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT (XON) ............................................................................................. 7-54
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT [ ] (XON[ ]) ...................................................................................... 7-71
EXT operating mode ........................................................................................................... 8-28
External EMERGENCY STOP ............................................................................................. 4-107
External programming ........................................................................................................ 8-28
F
Feed for PLC positioning .................................................................................................... 4-33
Feed potentiometer............................................................................................................ 4-116
Feed rate display ................................................................................................................ 4-116
Feed rate enable................................................................................................................. 4-75
Feed rate for leaving the reference end-position ............................................................... 4-49

Feed rate for traversing the reference marks..................................................................... 4-49
Feed rate override .............................................................................................................. 4-117
File types ............................................................................................................................ 4-133
File types – disable ............................................................................................................. 4-133
Flashing PLC error message .............................................................................................. 4-123
G
Gear change ....................................................................................................................... 4-86
Gear change, Acknowledgment of ..................................................................................... 4-87
Gear change, jog voltage for .............................................................................................. 4-87
Gear code ........................................................................................................................... 4-86
Gear range .......................................................................................................................... 4-82
Gear range, S-analogue voltage for .................................................................................... 4-83
Gear ranges, spindle speed for .......................................................................................... 4-83
Gear-code change signal .................................................................................................... 4-87
Graphic simulation .............................................................................................................. 4-113
Graphics display ................................................................................................................. 4-113
GREATER THAN (>) ......................................................................................................... 7-65
GREATER THAN [ ] (>[ ]) .................................................................................................. 7-78
GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO (>=)............................................................................... 7-67
GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOL[ ] (>=[ ])...................................................................... 7-79
Gross positioning error A.................................................................................................... 4-71
Gross positioning error B.................................................................................................... 4-72
Gross positioning error C.................................................................................................... 4-72
Gross positioning error D.................................................................................................... 4-73
Gross positioning error E .................................................................................................... 4-64
Gross positioning error A.................................................................................................... 4-70
H
Handshaking ....................................................................................................................... 8-9
Handwheel adapter HRA 110 ............................................................................................. 3-37; 4-172
Handwheel HR 130 ............................................................................................................ 3-34; 4-169
Handwheel HR 330 ............................................................................................................ 3-33; 4-169
Handwheel HR 332 ............................................................................................................ 3-35; 4-169
Handwheel input ................................................................................................................ 3-33
Handwheel keys ................................................................................................................. 4-169
Handwheel, count direction for .......................................................................................... 4-167
Handwheel, minimum subdivision factor for...................................................................... 4-167
Handwheel ......................................................................................................................... 4-166
Hardware components ....................................................................................................... 3-4
Hardware handshaking....................................................................................................... 8-9
Hardware version ............................................................................................................... 2-7
Heat generation .................................................................................................................. 3-8
Hirth coupling ..................................................................................................................... 4-183
Humidity ............................................................................................................................. 3-9
I
Incremental jog positioning ................................................................................................ 4-178
Indexed Call Module (CASE)............................................................................................. 7-100
Inhibited key ....................................................................................................................... 4-141
Integral factor ..................................................................................................................... 4-65
Integral factor, optimizing ................................................................................................... 4-242

Interface RS-232-C/V.24 ..................................................................................................... 8-10
Interpolation factor ............................................................................................................. 4-7; 5-6
ISO programs ..................................................................................................................... 4-133
J
Jump Commands ............................................................................................................... 7-94
Jump if Logic Accumulator = 0 (JPF) ................................................................................ 7-94
Jump if Logic Accumulator = 1 (JPT) ................................................................................. 7-94
Jump Label (LBL).............................................................................................................. 7-98
K
Key code............................................................................................................................. 4-141
Key simulation .................................................................................................................... 4-141
Kink point............................................................................................................................ 4-59
kv factor.............................................................................................................................. 4-55; 4-63
L
Lag monitoring.................................................................................................................... 4-70
Lead-screw pitch error........................................................................................................ 4-25
LESS THAN (<) ................................................................................................................... 7-64
LESS THAN [ ] (<[ ]) .......................................................................................................... 7-78
LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO (<=) ..................................................................................... 7-66
LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO [ ] (<=[ ]) .............................................................................. 7-78
Linear axis-error compensation .......................................................................................... 4-24
Linear encoders .................................................................................................................. 3-19
Linear measurement .......................................................................................................... 4-6
LOAD (L)........................................................................................................................... 7-27
LOAD BYTE (LB)............................................................................................................... 7-32
Load command................................................................................................................... 7-27
LOAD DOUBLEWORD....................................................................................................... 7-32
LOAD NOT (LN)................................................................................................................ 7-29
Load Stack (PS)................................................................................................................. 7-89
Load Stack (PSL)............................................................................................................... 7-90
Load Stack (PSW) ............................................................................................................. 7-91
LOAD TWO'S COMPLEMENT (L–) .................................................................................. 7-31
LOAD WORD (LW)........................................................................................................... 7-32
Logic Gates......................................................................................................................... 7-44
Logic unit ............................................................................................................................ 3-4
Lubrication pulse ................................................................................................................ 4-19
M
M function, acknowledgment of ........................................................................................ 4-138
M functions ........................................................................................................................ 4-118; 4-137
Machine axes ..................................................................................................................... 4-6
Machine control panel ........................................................................................................ 3-53; 4-149
Machine datum................................................................................................................... 4-50; 4-110
Machine parameters .......................................................................................................... 5-3; 5-4
Manual feed........................................................................................................................ 4-57
Meander ............................................................................................................................. 4-158
Measuring system monitoring .......................................................................................... 4-9
Measuring systems ............................................................................................................ 3-19; 4-6
Mechanical defects ............................................................................................................ 4-22

Mechanical vibration........................................................................................................... 3-9
Memory test....................................................................................................................... 4-136
Modul 9120 Position an auxiliary axis................................................................................. 7-114
Module 9000\: Copy a marker block................................................................................... 7-103
Module 9001\: Copy a Word block ..................................................................................... 7-103
Module 9010\: Indexed reading of Byte ............................................................................. 7-104
Module 9011\: Indexed reading of Word............................................................................ 7-104
Module 9012\: Indexed reading of Doubleword ................................................................. 7-104
Module 9020\: Indexed writing of Byte .............................................................................. 7-105
Module 9021\: Indexed writing of Word............................................................................. 7-105
Module 9022\: Indexed writing of Doubleword.................................................................. 7-105
Module 9032\: Transfer machine parameter values to the PLC......................................... 7-106
Module 9035\: Transfer status information to the PLC ...................................................... 7-107
Module 9036\: Transfer PLC status information to the NC ................................................ 7-108
Module 9040\: Transfer coordinate values to the PLC ....................................................... 7-109
Module 9100\: Assign data interface.................................................................................. 7-110
Module 9101\: Enable data interface.................................................................................. 7-110
Module 9102\: Interface status .......................................................................................... 7-111
Module 9105\: Transmit binary data via data interface....................................................... 7-112
Module 9106\: Receive binary data via data interface........................................................ 7-113
Module 9121 Stop an auxiliary axis .................................................................................... 7-115
Module 9122 Poll the status of an auxiliary axis ............................................................... 7-115
Module 9123 Traverse the reference point of an auxiliary axis.......................................... 7-116
Module 9124 Override for PLC axis ................................................................................... 7-117
Module 9150 Run an NC block.......................................................................................... 7-118
Module call if Logic Accumulator = 0 (CMF) .................................................................... 7-96
Module call if Logic Accumulator = 1 (CMT) .................................................................... 7-96
Module technique............................................................................................................... 7-13
Monitoring functions .......................................................................................................... 4-69
Monitoring the analog voltage ............................................................................................ 4-72
Mounting position............................................................................................................... 3-9
Movement-monitoring........................................................................................................ 4-72
MULTIPLICATION (x) ....................................................................................................... 7-59
MULTIPLICATION [ ] (x[ ]) ................................................................................................ 7-74
Multiplication factor ............................................................................................................ 4-59
N
NC power supply ................................................................................................................ 3-14
Nominal value output.......................................................................................................... 3-23
Nominal value potential ...................................................................................................... 3-23
Nonlinear axis error compensation..................................................................................... 4-25
Normal direction ................................................................................................................. 4-156
NOT EQUAL TO [ ] (<>[ ])................................................................................................. 7-79
O
OEM cycles ........................................................................................................................ 9-3
OEM cycles, calling ............................................................................................................ 9-8
Offset adjustment .............................................................................................................. 4-64; 4-243
Offset adjustment by code number ................................................................................... 4-64
Offset adjustment with integral factor ............................................................................... 4-65
Open control loop ............................................................................................................... 4-78
Operand directory............................................................................................................... 7-14

Operating mode.................................................................................................................. 4-141
OR (O)............................................................................................................................... 7-48
OR [ ] (O[ ])........................................................................................................................ 7-70
OR NOT (ON).................................................................................................................... 7-50
OR NOT [ ] (ON[ ])............................................................................................................. 7-70
orientation........................................................................................................................... 4-94
Overlap factor ..................................................................................................................... 4-129
P
Parentheses........................................................................................................................ 7-70; 7-74
Path dependent lubrication................................................................................................. 4-19
PLC – Main menu ............................................................................................................... 7-6
PLC auxiliary axes............................................................................................................... 4-36
PLC axes............................................................................................................................. 4-36
PLC Cycle time ................................................................................................................... 7-128
PLC error messages ........................................................................................................... 4-122; 7-24
PLC Functions .................................................................................................................... 7-5
PLC I/O unit ........................................................................................................................ 3-45
PLC I/O unit PL 410 ............................................................................................................ 3-49
PLC input, fast .................................................................................................................... 4-69
PLC Input/Output board...................................................................................................... 3-11
PLC Input/Output unit......................................................................................................... 3-5
PLC inputs .......................................................................................................................... 3-40
PLC Modules ...................................................................................................................... 7-103
PLC operation, select ......................................................................................................... 7-5
PLC outputs........................................................................................................................ 3-40
PLC positioning................................................................................................................... 4-33
PLC positioning module...................................................................................................... 3-2
PLC power supply .............................................................................................................. 3-15
PLC Program conversion .................................................................................................... 7-122
PLC program creation......................................................................................................... 7-12
PLC program editing........................................................................................................... 7-6
PLC program Transferring .................................................................................................. 7-10
PLC program, erase............................................................................................................ 7-8
PLC program, transfer from EPROM ................................................................................. 7-8
PLC program, translate....................................................................................................... 7-8
PLC TABLE function ........................................................................................................... 7-10
PLC text window ................................................................................................................ 4-122
PLC TRACE function........................................................................................................... 7-9
PLC utilization, processing time, memory .......................................................................... 7-8
Pocket coding ..................................................................................................................... 4-199
Pocket coding, fixed ........................................................................................................... 4-199
Pocket coding, variable....................................................................................................... 4-199
Pocket milling ..................................................................................................................... 4-129
Point-to-point and straight-cut control ................................................................................ 4-246
Polarity of the nominal value potential ............................................................................... 4-8
Polarity of the S-analogue voltage ...................................................................................... 4-81
Position approach, optimizing............................................................................................. 4-240
Position control loop ........................................................................................................... 4-52
Position display................................................................................................................... 4-114
Position display step........................................................................................................... 4-114
Position loop gain ............................................................................................................... 4-55
Position monitoring............................................................................................................. 4-70; 4-71

positioning error.................................................................................................................. 4-70; 4-71
Positioning module ............................................................................................................. 3-2
Positioning window ............................................................................................................ 4-73
Potential steps.................................................................................................................... 4-58
Power consumption ........................................................................................................... 2-5
Power supply...................................................................................................................... 3-14
PROCESSOR CHECK ERROR M ....................................................................................... 3-15
Program, end of.................................................................................................................. 4-136
Programming station .......................................................................................................... 4-135
Pull Stack (PLL)................................................................................................................. 7-91
Pull Stack (PLW) ............................................................................................................... 7-91
Pull Stack (PL)..................................................................................................................... 7-90
Q
Q parameters, overwriting ................................................................................................. 4-136
R
Radial acceleration.............................................................................................................. 4-67
RAM operation ................................................................................................................... 7-21
RAM test ............................................................................................................................ 4-136
Ramp slope for S-analogue voltage.................................................................................... 4-82
Rapid traverse..................................................................................................................... 4-55
Reference end-position ...................................................................................................... 4-39; 4-50
Reference marks ................................................................................................................ 4-37
reference marks, passing over ........................................................................................... 4-39
Reference point .................................................................................................................. 4-110
RELAY EXT. DC VOLTAGE MISSING................................................................................. 4-109
REMAINDER (MOD) ........................................................................................................ 7-61
REMAINDER [ ] (MOD[ ]) ................................................................................................. 7-75
RESET (R) ......................................................................................................................... 7-40
RESET NOT (RN) .............................................................................................................. 7-42
Residual voltage ................................................................................................................. 4-71
Rigid tapping....................................................................................................................... 4-104
Rigid tapping, Acceleration ramp for .................................................................................. 4-105
Rotary axes......................................................................................................................... 4-115
Rotary axis, display mode for ............................................................................................. 4-115
Rotational axis .................................................................................................................... 4-12
RS-232-C/V.24 .................................................................................................................... 3-32
Run duration timers ............................................................................................................ 4-118
Run duration, display of ...................................................................................................... 4-118
Run-in behavior................................................................................................................... 4-62
S
S code................................................................................................................................. 4-92
Sag...................................................................................................................................... 4-25
Scale datum point............................................................................................................... 4-110
Scaling factor ...................................................................................................................... 4-131
Scanning range ................................................................................................................... 4-158
S-code table........................................................................................................................ 4-93
Secondary linear axis .......................................................................................................... 4-13
Sequence for traversing reference marks .......................................................................... 4-49
Servo accuracy ................................................................................................................... 4-57

Servo lag............................................................................................................................. 4-55
Servo positioning of the NC-axes ....................................................................................... 4-52
SET (S) .............................................................................................................................. 7-39
Set commands ................................................................................................................... 7-39
SET NOT (SN) ................................................................................................................... 7-41
Shift Commands................................................................................................................. 7-82
SHIFT LEFT (<<)............................................................................................................... 7-82
SHIFT RIGHT (>>) ............................................................................................................ 7-83
Signal period ....................................................................................................................... 4-6
Signal subdivision ............................................................................................................... 4-7
Software handshaking ........................................................................................................ 8-9
Software limit switch.......................................................................................................... 4-16
Software limit switch ranges.............................................................................................. 4-233
Software number................................................................................................................. 2-6
Software option .................................................................................................................. 2-8
Software protection module............................................................................................... 2-8
Software version ................................................................................................................ 2-6
Special Tools....................................................................................................................... 4-197
Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 2-3
Spindle................................................................................................................................ 4-80
Spindle control loop, open .................................................................................................. 4-94
Spindle display, expanded .................................................................................................. 4-120
Spindle orientation.............................................................................................................. 4-80; 4-94
Spindle orientation, kv factor for ........................................................................................ 4-96
Spindle orientation, ramp slope .......................................................................................... 4-94
Spindle override.................................................................................................................. 4-85
Spindle positioning window................................................................................................ 4-96
Spindle power..................................................................................................................... 4-120
Spindle preset..................................................................................................................... 4-96
Spindle rotation, direction of............................................................................................... 4-81
Spindle rpm, analog output................................................................................................. 4-81
Spindle run-in characteristic ............................................................................................... 4-105
Spindle speed ..................................................................................................................... 4-81
Spindle, count direction of the measuring system signals................................................. 4-82
Spindle, transient response on acceleration....................................................................... 4-105
Spindle-enable .................................................................................................................... 4-82
Spindle-speed for spindle-orientation ................................................................................. 4-94
Spindle-speed output.......................................................................................................... 4-80
Stack Operations ................................................................................................................ 7-89
Standard transmission protocol.......................................................................................... 8-16
Standstill monitoring........................................................................................................... 4-73
Status display ..................................................................................................................... 4-114
Status display, cancel ......................................................................................................... 4-120
Stiction................................................................................................................................ 4-23
Strobe signal for M function ................................................................................................. 4-138
Subdivision factor ............................................................................................................... 4-166
SUBTRACTION (–) ............................................................................................................ 7-58
SUBTRACTION [ ] (–[ ]) ..................................................................................................... 7-74
Summary of connections ................................................................................................... 3-12
T
Tapping ............................................................................................................................... 4-100

Tapping with floating tap holder ......................................................................................... 4-100; 4-103
Tapping without floating tap holder .................................................................................... 4-104
Tapping, ramp slope for...................................................................................................... 4-101
Temperature compensation ............................................................................................... 4-30
Thread pitch........................................................................................................................ 4-104
Timers................................................................................................................................. 7-17
TNC keyboard ..................................................................................................................... 3-4; 3-56
Tool changer ....................................................................................................................... 4-196
Tool length, calculation of................................................................................................... 4-114
Tool magazine, number of pockets in ................................................................................ 4-214
Tool table ............................................................................................................................ 4-196
Touch Probe ....................................................................................................................... 4-151
Touch probe feed rate ........................................................................................................ 4-152
Touch probe maximum measuring range........................................................................... 4-152
Touch probe system input.................................................................................................. 3-28
Touch probe system, selection of ...................................................................................... 4-152
TRACE BUFFER, DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 7-10
TRACE, END....................................................................................................................... 7-10
TRACE, START ................................................................................................................... 7-10
Transient response ............................................................................................................. 4-62
Transient response, optimizing........................................................................................... 4-239
Transmission format........................................................................................................... 8-8
Traverse direction, testing .................................................................................................. 4-232
Traverse ranges .................................................................................................................. 4-16
TS 120 ................................................................................................................................ 3-29
TS 511 ................................................................................................................................ 3-30
Tuning of the drive amplifier............................................................................................... 4-228
U
Unconditional jump (JP).................................................................................................... 7-94
UNEQUAL (<>)................................................................................................................. 7-68
User parameters................................................................................................................. 4-133; 5-2
User parameters, dialogs for ............................................................................................. 4-134
V
VDU display ........................................................................................................................ 4-14
Visual display unit ............................................................................................................... 3-5; 3-26
VM 101A ............................................................................................................................. 4-25
voltage step ........................................................................................................................ 4-58
W
Weight ................................................................................................................................ 2-5
Wrong spindle speed.......................................................................................................... 4-88

Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Manual

Valid for the NC software types

260 060 up to version 17

DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH

8/95 TNC 360

Software version 17 contains the following additions:

• The software now supports the new handwheel HR 410.

The HR 410 is a portable electronic handwheel with:

Keys for selection of five axes

4/96 TNC 360 Update Information No. 8 1-1

MP7671 Manual feed rate in "handwheel" operating mode with HR 410

D-sub D-sub D-sub Coupling on Connecto Connecto Connecto

2 White 2 2 White E E White E E

4 Brown 4 4 Brown D D Brown D D

6 Yellow 6 6 Yellow B B Yellow B B

7 Gray 7 7 Gray A A Gray A A

8 Green 8 8 Green C C Green C C

WH/YL 2 Contact 2 (left) Permissive button

WH/GN 1 Contact 1 (right)

WH/RD 2 Contact 1 Emergency stop

1-2 TNC 360 Update Information No. 8 4/96

• PLC Module 9036 expanded

Calling the module:

PS B/W/D/K PLC status information type

The marker M3171 is set if there is an error in transfer.

4/96 TNC 360 Update Information No. 8 1-3

0: Handwheel interpolation factor for X-axis 0 ... 10

10: Limit on jog increment 0 ... 50000 µm

1-4 TNC 360 Update Information No. 8 4/96

Please replace the complete contents of the manual.

8/95 TNC 360 Update Information No. 7 1-1

New PLC Input/Output Unit PL 410 B

PL 410 B Id.-Nr. 263 371 12

Connecting cable LE 360C/ PL 410 B: Id.-Nr. 289 111 ..

10/94 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update Information No. 6 1-1

Software version 13 contains the following enhancements:

Software version 14 was released to correct the following error:

7/94 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update Information No. 5 1-1

1-2 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update Information No. 5 7/94

Software version 11 must be replaced by software version 12!

No new features were introduce in software version 12.

2/94 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update Information No. 4 1-1

The following improvements were made since version 9:

MP7225 = 1 : Block generation with the actual-position-capture key (teach-in)

1/94 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update information No. 3 1-1

1-2 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update information No. 3 1/94

The new version contains the following changes:

9/93 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update information No. 2 1-1

260 02x 08 for insertion of 1M byte EPROMs

The new software version contains the following changes:

The new feed rate is effective immediately!

9/93 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update information No. 1 1-1

• The number of PLC labels was increased to 1024.

• The following Q parameters were introduced:

• The type of tool compensation (R0/RR/RL/R+/R-) is stored in Q parameter Q123:

• Application as positioning module:

1-2 TNC 360/TNC 335 Update information No. 1 9/93

• The current feed rate in mm/min is now available in the PLC.

Error code: 0 = NC block was inserted